JP7243875B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine represented by a pachinko machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Among game machines such as pachinko machines, game machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional gaming machine, symbols are variably displayed on the display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, thereby providing a winning game advantageous to the player. In addition to the patterns, the display device also displays various images such as characters and landscapes. This diversified the display contents and improved interest.

JP-A-2003-325886

However, further enhancement of interest is required.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a player in playing a game .

In order to achieve this object, the game machine according to claim 1 comprises acquisition means for acquiring information based on the establishment of acquisition conditions, storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and determination conditions. discrimination means capable of discriminating the information stored in the storage means based on establishment; display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means; When the identification information based on the specific determination result is displayed, a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player, and stored in the storage means before the determination condition is satisfied a pattern display means for displaying a pattern corresponding to each of the information stored in the storage means on the display means; determination means; specific condition determination means for determining whether a specific condition is satisfied based on the result of determination by the preliminary determination means; and display of the pattern when the specific condition determination means determines that the specific condition is satisfied a first background mode in which the pattern is displayed in a background mode of the identification information displayed on the display means; background mode determination means for determining a background mode for determining one background mode from the plurality of background modes including at least a second background mode in which no pattern is displayed; background mode display means for displaying a background mode corresponding to the background mode on the display means; and in a state in which the display mode of the pattern is changed by the variable display means, the second background mode is displayed by the background mode display means. a specific mode display means capable of displaying a specific mode in which the information related to the pattern, which has been changed in the area where the identification information is dynamically displayed, can be identified when the identification information is changed to , and display of the pattern a means capable of displaying an identification mode that enables a player to identify the number of information stored in the storage means during a period in which a second background mode that is not displayed is displayed ; In the gaming machine, in a state in which the display mode of the symbols is changed by the variable display means, the second background mode is changed by the background mode display means, and the background mode corresponding to the symbols whose display mode has been changed is changed to the second background mode. If the background mode is changed to the first background mode before dynamic display of identification information is started, the second background mode The corresponding pattern can be displayed in a state in which the display mode has been changed before being varied, and the specific mode display means corresponds to the pattern that has been changed and displayed. The specific mode can be displayed during a stop period of the identification information after the dynamic display of the identification information executed until the dynamic display of the identification information is started.

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, the obtaining means for obtaining the information based on the establishment of the obtaining condition, the storage means for storing the information obtained by the obtaining means, and the above information based on the establishment of the determination condition. discrimination means capable of discriminating the information stored in the storage means; display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means; and the specified discrimination result on the display means. When the identification information based on is displayed, the privilege game executing means for executing the privilege game advantageous to the player, and the information stored in the storage means before the discrimination condition is satisfied pattern display means for displaying corresponding patterns on the display means; preliminary discrimination means for executing discrimination based on the information before the discrimination condition for the information stored in the storage means is satisfied; specific condition determining means for determining whether a specific condition is satisfied based on the result of determination by the prior determining means; and when the specific condition determining means determines that the specific condition is satisfied, the pattern display means displays variable display means for varying the display mode of the pattern, and in the background mode of the identification information displayed on the display means, the first background mode in which the pattern is displayed and the pattern is not displayed. background mode determining means for determining a background mode for determining one background mode from a plurality of said background modes including at least a second background mode; and corresponding to said background mode determined by said background mode determining means. a background mode display means for displaying a background mode on the display means; and a case where the second background mode is changed by the background mode display means in a state in which the display mode of the pattern is changed by the variable display means. a specific mode display means capable of displaying a specific mode in which the information related to the pattern, which has been changed in the area where the identification information is dynamically displayed, can be identified; and a second background mode in which the pattern is not displayed. means for displaying an identification mode that allows a player to identify the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means during the period in which is displayed, the gaming machine comprising : In a state in which the display mode of the pattern is changed by the variable display means, the background mode display means changes the display mode to the second background mode, and the identification information corresponding to the pattern whose display mode has been changed is displayed dynamically. When the background mode is changed to the first background mode before the display is started, the display is changed before the background mode is changed to the second background mode. The corresponding pattern can be displayed in a mode in which the display mode has been varied, and the specific mode display means can move the identification information corresponding to the pattern displayed in the variable manner. The specific mode can be displayed during the stop period of the identification information after the dynamic display of the identification information executed until the target display is started.

Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved .

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. Fig. 3 is a front perspective view of the operating unit; 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit; FIG. FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; It is a front view of a vertical displacement unit. It is a rear view of a vertical displacement unit. It is a front perspective view of a vertical displacement unit. It is a back perspective view of a vertical displacement unit. It is a front perspective view of a vertical displacement unit. It is a back perspective view of a vertical displacement unit. (a) is a front view of the vertical displacement unit, and (b) is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit. (a) is a front view of the vertical displacement unit, and (b) is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit. (a) is a front view of the vertical displacement unit, and (b) is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a regulation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a roller member. (a) is a side view of the regulating unit, (b) is a rear view of the regulating unit, and (c) is a sectional view of the regulating unit taken along line XXc-XXc of FIG. 20(b). 4 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit in the first position; FIG. (a) is an enlarged view of the vertical displacement unit in section XXII of FIG. 21, and (b) is a sectional view of the vertical displacement unit taken along line XXIIb-XXIIb of FIG. 22(a). (a) to (c) are partial enlarged front views of the vertical displacement unit. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit taken along line XXIVa-XXIVa of FIG. 23(a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit taken along line XXIVb-XXIVb of FIG. 23(b); (c) is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit taken along line XXIVc-XXIVc of FIG. 23(c). 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the decorative member; FIG. FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the decorative member; It is an exploded front perspective view of a rotation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotation unit. (a) is a top view of the rotating unit, (b) is a front view of the rotating unit as seen in direction XXIXb in FIG. 29(a), and (c) is XXIXc-XXIXc in FIG. 29(a) Fig. 3 is a cross-sectional view of the rotary unit on line; (a) is a top view of an intermediate member, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate member taken along line XXXb-XXXb of FIG. 30(a). (a) is a front view of the front cover, and (b) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the front cover taken along line XXXIb-XXXIb of FIG. 31(a). (a) is a top view of a reflector, and (b) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the reflector taken along line XXXIIb-XXXIIb of FIG. 32(a). (a) is a top view of the rotating unit, and FIG. 33(b) is a cross-sectional view of the rotating unit taken along line XXXIIIb-XXXIIIb of (a). 33(a) and 33(b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the rotation unit in section XXXIV of FIG. 33(b). (a) and (b) are front views of a rotation unit. (a) and (b) are top views of the rotating unit. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the center frame; FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the center frame; FIG. (a) is a front view of the center frame, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the center frame taken along line XXXIXb-XXXIXb of FIG. 39(a). 39(a) is a cross-sectional view of the center frame along line XLa-XLa in FIG. 39(a), and FIG. 39(b) is a cross-sectional view of the center frame along line XLb-XLb in FIG. 39(a). (a) and (b) are sectional views of a rotation unit and a center frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of a sorting device. It is a partially enlarged front view of the sorting device. FIG. 44 is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device taken along line XLIV-XLIV in FIG. 43; (a) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device taken along line XLVa-XLVa of FIG. 43, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device taken along line XLVb-XLVb of FIG. 43 is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device taken along line XLVc-XLVc of FIG. 43, and (d) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device taken along line XLVd-XLVd of FIG. (a) is a cross-sectional view of a sorting device, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device. Fig. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the light-emitting decoration unit; It is an exploded front perspective view of a regulation unit in the second embodiment. (a) is a side view of the regulation unit, (b) is a rear view of the regulation unit, and (c) is a sectional view of the regulation unit taken along line XLIXc-XLIXc in FIG. 49(b). (a) to (c) are cross-sectional views of the vertical displacement unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a sorting device according to a third embodiment. It is a partially enlarged front view of the sorting device. 52(a) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device along line LIIIa-LIIIa in FIG. 52, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device along line LIIIb-LIIIb in FIG. 52(b). (a) and (b) are sectional views of a sorting device. (a) is a front view of the sorting device in the fourth embodiment, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device taken along line LVb-LVb in FIG. b) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device taken along line LVc-LVc. FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view of a center frame 600 as a modified example; FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the operation of the rotation unit in the first control example; FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a lighting mode by the rotating unit in the first control example; It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the display screen of the 3rd design display apparatus in the 1st control example. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display mode of an 8-hold effect in the first control example; FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display mode of a special pressing effect of the 8-hold effect in the first control example; FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display mode of the sub-display area when the 8-hold effect is executed in the first control example; FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display mode of the sub-display area when the 8-hold effect is executed in the first control example; FIG. 5 is a diagram showing an outline of various counters in the first control example; (a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main controller in the first control example, (b) is a block showing the electrical configuration of the RAM in the main controller in the first control example; It is a diagram. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special symbol jackpot random number table in the first control example, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the jackpot type selection table in the first control example. It is a schematic diagram, (c) is a schematic diagram showing typically the contents of the random number table per normal symbol in the first control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a variation pattern selection table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a normal table in the first control example. is. FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a non-normal table in the first control example; FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a ROM within the audio ramp control device in the first control example; (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of an advance notice selection table at the time of pressing in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a rear surface switching table in the first control example. It is a diagram. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a special back surface switching table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a continuous advance notice lottery table in the first control example. FIG. 4C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of an operation scenario table in the first control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of an effect upper limit number of times table in the first control example; 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a RAM within the audio ramp control device in the first control example; FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device in a first control example; FIG. FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display data table in the first control example; FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table in the first control example; FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a drawing list in the first control example; 8 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the first control example; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 9 is a flow chart showing variation execution determination processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first control example; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol 1 fluctuation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol 2 fluctuation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a starting winning process executed by an MPU in the main control device in the first control example; FIG. 8 is a flow chart showing prefetching processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first control example; It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 4 is a flow chart showing through gate passage processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first control example; 4 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the first control example; 4 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by an MPU in a main controller in a first control example; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in a main controller in a first control example; It is a flow chart which shows the jackpot control processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first control example; FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing time setting processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; 10 is a flow chart showing frame button input monitoring/effect processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first control example. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a pressing control process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing special notification sound setting processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; 10 is a flow chart showing a pressing effect setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing touch sensor control processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; 8 is a flow chart showing rotation display operation setting processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; 7 is a flowchart showing lighting setting update processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing this command determination process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing winning command reception processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing stop command reception processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot related command processing performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. 8 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing variation pattern selection processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing variation pattern selection processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first control example; 8 is a flow chart showing special back setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first control example; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a look-ahead effect selection process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first control example; FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing boot processing executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (a) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, (b) is a flow chart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 4 is a flow chart showing V interrupt processing. 8 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (a) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example 10 is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. (a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 4 is a flowchart showing ending command processing; (a) is a flowchart showing a pending ball number command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example 10 is a flow chart showing continuous advance notice command processing to be executed. (a) is a flowchart showing rear image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (b) is a flowchart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 10 is a flow chart showing error command processing performed. 8 is a flowchart showing display setting processing executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 9 is a flow chart showing various image setting processes executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 9 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (a) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 10 is a flowchart showing resident image transfer setting processing; 9 is a flowchart showing normal image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 8 is a flow chart showing drawing processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the operation of the rotating unit in a modified example of the first control example; FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a RAM within the audio ramp control device in a modified example of the first control example; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing rotation display operation setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the modified example of the first control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing lighting start processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the modified example of the first control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing lighting setting update processing 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the modified example of the first control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a reel effect executed during a jackpot game in the second control example; FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a reel effect executed during a jackpot game in the second control example; FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the prize information storage area when the continuous short reach effect is executed in the second control example; It is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display mode when the continuous short reach effect is executed in the second control example. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a ROM of a main controller in a second control example; (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a short reel effect selection table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a long reel effect selection table. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a RAM of the audio ramp control device in the second control example; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing main processing 2 executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the second control example; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing reel effect setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound ramp control device in the second control example; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 2 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the second control example; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing winning command reception processing 2 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the second control example. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot related command process 2 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. 10 is a flowchart showing opening effect setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the second control example; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the second control example; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing variation pattern selection processing 2 executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the second control example; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a special background setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the second control example; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example; (a) is a flowchart showing reel effect command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example; (b) is a flow chart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example; It is a flow chart showing a transition effect command process. 10 is a flow chart showing a given effect command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example; FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an effect mode of a pending notice effect executed by the MPU in the display control device in the third control example; FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an effect mode of a pending notice effect executed by the MPU in the display control device in the third control example; FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a ROM of the audio ramp control device in the third control example; FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a hold announcement execution determination table in the third control example; FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a work RAM of the display control device in the third control example; 14 is a flow chart showing winning command reception processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the third control example. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a hold notice setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the third control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing stop command reception processing 3 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the third control example; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the third control example; 13 is a flow chart showing variation pattern command processing 3 executed by the MPU in the display control device in the third control example; (a) is a flowchart showing pending notice command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the third control example; (b) is a flowchart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the third control example; 10 is a flowchart showing back image change command processing 3. FIG. FIG. 12 is a flow chart showing a back D transition process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the third control example; FIG. FIG. 12 is a flow chart showing back face D termination processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the third control example; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing various image setting processes 3 executed by the MPU in the display control device in the third control example; It is a schematic diagram which showed the modification of a rotation unit typically. It is a schematic diagram which showed the modification of a rotation unit typically. It is a schematic diagram which showed the modification of a rotation unit typically. It is a schematic diagram showing the flow of continuous short reach effect in the fourth control example. FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display mode of a continuous short reach effect in the fourth control example; FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display mode of a continuous short reach effect in the fourth control example; FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a ROM of the audio ramp control device in the fourth control example; FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a RAM of the audio ramp control device in the fourth control example; FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing winning command reception processing 3 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fourth control example; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the continuous short reach effect setting process for winning performed by MPU in the sound ramp control apparatus in a 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the continuous short reach effect setting process for deviation performed by MPU in the audio|voice ramp control apparatus in a 4th control example. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing a variation pattern setting process 4 executed by an MPU in the sound ramp control device in the fourth control example; FIG. FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display mode of a pending notice effect in the first modified example of the third control example; FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display mode of a special holding notice effect in a second modified example of the third control example; FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display mode of a special holding notice effect in a second modified example of the third control example; FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a reel effect display mode in the first modified example of the second control example; It is a schematic diagram which showed the modification of a rotation unit typically.

<First embodiment>
BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, referring to FIGS. 1 to 47, as a first embodiment, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 1 will be described. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 2 whose outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 2 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 2. and an inner frame 4 supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 2 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 4, and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided serves as an opening and closing axis. A frame 4 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, ball entrances 63 and 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 4 from the back side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front surface of the game board 13 to play a pinball game. The inner frame 4 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shooting unit that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 4, a front door 5 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front door 5 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1). 5 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported toward the front side so that they can be opened and closed. The locking of the inner frame 4 and the locking of the front door 5 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front door 5 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and has a window portion 5c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses 8 is arranged on the back side of the front door 5, and the front side of the pachinko machine 10 can be visually recognized through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

An upper tray 17 for storing balls projects forward from the front door 5 and is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the ball thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17 . The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is changed, or the content of the super ready-to-win effect is changed. be.

Light-emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the front door 5 (for example, at corners). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illumination parts 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window part 5c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and the respective electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit by lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to indicate that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, an indicator lamp 34 is provided at the upper left portion of the front door 5 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). The indicator lamp 34 has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and is capable of indicating whether prize balls are being dispensed and when an error has occurred.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front door 5 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right side electric decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 (Fig. 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more splendor, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29-33.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 5c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with banknotes, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the balls are released according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is On the right side of the lower tray 50, an operating handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13. As shown in FIG.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball shooting unit 112a, a shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A ball is shot with a strength (shooting intensity) corresponding to , and is hit to the front surface of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape as viewed from the front, a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, windmills, rails 76 and 77, and a general input. Ball opening 63, second ball entrance 640, variable winning device 65, through gate 67, variable display unit 80, distribution device 700, etc. Mounted on the back side. The base plate 60 is made of wood by pasting together thin plate materials, and is formed so that various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 cannot be seen from the front side of the base plate 60 by the player. The openings 710a of the general ball entrance 63, the second ball entrance 640, the variable winning device 65, the variable display unit 80, and the sorting device 700 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. , are fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by tapping screws or the like. Further, although details will be described later, inside the sorting device 700, a first ball entrance 64 and a right second ball entrance 640r through which a ball can enter are provided. A ball entering the opening 710a is sorted by the sorting device 700 to either the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640r (see FIG. 43).

The central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 4 through the window portion 5c of the front door 5 (see FIG. 1). Mainly referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

An outer rail 77 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 77 is placed inside the outer rail 77. An arc-shaped inner rail 76 formed by is erected. The outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 76 and 77 and a resin-made outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a prize-winning opening, etc. area where the ball flows down).

The two rails 76 and 77 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 76 (upper left part in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 77 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center.

First pattern display devices 37A and 37B provided with a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged in the lower left side of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are for displaying according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are displayed according to whether the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, or the right second ball entrance 640r. configured to be used separately. Specifically, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 or the right second ball entrance. The first symbol display device 37B is configured to operate when a prize is won in the mouth 640r.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable probability, the time saving mode, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state by the lighting state. The lighting state indicates whether the stopped pattern is a pattern corresponding to the probability variable jackpot (jackets A, C), the pattern corresponding to the normal jackpot (jackpot B), or the winning pattern, or the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, A 7-segment display device displays the number of rounds during the jackpot and an error. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that each LED has a different emission color (for example, red, green, and blue), and depending on the combination of the emission colors, it is possible to suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is conducted when any one of the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, and the right second ball entrance 640r wins. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big win (big win lottery), and also determines the kind of big win when it is determined as a big win. As the types of jackpot determined here, 15R probability variable jackpot (jackpot A), 15R normal jackpot (jackpot B), and 2R probability variable jackpot (jackpot C) are prepared. The first pattern display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop pattern after the end of variation, but also indicate a pattern corresponding to the jackpot type when the jackpot is won. .

Here, the "15R variable jackpot" (jackpot A) is a variable jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot of 15 rounds, and the "2R variable jackpot" (jackpot C) is It is a probability variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot with the maximum number of rounds of 2 rounds. On the other hand, "15R normal jackpot" (jackpot B) shifts to a low probability state after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, and a time saving state during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). It's a big hit.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, a time during so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game that is easy to shift to a special game state It is the state of The high-probability state (during variable probability) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the probability of winning a second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 640 . "Low probability state" refers to a state in which the odds are not variable, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than when the odds are variable. In addition, the time-saving state (during time-saving) of the "low-probability state" is a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, and the jackpot probability remains the same, but only the probability of hitting the second symbol is increased, and the second entrance 640 refers to a game state in which the ball is likely to win a prize. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it means that the game is in a state of neither variable probability nor time reduction (state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the second pattern winning probability is increased).

During the probability change or during the time reduction, not only the probability of winning the second symbol is increased, but also the time during which the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened is changed, and the time is longer than during normal. is set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 more than when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It becomes easy. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 640, and the number of times the big winning lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 during the probability change or during the time saving, or in addition to changing the opening time, A change may be made to increase the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened more than during normal operation. In addition, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or the time reduction, and the electric accessory 640a is opened at the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is opened and once per hit. It is also possible to change at least one of the number of times to perform. In addition, during the probability change or during the time saving, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 or the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened per time is not set, and the second symbol is used. Only the winning probability may be changed so as to be increased compared to normal.

The game area is provided with a plurality of general ball entrances 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B are triggered by the winning (start winning) of any one of the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, and the right second ball entrance 640r. A third pattern display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") that performs variable display of the third pattern while synchronizing with the variable display in , and the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 as a trigger A second pattern display device (not shown) composed of LEDs for variably displaying the second pattern is provided.

A center frame 600 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 . The third pattern display device 81 can be visually recognized through an opening opened in the center of the center frame 600 .

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, upper, middle and lower three patterns are displayed. A column of symbols is displayed. Each pattern row is composed of a plurality of patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are horizontally scrolled for each pattern row to variably display the third pattern on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加It's like In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B under the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). Decorative display according to the display of the pattern display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

The second pattern display device alternately lights up a symbol "O" and a symbol "X" as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. This is for variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning lottery is won, the second symbol display device stops and displays the symbol "○" after the second symbol is variably displayed. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variable display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in this embodiment), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is displayed in a predetermined manner. It is configured to be activated (released) only for a period of time.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter during the variable probability or during the time saving than during the normal gaming state. As a result, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the probability change and the time reduction, so that more winning lotteries can be performed than during normal times. Therefore, the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, so that the player can be given more chances to open the electric accessory 640a of the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 during the variable probability and the time saving.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, other methods such as increasing the winning probability, increasing the opening time or the number of openings of the electric accessory 640a for one hit, etc. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be fixed regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during the variable probability or during the time saving, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the game state, and one winning The opening time and the number of openings of the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the game state.

The through gates 67 are attached to the game board on both sides of the variable display unit 80 . The through gate 67 is configured to allow passage of a part of the balls flowing down the game board among the balls shot to the game board. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is a loss. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a variable display stop symbol.

The number of times the ball passes through the through gate 67 is suspended up to a total of four times, and the number of suspended balls is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B described above, and is displayed on the second symbol suspension lamp (not shown). is also displayed. Four second pattern holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third pattern display device 81 .

In addition, the variable display of the second pattern is performed by switching lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in the present embodiment. A part of the pattern display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . Also, the maximum number of held balls for passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is not limited to 4, and may be set to 3 or less, or 5 or more (for example, 8). Also, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Also, the mounting position of the through gate is not limited to the right and left sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be below the variable display device unit 80, for example. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol reservation lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a sorting device 700 is arranged in which balls can win. When a ball enters (enters) a prize through the opening 710a of the sorting device 700, the entered ball is sorted to either the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640r. be done. When the ball enters (enters) the first ball entrance 64, a first ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first ball entrance switch is turned on. As a result, the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4) draws a lottery for a big win, and the first symbol display device 37A displays the result of the lottery. Also, when the ball enters the right second ball entrance 640, the second ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, as in the case of the right second ball entrance 640r. Then, due to the turn-on of the second ball entrance switch, the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4) draws a jackpot lottery, and the display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on the first symbol display device 37B.

On the other hand, a second ball entrance 640 through which a ball can enter is provided below the sorting device 700 when viewed from the front. When the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, a second ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control is caused by turning on the second ball entrance switch. A jackpot lottery is performed by the device 110 (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37B.

In addition, the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, and the right second ball entrance 640r are also one of the winning entrances from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. ing. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the number of prize balls paid out when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, and the number of prize balls paid out when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 Although the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640r is configured to be the same, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640r are configured to be the same. The number of prize balls paid out when the ball wins and the number of prize balls paid out when the ball enters the right second ball inlet 640r are different numbers, for example, the ball enters the first ball inlet 64. In this case, the number of prize balls paid out may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second ball entrance 640 and the right second ball entrance 640r may be five.

The second entrance 640 is accompanied by an electric accessory 640a. This electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball through the through gate 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state), which makes it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加

As described above, during the variable probability and during the time saving, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during normal, and the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short, so in the variable display of the second symbol "○ ' is more likely to be displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened is also longer during the variable probability or during the time saving than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to enter the second ball entrance 640 during the probability change or during the time saving than during normal times.

Therefore, during normal operation, the electric accessory attached to the second ball entrance 640 is often closed, and it is difficult to win the second ball entrance 640. A big winning lottery is executed by entering a ball and distributing the entered ball to the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640r.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through either the left or right through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is likely to be in an open state, and the second ball entrance 640 Since it is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the ball that enters the opening 710a is distributed to the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640r, and also to the second ball entrance 640. It becomes easier to execute a jackpot lottery associated with the entry of a ball. Therefore, the chances of winning a big winning lottery are increased compared to the normal period, which is more advantageous to the player than during the normal period.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment shoots balls to the player according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the game is variable probability, short time, or normal). can change the way Therefore, it is possible to change the way the player hits the ball, so that the player can enjoy the game.

A variable prize winning device 65 is provided below the sorting device 700, and a horizontally long rectangular specific prize winning port (large open port) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of any one of the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, and the right second ball entrance 640r becomes a jackpot, a predetermined time (variable After the elapse of time), the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is lit so as to become a jackpot stop symbol, and the third symbol display device 81 is caused to display a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot. , indicating the occurrence of a jackpot. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined period of time has passed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined period of time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a game value (game value) by paying out a larger amount of prize balls than usual. is done.

Specifically, the variable prize winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the specific prize winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing forward with the lower side of the opening/closing plate as an axis. and The specific prize winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot or hardly wins a prize. In the event of a big win, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to enter the specific prize winning port 65a, and the open state and the normal closed state are formed. It operates to alternate between states.

Incidentally, the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big win is lit in the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the A special game is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. You may make it form as a state. In addition, the number of the specific winning openings 65a is not limited to one, and one or more than two (for example, three) may be arranged. For example, it may be on the left side of the variable display device unit 80 .

An affixing space K1 for affixing a certificate stamp, an identification label, etc. is provided at the right corner of the lower side of the game board 13. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first outlet 71 . Balls that flow down the game area and do not enter any of the ball entrances 63, 64, 65a, 640, 640r are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out port 71. be. The first out port 71 is arranged below the sorting device 700 .

The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

Main controller 110, sound lamp controller 113, display controller 114, payout controller 111, launch controller 112, power supply 115, and card unit connection board 116 are housed in board boxes 100-104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover unopenably by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. a case rail 132 vertically connected to the side of the case rail 132; ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In main controller 110, MPU 201 performs main processing of pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, setting of display in first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display result in second symbol display device. to run.

In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controllers such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113 to operate. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc., and a stack area for storing various flags, counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol reservation lamp, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving opening and closing to the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected. to send.

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208 including a group of switches (not shown) and a group of sensors including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. , and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253 .

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to shoot the ball. . The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51 , and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51 .

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effects. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 includes the main controller 110, the display controller 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the touch sensor 290, the RTC 292, the firing sensor 293, the rotation unit 500 (including the drive motor 457 and the LED 532), Frame buttons 22 and the like are connected respectively.

Sound lamp control device 113, based on various commands (fluctuation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from main control device 110, determines the display mode of third symbol display device 81, and sends the determined display mode to the command The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect contents of the hour. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 . The display control device 114 displays various images on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with commands transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 monitors the time clocked by the RTC 292 configured with a known real-time clock, and when it reaches a specific time zone (3 minutes from 00 minutes to 03 minutes every hour), the time During the strip, a rear image change command including information for changing the stage displayed on the third pattern display device 81 to a special stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 . While this special stage is set, the stage is not changed even if the frame button 22 is operated (depressed). By configuring to change to a special stage in a specific time zone, in a hall or the like where a plurality of pachinko machines 10 are arranged side by side, it is possible to change to a special stage all at once in a specific time zone. A display performance with a sense of unity can be executed.

Also, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the display control device 114 . In the audio lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third pattern display device 81, output the audio corresponding to the display content from the audio output device 226, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, changes the third pattern in the third pattern display device 81, etc. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113 . The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display contents indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third pattern display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

Next, a schematic configuration of the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 8. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the action unit 200, and FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the action unit 200. FIG. 7 and 8 are front views of the operation unit 200. FIG.

7 shows a state in which the displacement members 430 arranged at the left and right ends of the vertical displacement unit 400 are respectively displaced to the retracted positions, and FIG. Each member 430 is shown displaced to its extended position.

As shown in FIGS. 5 to 8, the operation unit 200 includes a box-shaped rear case 300, and in the inner space of the rear case 300, a vertically displaceable unit 400 is provided above and a light-emitting decoration is provided below. A unit 800 is arranged respectively.

The rear case 300 includes a bottom wall portion 301 that is substantially rectangular in front view, and an outer wall portion 302 that is erected from the outer edges of four sides of the bottom wall portion 301 toward the front. It is formed in a box shape with one side (front side) open. A rectangular opening 301a is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 301. Through the opening 301a, the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 301 is visible. It is possible.

The vertical displacement unit 400 includes a rear base 420 which is arranged on the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300 and has a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and a displacement member 430 and a decorative member which are arranged on the rear base 420 so as to be displaceable. 450, the displacement member 430 and the decorative member 450 are retracted above the back case 300, and the extension projects to the front side of the opening 301a (that is, the third pattern display device 81) of the back case. position (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

In this case, the decorative member 450 is provided with a rotating unit 500. By rotating the rotating unit 500 and causing the LED of the irradiation unit 530 provided in the rotating unit 500 to emit light, the pattern is formed by an afterimage of light. and patterns can be displayed. Details of such a structure will be described later.

The light-emitting decoration unit 800 mainly includes a base body 810 and a light-emitting device 820 arranged on the front side of the base body 810, and emits light from a plurality of LEDs 821 arranged inside the light-emitting device 820. By changing the mode (for example, the number of LEDs 821 to irradiate), effects by light emission are performed. Details will be described later.

Next, detailed configurations of the vertical displacement unit 400, the rotation unit 500, the center frame 600, the distribution device 700, and the light emitting decoration unit 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 47. FIG. First, the vertical displacement unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 24. FIG.

First, the overall configuration of the vertical displacement unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 14. FIG. 9 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 400, and FIG. 10 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 400. FIG. 11 and 13 are front perspective views of the vertical displacement unit 400, and FIGS. 12 and 14 are rear perspective views of the vertical displacement unit 400. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 9 to 14 , the vertical displacement unit 400 includes a front base 410 having a substantially L-shaped shape when viewed from the front, a rear base 420 superimposed on the rear side of the front base 410 , and a front side of the front base 410 . , a displacement member 430 rotated by the driving force of the drive motor 441, and one end of the displacement member 430 connected to the displacement member 430 in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 9) as the displacement member 430 is displaced. direction), a front cover 460 disposed in front of one end of the front base 410, and a decorative member disposed in a gap between the front cover 460 and the front base 410 facing each other. side wall members 470 arranged at the left and right ends of the decorative member 450 to regulate the displacement of the decorative member 450; and rotation regulation arranged on the front side of the front base 410. and a member 480 .

In the vertical displacement unit 400, all members except for the decorative member 450 are arranged in a pair symmetrically, and the decorative member 450 is interposed between the pair. Further, in the detailed description of the members arranged in a pair, only the member arranged on the left side in front view (left side in FIG. 9) will be explained, and the member arranged on the right side in front view (right side in FIG. 9) , are assigned the same reference numerals as those on the left side in front view, and description thereof will be omitted.

The front base 410 is formed of a plate-like body that is substantially L-shaped when viewed from the front. It is formed mainly with two pieces 410Y.

The first piece 410X is arranged such that its extending direction is parallel to the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 9). In addition, the first piece 410X includes a standing portion 412 standing on the front side of the left-right outer end (left end), an upper recessed groove 413 recessed in an arcuate cross-section at the top, and a cross-section at the bottom. A lower recessed groove 414 formed in an arc shape is mainly provided.

The upright portion 412 is a wall that abuts against a sliding portion 451 of the decorative member 450 to be described later and restricts the rearward displacement of the decorative member 450. It is formed.

The upper recessed groove 413 and the lower recessed groove 414 are grooves into which a guide rod P1, which will be described later, is fitted, and are recessed in a semicircular shape with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the guide rod P1. In addition, the upper groove 413 and the lower groove 414 are formed so that the axes of the semi-circular cross-sections are located on the same straight line, and the upper end of the upper groove 413 extends from the lower groove 414 . is set larger than the axial dimension of the guide rod P1. As a result, both ends of the guide rod P1 can be fitted into the upper groove 413 and the lower groove 414 .

The second piece 410Y is formed in a vertically long rectangle when viewed from the front, and has an opening 411 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the center thereof, an engaging portion 415 projecting to the back side, and a columnar support portion 416 projecting to the back side. Formed by the Lord.

The opening 411 is an opening through which the shaft of the drive motor 441 attached to the front side of the front base 410 is inserted through the rear side of the front base 410 , and is a transmission gear fitted to the shaft of the drive motor 441 . The inner diameter is formed larger than the outer shape of 442 . Accordingly, when the drive motor 441 fails due to deterioration or the like, the drive motor 441 can be removed from the front base 410 and the transmission gear 442 can be removed from the vertical displacement unit 400 through the opening 411 . As a result, after the transmission gear 442 is attached to the shaft portion of the new drive motor 441, the transmission gear 442 can be inserted through the opening 411 and arranged. Compared to the case where the drive motor 441 is arranged on the front base 410 while inserting it into the shaft hole of the transmission gear 443 arranged between the opposing parts, this can be done easily, and the number of man-hours at the time of part replacement can be reduced. be able to. Further, in this case, since the shaft portion of the drive motor 441 can be reliably fitted into the shaft hole of the transmission gear 443, the reliability can be improved when parts are replaced.

The engaging portion 415 is a projection for locking one end of the torsion spring SP1, which will be described later, and projects from the back side of the second piece 410Y, and the projecting tip thereof bends toward the center of the vertical displacement unit 400 in the left-right direction. It is formed to have a substantially L-shaped cross section. As a result, it is possible to restrict the rotation of the torsion spring SP1 about its axis with the portion protruding toward the back side, and restrict the displacement of the torsion spring SP1 toward the back side with the bent portion at the tip.

The shaft support portion 416 is a cylindrical rod member made of a metal material, and one end side thereof is fitted to the back side of the front base 410 .

The drive motor 441 is a motor that applies a driving force to the vertical displacement unit 400. The transmission gear 442 is arranged on the front base 410 and arranged between the front base 410 and the rear base 420 as described above. , 443 .

As described above, the transmission gear 442 is a gear whose shaft hole is fitted onto the shaft of the drive motor 441 and is connected to the drive motor 441 , and is arranged to mesh with the transmission gear 443 .

The transmission gear 443 is a gear that is rotatably disposed between the front base 410 and the rear base 420 with its shaft hole fitted in the projection 417 of the front base 410. It is arranged in a state of meshing with the gear 442 . Therefore, the driving force of the drive motor 441 can be transmitted to the transmission gear 443 via the transmission gear 442 .

Further, the transmission gear 443 has a protrusion 443a protruding from the side surface on the back side. The projection 443 a is a rod member made of a metal material and formed in a columnar shape, and is disposed on the outer peripheral edge of the transmission gear 443 . Therefore, when the driving force is applied to the driving motor 441 and the transmission gear 443 is rotated as described above, the projection 443a is displaced in an arc around the axis of the transmission gear 443 .

The rear base 420 is a plate member formed to have substantially the same external shape as the front view shape of the second piece 410Y of the front base 410, and has a standing portion 421 standing on the front side on the outer edge.

The erected portion 421 is a wall for forming a gap between the front base 410 and the rear base 420 facing each other, and the erected distance is greater than the longitudinal dimension of the displacement member 430 and the transmission gear 443 combined. It is set to have a large dimension, and is arranged in a state where the front end surface is in contact with the back side of the front base 410 . As a result, a gap for disposing the transmission gears 442 and 443 and a displacing member 430 described later can be formed between the front base 410 and the rear base 420 facing each other.

The displacement member 430 is formed in a substantially L-shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a substantially box-like shape in which the outer edge portion protrudes to the rear side. Further, the displacement member 430 has a circular through hole 433 penetrating in the front-rear direction in its bent portion, a decoration-side sliding hole 432 penetrating in the front-rear direction on one side of the long side, and a sliding hole 432 on the short side. It mainly includes a drive-side slide hole 431 penetrating in the front-rear direction on the other side, and a displacement-side engaging portion 434 protruding from a protruding portion of the outer edge portion on one side of the long side.

The through hole 433 is a hole into which the pivot portion 416 of the front base 410 is inserted, and is formed with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the pivot portion 416 . Therefore, after inserting the through hole 433 into the shaft support portion 416 of the front base 410 , the front base 410 and the rear base 420 are combined, so that the displacement member 430 can be displaced with respect to the front base 410 . can be placed in

The drive-side sliding hole 431 is an elongated hole through which the projection 443a of the transmission gear 443 is inserted, and the width dimension in the lateral direction is set larger than the outer diameter of the projection 443a. The drive-side slide hole 431 is formed so that its longitudinal direction is the same as the extending direction (longitudinal direction) of the short side of the displacement member 430 , and as described above, the transmission gear 443 transmits the driving force of the drive motor 441 . When the transmission gear 443 is rotated by , the projection 443 a of the transmission gear 443 slides inside the drive-side slide hole 431 as it is displaced, thereby rotating the displacement member 430 around the through hole 433 . That is, by driving the drive motor 441, the displacement member 430 can be caused to move around the through hole 433. As shown in FIG.

The decoration-side slide hole 432 is an elongated hole that is provided in the decoration member 450 described later and through which the columnar support portion 452a is inserted. formed larger than The decoration-side sliding hole 432 is formed so that its longitudinal direction is the same as the extending direction (longitudinal direction) of the long side of the displacement member 430 . As described above, when the displacement member 430 is rotated around the through-hole 433, the decoration-side sliding hole 432 forms an arcuate displacement trajectory around the through-hole 433. FIG.

The displacement-side engaging portion 434 is a protrusion that engages the other end side of the torsion spring SP1, which will be described later, and is formed so as to protrude from the inner peripheral surface of the outer edge portion that protrudes from the rear side of the displacement member 430 . Further, the displacement-side engaging portion 434 is formed on the bent inner side surface of the displacement member 430 that is bent in a substantially L-shape when viewed from the front. As a result, the other end side of the torsion spring SP<b>1 can be engaged with the displacement side engaging portion 434 inside the rear side of the displacement member 430 .

The torsion spring SP1 has its torsion portion disposed around the through hole 433 of the displacement member 430 (the shaft support portion 416 of the front base 410), and rotates counterclockwise in front view around the rotation axis of the displacement member 430 (vertical displacement unit A displacement member 430 that constitutes the right side of the front view of 400 is applied with an urging force (right rotation in front view) around its rotation axis, one end side is attached to the engaging portion 415 of the front base 410, and the other end side is the displacement member. 430 are engaged with displacement-side engaging portions 434, respectively. As a result, the displacement member 430 rotates to the left with respect to the front base 410 around the axis of the through hole 433 (the shaft support portion 416 of the front base 410) (the displacement member 430 constituting the right side of the vertical displacement unit 400 when viewed from the front rotates to the right). ) is always biased in the direction of

As described above, the decorative member 450 is a member that is interposed between a pair of opposed vertically displacing units 400 that are configured as a pair of left and right units. It is set to be the same as the distance dimension between the outer ends in the horizontal direction of 410 .

The decorative member 450 is formed in a U-shape in front view with an open lower side, and includes a front base 452 forming a central portion thereof, sliding portions 451 connected to both left and right ends of the front base 452, and a front base. 452 , and a rotating unit 500 rotatably arranged on the front side of the front base 452 .

The front base 452 is formed of a horizontally long rectangular plate-like body when viewed from the front, and has a U-shaped cross section in which the upper and lower end faces are bent toward the rear side. The front base 452 includes a support portion 452a protruding from the back side, engaging portions 452b protruding from both left and right ends to the front side, smooth contact surfaces 452h formed on the front side at both left and right ends, and and an inclined surface 452g formed at the lower end of the contact surface 452h.

As described above, the support portion 452a is a rod member that is inserted into the decoration-side slide hole 432 of the displacement member 430, and is formed into a cylindrical rod-like body. As a result, the displacement member 430 is displaced by the driving force of the motor 441, and when the decoration-side sliding hole 432 of the displacement member 430 rotates around the through-hole 433, it is inserted into the decoration-side sliding hole 432. The support portion 452a is displaced as the decoration-side slide hole 432 is displaced. As a result, the decorative member 450 can be displaced by displacing the supporting portion 452a.

The engaging portion 452b is a projection with which the other end of the urging spring SP2, which will be described later, is engaged.

The contact surface 452h is a smooth surface that contacts a roller 492a of the regulating unit 490, which will be described later, and is formed on a smooth surface on which the roller 492a can roll. The inclined surface 452g is a surface that slopes downward from the front side to the rear side at the lower end portion of the contact surface 452h. As a result, the later-described regulation unit 490 and the decorative member 450 can be easily brought into contact with each other. A detailed description of the contact between the regulation unit 490 and the decorative member 450 will be given later.

The sliding portion 451 is a rod-shaped body having a rectangular cross section and extending in the vertical direction. Further, the sliding portion 451 has a through hole 451a that opens vertically. The through hole 451a is an opening into which the guide rod P1 is inserted, and is formed in a circular shape with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the guide rod P1.

As a result, when the displacement member 430 is displaced by the driving force of the drive motor 441 and the decoration member 450 is displaced as described above, the direction of displacement is changed by the sliding portions 451 provided at both ends of the front base 452. Regulated. As a result, the decorative member 450 is displaced along the axial direction (vertical direction) of the guide rod P1. That is, the decorative member 450 can be slid in the vertical direction by applying a driving force from the driving motor 441 .

The rear base 453 is a plate member that covers the rear side of the front base 452 at approximately the center in the left-right direction, and has substantially the same outer size in front view as the central portion of the front base 452 . As a result, the gears 454 to 456 can be rotatably arranged in the internal space between the front base 452 and the rear base 453 . A drive motor 457 is attached to the rear surface of the rear base 453 to output a rotational driving force and a control signal to the rotation unit 500 . A detailed description of the gears 454 to 456 and the drive motor 457 will be given later.

The front cover 460 is arranged to face the front side of the first piece 410X of the front base 410, and is a member that covers the front of the first piece 410X. They are formed in the same shape. The front cover 460 is formed into a box-like body with an open rear side, having erected walls 461 erected on the rear side from the outer edge thereof.

The standing wall 461 includes an upper groove forming member 462 projecting upward from the side surface forming the upper side, and a lower groove forming member 463 projecting downward from the side surface forming the lower side.

The upper groove forming member 462 is formed at a position facing the upper groove 413 of the front base 410, and has a groove 462a recessed in a semicircular shape on the rear side. On the other hand, the lower groove forming member 463 is formed at a position facing the lower groove 414 of the front base 410, and has a groove 463a recessed in a semicircular shape on the rear side.

The recessed grooves 462a and 463a are grooves in which the guide rod P1 is fitted, and are recessed in a semicircular shape with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the guide rod P1. Further, the concave grooves 462a and 463a are formed such that the axes of the concave grooves 462a and 463a are formed on the same straight line, and the distance from the upper end of the concave groove 462a to the lower end of the concave groove 463a is It is set larger than the axial dimension of the guide rod P1. As a result, both ends of the guide rod P1 can be fitted into the concave grooves 462a and 463a.

Therefore, when the front cover 460 is arranged in front of the front base 410, the guide rod P can be sandwiched between the upper recessed groove 413 and the recessed groove 462a and the lower recessed groove 414 and the recessed groove 463a. The guide rod P1 can be arranged on the front base 410 so as not to fall off. As a result, the sliding portion 451 of the decorative member 450 through which the guide rod P1 is inserted can be held against the front base 410 so as not to fall off.

Also, the distance between the upright wall 461 of the front cover 460 formed on the laterally outer side of the vertical displacement unit 400 and the upright portion 412 formed on the first piece 410X of the front base 410 facing each other in the front-rear direction. is set to be substantially the same as or slightly larger than the thickness dimension of the sliding portion 451 of the decorative member 450 in the front-rear direction, and the outer end portion of the sliding portion 451 in the left-right direction is arranged between them. Thereby, as described above, when the decorative member 450 is displaced in the vertical direction, it is possible to prevent the decorative member 450 from rattling in the front-rear direction.

The side wall members 470 are members arranged at both ends of the vertically displaceable unit 400 on the central side in the left-right direction, and are formed of substantially L-shaped plate bodies bent toward the rear side when viewed from the side. A wall surface that bends outward in the left-right direction is formed on the front end surface of the side wall member 470, and a regulation unit 490, which will be described later, is attached to the wall surface.

Further, the side wall member 470 has a pattern by unevenness or color on the side surface of the central side in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 9) with respect to the vertical displacement unit 400, so that the player can easily see the center frame 86 of the game board 13. 2) so that the pattern of the side wall member 470 can be visually recognized through the central opening. As a result, the vertically displaceable unit 400 (for example, the front cover 460, etc.) disposed laterally outside of the side wall member 470 can be made invisible to the player.

The rotation restricting member 480 is formed of a horizontally long rectangular plate-like body when viewed from the front, and an annular roller 481 having an axis extending in the front-rear direction is rotatably attached to the rear side of the rotation restricting member 480 . Further, the rotation restricting member 480 has an outer shape that is substantially half the outer shape of the second piece 410Y of the front base 410 when viewed from the front, and is arranged in front of the front base 410 with a predetermined gap.

The rotation restricting member 480 is a member that returns the later-described rotation unit 500 to an initial position, and the initial position of the rotation unit 500 can be defined by the contact between the roller 481 and the top base 510 .

The biasing spring SP2 is a coil spring that connects the front base 410 and the decorative member 450 and biases the decorative member 450 upward. The end is engaged with the engaging portion 412b of the decorative member 450. As shown in FIG. Thereby, the decorative member 450 is always urged upward with respect to the front base 410 . Therefore, when the decorative member 450 is displaced from the second position to the first position by displacement described later, the decorative member 450 can be easily displaced to the second position. Further, the biasing spring SP2 is bent along the outer peripheral surface of the roller 419 at the central portion. As a result, the length of the biasing spring SP2 can be secured, and an excessive increase in the biasing force can be suppressed.

Next, the operation of the vertical displacement unit 400 configured as above will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 to 17. FIG.

15 to 17 (a) are front views of the vertical displacement unit 400, in which FIG. 15 (a) shows the state arranged at the raised position, and FIG. 16 (a) shows the state between the raised position and the lowered position. FIG. 17(a) corresponds to the state arranged in the lowered position, respectively.

15(b) corresponds to the rear view of the vertical displacement unit 400 in FIG. 15(a), FIG. 16(b) in FIG. 16(a), and FIG. 17(b) in FIG. 17(a). . 15(b), 16(b), and 17(b) show a state in which the rear base 420 is removed for easy understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 15(a) and 15(b), when the vertical displacement unit 400 is placed in the raised position (hereinafter, this state is referred to as the “second position”), the displacement member 430 is positioned at one end. The side (the long side where the decorative side slide hole 432 is formed) is swung upward, and the decorative member 450 is positioned at the top. The support portion 452 a of the decorative member 450 is positioned inside the decorative slide hole 432 of the displacement member 430 and close to the radially outer end of the through hole 433 from the axis thereof.

Also, in this state, the rotational direction of one side of the displacement member 430 (the short side where the driving-side slide hole 431 is formed) is substantially the direction of the straight line connecting the rotational axis of the transmission gear 443 and the projection 443a. match. That is, the extending direction of the drive-side sliding hole 431 of the displacement member 430 is orthogonal to the direction of the straight line connecting the rotation shaft of the transmission gear 443 and the projection 443a (when the displacement member 430 and the transmission gear 443 are at the dead point). ). Therefore, the displacement member 430 cannot rotate around the through-hole 433, and the weight of the decoration member 450 connected to the displacement member 430 can suppress the rotation displacement of the displacement member 430. FIG.

From the state shown in FIGS. 15A and 15B, when the pair of drive motors 441 are rotationally driven and each transmission gear 443 is rotated, the projection 443a of the transmission gear 443 is moved to the displacement member 430. The left and right displacement members 430 are pushed downward by sliding through the drive-side slide holes 431 .

As a result, the left and right displacement members 430 are rotated around the axis of the through hole 433, and as shown in FIGS. 16(a) and 16(b), the decorative member 450 is displaced downward. From this state, when each transmission gear 443 is further rotated by the rotational driving of the pair of drive motors 441, the left and right displacement members 430 are further pushed downward, resulting in the state shown in FIGS. 17(a) and 17(b). As shown, the decorative member 450 is placed in the lowered position (hereinafter, this state will be referred to as the "first position").

As shown in FIGS. 17(a) and 17(b), when the vertical displacement unit 400 is placed at the first position, the left and right displacement members 430 are positioned on one side (driving side slide hole 431 is formed). The short side of the display device 450 is swung downward, so that the decorative member 450 is positioned at the lowest position and protrudes to the front side of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 2). .

In this case (when the vertical displacement unit 400 is placed at the lowered position), the decoration-side slide hole 432 of the displacement member 430 is inclined downward toward the center of the vertical displacement unit 400 in the left-right direction. The side surface of the support portion 452a of the decorative member 450 is brought into contact with the end portion radially outward from the edge. As a result, the weight of the decorative member 450 acts on the supporting portion 452a to displace the force in the direction of gravity and the force in the direction from the lateral direction of the vertical displacement unit 400 toward the central portion. As a result, it is possible to prevent the decorative member 450 from rattling in the vertical and horizontal directions due to the displacing operation of the rotating unit 500 of the decorative member 450, which will be described later.

Further, the rotation direction of the other side of the displacement member 430 (the short side where the drive-side slide hole 431 is formed) substantially coincides with the direction of the straight line connecting the rotation shaft of the transmission gear 443 and the projection 443a. That is, the extending direction of the drive-side sliding hole 431 of the displacement member 430 is orthogonal to the direction of the straight line connecting the rotation shaft of the transmission gear 443 and the projection 443a (when the displacement member 430 and the transmission gear 443 are at the dead point). ). Therefore, the displacement member 430 cannot rotate around the through-hole 433, and when the decorative member 450 rattles in the vertical direction due to the displacement operation of the rotation unit 500, which will be described later, the rattling causes the displacement member 430 to displace. Displacement of the member 430 can be suppressed. As a result, lptp that causes the decorative member 450 to rattle can be suppressed.

Further, regulation units 490 are arranged in front of both ends of the decorative member 450 . As a result, displacement of the decorative member 450 in the front-rear direction can be restricted. A detailed description of the regulation unit 490 will be given later.

Next, the regulation unit 490 will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 to 24. FIG.

First, the overall configuration of the regulation unit 490 will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 to 20. FIG. 18 is an exploded front perspective view of the regulation unit 490, and FIG. 19 is an exploded front perspective view of the roller member 492. FIG. FIG. 20(a) is a side view of the regulation unit 490, FIG. 20(b) is a rear view of the regulation unit 490, and FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of a regulation unit 490; FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 18 to 20, the regulating unit 490 includes a case member 491 formed in a box shape with an open back side, roller members 492 disposed inside the case member 491, and a case member 491. and an outer edge member 493 disposed on the open (opening side) outer edge.

The case member 491 has a protruding portion 491a protruding from the side surface on the front side, a notch portion 491b cut in a semicircular shape on both side surfaces in the left and right direction, and an inner side surface facing the opening protruding toward the back side. and a bulging portion 491c.

The projecting portion 491a is a projection for fastening the case member 491 to the side wall member 470 described above. By doing so, the regulation unit 490 can be arranged on the side wall member 470 .

The notch portions 491b are formed by notching two notch portions 491b on both sides in the left-right direction of the case member 491 so as to be aligned in the up-down direction in a semicircular shape. The cutout portion 491b is a cutout for inserting the collar 492c of the roller member 492 therein, and its inner diameter is set larger than the outer diameter of the collar 492c of the roller member 492 .

The bulging portion 491c is formed to bulge from below the center in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 20(c)) of the side surface (the rear surface of the front wall) facing the open side of the case member 491 . Moreover, the bulging portion 491 c has a predetermined gap between it and the roller 492 a of the roller member 492 .

The roller member 492 includes a roller 492a made of an elastic member and formed in an annular shape when viewed in a cross-sectional view from the axis, a shaft portion 492b inserted into the roller 492a, and supported by the shaft portion 492b. A pair of collars 492c arranged on the outer side of the collars 492c and a pair of retaining rings E1 externally fitted on the shaft portion 492b outside the collars 492c.

The shaft portion 492b is a member that is inserted through the inner circumference of the roller 492a. is set larger than the width dimension of In addition, recessed portions 492b1 that are recessed in the axial direction are formed at both ends of the shaft portion 492b in the axial direction. The recessed portion 492b1 is formed over the entire circumference of the shaft portion 492b, and has an axial outer diameter smaller than an inner diameter of a retaining ring E1, which will be described later.

The collar 492c has an annular shape when viewed from the front and a substantially stepped cross-section, and is composed of a small-diameter tubular portion 492c1 and a large-diameter tubular portion 492c2 having an outer diameter larger than that of the small-diameter tubular portion 492c1. The inner diameter of the collar 492c (the inner diameter of the small-diameter tubular portion 492c1 and the large-diameter tubular portion 492c2) is smaller than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 492b, so that the shaft portion 492b can be inserted therein.

The small-diameter cylindrical portion 492c1 is a portion that is fitted into the notch portion 491b of the case member 491, and as described above, the outer diameter of the small-diameter cylindrical portion 492c1 is formed larger than the inner diameter of the notch portion 491b of the case member 491. be done.

The large-diameter tubular portion 492c2 is a member for restricting lateral displacement when the roller member 492 is arranged in the case member 491. It is set larger than the inner diameter of the portion 491b. In addition, the distance dimension between the axially outer side surfaces of the pair of large-diameter cylindrical portions 492c2 disposed at both ends of the roller 492a in the axial direction is greater than the distance dimension between the opposed left and right side surfaces on the inner side of the opening of the case member 491. is also formed small.

The retaining ring E1 is an E-ring (E-shaped retaining ring), and is fitted into the recess 492b1 of the shaft portion 492b around the recess 492b1 with its opening widened. That is, the inner diameter of the inner circumference of the retaining ring E1 is set to be substantially the same as the outer diameter of the recess 492b1.

The roller member 492 configured as described above is assembled as follows. First, after the retaining ring E1 is fitted in the recessed portion 492b1 on one end side of the shaft portion 492b, the small-diameter cylindrical portion 492c1 is attached to the collar 492c from the other end on one side (the side on which the retaining ring E1 is fitted). ), the shaft portion 492b is inserted. Next, after inserting the roller 492a from the other end of the shaft portion 492b, the shaft portion 492c is rotated with the large-diameter cylindrical portion 492c2 directed to one side (the side on which the retaining ring E1 is fitted). 492b is inserted. After that, one retaining ring E1 is externally fitted to the recessed portion 492b1 on the other side of the shaft portion 492b.

As a result, the lateral displacement of the roller 492a and the pair of collars 492c supported by the shaft portion 492b between the pair of retaining rings E1 is restricted by the retaining ring E1. As a result, it is possible to prevent the roller 492a and the pair of collars 492c from coming off the shaft portion 492b.

The outer edge member 493 is a member that is formed in a vertically long rectangular frame-like body when viewed from the front and is arranged on the back side (open side) of the case member 491 . The outer edge member 493 is formed so that the shape of the inner periphery in front view is substantially the same as the shape of the inner periphery of the opening of the case member 491 in rear view. Also, on the side surface of the outer edge member 493 on the front side (case member 491 side), a standing portion 493a is formed around the inner edge portion to stand on the front side.

A recessed portion 493a1 recessed on the back side is formed in the erected portion 493a. The recessed portion 493 a 1 is formed at a position facing the notch portion 491 b of the case member 491 . Therefore, the roller member 492 can be arranged in the case member 491 by sandwiching the collar 492c of the roller member 492 between the notch portion 491b and the concave portion 493a1 of the case member 491 facing each other.

The roller member 492 configured as described above is assembled as follows. First, two collars 492c, which are arranged at both ends in the axial direction of the roller member 492, are arranged vertically in the notch portion 491b of the case member 491 in such a manner as to pivotally support them. Next, the outer edge member 493 is fastened and fixed to the case member 491 from the back side of the case member 491 with the standing portion 493a facing the front side (facing the case member 491 side). As a result, the roller member 492 is rotatably arranged with respect to the case member 491 and can be prevented from falling from the case member 491 .

Next, the operation of regulation unit 490 will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 to 24. FIG.

FIG. 21 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 400 in the first position. 22(a) is an enlarged view of the vertical displacement unit 400 in section XXII of FIG. 21, and FIG. 22(b) is a sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 400 taken along line XXIIb-XXIIb of FIG. 22(a). . In addition, in FIG. 22(a), the outlines of the roller 492a and the decorative member 450 are illustrated by dashed lines.

23(a) to 23(c) are partially enlarged front views of the vertical displacement unit 400, and FIG. 24(a) is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 400 taken along line XXIVa-XXIVa of FIG. 23(a). 24(b) is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 400 taken along line XXIVb-XXIVb of FIG. 23(b), and FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of a displacement unit 400; FIG. 23(a) to 23(c) illustrate transition states of the vertical displacement unit 400, and outlines of the roller 492a and the decorative member 450 are illustrated by broken lines.

As shown in FIGS. 21 and 22, when the vertical displacement unit 400 is positioned at the first position, the decorative member 450 is positioned downward. In this case, both ends of the decorative member 450 are positioned on the rear side of the regulation unit 490 as described above.

In this case, when the decorative member 450 is arranged at the first position and the rotation unit 500 (described later) is rotated, the decorative member 450 may rattle with respect to the front base 410 due to the rotational displacement. Therefore, there is a technique in which an engaging means for engaging the decorative member 450 and the front base 410 is provided to suppress rattling. The engaging means includes an engaging member arranged on either the decorative member 450 or the front base 410 and biased by the biasing means, and an engaging member formed to be able to engage with the engaging member and the decorative member 450 or the front base. 410 and an engaged member disposed on the other side of 410, and utilizing the displacement of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 (displacement toward the first position), the engaging member resists the biasing force of the biasing means. When the decorative member 450 is positioned at the first position, the engaging member is advanced by the biasing force of the biasing means and engaged with the engaged member. Thereby, the relative displacement of the body member with respect to the front base 410 is restricted by the engagement of the engaging means, and the rattling of the body member with respect to the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member is suppressed.

However, in such conventional engaging means, in order to bring the engaging means into the engaged state (position the main body member at the first position), the engaging member must be pushed against the urging force of the urging means. Not only is it necessary to retreat, but also when releasing the engagement state of the engaging means (displacement of the decorative member 450 from the first position toward the second position), the biasing force of the biasing means is resisted. Therefore, there is a problem that the driving force required to displace the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 increases.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 of the decorative member 450 is in contact with the roller 492a of the regulation unit 490, thereby regulating the relative displacement of the front base 410. Therefore, it is possible to suppress rattling of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 due to rotational displacement of the rotating unit 500 .

In this case, the direction of displacement when the decorative member 450 is arranged at the first position and the direction of rotation of the roller member 492 of the regulating unit 490 are set substantially parallel. Since the roller member 492 of the regulating unit 490 can be rotated along with the displacement, the driving force required to displace the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 can be suppressed.

Further, since the roller 492a is made of an elastic material that can be elastically deformed as described above, when the roller 492a of the regulation unit 490 contacts the contact surface 452h of the front base 452, the outer circumference of the roller 492a By elastically deforming the surface side, the front base 452 can easily hold the roller 492a. This makes it difficult to rotate the roller 492a and suppresses the rattling of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 .

The elastic body is preferably a viscoelastic body such as rubber or urethane. In this case, due to the damping effect, it is possible to perform a vibration damping function or a vibration insulating function of damping and isolating the vibration input from the decorative member 450 to the front base 410 due to the displacement of the rotary unit 500. This is because wear and failure of various devices arranged on the 410 side and loosening of fastening portions can be suppressed. In particular, when the rotating unit 500 is periodically displaced (e.g., when it is rotated at relatively high speeds to act as a versalytor), vibrations of relatively small amplitude and high frequency are emitted from the decorative member 450. Since it is input to the front base 410, it is particularly effective to employ a viscoelastic body.

Further, when the decorative member 450 and the regulation unit 490 (roller 492a) abut against each other, the roller 492a is elastically deformed, so that the product accuracy and assembly error of the vertical displacement unit 400 can be absorbed. Therefore, there is no need to increase the precision when molding the parts, and the manufacturing cost of the parts can be reduced. As a result, the manufacturing cost of products can be reduced.

Furthermore, since the collision sound generated when the decorative member 450 and the regulating unit 490 (roller 492a) abut against each other can be absorbed by the elastic deformation of the roller 492a, it is possible to prevent the player from hearing the sound generated when the decorative member 450 is displaced. It is possible to suppress the player's interest from being spoiled. Further, since the rotation axis direction of the roller 492a is perpendicular to the displacement direction of the decorative member 450, the roller 492a can be rotated with the displacement of the decorative member 450, so that the decorative member 450 and the roller 492a come into contact with each other. When displacing in contact, it is possible to suppress the sound of the members rubbing against each other. That is, if the projection is brought into contact with the displacement member to assist in stopping the displacement member or to suppress rattling, the members rub against each other when the displacement member is displaced while being in contact with the projection. A sound is produced.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, after the roller 492a and the decorative member 450 are brought into contact with each other, the roller 492a can be rotated along the displacement direction of the decorative member 450. It is possible to suppress rubbing between the decorative member 450 and the roller 492a.

In addition, since the regulation unit 490 of the side wall member 470 fastened and fixed to the front base 410 can regulate the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410, the regulation unit 490 relatively heavy is arranged in the decorative member 450. Since the decorative member 450 is not necessary, the driving force required for displacing the decorative member 450 can be reduced by reducing the weight. In addition, since the decorative member 450 serving as a vibration source can be made lighter, rattling can be easily suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 23 and 24, the manner of contact between the decorative member 450 and the regulation unit 490 when the decorative member 450 is displaced from the second position to the first position will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 23A and 24A, when the decorative member 450 is positioned above the regulating unit 490, the outer peripheral surface of the roller 492a contacts the decorative member 450 and the case member 491. placed without contact.

23(a) and 24(a), the decorative member 450 is displaced downward, and as shown in FIGS. When the member 491 is displaced to substantially the same vertical position as the substantially middle position in the vertical direction, the outer peripheral surface of the roller 492a disposed above the regulating unit 490 and the front surface of the decorative member 450 come into contact. It is considered to be in a state of As a result, the decorative member 450 can be prevented from rattling in the front, rear, left, and right directions.

That is, the roller 492a disposed on the upper side is pushed out by the decorative member 450 and rotated while being displaced in the radial direction, and is in contact with the decorative member 450 in the front-rear direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 24(b)). Therefore, the decorative member 450 is restrained from rattling in the front-rear direction. Further, the roller 492a is rotatable in one direction around the axis of the shaft portion 492b, and cannot rotate in the direction in which the decorative member 450 moves left and right. be able to.

On the other hand, since the roller 492a is rotatable around the axis of the shaft portion 492b, even when the roller 492a and the rotation unit 500 are in contact with each other, the decorative member 450 is vertically displaced at the first position. can be made

Further, as described above, the inclined surface 452g is formed at the lower end of the contact surface 452h of the front base 452, so that the inclined surface 452g can be used when the decorative member 450 is arranged at the first position. can guide the roller 492a to the front side of the contact surface 452h. As a result, the driving force required when arranging the decorative member 450 to the first position can be suppressed.

23(b) and 24(b), when the decorative member 450 is displaced further downward and positioned at the first position, the outer peripheral surfaces of the two rollers 492a disposed in the regulating unit 490 and the front surface of the decorative member 450 can be brought into contact with each other.

Here, if the rattling of the decorative member 450 that is vertically displaced is suppressed by a rotating body (roller 492a) that rotates along the displacement direction of the decorative member 450, the rotating body (roller 492a) It is difficult to restrict the movement of the decorative member 450 along the direction of displacement and to prevent the decorative member 450 from being displaced due to rattling in the vertical direction.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, as described above, the rotation direction of the other side of the displacement member 430 (the short side in which the drive-side slide hole 431 is formed) is aligned with the rotation axis of the transmission gear 443 and the protrusion 443a. , the decorative member 450 can be prevented from rattling in the vertical direction at the first position. That is, in the present embodiment, the regulation unit 490 allows only vertical displacement of the decorative member 450 to the first position, and at the second position, the transmission gear 443 and the displacement member 430 are displaced. By forming the dead point, it is possible to suppress the decorative member 450 from rattling in the vertical direction. As a result, since the relative displacement of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 can be restricted, the rattling of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 due to the displacement of the rotary unit 500 can be suppressed.

Further, the roller 492 a arranged below the rollers 492 a arranged in the vertical direction is in contact with not only the decorative member 450 but also the bulging portion 491 c of the case member 491 .

That is, when the roller 492a disposed on the lower side comes into contact with the decorative member 450, the rubber component of the roller 492a is pushed out (elastically deformed) toward the front side (right side in FIG. 24(c)). Thus, the outer peripheral surface on the front side is brought into contact with the side surface of the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491, and the roller 492a is sandwiched between the contact surface 452h of the decorative member 450 and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491. be able to. This increases the resistance when the roller 492a rotates around the shaft portion 492b, making it difficult to rotate the roller 492a. Therefore, it is possible to increase the resistance when the decorative member 450 is displaced in the vertical direction. As a result, since the relative displacement of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 can be restricted, the rattling of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 due to the displacement of the rotary unit 500 can be suppressed.

Here, as a mode in which the roller 492a is sandwiched between the contact surface 452h of the decorative member 450 and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491, the shaft portion 492b of the roller 492a is moved forward and backward (horizontal direction in FIG. 24(c)). to sandwich the roller 492a between the contact surface 452h of the decorative member and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491. In this case, the shaft portion 492b of the roller 492a has a diameter A structure that allows displacement in the direction is required.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the roller 492a is made of an elastic material, and its elastic deformation is used to move the roller 492a between the contact surface 452h of the decorative member 450 and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491. Since the shaft portion 492b of the roller 492a need not be formed to be radially displaceable, the shaft portion 492b can be formed as a shaft fixed to the front base 410. As shown in FIG. As a result, the structure can be simplified, and the durability can be improved and the product cost can be reduced.

In addition, since the roller 492a is elastically displaced and sandwiched between the contact surface 452h of the decorative member 450 and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491, the decorative member 450 does not move against the front base 410 due to the displacement of the rotary unit 500. When the roller 492a is caught between the decorative member 450 and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491 due to rattling, the decorative member 450 and the case member 491 are separated by utilizing the elastic recovery force of the roller 492a. The roller 492a can be easily held by the bulging portion 491c more firmly. This makes it difficult to rotate the roller 492a and suppresses the relative rattling of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410. Therefore, the rattling of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 due to the rotational displacement of the rotating unit 500 is minimized. can be suppressed.

Furthermore, as the decorative member 450 is displaced from the upper end to the lower end position, the displacement resistance can be increased, so when the decorative member 450 is stopped at the first position, other parts are damaged by the stopping operation. can be suppressed.

That is, in this embodiment, since the rotating unit is provided in the central portion of the decorative member 450, when the decorative member 450 is displaced in the direction of gravity and stopped, each part receives the weight of the decorative member 450 and the kinetic energy when displaced. Since it works, the parts are easily damaged.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the stopping operation can be assisted when displacing to the first position, so the stopping operation in the direction in which damage is likely to occur can be assisted. As a result, it is possible to effectively suppress the breakage of the parts and improve the reliability of the product.

Furthermore, since two rollers 492a are arranged vertically along the displacement direction of the decorative member 450, the contact surfaces 452h of the decorative member 450 are contacted at two points with a predetermined gap therebetween. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the decorative member 450 from tilting, and to prevent the rotation unit 500 from rattling with respect to the upper surface base 510 . As a result, rattling of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 due to rotational displacement of the rotating unit 500 can be effectively suppressed.

Further, the rotation plane of the rotation unit 500, which will be described later, is set to be substantially the same as the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 (that is, the surface with which the roller 492a contacts). That is, the rotation plane of the rotation unit 500 is arranged parallel to the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 and the rotation axis of the roller 492a. As a result, the front base of the decorative member 450 associated with the rotational displacement of the rotary unit 500 can be suppressed while suppressing the driving force required when arranging the decorative member 450 at the first position and when displacing the decorative member 450 from the first position to the second position. It is possible to effectively suppress rattling with respect to 410 .

Specifically, since the displacement mode of the rotating unit 500 is rotation, the decorative member 450 rotates due to the precession motion of the rotating unit 500 (the motion in which the rotating shaft of the rotating unit 500 swings in a circle). It is vibrated in a manner (mode) that tilts the plane of rotation of the unit 500 . Therefore, the rotation plane of the rotation unit 500 is substantially parallel to the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 and the rotation axis of the rotation unit 500, so that the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 (that is, the roller 492a is contact surface) can be pressed against the outer peripheral surface of the roller 492a in a direction orthogonal to the rotation axis of the roller 492a. As a result, when the decorative member 450 is arranged at the first position and when the decorative member 450 is displaced from the first position to the second position, the driving force required to displace the decorative member 450 is suppressed by rotating the roller 492a. At the same time, the abutment of the abutment surface 452h of the front base 452 against the outer peripheral surface of the roller 492a effectively suppresses the looseness of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 due to the displacement (rotation) of the rotary unit 500. .

Next, with reference to FIGS. 25 to 36, the rotating unit 500 arranged on the decorative member 450 will be described.

First, with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26, the overall configuration of the decorative member 450 will be described in detail. 25 is an exploded front perspective view of the decorative member 450, and FIG. 26 is an exploded rear perspective view of the decorative member 450. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the decorative member 450 includes gears 454 to 456 arranged between the front base 452 and the rear base 453, and a driving motor attached to the rear side of the rear base 453. 457 and a signal transmission mechanism 458 attached to the rear side of the front base 452 .

The front base 452 is formed with a recess 452c recessed on the rear side at the center thereof. The recess 452c has an annular shape when viewed from the front, and has an insertion hole 452f formed through the shaft portion thereof in the front-rear direction, and openings 452d and 452e opened in the left-right direction on the side surfaces of both ends in the left-right direction. be.

The rear base 453 is formed of a plate-like body that is oblong in the front view and has a horizontally long rectangular shape smaller than the front view of the front base 452. The rear base 453 has an opening 453b that opens in the front-rear direction at the center and a circular shape that extends in the front-rear direction on the right side in the front view. It is mainly formed with an open insertion hole 453a and cylindrical support portions 453c and 453d projecting toward the front side.

The insertion hole 453a is an opening through which the shaft portion of the drive motor 457 (to be described later) is inserted. is opened in a circular shape. The opening 453b is an opening through which a signal transmission mechanism 458, which will be described later, is inserted, and is formed in an inner hole shape that is larger than the shape of the signal transmission mechanism 458 when viewed from the front.

The shaft support portions 453 c and 453 d are shaft portions that are inserted into the shaft portions of the gears 455 and 456 to be described later, and are set in a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of each gear 455 and 456 .

The drive motor 457 is a motor with a built-in encoder for position detection, and can detect the rotation angle and rotation speed of the motor. The drive motor 457 is attached to the rear surface of the rear base 453 as described above. It is fastened and fixed.

The gear 454 is meshed with the gear 455 and fixedly attached to the shaft portion of the drive motor 457 inserted through the insertion hole 453 a of the rear base 453 . In addition, the gear 454 is formed to have a thickness smaller in the front-rear direction than the distance between the rear base 453 and the front base 452 facing each other. can rotate without contacting the side of the When the drive motor 457 applies rotational driving force, the gear 454 is rotated, and the rotational driving force can be transmitted to the gear 455 meshing with the gear 454 .

The gear 455 is meshed with a rear base 571 (see FIG. 26) of the rotation unit 500, which will be described later. possible. In addition, the gear 455 is formed to have a thickness smaller in the front-rear direction than the distance between the rear base 453 and the front base 452 facing each other, so that when the rear base 453 is arranged on the front base 452, the front base 452 and the rear base 453 are separated from each other. can rotate without contacting the side of the When the driving motor 457 applies rotational driving force, the rotational driving force is transmitted from the gear 454 to the gear 455 to rotate the rear base 571 . As a result, the rotating unit 500 is rotated.

A part of the gear 455 is inserted through the first opening 452 d of the front base 452 , and meshes with the rear base 571 of the rotation unit 500 arranged in front of the front base 452 .

A gear 456 is meshed with the rear base 571 of the rotation unit 500 . The gear 456 is a member having a projection on its side surface (end surface in the axial direction) for detecting the initial position (reference position). It is arranged on the base 453 . A part of the gear 456 is inserted through the second opening 452 e and is meshed with the rear base 571 . Further, the gear 456 is formed to have a thickness smaller in the front-rear direction than the space between the rear base 453 and the front base 452 facing each other, so that when the rear base 453 is arranged on the front base 452, the front base 452 and the rear base 453 are separated from each other. can rotate without contacting the side of the When the drive motor 457 applies rotational driving force to rotate the gears 454, 455 and the rotating unit 500 (back base 571), the rotational driving force is transmitted from the rear base 571 to rotate the gear 456. . As a result, the initial position of the rotation unit 500 can be detected.

In this case, the number of gear teeth formed on the outer peripheral surface of the gear 456 and the number of gear teeth of the gear 571a1 formed on the outer peripheral surface of the rear base 571 of the rotary unit 500 are set to be the same. The gear 456 can be rotated once for each rotation of the rotating unit 500 . This makes it possible to easily perform initial position detection (reference position).

The signal transmission mechanism 458 is a slip ring that transmits electric power and signals to the irradiation unit 530 of the rotating unit 500, and is configured such that a shaft portion 458a projecting from the front can rotate. The shaft portion 458a is formed to have a substantially D-shaped cross section, and has a passage opened therein through which an electrical wiring is inserted.

When the signal transmission mechanism 458 is attached to the rear side of the front base 452 by passing through the opening 453b of the rear base 453, the shaft portion 458a of the signal transmission mechanism 458 is inserted into the shaft portion 458a of the electrical wiring. and protrude from the front of the front base 452 .

Next, the overall configuration of the rotating unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 to 29. FIG. 27 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotation unit 500, and FIG. 28 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotation unit 500. FIG. FIG. 29(a) is a top view of the rotating unit 500, FIG. 29(b) is a front view of the rotating unit 500 as seen in direction XXIXb of FIG. 29(a), and FIG. 29(a) is a cross-sectional view of the rotation unit 500 taken along line XXIXc-XXIXc of FIG. 29(a). It should be noted that the description of the rotation unit 500 is based on the initial position (reference position).

As shown in FIGS. 27 to 29, the rotation unit 500 includes an upper base 510 forming an upper side surface, a lower base 520 forming a lower side surface, and an irradiation unit 530 disposed below the upper base 510. , an intermediate member 540 arranged below the irradiation unit 530, a reflector 560 arranged below the intermediate member 540, a front cover 550 arranged in front of the reflector 560, and an upper surface A rotation transmission unit 570 arranged on the rear side of the base 510 and the lower surface base 520 is mainly provided.

The rotation transmission unit 570 is a unit for transmitting the rotation of the drive motor 457 to the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520, and includes a rear base 571 arranged on the rear side and a front base 572 arranged on the front side. , a bearing BR sandwiched between the front base 572 and the rear base 571, and a fastening member 573 disposed inside the bearing BR.

The rear base 571 is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, and has a bulging portion 571a which bulges from the inner peripheral edge portion toward the rear side in an annular shape when viewed from the rear. A gear 571a1 is engraved on the outer side surface of the bulging portion 571a. Gear 571a1 meshes with gear 455 as described above. Accordingly, by applying a driving force to the driving motor 457, the rotational driving force is transmitted to the rear base 571 (the gear 571a1) via the gears 454 and 455, and the rotation unit 500 is rotated.

The front base 572 is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, and has an outer standing portion 572a erected from an outer peripheral edge portion and an inner standing portion 572b erected from an inner peripheral portion in a U shape when viewed from the front. And prepare.

The outer standing portion 572a is a wall portion for forming a gap between the front surface of the rear base 571 and the rear surface of the front base 572, and holding the bearing BR and the fastening member 573 therebetween. It is set to have substantially the same standing height as the axial width dimension of the BR, and is set to have substantially the same inner shape as the outer diameter of the bearing BR.

The side surface of the outer standing portion 572a on the side of the erected distal end is brought into contact with the front surface of the rear base 571, and a screw inserted from the rear surface side of the rear base 571 is fastened and fixed. Thereby, the rear base 571 and the front base 572 are fastened and fixed.

The inner standing portion 572b is a member that suppresses twisting of the wiring connecting the inside of the rotation unit 500 and the shaft portion 458a of the signal transmission mechanism 458 when the shaft portion 458a of the signal transmission mechanism 458 is rotated. , and is substantially U-shaped when viewed from the rear, and the inner shape thereof is substantially the same as or slightly larger than the outer shape of the shaft portion 458a of the signal transmission mechanism 458 when viewed from the front.

Therefore, when the rotation unit 500 is arranged on the front base 452 , the inner standing portion 572 b can be fitted onto the shaft portion 458 a of the signal transmission mechanism 458 . Therefore, when the rotating unit 500 is rotated, the planar portions of the inner standing portion 572b and the shaft portion 458a of the signal transmission mechanism 458 are engaged with each other, so that the shaft portion 458a of the signal transmission mechanism 458 can be rotated. As a result, twisting of the wiring connecting the rotation unit 500 and the signal transmission mechanism 458 can be suppressed.

The bearing BR is a member that suppresses transmission of the rotation to the front base 452 when the rotation unit 500 is rotated with respect to the front base 452, and is an annular metal member having different inner and outer diameters. are combined, and a spherical or cylindrical metal body is fitted between the two members.

The outer diameter of the bearing BR is set substantially equal to the inner diameter of the outer standing portion 572 a of the front base 572 . As a result, the bearing BR can be fixed to the outer standing portion 572a of the front base 572 and disposed. In this case, the inner diameter of the rear base 571 is set smaller than the outer diameter of the bearing BR. Therefore, when the bearing BR is sandwiched between the front base 572 and the rear base 571 facing each other, the bearing BR is prevented from coming off from the rotation transmission unit 570 .

The fastening member 573 is a member that fastens the rotation unit 500 to the front base 452 . The fastening member 573 is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, and includes a protruding wall portion 573a that protrudes from the outer peripheral surface on the front side.

The outer diameter of the fastening member 573 is formed substantially the same as the inner diameter of the bearing BR. On the other hand, the inner diameter of the fastening member 573 is formed larger than the outer shape of the inner standing portion 572 b of the front base 572 . As a result, the fastening member 573 is disposed in the rotation transmission unit 570 in such a manner that its outer edge portion is fitted into the inner edge portion of the bearing BR, and the inner edge portion of the fastening member 573 is inserted through the inner rising portion 572b of the front base. .

The protruding wall portion 573a is a protruding portion for suppressing the fastening member 573 from being removed from the assembled rotation transmission unit 570, and protrudes from the outer peripheral surface of the fastening member 573 with a constant protruding dimension over the entire circumference. and its outer diameter is set larger than the inner diameter of the bearing BR. Therefore, by fitting the fastening member 573 into the bearing BR from the front side of the bearing BR, it is possible to prevent the fastening member 573 from being removed from the assembled rotation transmission unit 570 .

More specifically, by fitting the fastening member 573 into the bearing BR from the front side of the bearing BR, it is possible to restrict the rearward movement of the fastening member 573 with respect to the bearing BR. On the other hand, the movement of the fastening member 573 to the front side is achieved by disposing the bearing BR between the front base 572 and the rear base 571 facing each other. are abutted and regulated. As a result, detachment of the fastening member 573 from the assembled rotation transmission unit 570 can be suppressed.

Further, since the fastening member 573 to which the bearing BR is fitted is fastened to the front base 452, it is possible to suppress transmission of rotational motion to the front base 452 when the rotation unit 500 is rotated.

That is, when the rotation unit 500 is rotated, only the ring-shaped metal body arranged outside the bearing BR is rotated, and the ring-shaped metal body arranged inside the bearing BR rotates. By not transmitting, it is possible to suppress the rotation of the fastening member 573 . As a result, the rotating unit 500 can be rotated with respect to the decorative member 450 .

The upper surface base 510 is formed in an arc shape that curves toward the rear side (upper side in FIG. 29(a)) when viewed from above, and its front edge portion curves downward (toward the back side of the paper surface in FIG. 29(a)). It is formed into a curved shape. The top base 510 has a decorative portion 511 that bulges out in a semicircular shape in a front view at the center in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 29(b)), and a blowing hole 512 that penetrates in the up-down direction (plate pressure direction). , and a pressing portion 513 protruding downward in a cylindrical shape.

The decorative portion 511 is a portion that is fastened to the upper side of the front base 572 of the rotation transmission unit 570 described above. The radius of the semicircular shape is formed larger than the radius of the outer diameter of the front base 572 . Thereby, it is fastened with the front base 572 of the rotation transmission unit 570, and when viewed from the front, the upper side of the front base 572 can be made invisible.

The air blowing hole 512 is a through hole penetrating in the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 29(c)), and is formed in an elongated hole shape that is long in the front-rear direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 29(a)). In addition, a plurality of blow holes 512 are formed in the horizontal direction along the arc shape of the upper base 510 .

When the upper surface base 510 is combined with the lower surface base 520, the pressing portion 513 forms a gap between the irradiation unit 530 and the upper surface base 510 sandwiched between them, and restricts the movement of the irradiation unit 530. The projection height is set to the height up to the side surface of the upper surface of the irradiation unit 530 (see FIG. 29(c)). In addition, a plurality of pressing portions 513 are formed to protrude from the rear edge of the upper base 510 .

The lower surface base 520 is formed in substantially the same shape as the upper surface base 510 and is arranged symmetrically with the upper surface base 510 about the axis of the rotation transmission unit 570 . The decoration part 521 and the blow hole 522 formed in the lower base have the same shape as the decoration part 511 and the blow hole 512 formed in the upper base 510, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The decorative portion 521 of the lower surface base 520 is a portion that is fastened to the lower side of the front base 572 of the rotation transmission unit 570, and is fastened to the front base 572 of the rotation transmission unit 570 so that when viewed from the front, the front base The bottom side of 572 can be invisible. Therefore, by combining the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the mechanism when the rotation unit 500 is rotated by the player.

The irradiation unit 530 mainly includes a substrate member 531 and an LED 532 arranged on the lower surface side of the substrate member 531 .

The substrate member 531 is formed of a plate-like body whose outer shape when viewed from the top is slightly smaller than the shape of the top base 510 when viewed from the top. Accordingly, when the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 are arranged in combination in the vertical direction, the substrate member 531 can be made invisible from the vertical direction.

Further, the board member 531 is formed with a through hole 531a penetrating in the vertical direction at the edge on the front side. The through-hole 531a is a member that prevents the substrate member 531 from being misaligned, and will be described in detail later. The wiring of the shaft portion 458 b of the signal transmission mechanism 458 described above is connected to the substrate member 531 . As a result, light can be emitted from an LED 532, which will be described later, through an IC and a capacitor incorporated in the substrate member 531. FIG.

The LED 532 is formed as a surface-mounted LED, and has a rectangular outer shape (outer shape of a cavity molded from a resin ceramic) when viewed from the front, and an irradiation surface (epoxy or silicone sealed in the cavity) for irradiating light. The surface of the encapsulating resin such as the . Further, the LEDs 532 are arranged on the lower surface side of the substrate member 531, and a plurality of LEDs 532 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction along the arc shape of the substrate member 531 when viewed from above. As a result, the LED 532 can irradiate light onto a reflector 560, which will be described later.

The intermediate member 540 is formed of a plate-like body having a top view shape substantially the same as the top view shape of the top base 510 . Accordingly, when the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 are arranged in combination in the vertical direction, the intermediate member 540 can be arranged between the opposed parts.

The front cover 550 is made of a transparent light-transmissive material and has an arc shape when viewed from above. Further, the front cover 550 is arranged on the intermediate member 540 side.

The reflecting plate 560 has a silver decoration (plating) on its outer surface, and is formed of a plate-like body whose outer shape when viewed from the top is substantially the same as the shape of the top base 510 when viewed from the top. In addition, the reflector 560 has a recessed portion 564 formed by notching the side surface on the front side to the rear.

By inserting the above-described front cover 550 into the cutout portion of the concave cutout portion 564, the front surface of the front cover 550 is placed at substantially the same position as the front surfaces of the upper base 510, the lower base 520, and the intermediate member 540. can be set. That is, the width dimension of the front cover 550 in the front-rear direction is set to the distance dimension from the front surface of the recess 564 of the reflector 560 to the front surface of the upper base 510 , the lower base 520 and the intermediate member 540 . Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the front cover 550 from protruding from the rotation unit 500 . As a result, the rotating unit 500 can be assembled as an integral unit with little unevenness, and when the rotating unit 500 is visually recognized, it is possible to prevent the appearance of each part from being difficult to understand and to prevent the player from losing interest. .

A detailed description of intermediate member 540 will now be provided with reference to FIG. 30(a) is a top view of the intermediate member 540, and FIG. 30(b) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the intermediate member 540 taken along line XXXb-XXXb of FIG. 30(a).

As shown in FIGS. 30(a) and 30(b), the intermediate member 540 has a first outer edge that stands upward (in the direction in which the upper base 510 is arranged) from the outer edge when viewed from above. 541 and a second outer edge portion 542, an irradiation hole 543 penetrating in the vertical direction, an irradiation regulating portion 544 projecting from the periphery of the irradiation hole 543, and a projecting portion projecting from the edge on the front side. It mainly includes a portion 545 and a groove portion 546 recessed in the outer peripheral portion of the irradiation restricting portion 544 .

The first outer edge portion 541 is formed on the outer edge portion of the intermediate member 540 on the front side. The inner diameter dimension of the curved shape of the front side (lower side in FIG. 30A) of the first outer edge portion 541 when viewed from the top is approximately the outer diameter dimension of the curved shape of the front side of the substrate member 531 of the irradiation unit 530 when viewed from the top. set to be the same. Also, the standing dimension of the first outer edge portion 541 is set larger than the thickness dimension (vertical dimension) of the substrate member 531 . Therefore, when the rotation unit 500 is assembled, the irradiation unit 530 can be shielded by the first outer edge portion 541 to be invisible from the front side.

The second outer edge portion 542 is formed on the outer edge portion of the intermediate member 540 on the back side. The shape of the rear surface side (upper side in FIG. 30A) of the second outer edge portion 542 when viewed from above is substantially the same as the shape of the rear surface side of the substrate member 531 of the irradiation unit 530 when viewed from above. Also, the standing dimension of the second outer edge portion 542 is set lower than that of the first outer edge portion 541 . Therefore, when the rotating unit 500 is assembled, the lower side surface of the irradiation unit 530 is arranged in contact with the standing tip surface of the second outer edge portion 542 . Therefore, the introduced outside air can be smoothly discharged to the rear side.

The irradiation hole 543 is a hole for separately dividing the light emitted from the plurality of LEDs 532 arranged in the irradiation unit 530, and is opened at a position facing the LEDs 532 arranged in the irradiation unit 530. . Thereby, the light of adjacent LED532 can suppress irradiating another range. Also, the inner diameter of the irradiation hole 543 on the irradiation unit 530 side is set to be substantially the same as the outer diameter of the irradiation surface of the LED 532, and their axes are arranged coaxially. As a result, the light emitted from the LED 532 can be efficiently made incident on the reflecting portion 563 of the reflecting plate 560 to be described later through the irradiation hole 543 .

Also, the irradiation hole 543 is formed such that the inner diameter increases from the upper surface side (the LED 532 side) toward the lower surface side. Thereby, the light emitted from the LED 532 can be efficiently incident on the reflecting portion 563 of the reflecting plate 560 through the irradiation hole 543 .

The irradiation regulating portion 544 protrudes around the irradiation hole 543 described above. As a result, the gap between the opposing LEDs 532 and the upper surface of the intermediate member 540 can be reduced, so that the light from the LEDs 532 can easily enter the irradiation hole 543 and can be prevented from leaking out of the irradiation hole 543 . As a result, it is possible to increase the light intensity of the afterimage display due to the afterimage effect.

In addition, the projecting dimension of the irradiation restricting portion 544 is set to be substantially the same as the erecting dimension of the second outer edge portion 542 , and when the rotating unit 500 is assembled, the protruding tip surface of the irradiation restricting portion 544 and the irradiation unit 530 are aligned. The LED 532 abuts thereon. As a result, it is possible to suppress the light from the adjacent LEDs from entering the irradiation hole 543, so that the outer diameter of the afterimage display due to the afterimage effect can be clarified. In addition, since the inner diameter of the irradiation hole 543 on the irradiation unit 530 side is set to be substantially the same as the outer diameter of the irradiation surface of the LED 532, the area of the irradiation regulation portion 544 that abuts on the LED 532 can be secured. Leakage to the outside of the irradiation hole 543 can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to increase the light intensity of the afterimage display due to the afterimage effect.

Furthermore, since the irradiation regulating portion 544 and the adjacent irradiation regulating portion 544 are connected to each other at their outer peripheral surfaces, the rigidity of the intermediate member 540 can be increased. In this case, the radiation restricting portion 544 has a circular outer peripheral surface, and the adjacent radiation restricting portions 544 and the outer peripheral surfaces thereof are connected to each other. That is, the group in which the plurality of irradiation restricting portions 544 are connected to each other has an uneven outer shape (a shape in which a plurality of outwardly convex circular arcs are connected), so that a space (surface area) is secured and the heat dissipation effect is enhanced. At the same time, it is possible to increase the rigidity of the intermediate member 540 by utilizing the unevenness of the outer shape.

The projecting portion 545 is a projection that restricts the irradiation unit 530 from moving forward, backward, leftward, and rightward, and is formed at a position where it is inserted through the through hole 531a of the substrate member 531 when the rotation unit 500 is assembled. The protruding portion 545 is formed in a shape in which cylinders having different outer diameters are combined vertically, and includes a large diameter portion 545a on the base side and a small diameter portion 545b on the tip side which is smaller in diameter than the large diameter portion 545a. formed from

The large-diameter portion 545a is a protrusion for forming a predetermined gap between the intermediate member 540 and the substrate member 531 when the irradiation unit 530 is arranged on the intermediate member 540. The outer shape is set to be larger than the inner diameter of the hole 531 a , and the projecting dimension is set to be substantially the same as the standing dimension of the second outer edge portion 542 .

As a result, when the irradiation unit 530 is arranged on the intermediate member 540, the facing distance between the intermediate member 540 on the front side and the substrate member 531 of the irradiation unit 530 is defined. On the other hand, the facing distance between the intermediate member 540 on the back side and the substrate member 531 of the irradiation unit 530 is defined by the second outer edge portion 542 . In addition, since the projection distance of the large-diameter portion 545a and the standing distance of the second outer edge portion 542 are set to be substantially the same, the vertical side surface of the substrate member 531 of the irradiation unit 530 is aligned with the vertical side surface of the intermediate member 540. can be arranged parallel to each other.

The small-diameter portion 545b is a protrusion for positioning the irradiation unit 530 with respect to the intermediate member 540 when the irradiation unit 530 is arranged on the intermediate member 540, and is approximately the inner diameter of the through hole 531a of the substrate member 531. The outer diameter is set to be the same or slightly smaller. Therefore, when arranging the irradiation unit 530 on the intermediate member 540, by fitting the through hole 531a of the substrate member 531 to the small diameter portion 545b of the intermediate member 540, the irradiation unit 530 can be moved to the intermediate member 540 in the front, rear, left, and right directions. can define the movement of

The groove portion 546 is a groove extending along the base portion of the irradiation restricting portion 544 and recessed to have a U-shaped cross section. Since the area of contact between the side surface of the intermediate member 540 and the outside air is increased due to the groove portion 546 being recessed, the heat dissipation of the intermediate member 540 is improved. Moreover, the heat dissipation effect can be enhanced while ensuring the rigidity of the intermediate member 540 . That is, by forming the groove-shaped groove portion 546 extending along the base portion of the irradiation regulating portion 544, the area recessed in the intermediate member 540 is minimized, and the rigidity of the intermediate member 540 is ensured. The operation of the LEDs 532 can increase the space for the portion where the generated heat is particularly concentrated, thereby enhancing the heat dissipation effect.

The groove width of the groove portion 546 is set smaller than the distance dimension from the outer peripheral edge portion of the irradiation regulating portion 544 to the irradiation hole 543, and the recess depth of the groove portion 546 is set to be less than half the plate thickness of the intermediate member 540. set small.

Next, with reference to FIG. 31, the front cover 550 will be described in detail. 31(a) is a front view of the front cover 550, and FIG. 31(b) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the front cover 550 taken along line XXXIb-XXXIb of FIG. 31(a). In addition, in FIG.31(b), the spreading|diffusion part 551 is illustrated typically.

As shown in FIGS. 31(a) and 31(b), the front cover 550 has a diffusion part 551 on the inner edge side (upper side in FIG. 31(b)) of the lower side (left side in FIG. 31(b)). formed with.

The diffusing portion 551 is a portion whose surface is roughened, and the roughened surface of the diffusing portion 551 diffuses and diffuses the light irradiated onto the diffusing portion 551 . Note that surface roughening is a processing mode in which unevenness is formed on the surface.

Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the reflector 560 will be described in detail. 32(a) is a top view of the reflector 560, and FIG. 32(b) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the reflector 560 taken along line XXXIIb-XXXIIb of FIG. 32(a). In addition, in FIG.32(b), the reflection part 563 is illustrated typically.

As shown in FIGS. 32(a) and 32(b), the reflector 560 is surrounded by a partition wall 561 erected on the upper surface side (the front side of the paper surface of FIG. 32(a)) and the partition wall 561. It mainly includes a reflecting portion 563 formed on the upper surface of the region and an erecting wall 562 erected along the edge on the back side.

The partition wall 561 is erected in a U-shape with an open front side (lower side in FIG. The pieces are formed side by side. In addition, adjacent erected walls 562 are combined (commonly used) with wall portions extending in the front direction to form one wall portion. Thereby, the space in which the partition walls 561 are arranged side by side can be reduced. As a result, the number of partition walls 561 to be formed can be maximized.

The reflecting portion 563 is formed by roughening the upper surface of the region surrounded by the edge portion on the front side of the reflecting plate 560 and the partition wall 561 by laser processing or the like in a top view. Further, the reflecting portion 563 is connected to a horizontal portion 563a formed of side surfaces parallel to the upper and lower surfaces of the reflecting plate 560, and connected to the horizontal portion 563a so that the plate thickness of the reflecting plate 560 increases as the distance from the horizontal portion 563a increases. and a slanted surface 563b that is slanted in the direction.

The horizontal portion 563a is formed on the side surfaces parallel to the upper and lower surfaces of the reflector 560, other than the edge portion on the front side. That is, the horizontal portion 563a (reflecting portion 563) is not formed on the edge portion on the front side, and the surface is not roughened. Accordingly, the reflecting portion 563 can be formed by holding the front edge portion of the reflecting plate 560 . As a result, there is no need to separately form a holding portion on the reflecting plate 560 when roughening the surface, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

The inclined surface 563b is a portion that mainly reflects the light emitted from the LED 532 of the irradiation unit 530 arranged on the upper surface side to the front side, and is inclined 45 degrees to the front side with respect to the irradiation surface of the LED 532. formed on the surface.

The connecting position between the horizontal portion 563 a and the inclined surface 563 b is set at a position where the connecting straight line passes through the axis of the irradiation surface of the LED 532 . As a result, of the light emitted from the LED 532, the light emitted toward the rear side can be effectively reflected to the front side by the inclined surface 563b. On the other hand, of the light emitted from the LED 532, the light emitted to the front side can be reflected to the front side by the horizontal portion 563a.

As described above, the erected wall 562 is erected along the rear edge of the reflector 560, and its erected height is set to the same height as the erected height of the partition wall 561. . Thereby, a space can be formed between the standing wall 562 and the partition wall 561 when the rotation unit 500 is assembled (the intermediate member 540 is arranged above the reflector 560). That is, an air layer can be formed between the reflector 560 and the intermediate member 540 . As a result, it is possible to suppress the accumulation of heat inside the reflecting plate 560 and the intermediate member 540, the heat is accumulated by the rotation unit 500, and the substrate member 531 of the irradiation unit 530 arranged in the rotation unit 500 is heated. Damage can be suppressed.

The rotating unit 500 configured as described above is assembled as follows. First, the fastening member 573 is fitted into the inner circular portion of the bearing BR from the front side, and the inner circular portion of the fastening member 573 is fitted onto the inner standing portion 572b of the front base 572 from the outside. After the front base 572, the bearing BR and the fastening member 573 are integrated, the rear base 571 is arranged on the rear side, and the front base 572 and the rear base 571 are fastened to assemble the rotation transmission unit 570 as a unit.

In the front part of the rotation unit 500 (the part excluding the rotation transmission unit 570), the lower base 520 is arranged below the reflector 560, and the lower base 520 and the reflector 560 are fastened. After the lower base 520 and the reflector 560 are fastened and fixed, the intermediate member 540 is superimposed on the upper surface of the reflector 560 with the front cover 550 sandwiched therebetween. The irradiation unit 530 is arranged on the upper surface of the intermediate member 540 with the through hole 531 a fitted onto the small diameter portion 545 b of the projecting portion 545 of the intermediate member 540 . In this state, the top base 510 is arranged from above and fastened to the intermediate member 540, thereby assembling the front portion of the rotation unit 500 (the portion excluding the rotation transmission unit 570) as a unit.

Next, the rotation transmission unit 570 is arranged behind the front portion of the rotation unit 500, and the rotation unit 500 and the rotation transmission unit 570 are fastened together to assemble the rotation unit 500 as one unit.

Next, the light emitted from the LED 532 of the irradiation unit 530 will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 and 34. FIG. 33(a) is a top view of the rotation unit 500, and FIG. 33(b) is a cross-sectional view of the rotation unit 500 taken along line XXXIIIb-XXXIIIb of FIG. 33(a). (a) and (b) of FIG. 34 are partial enlarged cross-sectional views of the rotation unit 500 at the XXXIV section of FIG. 33(b).

Note that FIG. 33A shows a state in which the upper base 510 and the irradiation unit 530 are removed from the rotation unit 500. As shown in FIG. In addition, in FIGS. 34A and 34B, the light emitted from the LED 532 is indicated by a chain double-dashed line.

As shown in FIGS. 33( a ) and 33 ( b ), below the irradiation hole 543 of the intermediate member 540 , a reflecting section 563 partitioned as one area by being surrounded by a partition wall 561 is arranged. . As described above, each LED 532 is arranged above each irradiation hole 543, so that the light emitted from each LED 532 can be irradiated to the reflecting portions 563 at different positions. That is, the light emitted from each LED 532 can be emitted in a state divided by each reflecting portion 563, so that the division of light from each LED 532 can be made clear. As a result, the light emitted from each LED 532 can be emitted only from the corresponding reflecting portion 563, so that the appearance of the afterimage display by the afterimage effect can be made clear.

In addition, since the structure for causing the light from the LEDs 532 to enter the reflecting portion 563 of the corresponding reflecting plate 560 through the irradiation hole 543 of the intermediate member 540 is formed from the two members of the reflecting plate 560 and the intermediate member 540, such a structure The structure can be simplified as compared with the case where the body is composed of one member. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the product cost.

As shown in FIG. 34(a), the light emitted from the LED 532 of the irradiation unit 530 to the inclined surface 563b of the reflector 560 is irregularly reflected by the rough surface of the inclined surface 563b, and is side), is transmitted through the front cover 550, and emitted to the front side of the gaming machine. That is, the light emitted from the LED 532 can be emitted to the front (front side) of the rotating unit 500 . Therefore, even when the substrate member 531 is oriented so that the surface on which the LED 532 is mounted is substantially parallel to the rotation axis of the rotation unit 500, the light (blinking) of the LED 532 is visually recognized by the player, and the afterimage display is performed by the afterimage effect. be able to.

In addition, the inclined surface 563b of the reflector 560 allows the light emitted from the LED 532 to be efficiently emitted toward the player. Therefore, stronger light can be emitted to the front side of the rotating unit 500 . Therefore, it is possible to increase the light intensity of the afterimage display due to the afterimage effect.

Some of the light emitted from the LED 532 to the inclined surface 563b of the reflecting portion 563 is diffusely reflected by the rough surface of the inclined surface 563b and reflected by the opposing surfaces of the intermediate member 540 and the reflecting plate 560. . The light reflected by the opposing surfaces of the intermediate member 540 and the reflector 560 is reflected again by the opposing surfaces (the opposing surfaces of the intermediate member 540 and the reflector 560) to irradiate the front cover 550. FIG.

In this case, as described above, the intermediate member 540 is formed in white, which has a lower light absorptivity than black. On the other hand, the reflecting plate 560 has a silver decoration on its outer surface, as described above, so that the light reflected by the reflecting plate 560 can be easily reflected again.

Therefore, the light emitted from the LED 532 to the reflecting portion 563 can be diffusely reflected by the rough surface, and can be emitted to the front side (to the player side) of the rotating unit 500 in a state of being evenly dispersed. In other words, it is possible to prevent the light emitted from the opening of the reflecting portion 563 from being viewed in a state where it is concentrated in a part of the opening.

As shown in FIG. 34(b), the light emitted from the LED 532 of the irradiation unit 530 to the horizontal portion 563a of the reflector 560 is irregularly reflected by the rough surface of the horizontal portion 563a and side). Therefore, the light emitted from the LED 532 can pass through the front cover 550 and be emitted to the front side.

Since the rough surface of the horizontal portion 563a is not formed on the front side end portion of the reflector 560, light can be easily emitted toward the front side (player side) of the rotating unit 500. , the light intensity of the afterimage display due to the afterimage effect can be increased. That is, when the inner surface of the reflector 560 is roughened at the end on the front side of the rotating unit 500, the light is diffusely reflected by the rough surface, and the front side of the rotating unit 500 (the side of the hitting player) ), the front end portion of the reflector 560 is not formed, and at least the reflecting portion 563 has a flatter and smoother surface than the rough surface processed. can be suppressed, and the amount of light directed toward the front side (player side) of the rotating unit 500 can be increased.

In addition, the partition wall 561 is formed on the front side (the recessed portion 564 is formed at the end portion on the front side of the horizontal portion 563a (the portion where the rough surface processing of the reflecting portion 563 is not formed (smooth surface)). Since the shape tapers toward the end of the rotary unit 500, the cross-sectional area of the inner surface of the non-roughened portion of the horizontal portion 563a increases toward the end of the front side of the rotary unit 500. Enlarged (expanded). Therefore, the light emitted toward the front side of the rotating unit 500 can be spread. That is, the area visually recognized as the light-emitting region can be enlarged more than the area of the light-emitting surface of the LED 532 . Therefore, LED532 can be reduced in size.

Furthermore, since the front side of the reflector 560 (rotating unit 500) is formed so as to curve toward the rear toward the end with the central portion (rotational axis) in the left-right direction as the center, the front side (concave) of the reflector 560 is formed. The end of the side where the cutout 564 is formed) is closer to the front side (the side where the cutout 564 is formed) in each area partitioned by the partition wall 561 as the distance from the rotation shaft of the rotation unit 500 increases in the radial direction. side) is increased in length dimension. Thereby, the visible lightness (brightness of light) of each of the plurality of reflecting portions 563 can be made uniform.

That is, in the rotating unit 500, the displacement speed (peripheral speed) increases as it goes radially outward from the rotation axis (rotation center). The light of the LEDs 532 closer to the axis of rotation appears to have higher brightness (brighter) than the light of the LEDs 532 farther (outward in the radial direction) from the rotation axis.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the farther the front end of the reflecting plate 560 is from the rotating shaft of the rotating unit 500 in the radial direction, the more the front side (concave notch) in each area partitioned by the partition wall 561 is. Since the length of the end portion of the side where the portion 564 is formed) is increased, the more the reflecting portion 563 (LED 532) is spaced radially outward from the rotating shaft of the rotating unit 500, the stronger the irregular reflection due to the rough surface. (that is, by reducing the ratio of the light directly visible to the player from the LED 532), the light can be visually recognized as light of high brightness. As a result, it is possible to suppress the difference in brightness seen by the eye at the arrangement position in the radial direction, and to make the brightness (brightness of light) uniform.

In addition, the length dimension of the horizontal portion 563a of the reflector 560 in the direction parallel to the axial direction of the rotating unit 500 increases with increasing distance from the rotating shaft of the rotating unit 500 in the radial direction. It is possible to make each visible lightness (brightness of light) uniform.

The light irradiated to the front cover 550 can be diffused in the traveling direction by the diffusion portion 551 formed on the inner peripheral surface of the front cover 550 . That is, the rough surface of the diffusion portion 551 of the front cover 550 can bend the traveling direction of the light irradiated to the diffusion portion 551 in a plurality of different directions. As a result, the light emitted toward the front side of the rotating unit 500 can be spread. That is, the area visually recognized as the light-emitting region can be enlarged more than the area of the light-emitting surface of the LED 532 . Therefore, LED532 can be reduced in size.

Also, if the light from the LED 532 is directly visible to the player (without being transmitted through a light-transmissive material member), the light from the LED 532 has high directivity in the forward direction, so the player is dazzled. I was afraid to feel

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the surfaces that diffusely reflect the light emitted from the LEDs 532 are formed at two locations, the reflector 560 and the front cover 550, so that the directivity of the light emitted from the LEDs 532 can be weakened. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling dazzling when visually recognizing the emitted light.

Here, there is known a device that has a plurality of light emitting means (LEDs 532) and blinks the light emitting means according to the rotational position, thereby performing display using an afterimage effect. However, in the conventional light emitting means, the posture of the substrate (substrate member 531) is such that the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted is orthogonal to the rotation axis (that is, the irradiation direction of the light emitting means is directed to the front side (player side)). (orientation parallel to the plane of rotation), the outer shape in a front view (viewed in the direction of the rotation axis) becomes large. Therefore, there is a problem that the visibility of the rear side of the rotating unit 500 is hindered when the rotation of the rotating display device (rotating unit 500) is stopped.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the substrate member 531 on which the plurality of LEDs 532 are arranged is positioned such that the surface on which the LEDs 532 are mounted is substantially parallel to the rotation axis of the rotation unit 500. 510 and the lower surface base 520, it is possible to suppress the outer shape of the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 when viewed from the front (viewed in the rotation axis direction). As a result, the visibility of the rear side of the upper base 510 and the lower base 520 can be improved when the rotation of the rotating unit 500 is stopped.

Next, rotation of the rotation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 and 36. FIG.

35(a) and 35(b) are front views of the rotating unit 500. FIG. 36(a) and 36(b) are top views of the rotation unit 500. FIG.

35(a) to 36(b), the flow of air generated by the rotating unit 500 is illustrated by a chain double-dashed line, and is given the symbol of airflow K. As shown in FIG. Also, air blow holes 512 and 522 of the upper base 510 and the lower base 520 are illustrated by dashed lines.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, only the case where the rotation unit 500 is rotated to the left when viewed from the front will be described. Therefore, its description is omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 35(a) and 35(b), when the rotation unit 500 is rotated by the driving force of the driving motor 457, the rotation causes outside air to enter through the air blowing holes 512 and 522. An airflow K is generated inside the rotating unit 500 .

In this case, since the air holes 512 and 522 are opened in the tangential direction with respect to the rotation direction of the rotating unit 500, when the rotating unit 500 rotates, the air blowing holes 512 and 522 pass through the air blowing holes 512 and 522. It is possible to make it easier for outside air to enter the inside of the rotating unit 500 .

More specifically, when the rotating unit 500 is rotated leftward in front view, in the initial position, the air blow hole 512 of the upper base 510 formed on the right side in front view and the air blow hole in the lower base 520 formed on the left side in front view are formed. 522 is displaced in the direction of taking in (passing through) the air into the blowing holes 512 and 522 . As a result, when the rotating unit 500 rotates, the air outside the rotating unit 500 can easily enter the inside of the rotating unit 500 . Therefore, heat generated when the LED 532 operates can be cooled.

In addition, since the air blow hole 512 of the upper base 510 and the air blow hole 522 of the lower surface base 520 are formed point-symmetrically with respect to the rotation axis, when the rotation unit 500 rotates rightward in front view, the rotation at the initial position does not occur. External air can be easily taken into the rotation unit 500 by the air blowing holes 512 of the upper base 510 formed on the left side of the unit 500 in front view and the air blowing holes 522 of the lower base 520 formed on the right side of the unit 500 when viewed from the front. That is, even when the rotating unit 500 rotates to the right, the same effects as in the case described above (when the rotating unit 500 rotates to the left in the front view) are obtained.

Here, a substrate (substrate member 531) on which an LED (LED 532) is mounted is disposed inside the rotating body (rotating unit 500), and the LED emits light while rotating the rotating body. If it is not possible to sufficiently cool the heat generated during operation of ICs and capacitors, the solder of the LEDs soldered to the board and the ICs and capacitors that control them may melt, resulting in poor contact.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, since the air blow holes 512 and 522 are opened in the tangential direction with respect to the rotation direction of the rotation unit 500, the rotation of the rotation unit 500 takes in outside air into the rotation unit 500. be able to. Therefore, the heat generated when the LED operates can be cooled.

The air taken into the rotating unit 500 through the air blowing holes 512 and 522 mainly collides with the irradiation unit 530 or the reflector 560 and is dispersed. The airflow K dispersed on the back side of the rotating unit 500 (the back side of the paper in FIG. 35(a)) flows to the outside of the rotating unit 500 through the opening (the gap between the opposing surfaces) on the back side of the upper base 510 and the lower base 520. It is ventilated and released into the atmosphere.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 36(a), the airflow K dispersed on the front side of the rotating unit 500 (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 35(a)) is caused by the centrifugal force of the rotation of the rotating unit 500 in the radial direction from the rotation axis. The air is blown to the outside, is blown to the outside of the rotating unit 500, and is released into the atmosphere (see FIG. 35(a)).

That is, since the rotating unit 500 is formed in a container-like shape with an open rear surface side by combining the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520, the external air taken in through the air blowing holes 512 and 522 is efficiently discharged from the rear surface side. can be exhausted effectively, thus cooling the heat generated when the LED 532 operates. In addition, by discharging the air from the back side of the upper base 510 and the lower base 520 in this way, it is possible to suppress the influence of the discharged air on the ball flowing down the game area (or rolling on the stage).

Further, in the present embodiment, the upper base 510 and the lower base 520 are elongated along the diametrical direction in the plane of rotation of the upper base 510 and the lower base 520 in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front (that is, when viewed in the direction of the rotation axis). Therefore, the centrifugal force accompanying the rotation of the upper base 510 and the lower base 520 is used to push the air inside the upper base 510 and the lower base 520 toward the ends in the longitudinal direction (outward in the radial direction during rotation). It can be flowed and exhausted from the back side. Therefore, in the vicinity of the rotation transmission unit 570, outside air can be taken into the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 from the back side along with the air flow.

That is, in the vicinity of the rotation transmission unit 570, since the rotation speed is low, the efficiency of taking in outside air from the blow holes 512 and 522 in the side walls is low (or it cannot be taken in). Take in outside air from the back side in the vicinity, flow the taken in outside air to the longitudinal end side (outside in the radial direction during rotation) by centrifugal force, and exhaust the air from the back side on the outside in the radial direction) can be formed. As a result, heat generated when the LED 532 operates can be cooled. In particular, cooling of the LED 532 arranged near the rotation transmission unit 570 can be achieved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 36(b), when the air inside the rotating unit 500 is pushed out in the radial direction due to the rotation of the rotating unit 500, the internal pressure on the central side of the rotating unit 500 decreases. External air is taken in through the gaps on the rear side between the rotation transmission unit 570 of the motor 500 and the top base 510 and the bottom base 520 . As a result, cooling of the LEDs 532 arranged in the vicinity of the rotation transmission unit 570 can be achieved more reliably.

In this case, the front wall forming the front side of the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 (the front edge of the upper surface base 510 is downward (the back side of the paper in FIG. 29A) (the front edge of the lower surface base 520 is upward)) curved portion) has a shape parallel to the plane of rotation of the upper base 510 and the lower base 520 (that is, the shape of the upper base 510 and the lower base 520 when viewed in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis is a rectangular parallelepiped). , the angle of the part where the air flowed to the longitudinal end (outward in the radial direction during rotation) by centrifugal force changes its direction toward the rear side becomes a substantially right angle, so a vortex is easily formed at this part. . Therefore, the flow of air is obstructed, and smooth exhaust from the back side becomes difficult.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the front side of the upper base 510 and the lower base 520 (the front edge of the upper base 510 is downward (the back side of the paper in FIG. 29A) (the front edge of the lower base 520 is upward). curved portion) is formed in a shape curved outward from the central portion in the left-right direction. At the same time, the angle of the portion where the air flowed to the longitudinal end (radial direction outward) changes direction toward the back side can be made larger than a substantially right angle. It is possible to suppress the formation of a vortex and make the air flow smooth. Therefore, exhaust from the back side can be performed more smoothly. As a result, cooling of the LED 532 arranged near the rotation transmission unit 570 can be achieved more reliably.

Furthermore, the distance dimension between the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 facing each other on the back side (vertical dimension in FIG. 35(a)) is greater than the distance dimension on the back side in the vicinity of the rotation transmission unit 570 at the longitudinal end side. Since the distance is larger than the distance on the back side, the air inside the upper base 510 and the lower base 520 is caused to flow toward the ends in the longitudinal direction (outward in the radial direction during rotation) using the centrifugal force that accompanies the rotation. By exhausting air from the rear side on the radially outer side, when outside air is taken in from the rear side in the vicinity of the rotation transmission unit 570, the intake can be performed efficiently.

In addition, since the open portion on the rear side near the rotation transmission unit 570 (the inner periphery of the decoration portion 511 of the upper surface base 510 and the decoration portion 521 of the lower surface base 520) is formed in a circular shape concentric with the rotation axis, the upper surface base 510 In addition, it is possible to suppress disturbance of outside air (formation of flow in the rotational direction) in the vicinity of the rotation transmission unit 570 along with the rotation of the lower surface base 520 . As a result, outside air can be efficiently taken in from the rear side in the vicinity of the rotation transmission unit 570 .

Furthermore, since the outer peripheral surface of the outer standing portion 572a of the front base 572 is formed in a shape that narrows from the back side toward the front side, the rotating unit 500 can be positioned between the decorative portion 511 of the upper base 510 and the decorative portion of the lower base 520. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of vortices in the airflow K when air is taken in from the gap between 521 and rotation transmission unit 570 . Therefore, the flow of the airflow K flowing through the central portion of the rotation unit 500 in the left-right direction can be made smooth, and when outside air is taken in from the rear side in the vicinity of the rotation transmission unit 570, it can be taken in efficiently. .

Next, the center frame 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 to 41. FIG.

First, the overall configuration of the center frame 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38. FIG. 37 is an exploded front perspective view of the center frame 600, and FIG. 38 is an exploded rear perspective view of the center frame 600. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, the center frame 600 includes a frame body 610 formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, a center cover 620 disposed so as to cover the inner peripheral portion of the frame body 610, and a sensor 630 attached to the frame 610 .

The frame body 610 includes a stage 611 protruding toward the center cover 620 (rear side) from the lower portion of the inner peripheral edge when viewed from the front, a wall portion 612 protruding radially outward from the side surface of the outer periphery, and a rear side. A fastening hole 613 recessed in a circular shape toward the front side in the edge of the sensor 630 and an opening 614 opening in front of the irradiation surface 631 of the sensor 630 arranged on the back side. be.

In addition, the frame 610 is arranged in the central part of the game board 13 so as to surround the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 2), and is a member that can be visually recognized by the player through the glass 8. A pattern or picture is drawn on the front side.

The stage 611 is formed by bending from the lower inner edge of the frame 610 toward the back side, and the upper surface thereof has a first concave portion 611a at the end on the front side and a second concave portion 611a at the end on the back side. The provided portions 611b are respectively recessed.

The stage 611 causes the ball to roll on its upper surface and drops the ball from the upper surface of the stage 611 by utilizing the inclination of either the first recessed portion 611a or the second recessed portion 612b. It is possible to form a state in which the ball is likely to win in the opening 710a of the device 700 . Therefore, it is possible to form a plurality of flow-down paths for the balls flowing down the game area, so that the player can be entertained.

The first recessed portion 611a is a groove for dropping a ball rolling on the upper part of the stage 611 to the front side of the game board 13 (the front side of the base plate 60). deeply formed. The second recessed portion 611b is a groove for throwing a ball into an opening formed in the rear portion of the center of the stage 611 in the left-right direction, and the depth of the recessed portion 611b is formed deeper toward the rear side.

The wall portion 612 is a portion that positions the center frame 600 in the front-rear direction with respect to the base plate 60 when the assembled center frame 600 is arranged on the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2). The outer shape is formed to be larger than the inner shape of the opening penetrating in the direction. As a result, when the center frame 600 is inserted into the opening of the base plate 60 from the front side, the rear side surface of the wall portion 612 abuts against the front side surface of the base plate 60 . A center frame 600 can be positioned.

The fastening holes 613 are a plurality of holes recessed in the back side of the frame 610, and are formed at positions facing through holes 623a of the center cover 620, which will be described later. The opening 614 is an opening for irradiating the front side with sensor light emitted from a sensor 630, which will be described later, and is formed at a position facing an irradiation surface 631 of the sensor 630 to which the sensor light is emitted.

The center cover 620 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and has a substantially circular shape in a front view. and a mounting portion 623 protruding outward from the standing tip surface of the side wall portion 622 and the lower edge portion of the cover member 621. be.

The cover member 621 is formed in a plate-like body having a constant thickness that curves toward the rear side (the curved surface is convex on the front side) as it goes outward from the upper center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. An upper peripheral edge (hereinafter referred to as "first portion 621a") of the center portion in the left-right direction is positioned forward of left and right ends and lower edge peripheral edges (hereinafter referred to as "second portion").

Since the cover member 621 is formed of a plate-like body with a constant thickness, it is possible to prevent it from acting as a convex lens and ensure the visibility of the third pattern display device 81 arranged on the back side.

In addition, since the cover member 621 is formed of a plate-like body having a constant thickness, the cover member 621 and the third pattern display device 81 are opposed to each other by the amount that the central portion in the left-right direction is curved toward the front side when viewed from the front. A space can be formed between them. As a result, it is possible to secure a space for rendering by displacing the decorative member 450 of the vertical displacement unit 400 described above.

The side wall portion 622 is a wall portion that enables the center cover 620 to be attached to the frame body 610. Since the cover member 621 is curved toward the rear side as described above, the rear surface of the frame body 610 and the center cover are correspondingly curved. When the distance between the front surface of the frame 620 and the front surface becomes large, the side wall portion 622 can reduce (eliminate) the distance between the rear surface of the frame body 610 and the front surface of the center cover 620 .

In other words, the vertical dimension of the side wall portion 622 toward the front is set to the distance between the rear surface of the frame 610 and the front of the center cover 620 when the center cover 620 is arranged on the frame 610 . As a result, when the frame 610 and the center cover 620 are assembled together, the first portion 621a of the cover member 621 can be prevented from protruding too far toward the front of the frame 610 .

The attachment portion 623 is a projection for attaching the center cover 620 to the frame 610, and is formed with a plurality of through holes 623a penetrating in the front-rear direction. As described above, the fastening hole 613 is formed in the rear surface of the frame 610 at the position facing the through hole 623a, and a screw or the like (not shown) is inserted through the through hole 623a and fastened to the fastening hole 613. Thus, frame 610 and center cover 620 are fastened and fixed.

The sensor 630 is a motion sensor for detecting the actions of the player, and is composed of a light emitting unit that emits light such as infrared rays, and a light receiving unit that receives the light emitted from the light emitting unit and reflected by an object. and an illumination surface 631 having

The sensor 630 is arranged at a height of about 2/3 from the bottom when the frame 610 is vertically divided into three equal parts, and is arranged on the right side of the frame 610 . Further, the sensor 630 is disposed with its irradiation surface 631 tilted toward the central front side of the center frame 600 . As a result, the light emitted from the irradiation surface 631 of the sensor 630 is emitted from the central portion of the front side of the game board 13 through the glass 8 to the player side.

Next, sensor light emitted from the sensor 630 will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40. FIG.

39(a) is a front view of the center frame 600, and FIG. 39(b) is a cross-sectional view of the center frame 600 along line XXXIXb-XXXIXb of FIG. 39(a). 40(a) is a cross-sectional view of the center frame 600 along line XLa-XLa in FIG. 39(a), and FIG. 40(b) is a cross-sectional view of center frame 600 along line XLb-XLb in FIG. 39(a). It is a diagram.

In FIGS. 39(a) and 40(b), the irradiation areas of the light from the sensor 630 projected in front of the center frame 600 are shown by two-dot chain lines, and are shown as irradiation areas R1 and R2. Also, in FIG. 39(b), the sensor 630 is illustrated by a dashed line. Furthermore, in FIGS. 40(b) and 40(b), the sensor 630 and the light emitted from the sensor 630 are illustrated by two-dot chain lines, and are arranged in front of the center frame 600 (in front of the game board 13). The glass 8 to be coated is illustrated by a chain double-dashed line.

As shown in FIGS. 39 and 40, the sensor 630 is arranged forward of the second portion 621b of the cover member 621. As shown in FIGS. As a result, the light emitted from the sensor 630 is not emitted to the front side of the gaming machine via (transmits) the cover member 621, and the light emitted from the sensor 630 is blocked by the cover member 621. can be suppressed. In addition, the sensor 630 has a decorative portion of the frame 610 arranged on the front side. As a result, the sensor 630 can be made difficult to be visually recognized from the player's side (front side).

The light irradiated from the sensor 630 is irradiated directly onto the glass 8 from the irradiation surface 631 of the sensor 630 and emitted from the front side of the glass 8, which is the irradiation region R1, and the front of the cover member 621 of the center cover 620. The light is reflected and emitted to the area of the irradiation area R2 emitted from the front side of the glass 8 .

Here, in a gaming machine in which a motion sensor (sensor 630) is arranged in the gaming machine to detect the action of the player on the front side of the liquid crystal device (third pattern display device 81), the motion sensor is exposed. And there was a problem of spoiling the interest.

Therefore, the sensor 630 is arranged on the back side of the decorative member (frame body 610). In this case, if the sensor 630 is retracted from the inner edge side of the decorative member (the opening 614 of the frame 610) to the back side (outside), it can be made more difficult to see, but the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion (irradiation surface 631) are placed in front. It becomes difficult to aim toward the target, and the detection range becomes narrower. On the other hand, if the sensor 630 is positioned close to the inner edge of the decorative member (opening of the frame 610), the light emitting part and the light receiving part can be easily directed to the front, so that the detection range can be widened in the front-rear direction. easier to see. That is, there is a problem that it is difficult to secure a range in which an object can be detected while making the sensor 630 difficult for the player to visually recognize.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, part of the light emitted from the irradiation surface 631 of the sensor 630 is applied to the cover member 621 of the center cover 620, so that the curved shape of the cover member 621 causes the front side ( player's side). As a result, the sensor 630 can be retracted to the back of the opening 614 of the frame 610 to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the sensor 630, while securing a range in which the object can be detected. In addition, since the cover member 621 is made of a light-transmitting material, it is possible to ensure the visibility of the pattern displayed on the liquid crystal display device.

Further, since the front side of the cover member 621 is formed as a convex curved surface, when the light emitted from the sensor 630 is reflected on the front side of the cover member 621, the angle of reflection (reflection angle) at a position near the sensor 630 is can be made more acute, while the angle of reflection (angle of reflection) can be made more obtuse at a position far from the sensor 630, which makes it easier to expand the range in which an object can be detected.

Further, the light irradiated to the irradiation region R2 (the light reflected by the cover member 621) is reflected toward the cover member 621 when irradiated and reflected by the object. In this case, the reflected light travels in different directions depending on the surface shape of the reflecting object. The direction can be the direction of travel toward the sensor 630 side. That is, by increasing the amount of light reflected to the sensor 630 side, the light reception detection operation of the sensor 630 can be reliably performed.

The first portion 621a of the cover member 621 is located on the front side of the wall portion 612 of the frame 610, and the second portion 621b is located on the rear side of the wall portion 612 of the frame 610 (FIG. 39 ( b) see). That is, the first portion 621a is disposed at a position substantially flush with the rear surface of the base plate 60 or at a position closer to the front than the rear surface of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2), and the second portion 621b is disposed at the rear surface of the base plate 60. It is disposed at a position on the back side of the .

As a result, the distance between the cover member 621 of the center cover 620 and the third pattern display device 81 in the upper part of the center frame 600 can be ensured. As a result, it is possible to secure the dimension in the front-rear direction when the decorative member 450 of the vertical displacement unit 400 is displaced in the vertical direction, and the decorative member 450 can be displaced. In addition, the curvature of the cover member 621 can be increased in the limited space between the rear space where the decorative member 450 is displaced and the front space where the glass 8 is arranged.

In addition, since the first portion 621a is disposed at a position substantially flush with the rear surface of the base plate 60 or at a position closer to the front than the rear surface of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2), the decorative member 450 of the vertical displacement unit 400 ( The rotation unit 500) can be more reliably prevented from interfering with the first portion 621a, and the size of the displacement member can be increased accordingly.

Furthermore, since the second portion 621b is arranged at a position closer to the back side than the back side of the base plate 60, the curvature of the cover member 621 can be increased, and the front side of the cover member 621 can be used as a light reflecting surface. It can be done easily. In other words, the sensor 630 can be arranged on the far side to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the sensor 630, while securing a range in which the object can be detected.

In addition, since the first portion 621a is positioned above the cover member 621, in the store where the gaming machine 10 is installed, the illumination of the fluorescent lamp of the store is reflected by the cover member 621 and the front side (player side) is reflected. can be suppressed.

That is, if the upper portion of the cover member 621 is curved toward the back side, the light from the fluorescent lamp of the store illuminated from obliquely upward direction is likely to be reflected toward the front side. Since it is formed as a curved surface whose normal direction is directed downward at least from the horizontal direction, the light incident on the front of the cover member 621 can be reflected downward. That is, when light from a fluorescent lamp installed on the ceiling of the store or another game machine is incident on the front of the cover member 621, it is possible to suppress the light from being reflected toward the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling dazzled and the visibility of the third symbol display device 81 from deteriorating.

Next, referring to FIG. 41, the relationship between the center frame 600 and the rotation unit 500 of the vertical displacement unit 400 will be described.

41(a) and 41(b) are sectional views of the rotating unit 500 and the center frame 600. FIG. 41(a) shows the rotation unit 500 in its initial position (reference position) (the position in which the extension direction is oriented horizontally), and FIG. 41(b) shows the rotation unit 500 at is rotated by 90 degrees.

As shown in FIGS. 41(a) and 41(b), the decorative member 450 of the vertical displacement unit 400 is displaced, and the front side of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 2) and the rear side of the center frame 600 are displayed. , a predetermined gap is formed between the rotating unit 500 of the decorative member 450 and the cover member 621 of the center frame 600 facing each other. This allows the rotating unit 500 to rotate without colliding with the cover member 621 .

In this case, when the rotating member (rotating unit 500) rotates in front of the third pattern display device 81, the rotation of the rotating member generates a wind flow, and the ball flowing down under the influence of the wind is generated. I had a problem with it moving.

In particular, in this embodiment, since the rotating unit 500 is positioned above the stage 611 on which the ball rolls, the ball rolling on the upper part of the stage 611 is easily affected by the wind caused by the rotation of the rotating unit 500 .

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the mounting portion 623 connected from the second portion 621b of the cover member 621 is fastened to the fastening hole 613 recessed below the stage 611 of the frame 610 (that is, Since the lower end portion of the center cover 620 is connected to the lower end of the frame 610), it is possible to separate the falling region of the ball and the displacement region of the rotating unit 500. FIG. Therefore, the wind generated by the rotation of the rotating unit 500 can be blocked by the cover member 621 (second portion 621b). As a result, it is possible to suppress the flow of the ball from being affected by the action of the wind. In addition, even if a wind is generated by the rotation of the rotary unit 500 and dust and dust are blown away by the wind, the blown dust and dust can be blocked by the second portion 621b (cover member 621). It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the detection accuracy due to soaring on the route of light emission and light reception.

Here, it is conventionally known that the stage 611 of the center frame 600 is provided with a back wall so that the ball rolling on the stage 611 does not fall on the back side. However, in such a conventional product, the wind generated by the rotation of the rotation unit 500 winds around the front side from the standing tip on the back side erected from the stage 611 or winds on the glass 8 on the front side of the game board 13 . , and affects the ball rolling on the stage 611 . On the other hand, in order to eliminate the influence of the wind on the sphere rolling on the stage 611, the rear wall is curved to the front side to form a shape that covers the periphery of the sphere on the stage (i.e., forms a closed passage). ), it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the ball rolling on the upper part of the stage 611, and the interest of the player is spoiled.

On the other hand, since the second portion 621b of the cover member 621 is connected to the range including the stage 611 of the frame 610, the wind generated by the rotation of the rotation unit 500 is directed to the second portion 621b (the cover member 621). can be blocked by As a result, since it is not necessary to cover the periphery of the stage 611, it is possible to make the ball rolling on the upper part of the stage 611 easily visible to the player, while suppressing the effect of the wind on the downflow of the ball.

Here, if the displacement area where the displacement member (vertical displacement unit 400) is displaced and the flow-down area where the ball flows down are partitioned by a partition plate (center cover 620), the rear surface arranged on the back side of the game board 13 In the case 300, many members that generate heat, such as the drive motor 441 that drives the third symbol display device 81 and the vertical displacement unit 400, are arranged. ), and the circuit board for controlling the gaming machine 1 and the third symbol display device 81 are damaged.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the first portion 621a of the cover member 621 is not connected to the frame 610 and is disposed with a predetermined gap from the inner peripheral edge of the frame 610. The back side and the front side of the game board 13 and the cover member 621 can be communicated with each other through a predetermined space. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the heat generated from the vertical displacement unit 400 from remaining on the back side of the game board 13 and the cover member 621 . As a result, colder air on the front side (than on the rear side) of the game board 13 can be sent to the back side of the game board 13, so that the circuit board for controlling the game machine 1 and the third pattern display device 81 are not damaged. can be suppressed.

In addition, since the predetermined space between the first portion 621a and the inner peripheral edge of the frame body 610 is formed in the upper part of the center frame 600, the warmed air passes through the predetermined space to the front side of the game board 13. It is easy to flow into. That is, since the air warmed on the back side of the game board 13 is raised by the heat, it moves from the predetermined gap between the first portion 621a formed above and the inner peripheral edge of the frame 610 to the front side. It can flow easily. As a result, it is possible to prevent heat from being accumulated on the back side of the game board 13 and the cover member 621 .

In this case, when the rotation unit 500 is rotated and wind is generated, the wind comes out of the predetermined space between the first portion 621a and the inner peripheral edge of the frame 610 and flows down in front of the game board 13. It may affect the ball being played.

On the other hand, the wind generated by the rotation of the rotating unit 500 can be directed toward the upper area of the game area (the area above the opening of the game board 13), It is possible to suppress that the flow of water is affected. That is, the ball flowing down the upper area of the game area is the initial ball that was shot from the ball shooting unit 112a and flowed into the game area. Compared to a ball rolling on 611, it is less susceptible to wind. In other words, it is possible to direct the wind toward a region where the ball is less affected by the wind. Therefore, the rotational speed of the rotating member can be increased by that amount, and the performance effect can be improved.

Next, the sorting device 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 46. FIG.

First, the overall configuration of the sorting device 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 45. FIG. 42 is an exploded front perspective view of the sorting device 700, and FIG. 43 is a partially enlarged front view of the sorting device 700. FIG. FIG. 44 is a cross-sectional view of sorting device 700 taken along line XLIV-XLIV in FIG. 45(a) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device 700 along the XLVa-XLVa line in FIG. 43, and FIG. 45(b) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device 700 along the XLVb-XLVb line in FIG. 45(a). 45(c) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device 700 along the XLVc-XLVc line in FIG. 43, and FIG. 45(d) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device 700 along the XLVd-XLVd line in FIG. is.

In FIG. 43, the inner peripheral surface of the distribution member 760, the seesaw member 762, the first ball entrance 64, the second right ball entrance 640r, and the outer shapes of the recovery hole 752 are illustrated by dashed lines. Also, in FIG. 45(d), the path of the ball dispensed from the opening 744 is illustrated by a two-dot chain line.

As shown in FIGS. 42 to 45, the sorting device 700 is arranged below the center frame 600 of the game board 13, and arranged on the front side of the base plate 60 (on the front side of the paper in FIG. 43). It mainly includes a front side formation portion 710 and a back side formation portion 720 arranged on the back side (back side of the paper surface of FIG. 43) with respect to the base plate 60 .

The front side forming portion 710 is mainly formed with a winning member 730 attached to the front side of the base plate 60 and a bending member 740 arranged on the front side of the winning member 730 .

The back side forming portion 720 is mainly formed by an interposed member 750 attached to the back side of the base plate 60 and a distribution member 760 arranged on the back side of the interposed member 750. .

The prize winning member 730 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and includes the above-described opening 710a positioned at the upper center in the left-right direction, the electric accessory 640a positioned below the opening 710a, and the electric accessory 640a. It is mainly formed with through-holes 731 located on both sides in the left-right direction and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and lower insertion holes 732 located below the through-holes 731 and penetrating in the front-rear direction. .

The through-hole 731 is a member into which an upper projecting portion 741 of a bending member 740, which will be described later, is inserted. . A projecting wall 731a is formed on the lower surface of the through hole 731 so as to project upward from the rear surface to the front surface.

Two protruding walls 731a are arranged side by side symmetrically with respect to the lateral center line of the through hole 731 in front view, and the protruding distance is set smaller from the back side toward the front side. Therefore, the ball passing (rolling) inside the through hole 731 by the interposing member 750 and the distributing member 760, which will be described later, is guided to the center position in the left-right direction of the two protruding walls 731a, and is guided from the back side to the front side. rolled towards the side.

The lower insertion hole 732 is a hole that communicates with the recovery hole 752 of the interposition member 750 arranged on the back side, and is formed at a position facing the recovery hole 752 of the interposition member 750 . The lower insertion hole 732 has a generally D-shaped opening with a curved lower surface when viewed from the front. and a second projecting portion 732b.

The first projecting portion 732a is formed such that the projecting distance increases from the front side (the right side in FIG. 45(a)) toward the rear side (the left side in FIG. 45(a)). The second protruding portion 732b is formed so that the protruding distance decreases from the front side toward the back side. In addition, the distance dimension between the opposing first protrusion 732a and the second protrusion 732b is slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere. Therefore, when the ball passes through the inside of the lower insertion hole 732, the inclination of the second projecting portion 732b from the front side to the back side allows the ball to roll to the back side. On the other hand, when the ball bounces in the vertical direction when inserted through the lower insertion hole 732, the upward displacement can be suppressed by the first projecting portion 732a.

A sensor SE for detecting passage of a ball is arranged on the back surface of the lower insertion hole 732 . The sensor SE is a member that is formed in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a through hole formed in its side surface with a diameter slightly larger than that of a sphere. can detect the passage of The sensor SE is arranged such that the axis of the through hole is coaxial with the circular arc axis on the lower surface side of the lower insertion hole 732 . As a result, the opening direction of the through-hole can be inclined slightly downward toward the rear side, so that the sphere passing through the through-hole of the sensor SE can be prevented from remaining inside the through-hole.

The bending member 740 is a member that is arranged on the front side of the through hole 731 and the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730 described above, and is positioned substantially in the center in the left-right direction of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2) when viewed from the front. are arranged symmetrically, and the external shape thereof is formed symmetrically.

In addition, the bending member 740 is arranged at a position where a gap large enough for a ball to pass is formed between the bending member 740 and the inner rail 61 (see FIG. 2) forming the game area in a front view. As a result, the ball flowing down the game area below the bending member 740 is prevented from remaining in the game area by being caught between the bending member 740 and the inner rail 61 .

The bending member 740 is formed of a substantially rectangular plate-like body when viewed from the front, and includes an upper protrusion 741 protruding from the rear surface thereof, a lower protrusion 743 protruding from below the upper protrusion 741, and an upper protrusion 741. and an opening 744 formed between the opposed lower protrusions 743 .

The upper protruding portion 741 is formed in a substantially U-shape with an open bottom when viewed from the rear, and its outer shape is set slightly smaller than the inner shape of the through hole 731 of the winning member 730 . As a result, when the bending member 740 is arranged on the winning member 730 , the upper protruding portion 741 can be inserted into the through hole 731 for arrangement. Therefore, when arranging the bending member 740 to the winning member 730, the upper projecting portion 741 can be inserted for positioning, so the assembling process can be simplified.

In addition, since the upper protruding portion 741 is formed in a substantially U shape whose lower side is open when viewed from the rear, when the ball is passed through the through hole 731 of the prize winning member 730 and rolled toward the bending member 740, the ball can be pushed. A connection portion between the winning member 730 and the bending member 740 is not formed on the rolling surface (lower surface) on which the . Therefore, since the rolling of the ball can be made constant, it is possible to suppress the ball from stopping inside the through hole 731 . That is, when a connecting portion between the winning member 730 and the bending member 740 is formed on the rolling surface of the ball, the resistance increases when the ball rolls on the connecting portion, and the ball bounces on the steps. By eliminating the connecting portion on the rolling surface of the ball, it is possible to stabilize the rolling of the ball and suppress the clogging of the ball.

Further, in this case, even if the upper protruding portion 741 is formed in an annular shape in a rear view and the ball is passed through the inside of the annular ring, the winning member 730 and the bending member are similarly formed on the rolling surface on which the ball rolls. Although the connecting portion with 740 is not formed, the shape of the bending member 740 is complicated due to the formation of the upper projection 741 in an annular shape, which increases the manufacturing cost. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the upper protruding portion 741 is substantially U-shaped when viewed from the rear, so the shape of the component can be simplified, and an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

The lower protruding portion 743 is formed below the upper protruding portion 741 and has a substantially U-shape in a rear view with an open upper side. That is, when viewed from the back, the open portions of the upper protruding portion 741 and the lower protruding portion 743 are formed to face each other in the vertical direction.

The lower protruding portion 743 is a path (hereinafter referred to as “second ball throwing path KR2”) for throwing a ball thrown from the through hole 731 of the prize winning member 730 toward the bending member 740 to the lower insertion hole 732 of the prize winning member 730. ), and is formed at a position facing the lower insertion hole 732 in the front-rear direction.

The projection distance of the lower projecting portion 743 toward the rear side is set to be larger than the diameter of the sphere. Further, the bending member 740 is arranged on the prize winning member 730 in a state where the protruding tip surface of the lower protruding portion 743 is in contact with the prize winning member 730 . Therefore, the distance between the bending member 740 and the winning member 730 facing each other is made larger than the diameter of the ball, and the ball is thrown vertically between the bending member 740 and the winning member 730. (referred to as "first ball throwing path KR1") is formed.

The bending member 740 is formed with a guide portion 742 protruding from the upper inner surface of the upper protruding portion 741 to the lower inner surface of the lower protruding portion 743 . The guide portion 742 protrudes in a substantially U shape with an open back side when viewed from the side.

The guide portion 742 is a projecting wall that throws a ball thrown from the through hole 731 of the prize winning member 730 to the bending member 740 (first ball throwing path KR1) in the vertical direction, and then throws the ball to the lower insertion hole 732 of the prize winning member 730. , and the height in the vertical direction of the lower inner edge is formed slightly smaller than the height of the lower inner edge of the lower insertion hole 732 arranged on the rear surface.

Two guide portions 742 are formed symmetrically about the center line in the horizontal direction of the through hole 731 arranged on the back side in a front view. As a result, the sphere is guided (folded back to the back side) in contact with the two guide portions 742, so that the sphere can be prevented from being displaced in the left-right direction.

The protruding tip surfaces of the guide portions 742 arranged side by side are formed to be inclined toward the base side as they approach the mutually facing surfaces (see FIG. 45(b)). As a result, it is possible to effectively prevent the sphere that is guided (folded back to the back side) in contact with the two guide portions 742 from being displaced in the left-right direction.

The upper projecting portion 741 is formed with sidewalls 741a that project inward from the left and right side surfaces in a rear view. A plurality of side walls 741a (three in this embodiment) are arranged side by side at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. As a result, when the ball thrown inside the upper protruding portion 741 in the normal state rolls in the horizontal direction, it can be brought into contact with the tip surface of the side wall 741a to stabilize the thrown ball. On the other hand, when two balls continuously flow inside the upper protruding portion 741, and the ball flowing behind collides with the ball flowing ahead, the preceding ball enters between the side walls 741a, thereby It is possible to prevent the balls from being clogged inside the upper protruding portion 741 by securing a distance for escaping in the direction. That is, the side wall 741a can stabilize the ball thrown inside the upper projecting portion 741. As shown in FIG.

The openings 744 are predetermined gaps formed between the upper projecting portion 741 and the lower projecting portion 743 facing each other, and are formed on both left and right sides in a rear view. In addition, the opening 744 is formed in a substantially U shape that is open on the rear side in a side view.

The upper end of the opening 744 is set at substantially the same height in the vertical direction as the lower surface of the through hole 731 of the prize winning member 730 , and the height of the lower end is approximately midway in the vertical direction of the lower insertion hole 732 of the prize winning member 730 . is set to the height of As a result, when the balls are successively thrown into the bending member 740 , it is possible to prevent the preceding balls from escaping into the opening 744 and clogging the inside of the bending member 740 . That is, the opening 744 is formed to open on the left-right side surface of the connecting portion between the first ball-throwing path KR1 and the second ball-throwing path KR2.

The distribution member 760 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a box-like body with an open front side. In addition, the distribution member 760 is bent at a substantially center position in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and is inclined downward from the substantially center position in the left-right direction toward the outer side in the left-right direction. Both ends of the sorting member 760 in the left-right direction are set at positions facing the through holes 731 of the winning member 730 described above.

The sorting member 760 includes a pair of inclined surfaces 761 that incline downward to both the left and right sides from a center position in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, a seesaw member 762 arranged in the center of the inclined surfaces 761, and an upper side of the seesaw member 762. and a ball feed port 763 formed in the .

The ball feed port 763 is a member for forming an opening on the front side of the sorting member 760 and is formed at a position facing the opening 710 a of the winning member 730 . As a result, when the distribution member 760 is arranged in an interposed member 750 described later, a space A can be formed between the ball feed port 763 and the interposed member 750 facing each other.

The space A is formed in a space larger than the outer diameter of the sphere (that is, the space through which the sphere can pass), and the opening 710a of the prize winning member 730 passes through a through hole drilled in the base plate 60. It is connected with the internal space (see FIG. 44). As a result, the ball that wins the opening 710a can be thrown into the space A, and the ball can be thrown inside the space A.

The seesaw member 762 is formed in an annular shape, and has three protrusions 762a protruding outward from the outer edge thereof at intervals of 90 degrees around the axis, and a shaft inserted inside the annular shape. and a portion 762b.

The shaft portion 762b is a shaft support portion for rotating the seesaw member 762 around an axis, is formed in a cylindrical shape, and is inserted through the inside of the annular ring of the seesaw member 762 . In this state, the shaft portion 762b is sandwiched between the interposing member 750 and the distribution member 760, so that the seesaw member 762 is arranged rotatably around the shaft portion 762b.

The protrusion 762a is a protrusion for alternately distributing the ball one by one to the left and right inclined surfaces 761 when the ball is thrown from the space A described above. A ball is thrown in the opposite direction. That is, the ball thrown from the space A can be thrown in the horizontal direction by the projection 762a in the central portion. The projections 762a protruding from both ends restrict the displacement of the seesaw member 762, and the weight applied when the ball passes through displaces the direction in which the tip of the central projection 762a is positioned (rotating the seesaw member 762). The rotation of the seesaw member 762 is regulated by contact between the tip surface of the protrusion 762a and the inclined surface 761. As shown in FIG. On the other hand, when the projection 762a that is not in contact with the inclined surface 761 is guided by the central projection 762a, the guided ball collides with the projection 762a and is pushed downward. As a result, the protrusion 762a on the opposite side is displaced upward, and the distal end of the protrusion 762a that is displaced downward comes into contact with the inclined surface 761, thereby restricting the displacement.

Inclined surface 761 is a rolling surface of a path (hereinafter referred to as “third ball throwing path KR3”) along which the balls distributed to the left and right by seesaw member 762 are rolled and thrown. It is formed so as to slope downward from the center position in the left-right direction toward the outside. As a result, the balls sorted to the left and right by the seesaw member 762 of the sorting member 760 are rolled on the inclined surface 761 and sent (rolled) to the end of the inclined surface 761 on the downward side.

The inclined surface 761 is inclined toward the insertion member 750 at the end on the lower side so that the thickness of the side surface on the back side increases forward toward the end. As a result, the ball that rolls on the inclined surface 761 and is thrown to the end of the inclined surface 761 passes through the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance of the intervening member 750 disposed in front of the distribution member 760 . You can throw the ball to 640r. More specifically, the ball distributed to the left side in front view by the seesaw member 762 and rolling on the inclined surface 761 is thrown (entered) to the first ball entrance 64 . On the other hand, the ball distributed to the right side in front view by the seesaw member 762 and rolling on the inclined surface 761 is thrown (entered) to the right second ball entrance 640r.

The intervening member 750 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has the above-described variable winning device 65 at the lower center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, the first ball entrance 64 which penetrates in the front-rear direction on the left side, It mainly includes a right second ball inlet 640r penetrating in the longitudinal direction on the right side, and a recovery hole 752 opened below the first right ball inlet 64 and the right second ball inlet 640r. formed by

The first ball entrance 64 and the right second ball entrance 640 r are formed on the front sides of the right and left end portions of the sorting member 760 and on the rear side of the through holes 731 of the winning member 730 . Therefore, the spaces at the left and right ends of the sorting member 760 and the internal space of the through hole 731 of the winning member 730 are connected via the first ball entrance 64 and the right second ball entrance 640r. Therefore, the ball rolling on the upper part of the inclined surface 761 of the distribution member 760 described above passes through the first ball entrance 64 and is sent to the through hole 731 of the prize winning member 730, and the right second ball entrance 640r to pass through the through hole 731 of the winning member 730 (both referred to as "fourth ball throwing route KR4" hereinafter).

The recovery hole 752 is an opening formed on the back side of the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730 as described above. That is, the recovery hole 752 is connected to the back side of the sensor SE, and the ball passing through the sensor SE is thrown to the opening of the recovery hole 752 . The recovery hole 752 is connected to a ball circulation device installed in the store, and the balls recovered to the recovery hole 752 are circulated by the circulation device and shot out from the ball shooting unit 112a again as game balls. .

The sorting device 700 configured as described above is thrown as follows. A ball entering from the opening 710a is thrown to the distribution member 760 and then sent to the third ball path KR3 in either the left or right direction by the seesaw member 762 of the distribution member 760. FIG. A ball thrown through the leftward third throwing path KR3 reaches the end of the third throwing path KR3. The ball is thrown to the fourth throwing route KR4. On the other hand, a ball thrown through the leftward third throwing path KR3 reaches the end of the third throwing path KR3, and when it reaches the end of the third throwing path KR3, the right second ball entrance 640r of the interposition member 750 arranged on the front side The ball is thrown to the fourth throwing route KR4 inside the . A ball thrown through the fourth ball-throwing path KR4 is thrown to the first ball-throwing path KR1 on the back side of the bending member 740 . A ball thrown along the first ball-throwing path KR1 is guided by the lower projecting portion 743 of the bending member 740 and is thrown to the second ball-throwing path KR2. A ball that is thrown through the second ball-throwing path KR2 passes through the lower insertion hole 732 of the prize-winning member 730 and the inside of the sensor SE, and then is thrown to the recovery hole 752 of the interposition member 3750 .

Here, as described above, the through hole 731 and the lower insertion hole 732 of the prize winning member 730 are formed on both the left and right sides of the electric accessory 640a, and the bending members 740 are arranged in a pair on the left and right. The electric accessory 640 a is positioned between the lower protrusions 743 of the member 740 .

In this case, if the downward inclination angle of the third ball-throwing path KR3 is made small (the inclined surface is gentle), the falling speed of the ball becomes low, and ball clogging tends to occur in the lower projecting portion 743 . On the other hand, if the downward inclination angle of the third ball-throwing path KR3 is increased (the downward inclination is steeper), the flow speed of the ball can be increased, and ball clogging in the lower insertion hole 732 can be made difficult to occur. The space in the height direction (vertical direction) required for disposing the third ball throwing path KR3 (distribution member 760) increases, making it difficult to dispose the electric accessory 640a.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the opening 744 is formed in the side wall of the lower protruding portion 743, it is possible to prevent ball clogging in the lower protruding portion 743 from occurring. It is possible to reduce the angle of the descending inclination of (gentle descending inclination). As a result, the space in the height direction required for arranging the third ball throwing route KR3 (distribution member 760) can be reduced, and the electric accessory 640a can be arranged. In other words, the arrangement of the bending member 740 and the electric accessory 640a is impossible in the conventional product, and is made possible only by forming the opening 744 in the side wall of the lower projecting portion 743 as described above. is.

Here, in this embodiment, an opening is formed in the center of the game board 13 (the center frame 600 is arranged), and the player can visually recognize the third symbol display device 81 through the opening. In recent years, with the demand for a larger size of the third pattern display device 81, the center opening of the game board 13 (the inner peripheral edge of the frame 610 of the center frame 600) has also become larger. The space between the edge and the lower edge of the play area (the lower inner edge of the inner rail 61) is narrowed. Therefore, in the conventional product, members corresponding to the third ball throwing path KR3 and the electric accessory 640a can be arranged in the space between the lower edge of the central opening of the game board 13 and the lower edge of the game area. It was difficult.

That is, as described above, when the downward inclination angle of the third ball throwing path KR3 is made small (the downward inclination is gentle), the falling speed of the ball becomes low, and ball clogging tends to occur in the lower projecting portion 743. Become. On the other hand, if the angle of the downward slope of the third throwing path KR3 is increased (the downward slope is steeper), the falling velocity of the ball can be increased, making it difficult for the ball to clog the lower protruding portion 743. The space in the height direction required for disposing the third ball throwing path KR3 increases, making it difficult to dispose the electric accessory 640a. In addition, since the arrangement position in the vertical direction of the lower protruding portion 743 (bending member 740) is lowered (lowered), the lower protruding portion 743 (bending member 740) and the lower edge of the game area (inner rail 61) It becomes difficult to secure a gap through which the ball can pass between the two, and it becomes necessary to provide the first out ports 71 on both sides of the lower projecting portion 743 (bending member 740).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, since the opening is formed in the side wall of the lower protruding portion 743, it is possible to prevent ball clogging from occurring in the lower protruding portion 743. It is possible to reduce the angle of the descending inclination of the 3-throwing path KR3 (gentle descending inclination). As a result, since the arrangement position in the height direction (vertical direction) of the lower protruding portion 743 (flexing member 740) can be raised (higher), the lower protruding portion 743 (flexing member 740) and the game area (lower inner edge of the inner rail 61), a gap through which the ball can pass can be secured. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the need to provide the first outlets 71 on both sides of the lower projecting portion 743 (bending member 740).

That is, in the arrangement of the bending member 740 and the electric accessory 640a, the arrangement in which a gap through which a ball can pass is formed between the lower protruding portion 743 (the bending member 740) and the lower edge of the game area is the conventional product. This is an arrangement that is impossible in the conventional method, and is made possible only by forming an opening in the side wall of the lower protruding portion 743 as described above.

Next, referring to FIG. 46, the ball throwing of the guide portion 742 of the bending member 740 will be described. 46(a) is a sectional view of the game board 13, and FIG. 46(b) is a sectional view of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. 46(a) corresponds to FIG. 45(a), and FIG. 46(b) corresponds to FIG. 45(b).

As shown in FIG. 46, when two balls are thrown from the through-hole 731 of the winning member 730 to the bending member 740 with almost no gap (that is, two balls in a row), the previous (preceding) ball is thrown. A portion of the ball enters the opening 744 and is fed to the rear side and guided to the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730 .

Here, if a passage with a cross-sectional area slightly larger than the outer diameter of the sphere is formed, and the passage is curved, two spheres can be placed in the passage with almost no gap (two spheres are connected to each other). ) When a ball is thrown, the preceding ball hits the trailing ball, and the trailing ball pushes the leading ball against the side wall, making it impossible for both to roll, resulting in ball jamming. rice field.

On the other hand, in the present application, since the opening 744 is formed at the connecting portion between the first ball throwing path KR1 and the second ball throwing path KR2, when a plurality of balls pass through the lower projecting portion 743 in a row, Even if the trailing ball catches up with the preceding ball, it is possible to make it difficult for the preceding ball to be pressed against the side wall, and to facilitate the continuation of the rolling of both. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging.

In addition, since the opening 744 is formed at a position where the first ball-throwing path KR1 and the second ball-throwing path KR2 intersect, it is possible to prevent the ball from being easily clogged at the bent portion. That is, in the area where the first throwing route KR1 and the second throwing route KR2 intersect, the ball that has flowed (dropped) down the first throwing route KR1 changes direction and rolls toward the extending direction of the second throwing route KR2. This is the position where the ball starts to move, and it is easy for the trailing ball to catch up with the leading ball. Therefore, when the preceding ball is pressed against the side wall by the following ball, both cannot roll, and ball clogging is likely to occur.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the opening 744 is formed at the intersection of the first ball throwing path KR1 and the second ball throwing path KR2. The ball can escape between the opposing openings 744 (a part of the preceding ball is accommodated in the opening 744) to make it difficult to press against the side wall, making it easier to continue the rolling of both. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging.

Furthermore, as described above, since the height of the lower end of the opening 744 is set to the height of the approximately middle position in the vertical direction of the lower insertion hole 732 of the prize winning member 730, the ball falls (flows down) along the first throwing path KR1. When the ball to be played reaches the bottom wall of the second ball-throwing path KR2 (lower projecting portion 743), the ball can be easily received in the opening. Therefore, even when the trailing ball catches up with the leading ball, the leading ball can escape between the opposing openings 744 to be less likely to be pressed against the side wall, and the rolling of both can be easily continued. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging.

In addition, the lower projecting portion 743 is formed in a substantially U shape when viewed from the side, and is installed at a position where the height of the lower end of the opening 744 is separated from the bottom wall of the lower projecting portion 743 by a predetermined distance. A sidewall can be left (formed) between the lower end of the opening 744 and the second ball throwing path KR2 (lower projecting portion 743). Therefore, even if the opening is formed in a size that allows the ball to pass through, the ball unnecessarily flows out from the bending member 740 to the outside (the game area on the front side of the game board 13) through the opening. can be suppressed.

In this case, if the size of the opening 744 is such that the ball cannot pass through, the opening 744 can be used to make it difficult for the preceding ball to be pressed against the side wall. A configuration is formed in which the leading ball pushes the leading ball toward the center of the opening 744 , and the leading ball may be nested within the opening 744 . In this case, the rolling motion of the trailing ball is hindered by the ball that is stuck in the opening 744, and ball clogging occurs.

On the other hand, the opening 744 is made larger than the outer shape of the sphere (it is formed to a size that allows the sphere to pass through), so that the trailing sphere presses the leading sphere toward the center of the opening 744. Even when it is done, the preceding ball can be discharged from the opening 744 to the outside of the bending member 740 (the game area on the front side of the game board 13), and the preceding ball is fitted (fitted) into the opening 744. can be avoided. As a result, the rolling of the trailing ball can be continued, and the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

Also, in this way, the opening 744 is formed with a size that allows the ball to pass through, and the opening 744 is arranged on the front side of the game board 13 (that is, the game area), so that the ball flows down the game area. A ball can flow into the flexure member 740 through the opening 744 . Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. For example, when a sensor for detecting winning balls is provided downstream of the lower projecting portion 743, in addition to the ball flowing into the bending member 740 from the upstream of the lower projecting portion 743, the bending member A ball that has flowed into 740 can also be detected as a winning ball. In particular, in this case, the opening 744 (the area where the first ball-throwing path KR1 and the second ball-throwing path KR2 intersect) is arranged on the front side of the game board 13, so the flow from the opening 744 to the bending member 740 is provided. It is possible to make the player visually recognize the ball to be played. Therefore, also from this point, the interest in the game can be enhanced.

A lower portion of the guide portion 742 (that is, a portion curved downward toward the recovery hole 752) is disposed in the region where the first ball-throwing path KR1 and the second ball-throwing path KR2 intersect. As a result, when the ball flowing down (falling) down the first ball-throwing path KR1 changes direction and starts rolling in the extending direction of the second ball-throwing path KR2, the ball is moved to the downward slope of the guide part 742. can be used to move quickly. This makes it easier for the leading ball to roll before the trailing ball catches up with it, and the trailing ball rolls the trailing ball to the back side (along the extending direction of the second throwing path KR2). Since it is possible to suppress being pressed against the side wall on the rear side when rolling, it is possible to facilitate the continuation of the rolling of both. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging.

In addition, since the opening 744 is formed on the front side (game area side) of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2), ball clogging occurs at the curved portion between the first ball-throwing path KR1 and the second ball-throwing path KR2. When this happens, the store operator can access the opening 744 from the front side by opening the glass 8 . Therefore, it is possible to improve the workability of the work for removing ball clogging.

Furthermore, when dust or debris accumulates in the curved portion between the first ball throwing route KR1 and the second ball throwing route KR2, the store operator opens the glass 8 to access the opening 744 from the front side. to allow cleaning of the flexure through opening 744 . Therefore, it is possible to improve the cleaning performance when cleaning the first ball-throwing path KR1 and the second ball-throwing path KR2.

Next, the luminous decoration unit 800 will be described with reference to FIG. 47 . 47 is an exploded front perspective view of the luminous decoration unit 800. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 47, the luminous decoration unit 800 includes a horizontally long rectangular base body 810 disposed on the bottom wall portion 301 (see FIG. 6) of the rear case 300, and a base body 810 on the front side of the base body 810. It mainly includes a light-emitting device 820 to be provided and a cover member 830 covering the front surface of the light-emitting device 820 and made of a light-transmitting material.

On the front side of the light emitting device 820, a plurality of light emitters (LEDs 821) are distributed over the entire surface. Therefore, the light emitted from the LED 821 is emitted from the entire surface of the cover member 830 to the front side of the gaming machine.

<Second embodiment>
Next, a regulation unit 2490 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 to 50. FIG. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the part same as the said 1st Embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

First, referring to FIGS. 48 and 49, the overall configuration of regulation unit 2490 will be described. FIG. 48 is an exploded front perspective view of the regulation unit 2490 in the second embodiment. 49(a) is a side view of the regulation unit 2490, FIG. 49(b) is a rear view of the regulation unit 2490, and FIG. 49(c) is a line XLIXc-XLIXc in FIG. FIG. 14 is a cross-sectional view of a regulation unit 2490;

As shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, in a regulation unit 2490 according to the second embodiment, a roller member 492 is pivotally supported by a rotating member 2494 so that the position of the roller member 492 can be adjusted by rotating the rotating member 2494. be.

The regulating unit 2490 includes a case member 2491 formed in a box-like body, an outer edge member 2493 disposed on the outer edge of the case member 2491 on the open side, and between the case member 2491 and the outer edge member 2493. It mainly includes a rotating member 2494 that is clamped and rotatably supported, and a roller member 492 that is supported by the rotating member 2494 .

The case member 2491 is formed in a box shape with an open rear side, and is formed to have a width dimension in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 49(b)) larger than that of the case member 491 in the first embodiment. Further, the case member 2491 is mainly formed with a protruding portion 491a that protrudes from the side surface on the front side, and cutout portions 2491b that are cut out in a semicircular shape on both side surfaces in the left-right direction.

The notch portion 2491b is cut out in a semicircular shape at approximately the center position in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 49(b)) of both sides of the case member 2491 in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 49(b)). be. The cutout portion 2491b is a cutout for rotatably supporting a shaft portion 2494b of the rotating member 2494 to be described later.

The outer edge member 2493 is a member that is formed in a vertically long rectangular frame-like body when viewed from the front and is arranged on the back side (open side) of the case member 2491 . The outer edge member 2493 has an inner shape that is substantially the same as the opening of the case member 2491 . In addition, on the side surface of the outer edge member 2493 on the front side (case member 491 side), an upright portion 2493a is formed around the inner edge portion to stand on the front side.

A recessed portion 2493a1 recessed on the back side is formed in the erected portion 2493a. The recessed portion 2493a1 is formed at a position facing the notch portion 2491b of the case member 2492 . Therefore, the rotation member 2494 can be rotatably disposed in the case member 2491 by sandwiching the rotation member 2494 described later between the notch portion 2491b and the concave portion 2493a1 of the case member 2491 facing each other.

The rotating member 2494 is formed of an oblong plate-like body in a side view, and its longitudinal dimension is set smaller than the vertical dimension of the inner portion of the case member 2491 . The rotating member 2494 has a cylindrical shaft portion 2494b projecting outward in the left-right direction from the case member 2491 at the center in the longitudinal direction. and a regulating portion 2494c that bulges radially outward from the projecting tip portion of the portion 2494b.

The shaft portion 2494b protrudes longer than the plate thickness of the case member 2491 formed in a box-like body, and a restricting portion 2494c that bulges in the radial direction is formed at the tip of the protruding portion. Accordingly, by fitting the shaft portion 2494b into the notch portion 2491b of the case member 2491 and arranging the concave portion 2493a1 of the outer edge member 2493 from the rear side, the rotating member 2494 can be rotated with respect to the case member 2491. In addition, the rotation member 2494 can be regulated from being displaced in the left-right direction with respect to the case member 2491 by the regulating portion 2494c.

The shaft support hole 2494a is an opening through which the shaft portion 492b of the roller member 492 is inserted. As a result, the roller member 492 can be rotated by inserting the shaft portion 492b of the roller member 492 from which the retaining ring E1 has been removed into the shaft support hole 2494a and then fitting the retaining ring E1 onto the shaft portion 492b. can be disposed on the rotating member 2494 at .

The regulation unit 2490 configured as described above is assembled as follows.

First, the shaft portions 492b of the roller members 492 are inserted into the shaft support holes 2494a of the rotating members 2494 arranged in a pair, and the roller members 492 are supported on the rotating members 2494. As shown in FIG. As a result, two roller members 492 can be arranged vertically in parallel between the opposing rotating members 2494 arranged in a pair.

Next, after disposing a torsion spring (not shown) on the shaft portion 2494b of the rotating member 2494 and fitting it in the notch portion 2491b of the case member 2491, the outer edge member 2493 is disposed from the rear side, thereby rotating the spring. The member 2494 can be arranged rotatably with respect to the case member 2491 about the shaft portion 2494b. Accordingly, by rotationally displacing the rotating member 2494, the position of the roller member 492 arranged on the rotating member 2494 can be displaced. In addition, the roller member 492 arranged above the roller members 492 arranged vertically is biased toward the front side (left side in FIG. 49(c)) by the torsion spring arranged on the shaft portion 2494b. can be

Next, with reference to FIG. 50, a contact state between the decorative member 450 and the regulation unit 2490 when the decorative member 450 is displaced from the second position to the first position will be described. 50(a) to (c) are sectional views of the vertical displacement unit 400. FIG. 50(a) corresponds to FIG. 24(a), FIG. 50 to FIG. 24(b), and FIG. 21(c) to FIG. 18(c).

As shown in FIG. 50(a), when the decorative member 450 is positioned above the regulating unit 2490, the rotating member 2494 is pulled by a torsion spring (not shown) provided on the shaft portion 2494b of the rotating member 2494. As shown in FIG. is rotated so that the roller member 492 arranged above the roller member 492 arranged on the lower side is positioned on the front side.

As a result, the decorative member 450 is displaced downward from the state shown in FIG. 21(a), and the lower end surface of the decorative member 450 shown in FIG. , the roller 492a of the roller member 492 arranged on the upper side comes into contact with the decorative member 450 and exerts a lower pressure than the regulating unit 2490 of the first embodiment. can be made smaller. In this case, the rotating member 2494 is in contact with a projection (not shown) formed inside the case member 2491, so that the roller member 492 arranged on the upper side is not displaced to the front side (the rotating member 2494 is The upper side is not rotationally displaced to the front side).

Therefore, when the decorative member 450 is displaced further downward from the state shown in FIG. 21(b) to the first position shown in FIG. 50(c), a driving force is applied to the decorative member 450. It is possible to suppress an increase in the energy consumption of the drive motor 441 that is driven.

Further, when the decorative member 450 is displaced to the first position as shown in FIG. As a result, the roller member 492 on the lower side is pushed to the rear side and displaced to the rear side, and the roller 492a on the upper side is displaced to the front side. As a result, the pressing force of the upper roller 492a against the decorative member 450 can be increased. As a result, when the decorative member 450 is arranged at the first position, the decorative member 450 can be firmly held by the pressing force of the roller members 492 arranged above and below. On the other hand, when the decorative member 450 is positioned in the middle of displacement, the pressing force acting on the decorative member 450 can be reduced to facilitate displacement. That is, as the decorative member 450 is displaced, the pressing force applied from the regulation unit 2490 to the decorative member 450 can be changed.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, a sorting device 700 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 53. FIG. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 51 to 53, the overall configuration of sorting device 3700 will be described. FIG. 51 is an exploded front perspective view of a sorting device 3700 according to the third embodiment. FIG. 52 is a partially enlarged front view of the sorting device 3700. FIG. 53(a) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device 3700 taken along the LIIIa-LIIIa line in FIG. 52, and FIG. 53(b) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device 3700 taken along the LIIIb-LIIIb line in FIG. 52(b). .

As shown in FIGS. 51 to 53 , in the sorting device 3700 of the third embodiment, the opening of the second ball entrance 640 is connected to the sorting device 3700 .

The sorting device 3700 is arranged below the center frame 600 of the game board 13, and has a front side formation portion 3710 arranged on the front side with respect to the base plate 60 and a rear side with respect to the base plate 60. and a front side forming portion 3710 to be formed.

The front side forming portion 3710 mainly includes a winning member 3730 attached to the base plate 60 and a bending member 3740 arranged on the front side of the winning member 3730 .

The rear side forming portion 3720 includes an interposition member 3750 attached to the base plate 60, a distribution member 760 disposed on the rear side of the interposition member 3750, and an interposition member positioned below the distribution member 760. 3750 and a second ball feeding path 3770 disposed on the back side of the ball 3750.

The winning member 3730 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has the above-mentioned opening 710a at the upper center in the left-right direction, the electric accessory 640a below the opening 710a, and the electric accessory 640a on both sides of the electric accessory 640a in the left-right direction. A through hole 731 is formed through in the front-rear direction, a second through hole 3733 is formed through the through hole 731 in the front-rear direction, and a lower part is formed through the second through-hole 3733 in the front-rear direction. It is mainly formed with a side insertion hole 732 .

The second through hole 3733 is an opening through which a sphere passes, and is formed in a generally rectangular shape in a front view that is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the sphere. The second through-hole 3733 is formed below the second ball inlet 640, and has a second protruding wall 3733a formed on the lower surface thereof so as to protrude upward from the back side to the front side. be.

Two second protruding walls 3733a are arranged side by side symmetrically with respect to the center line of the second through hole 3733 in the front view in the left-right direction, and the protruding distance thereof is set smaller from the back side toward the front side. Therefore, when a ball passes through the inside of the second through hole 3733 by the later-described intervening member 3750 and the second ball feeding path, the ball can be guided to the center position in the left-right direction of the two second projecting walls 3733a. , can be rolled from the back side to the front side.

The bending member 3740 is a member disposed on the front side of the through hole 731, the second through hole 3733, and the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 3730, and is located on both left and right sides of the second ball entrance 640. The pair of external shapes are formed symmetrically.

The bending member 3740 is formed of a substantially rectangular plate-like body when viewed from the front, and includes an upper protrusion 741 protruding from the rear surface side, an intermediate protrusion 3745 protruding from below the upper protrusion 741, and an intermediate protrusion 3745 protruding from below the upper protrusion 741. and a lower protrusion 743 that protrudes from below 3745 .

The intermediate protruding portion 3745 is a wall portion that is elongated in the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 53(b)) when viewed from the rear, and is formed on both the left and right sides of the second through hole 3733. It is formed at the same height as the approximately middle position of the through hole 3733 in the vertical direction. On the other hand, the lower side surface of the intermediate protruding portion 3745 is positioned below the bottom surface of the second through hole 3733 .

A second opening 3746 having a predetermined gap is formed between the intermediate protruding portion 3745 and the upper protruding portion 741 facing each other. On the other hand, an opening 744 having a predetermined gap is formed between the intermediate protruding portion 3745 and the lower protruding portion 743 facing each other.

The second opening 3746 has a substantially U-shape opening on the back side in a side view, and the inner shape thereof is formed to be larger than the outer shape of a sphere. That is, the second opening 3746 is set to a size that allows the sphere to pass through. A detailed description of the second opening 3746 will be given later.

The second ball feed path 3770 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a substantially box shape with a constant thickness and an open front side. The second ball-throwing path 3770 is a ball-throwing path for throwing a ball entering the second ball inlet 640 to the second through-hole 3733 of the winning member 3730, and is arranged on the back side of the interposing member 3750. , a ball-throwing passage can be formed between the inner side of the second ball-throwing passage 3770 and the interposing member 3750 .

The second ball feeding path 3770 has a left end located on the back side of the second ball entrance 640 of the prize winning member 3730 in a front view, and a right end of the second ball feeding path 3770 that passes through the prize winning member 3730. It is positioned on the back side of the hole 3733 and disposed. That is, the second ball feed path 3770 is arranged in the interposition member 3750 such that the left end in a front view is positioned higher than the right end and tilts downward toward the right end.

Further, the second ball feed path 3770 has a left end connected to the second ball entrance 640 in a front view, and a right end connected to the second connecting hole 3753 of the interposing member 3750 . As a result, the ball that has entered the second ball inlet 640 is thrown into the second ball path 3770, and then rolls inside the second ball path 3770 from the left end to the right end. The ball is thrown to the second connecting hole 3753 of the interposed member 3750 .

The intervening member 3750 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and includes the above-described variable winning device 65 at the lower center in the left-right direction, and first winning devices positioned on both left and right sides of the variable winning device 65 and penetrating in the front-rear direction. The ball opening 64 and the right second ball inlet 640r, the recovery hole 752 located below the first ball inlet 64 and the right second ball inlet 640r and penetrating in the front-rear direction, the right second ball inlet 640r, It is formed with a second connecting hole 3753 located between the ball inlet 640r and the recovery hole 752 and penetrating in the front-rear direction.

The second connecting hole 3753 is formed to have a generally rectangular shape in a front view. . As a result, the ball rolling inside the second ball-throwing path 3770 described above passes through the second connecting hole 3753 and is thrown to the second through-hole 3733 of the interposed member 750 .

The sorting device 3700 configured as described above throws balls as follows. Balls entering from the opening 710a are thrown to the distribution member 760 and alternately fed to either one of the left and right inclined surfaces 761 by the seesaw member 762 of the distribution member 760. FIG. When the ball rolling on the inclined surface 761 is thrown to the end of the inclined surface 761, it reaches the first ball entrance 64 of the interposed member 3750 arranged on the front side or the right second ball entrance 640r. The ball passes through the inside and is thrown to the back side of the bending member 740 . The ball thrown to the back side of bending member 740, 3740 is guided along the protruding tip end surface of guide part 742 of bending member 740, 3740 and drops downward, and also passes through lower insertion hole 732 of winning member 3730. After passing through the inside of the sensor SE, the ball is thrown to the collection hole 752 of the interposing member 3750 .

A ball entering from the second ball inlet 640 is thrown to the second ball-throwing path 3770 and is thrown inside the second ball-throwing path 3770 from the left end to the right end. The ball that is thrown to the right end of the second ball-throwing path 3770 passes through the inside of the second connecting hole 3753 of the interposition member 3750 arranged on the front side, and passes through the second through-hole 3733 of the winning member 3730. Later, it falls downward while being guided along the protruding tip surface of the guide portion 742 of the bending member 3740, passes through the inside of the lower insertion hole 732 of the prize winning member 3730, passes through the inside of the sensor SE, and then intervenes. The ball is thrown to the collection hole 752 of the installation member 3750 .

Therefore, in the sorting device 3700, the ball entering from the second ball entrance 640 can be detected by the sensor SE arranged on the right side of the winning member 3730 when viewed from the front. There is no need to install a new sensor SE. That is, the sensor SE that detects the ball entering through the opening 710a can also serve as the sensor SE that detects the ball entering the second ball inlet 640, so the cost of the product can be reduced accordingly. .

Next, referring to FIG. 54, second opening 3746 of bending member 3740 will be described. (a) and (b) of FIG. 54 are sectional views of the sorting device 3700. FIG. 54(a) corresponds to FIG. 53(a), and FIG. 54(b) corresponds to FIG. 53(b).

As shown in FIG. 54, a ball enters from the opening 710a and is thrown to the back side of the bending member 3740, and a ball enters from the second ball entrance 640 and is thrown to the back side of the bending member 3740. If the balls that are thrown to the side are thrown to the back side of the bending member 3740 at substantially the same timing, the balls on the back side of the bending member 740 may come into contact with each other and become jammed.

That is, the ball that is thrown from the second ball entrance 640 and is thrown from the second through hole 3733 of the winning member 3730 to the bending member 3740 (hereinafter referred to as the "lower ball") is thrown from the opening 710a. Then, the ball is sent from the through hole 731 of the winning member 3730 to the back side of the bending member 3740, and collides with the ball falling from above to below the bending member 3740 (hereinafter referred to as the "upper ball"), There is a risk that the ball will become stuck and jammed by being caught in the front end of the second through hole 3733 .

On the other hand, in the third embodiment, since the second opening 3746 is formed in the bending member 3740, the upper ball is discharged from the second opening 3746 or escaped between the opposing second openings 3746, whereby the lower ball and the ball on the upper side can be eliminated to prevent the ball from being clogged in the ball feeding path of the bending member 3740 .

That is, when the upper sphere rides on the lower sphere to form a balanced state, the second opening 3746 is formed in the lateral side surface where the upper sphere is positioned, and the upper spheres Since the spherical shape leans on either the left or the right, the upper sphere is sent to the inside of the second opening 3744 on either the left or right. This can eliminate the equilibrium between the lower sphere and the upper sphere. Therefore, it is possible to suppress clogging of balls in the ball feed path of the bending member 3740 .

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 55, a sorting device 4700 according to the fourth embodiment will be described. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

55(a) is a front view of the sorting device 4700 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 55(b) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device 4700 taken along line LVb-LVb in FIG. 55(a). (c) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device 4700 along line LVc-LVc in FIG. 55(b). In addition, in FIGS. 55(a) to 55(c), the passing path through which the ball passes is schematically illustrated with a dashed line.

As shown in FIGS. 55(a) to 55(c), a sorting device 4700 according to the fourth embodiment has a prize winning opening that is located outside and below the opening 744 of the bending member 740 in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 55(a)). 4063 is provided.

The winning opening 4063 is an opening through which a ball flowing down the game area can pass, and is arranged on the front side of the game board 13 . The winning opening 4063 is connected to a third connecting hole 4752a of an interposing member 4750, which will be described later, on the back side thereof, and a ball that has entered the winning opening 4063 is guided to the third communicating hole 54752a.

The recovery hole 752 of the interposing member 4750 is formed by bending downward at the tip of the second ball throwing path KR2, and a path (sixth ball throwing path KR6) through which the ball passes through and is thrown downward is formed. be. That is, the sixth throwing route KR6 and the second throwing route KR2 are connected.

A third connecting hole 4752a projecting to both the left and right sides is formed in the sixth ball throwing path KR6, and a sensor SE for detecting the passage of the ball is arranged in the lower portion of the third connecting hole 4752a.

The third connecting hole 4752a is connected to the open portion of the winning opening 4063 on the back side. As a result, the ball that has entered the prize winning opening 4063 is thrown into the third connecting hole 4752a and is thrown to the sixth ball path.

A sensor SE2 different from the sensor SE arranged on the sixth ball throwing path KR6 is arranged on the passage of the third connecting hole 4752a. As a result, it is possible to detect the ball that has entered the inside of the third connecting hole 4752a.

As a result, the ball ejected from the opening 744 of the bending member 740 can enter the winning opening 4063 . That is, the ball guided by the bending member 740 not only passes through the sensor SE, but also flows out from the opening 744 to the game area. It is possible to form a passing form and add interest to the game.

In addition, the winning opening 4063 may be arranged at a position capable of receiving all the balls that have flowed out from the opening 744 into the game area. Some balls may be placed in unacceptable positions.

In addition, since the opening 744 is formed at the connecting portion between the first ball-throwing passage KR1 and the second ball-throwing passage KR2, the balls that are likely to be clogged can be put out from the opening into the game area, thereby making the first ball-throwing passage KR1. and the second ball throwing route KR2.

Furthermore, since the bending member 740 in which the winning opening 4063 and the opening 744 are formed is arranged on the front side of the game board 13, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the manner in which the ball paid out from the opening 744 enters the winning opening 4063. It is possible to easily impart interest to the player.

Since the third connecting hole 4752a is connected above the sensor SE arranged on the sixth ball throwing path KR6, the ball entering from the winning hole 4063 only passes through the sensor SE2 arranged on the third connecting hole 4752a. Instead, it passes through the sensor SE located on the sixth throwing path KR6. Therefore, the ball entering from the prize winning opening 4063 can pass through the two sensors, so that the player can be entertained.

In addition, since the balls thrown to the bending member 740 are distributed one by one to the left and right by the seesaw member 762 of the distribution member 760, the balls are continuous at the connecting portion between the first ball-throwing path KR1 and the second ball-throwing path KR2. It is possible to suppress the ball being thrown. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a ball from clogging the connecting portion between the first ball-throwing path KR1 and the second ball-throwing path KR2.

Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments, the present invention is by no means limited to the above embodiments, and it will be easily understood that various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, a gaming machine may be configured by replacing or combining part or all of one embodiment with part or all of another one or more embodiments.

In the first embodiment, the case where one sensor 630 is arranged on the center frame 600 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, two sensors 630 may be arranged symmetrically about the center line of the center frame 600 in the horizontal direction. More than two sensors 630 may be provided.

In the first embodiment, the case where the sensor 630 is arranged on the frame body 610 of the center frame 600 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the sensor 630 may be arranged on the front cover 460 of the vertical displacement unit 400 . In this case, since the irradiation range of the sensor 630 can be widened, the detection area of the sensor 630 can be expanded.

In the first embodiment, the case where the cover member 621 of the center cover 620 is formed as a convex curved surface on the front side has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be bent in a substantially V-shaped cross section at the central portion on the front side. Alternatively, it may be formed as a convex curved surface on the back side. Alternatively, a curved surface may be partially formed. At least, the light emitted from the sensor 630 should be reflected by the cover member 630 so that an object in front of the game board 13 can be detected.

In the above-described first embodiment, the cover member 621 of the center cover 620 serves both to make the player visually recognize the third symbol display device 81 arranged on the back side and to serve as the light emitted from the sensor 630. Although it has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this, and the area of the cover member 621 is an area that allows the player to visually recognize the third symbol display device 81 and an area that reflects the light emitted from the sensor 630. You can divide the area into This modification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a cross-sectional view of a center frame 600 as a modified example. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted. 56 corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 40(b), and only the cross-section of the center cover 620 is schematically illustrated. Further, in FIG. 56, the outer shape of the third pattern display device 81 arranged on the back side of the center frame 600 is illustrated by a chain double-dashed line.

As shown in FIG. 56, the cover member 621 of the center frame 600 has second regions R2 at both ends in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 56), and center sides (third pattern display devices) of the second regions R2 at both ends. 81) is provided with a first region R1.

The first region R1 is a region where the third pattern display device 81 arranged on the back side of the cover member 621 can be visually recognized by the player, and is formed of a light-transmitting material with a relatively high degree of transparency. The second region R2 is a region that reflects the light emitted from the sensor 630 to the front side of the gaming machine 10 (toward the player). The boundary position between the first region R1 and the second region R2 should be visible to the player positioned on the front side of the gaming machine 10. Identical positions are preferred. Also, in this modified example, the sensors 630 are arranged at both left and right ends for easy understanding.

In this case, for example, the back side or the front side of the second region R2 may be coated with a member having a high reflectance such as silver foil. Alternatively, a silver sticker may be attached to the back side or front side of the second region R2. In this case, since the light emitted from the sensor 630 can be easily reflected, the object on the front side of the game board 13 can be detected more reliably.

Alternatively, the portion of the second region R2 may have a curved shape that protrudes toward the back side, or the portion of the second region R2 may have a flat surface. In this case, the range in which the light emitted from the sensor 630 is reflected by the second region R2 and emitted to the front side can be widened, so the detection range of the sensor 630 can be expanded.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the sensor 630 is arranged in front of the cover member 621, but the present invention is not limited to this. may be set. In this case, the light emitted from the sensor 630 is transmitted through the cover member 621, so that the object on the front side of the game board 13 can be detected. Furthermore, in this case, since the cover member 620 has a convex curved shape on the front side, when the light emitted from the sensor 630 is incident on the cover member 630, the irradiation angle can be changed. That is, by transmitting through the cover member 630 having a curved shape convex to the front side, the irradiation range of the sensor 630 emitted to the front side of the game board 13 can be widened.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the two inclined surfaces 761 (third ball throwing path KR3) of the distribution member 760 are formed to have the same length has been described. The lengths of (the third throwing path KR3) may be different. In this case, the time required for the sensor SE to detect each ball sorted to the left and right by the seesaw member 762 of the sorting member 720 can be made different between the left and right paths, so that the player can be entertained.

In the first and second embodiments described above, the roller 492a is made of an elastic material, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the roller 492a may be made of a material having a lower elastic modulus than rubber or urethane, and an elastic member such as rubber or urethane may be fitted on the outer peripheral surface of the roller 492a. In this case, since the volume of the elastic body can be reduced, the manufacturing cost of the roller member 492 can be suppressed.

In the first embodiment, the cover member 621 of the center frame 600 has a uniform thickness. However, the thickness of the cover member 621 may be varied. For example, the cross-sectional shape of the cover member 621 may be substantially D-shaped. In this case, since the cover member 621 becomes a convex lens, the third pattern display device 81 and the decoration member 450 arranged on the back side of the cover member 621 can be displayed in a large size.

In the first embodiment, the elastic deformation of the roller 492a is used to sandwich the roller 492a between the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491. It is not limited to this, and may utilize the displacement of the roller 492a. For example, the shaft portion 492b of the roller 492a may be displaceable, and the roller 492a may be displaced and sandwiched between the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491. good.

In this case, the roller 492a can be sandwiched between the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491 without utilizing the elastic deformation of the roller 492a. For example, it can be formed from a resin having a lower elastic modulus than rubber or urethane, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced accordingly.

In the above-described third embodiment, the upper roller 492a contacts the decorative member 450 before the lower roller 492a. The roller 492a that is placed on the lower side may contact the decorative member 450 later than the roller 492a that is placed on the lower side.

For example, the roller 492a arranged above the regulating unit 490 at the initial position (the position where the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 and the roller 492a are spaced apart from each other) is positioned between the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 and the front-rear direction (FIG. 50). It may be configured to provide a predetermined gap in (a) the left-right direction). In this case, when the decorative member 450 is displaced to the first position, the time until it comes into contact with the roller 492a is delayed compared to the first and third embodiments. The time during which the load (resistance) increases can be shortened.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the irradiation regulating portion 544 and the LED 532 are arranged in contact with each other has been described. Gaps may be formed. In this case, since both ends of the irradiation hole 543 can be opened, it is possible to prevent air from staying (accumulating) inside the irradiation hole 543 . That is, since an air flow can be created inside the irradiation hole 543, the heat generated by the operation of the LED 532 can be efficiently cooled.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the surface roughening is formed in an uneven shape has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the surface roughening may be a surface consisting only of projections (protrusions). , a surface consisting only of recesses (hollows). The roughening may also extend as striations or grooves. Furthermore, the concave and convex cross-sectional shapes may be circular, keyed, polygonal, or a combination thereof. That is, as long as a portion higher than the reference position and a portion lower than the reference position are formed, and a plurality of portions (surfaces) capable of reflecting light are formed, and diffuse reflection is possible, the shape of the unevenness is arbitrary.

In each of the above-described embodiments, a smoke generating device (smoke generating means) for generating smoke is provided on the back side of the game board 13 (base plate 60), and the smoke generated from the smoke generating device is distributed to the displacement area of the rotation unit 500. It may be introduced into (rotating area). That is, the space between the third pattern display device 81 and the center frame 600 (center cover 620) may be filled with smoke. As a result, the light emitted from the LED 532 can be visually recognized by the player while allowing smoke to pass through, and the blinking of the LED 532 can be highlighted. In addition, while the rotating unit 500 or its rear side member is hidden by the smoke (while making it difficult for the player to visually recognize), only the blinking of the LED 532 can be visually recognized. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect of the LED 532 (light).

In the conventional product, it was difficult to keep the above-mentioned space filled with smoke because the smoke was pushed out to the outer peripheral side as the rotation unit rotated. Therefore, it was difficult to obtain a smoke effect. On the other hand, according to the rotating unit 500 in each of the above-described embodiments, the air blow holes 512 and 522 are opened in the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520, and the rear surface of the structure in which the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 are assembled. Since the side is opened, the outside air taken in from the air blowing holes 512 and 522 can be exhausted from the back side and circulated. Therefore, the space described above can be filled with smoke (stayed around the rotation unit 500). As a result, the LED 532 can be blinked in a smoke-filled atmosphere, and the effects described above can be achieved.

<First control example>
Next, a first control example of the pachinko machine 10 in each embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 to 123. FIG. In this first control example, it is possible to execute a jackpot effect using the rotation unit 500 during the variable display. More specifically, the rotating unit 500 is composed of a known Versalighter, and by varying the light emission pattern of a plurality of LEDs 532 arranged in a row inside according to the amount of rotation of the rotating unit 500, the rotating operation is performed. A specific character is displayed as an afterimage on the trajectory of .

In this control example, the rotation speed of the rotation unit 500 is set to 100 ms/rotation (that is, 600 rpm (revolution per minute)) when a specific character is displayed as an afterimage on the trajectory of the rotation operation. . Here, since the time resolution (minimum visible lighting time) of the human eye is about 50 to 100 ms, a light source that repeats turning on and off at intervals of 100 ms is always recognized as being in a lighting state. Since the rotational speed of the rotating unit 500 in this control example is 100 ms/rotation, the rotating unit 500 rotates once every 100 ms and returns to the same position. By controlling the LED 532 to light up again when returning to the same position, it is possible for the player to have the illusion that the position illuminated by the LED 532 is always lit. As a result, it is possible to give the impression that a specific character is displayed as an afterimage on the trajectory of the rotating motion.

Note that the rotation speed of the rotation unit 500 is not limited to 100 ms/rotation, and may be slower or faster than this. When the rotation speed is high, it is possible to visually recognize (illusion) that specific characters and patterns are displayed more clearly. When the rotation speed is slow, it is possible to visually recognize (illusion) that a specific character or pattern is blinking. By providing a case where the rotation speed is fast and a case where it is slow, it is possible to provide a case where the specific characters and patterns are lit and a case where they are blinked, thereby increasing the variation of the display and improving the interest of the player. . Further, it is of course possible to provide a case in which specific characters or patterns are blinked only by varying the lighting intervals of the LEDs 532 without varying the rotation speed.

In addition, since the rotating unit 500 has a board member 531 on which a plurality of LEDs 532 are mounted, when a jackpot effect is performed using the rotating unit 500, the LEDs 532 and the IC/capacitor mounted on the board operate. Heat is generated by doing so. Therefore, if the rotating unit 500 is operated frequently, the solder that connects the LED 532, the IC, the capacitor, and the like to the substrate may be melted due to heat generation, resulting in poor contact. Therefore, in this control example, the operation frequency of the rotation unit 500 is suppressed, and a novel big win effect can be realized while preventing poor contact.

Also, in this first control example, the number of times a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of times a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 or the right second ball entrance 640r can each be suspended up to four times. It consists of Then, when the number of times a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of times a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 or the right second ball entrance 640r reaches the upper limit of 4 times (a total of 8 times When the ball entry is suspended), it is configured to be able to execute a continuous notice effect (8 suspension effects) that executes the same system effect over the variable display corresponding to the 8 times of ball entry. . By this continuous advance notice effect, the player's sense of anticipation can be continuously held over a plurality of continuous variable displays. In the following description, for the sake of convenience, the special symbol lottery that is executed based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 will be referred to as the "special symbol 1 lottery". The special symbol lottery executed based on the ball entering the ball opening 640 (right second ball entrance 640r) will be referred to as "special symbol 2 lottery".

First, the configuration of the rotating unit 500 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 and 58. FIG. FIG. 57(a) is a diagram illustrating a case where the rotation unit 500 is driven by the drive motor 457 to rotate 90 degrees clockwise in a front view. This example shows a case where only the outermost LED 532 (LED1) among the plurality of LEDs 532 arranged on the rotating unit 500 continues to be lit, and the other LEDs 532 are extinguished. As shown in FIG. 57(a), when the rotating unit 500 rotates clockwise by 90 degrees while the LED1 continues to light up, the player observing from the front of the rotating unit 500 sees that the LED1 emits light. The trajectory of light (the hatched portion in FIG. 57) is recognized as an afterimage, and it is recognized as if an arc of the same color as the emitted color of the LED 1 appeared in the air. In an actual effect, specific characters are displayed as an afterimage by switching the lighting timing and lighting timing of the plurality of LEDs 532 according to the rotational position (the number of rotational operation steps).

FIG. 57(b) is a diagram showing the arrangement of the plurality of LEDs 532 of the rotating unit 500. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 57(b), in the rotating unit 500, 40 sets of LEDs from LED1 to LED40 are arranged in a row as the LEDs 532. As shown in FIG. Each LED is composed of LEDs of three colors of red, blue, and green, and a vertically elongated substantially rectangular diffusion plate is disposed in front of the LEDs. With this diffusion plate, the LED light emitted from the rear side can be evenly (uniformly) transmitted to the front side. In addition, as described above in the description of the structure of the rotating unit 500, each LED 532 is not directly arranged on the back side of each diffusion plate. Each diffuser plate is irradiated with the light reflected by the inclined surface 563b of the reflector plate 560 (see FIGS. 34A and 34B).

Next, with reference to FIG. 58, how the afterimage looks when the rotation unit 500 is actually used for the big win effect will be described. As shown in FIG. 58, in this control example, when a special symbol lottery results in a big win and the rotating unit 500 operates, an afterimage is displayed by setting a predetermined light emission pattern for each of the LEDs 1 to 40. . In this control example, the light emission pattern of each of the LEDs 1 to 40 is set so that the afterimage forms the characters "hit". By showing the winning character as an afterimage, the player can easily recognize that the special symbol lottery of this time was a big win. Although the details will be described later, the light emission patterns of the LEDs 1 to 40 constituting the rotating unit 500 are defined in the operation scenario table 222f provided in the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. The light emission pattern defined in this operation scenario table 222f is defined for one round of the rotation unit 500. FIG. That is, the same light emission pattern is repeatedly set each time the rotating unit 500 rotates once. As a result, the same characters (“win” characters) can appear at the same position every round. Therefore, it is possible to make the player easily recognize the word "hit".

Although illustration is omitted, the lower half of the rotation plane of the rotation unit 500 displays an afterimage of the character "winning" having rotational symmetry with the character "winning" displayed on the upper half. controlled by As a result, it is possible to make the player more certainly aware of the big win.

Next, the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 to 63. FIG. FIG. 59 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, and FIG. 59(a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG.59(b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen.

The third pattern consists of 9 kinds of main patterns numbered from "1" to "9" and sub-patterns not numbered. Each main pattern consists of a back pattern consisting of sea creatures (octopus, shark, crab, etc.) predetermined for each number, and a number from "1" to "9". The sub-symbol is composed of a simple substantially triangular pattern.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when the result of the lottery of the special symbols performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is a big hit, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. It is configured such that a jackpot is generated after the end of the variable display. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, a variable display in which the same main symbols are not aligned is performed.

For example, if the lottery result of the special symbols is "big win A" or "big win C", a variable display is performed in which one of the main symbols "1 to 9" is added. Further, if it is a "jackpot B", a variable display is performed in which one of the main symbols to which the even numbers "2, 4, 6, 8" are added is aligned. That is, there is a possibility that the variable display in which the main symbols with the odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are aligned only in the case of the probability variable jackpot. Therefore, when the variable display is executed, the game can be played with the expectation that the odd numbers will be aligned. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out, a variable display is performed in which the main symbols of the same number are not aligned.

As shown in FIG. 59(a), the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is roughly divided into two upper and lower parts. The lower 1/4 is a sub-display area Ds for displaying an advance notice effect, characters, the number of pending balls, and the like.

In the main display area Dm, three pattern rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 of upper, middle and lower are displayed. The above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. That is, in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, main symbols and sub-symbols are alternately arranged in ascending or descending numerical order, and each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is periodically scrolled from right to left to display a variable display. done. In particular, in the upper symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in three stages of left, middle and right for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The left vertical line, the middle vertical line, and the right vertical line of the main display area Dm are set as effective lines L1 to L3, respectively. In addition, a diagonal line rising to the right and a diagonal line falling to the right in the main display area Dm are set as effective lines L4 and L5, respectively. During each game, the third symbols are stopped and displayed on the activated lines L1 to L5 in the order of upper symbol row L1→lower symbol row L3→middle symbol row L2. This stop display state is maintained for at least one second. In this way, by displaying the stopped third symbol for a certain period of time (one second or more), the player can determine whether the combination of the third symbols corresponds to the big win (the lottery result of the special symbol is the big win). presence or absence) can be suppressed from being overlooked. Also, when the third symbol is stopped, if a combination of big winning symbols (combination of the same main symbols in this control example) is aligned on the effective line L1, a big winning moving image (opening effect) is displayed as a big winning.

In addition, when the combination of the third symbols stopped and displayed is a combination corresponding to a loss and there is a held ball, a variable display corresponding to a lottery based on the held ball is started after the stop display for 1 second. . In addition, when there are a plurality of reserved balls, a lottery is executed based on the reserved ball corresponding to the oldest incoming ball in terms of time.

On the other hand, when the third pattern of the combination corresponding to the missing of the special pattern is stop-displayed for one second in the absence of the reserved ball, the stop-display of the third pattern continues thereafter. This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses or a new ball enters the first ball entrance 64 . Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed since the third symbol was stop-displayed, a demonstration effect indicating that the game is not being executed is displayed. Although the player continuously shoots the ball for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds), the ball does not enter any of the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, and the right second ball entrance 640r. It is rare that the third symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds). This is due to the fact that no games are played by Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed after the third symbol is stopped and displayed, it is determined that the player is not playing a game, and the demonstration effect is started. do. Thereby, the player who is going to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily judge whether the game is being played based on the presence or absence of display of the demonstration performance. On the other hand, a new ball enters any one of the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, and the right second ball entrance 640r before a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses. In this case, the variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the new incoming ball is executed.

The sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally below the main display area Dm, and is used to display the ball that has entered the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, and the right second ball entrance 640r. This is an area for displaying the number of held balls, which is the number of balls (held balls) for which variation has not been executed. As shown in FIG. 59(b), the sub-display area Ds includes a substantially square-shaped execution display area Ds1a in which symbols corresponding to the variable display being executed are displayed, and a pending symbol indicating the number of pending balls. and a holding display area Ds1b having a horizontally long substantially rectangular shape.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 59(b), a total of nine main symbols and sub-symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In addition, at the right end and left end (outside the active line) of the main display area Dm, three parts of the main pattern and three parts of the sub-symbol of the third pattern are displayed.

On the other hand, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), or each second ball entrance (second 2 ball entrance 640, right second ball entrance 640r), the number of times the ball is entered is suspended up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of suspended balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, and the secondary It is also displayed in the display area Ds. More specifically, in the holding display area Ds1b, the number of held balls based on the number of balls entered into the first ball entrance 64 and the number of balls entered into each of the second ball entrances (second ball entrance 640, right second ball entrance 640r ), the same number of reserved symbols as the sum of the number of reserved balls based on the entering balls are displayed. That is, when one reserved pattern is displayed in the reserved display area Ds1b, it indicates that the total number of reserved balls is one ball, and when four reserved patterns are displayed, the total number of reserved balls is 4 balls. Further, when no reserved symbol is displayed in the reserved display area Ds1b, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball. In FIG. 59(b), the display contents when the total of the number of held balls based on entry into the first ball entrance 64 and the number of held balls based on entry into each of the second ball entrances is 6. , and six circular reserved symbols are displayed in the reserved display area Ds1b. The number of reserved symbols displayed in the reserved display area Ds1b is updated in synchronization with the actual number of reserved balls. In addition, the reserved symbols displayed in the reserved display area Ds1b are left-justified and displayed in order from the reserved symbols corresponding to the oldest reserved ball in terms of time.

In this control example, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 and the ball entering each of the second ball entrances (the second ball entrance 640 and the right second ball entrance 640r) are Although it is configured to be able to hold up to 4 times, the upper limit of the number of held balls is not limited to 4 times, even if it is set to 3 times or less or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times) good. In addition, the upper limit of the number of held balls entering the first ball entrance 64 and the number of held balls entering each second ball entrance (second ball entrance 640, right second ball entrance 640r) It is not limited to be the same as the upper limit of the number. The upper limit of the number of held balls for entering the first ball entrance 64 may be larger than the upper limit of the number of held balls for entering each of the second ball entrances, or conversely, it may be smaller. good. In addition, instead of displaying the reserved symbols in the reserved display area Ds1b, the number of reserved balls may be indicated by numbers in a part of the third pattern display device 81, or the areas divided into four may be changed by the number of reserved balls ( For example, they may be displayed in different colors or lighting patterns. Further, since the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37, the third symbol display device 81 may not display the number of reserved balls. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls, which is the maximum holding number, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 60 to 63, a description will be given of a continuous advance notice effect (8 pending effects), which is one of the effects executed in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example. This continuous notice production (8 ball holding production) is the number of holding balls (holding balls with special symbol 1) based on the entry to the first ball entrance 64, and each second ball entrance (second ball entrance 640, right second ball entrance 640r). .

FIG. 60(a) is a diagram showing a display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when it is determined to start the eight pending effect. When the eighth ball entry is suspended in total during the variable display of the third symbol, it is determined whether or not to execute the eight pending effect one second before the variable display ends. Although the details will be described later, this 8 ball reservation effect is configured to be more likely to be executed as the lottery results with high expectations are reserved among the reserved balls. Therefore, when the 8-piece pending effect is executed, the player can play the game in anticipation of a big win in the pending state. When the start of the 8-ball reservation performance is determined, the characters ``preparing for the school of fish mode'' are displayed on the upper part of the variable display main display area Dm which is being changed when the 8th ball is reserved. This makes it possible for the player to easily understand that the 8 pending performance will be executed before the performance is started. Therefore, it is possible to expect a big win in any one of the eight reserved variable displays.

FIG. 60(b) is a diagram showing the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when the 8-hold effect is being executed. As shown in FIG. 60(b), when the 8 fish hold effect is executed, the characters "Fish school mode" are displayed in the upper part of the main display area Dm. In addition, many fish (schools of fish) appear behind the sub-display area Ds. By changing the display mode (rear side) of the execution display area Ds1a and the pending display area Ds1b, the player is informed that the currently executing variable display and the pending variable display are highly expected. easily recognizable.

FIG. 61 is a diagram showing a display mode of a special pressing effect that may be executed in the 8-holding effect. It is determined whether or not to execute this special pressing effect when reach occurs in the 8-holding effect. Note that reach means that the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are stopped and displayed in the variable display, and only the middle symbol row Z2 is variably displayed, and on any of the effective lines L1 to L5. This mode shows a state in which the main symbols with the same number are stopped and displayed, suggesting that there is a chance that the main symbols with the same number are aligned on the activated line. The example shown in FIG. 61 shows a state in which two main symbols with the number "1" attached are stopped on the activated line L3. In this case, the main symbol with the number "1" attached to the right side of the middle symbol row Z2 is stop-displayed to become a stop symbol of a big win, so that the player is expected to win a big win. be able to.

When reach occurs in the 8-hold effect and execution of the special pressing effect is determined, as shown in FIG. Is displayed. By displaying the image of this button, the player can be prompted to press the frame button 22 . Also, when the player presses the frame button 22 in the state shown in FIG. 61 (the button image is displayed), a lottery is entered on the condition that the variable display being executed corresponds to a big win. When winning, a special notification sound (determined notification sound) is output. By outputting this special notification sound, the player can be made to recognize that the current variation display will be a big win before the third symbol is stopped and displayed. In this control example, when it is decided to output the special notification sound, the output of the special notification sound is not limited to one time, but is configured to be output a plurality of times according to the operation of the frame button 22 by the player. there is With this configuration, the player who wants to listen to the special notification sound can operate the frame button 22 many times while the image of the button is being displayed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the willingness of the player to participate in the game.

Note that, in the first control example, an effect that prompts the user to press the frame button 22 is provided in addition to the special pressing effect. Hereinafter, the pressing effect other than the special pressing effect will be referred to as a normal pressing effect in order to distinguish it from the special pressing effect. In this normal pressing effect, for example, pressing of the frame button 22 is prompted when the game progresses to super ready-to-win, and when the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected, an effect to suggest the degree of expectation of super ready-to-win is executed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 62 and 63, transition of the display mode of the sub-display area Ds during execution of the 8 pending effect will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 62, the transition of the display mode when no new prize winning is detected during the period from the start of execution of the 8 pending effects to the end will be described.

FIG. 62(a) is a diagram showing the display mode of the sub-display area Ds when the first variable display is being executed after the 8-pending effect is started. As shown in FIG. 62(a), a special symbol lottery based on the first reserved ball (the oldest reserved ball in terms of time) is executed, and when the variable display showing the lottery result is executed, the reserved display is performed. The pending symbols displayed in the area Ds1b are shifted one by one toward the execution display area Ds1a and displayed. As a result, the reserved symbol is not displayed at the right end of the reserved display area Ds1b. Even in this case, the fish school display on the back side continues to be displayed on the entire sub-display area Ds. Thereafter, regardless of the number of fluctuations (the number of displayed reserved symbols), the fish shoal display continues over the entire sub-display area Ds during execution of the 8-piece reserved effect. As a result, the fish school display indicating whether or not the 8-ball pending effect is being executed can be displayed in a wider display range regardless of the number of pending balls. In addition, the processing load of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced as compared with the case where the display area of the fish school display is changed according to the number of held balls.

As shown in FIG. 62(b), the reserved symbols displayed in the reserved display area Ds1b disappear, and the sub-display area Ds is displayed while the variable display based on the last (eighth) reserved ball is being executed. The fish school display over the entire area continues. Then, when the variable display based on the last reserved ball of the eight-piece reserved effect is completed and the lottery result is lost, the back surface of the sub-display area Ds is returned to the normal back surface (Fig. 62(c)). reference). As a result, the player can easily recognize that the 8-pending effect has ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 63, the transition of the display mode when a new prize winning is detected during the period from the start of the execution of the 8 pending effects to the end will be described. When the 8-ball holding effect is executed and the back of the secondary display area Ds is displayed as a school of fish (see FIG. 63(a)), the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, or the right second entrance is displayed. When a new winning for the ball mouth 640r is detected, the display area after the reserved symbol corresponding to the new winning is set in a different manner. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 63(b), the display area on the right side of the secondary display area Ds, which includes the reserved pattern corresponding to the new reserved ball, has a display mode in which a large number of bubbles are displayed on the back ( bubble display). On the other hand, the rear surface of the display area on the left side of the reserved pattern corresponding to the new reserved ball is maintained as the fish school display. In this way, the reserved symbols corresponding to the reserved balls that were reserved at the time the 8 reserved performance was started, and the reserved balls that did not exist at the time the 8 reserved performance was started (the 8 reserved performance was executed To make a player clearly recognize to what extent the 8-ball holding performance continues by making the back image different from the holding pattern corresponding to the holding ball which is not used for judgment of whether to play or not. can be done. Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, it is divided into an area for displaying reserved patterns corresponding to the reserved balls that were reserved at the time when the 8 reserved performance was started, and an area for displaying reserved patterns corresponding to new reserved balls. The display mode in which the screen is displayed by pressing is referred to as "split display".

This split display basically continues until the variable display corresponding to the 8 reserved balls to be the target of the 8 reserved performance ends. That is, as shown in FIG. 63(c), when the variable display corresponding to the 8th reserved ball in the 8-ball reserved effect is executed, the entire reserved display area Ds1b is set to bubble display, and the execution display area Only Ds1a is displayed as a school of fish. In this state, when the last variation effect of the 8 pending effects is completed and the combination of the stop symbols corresponding to the failure is stopped and displayed, after the next variation, as shown in FIG. 63(d), the normal display mode. back to That is, not only the fish school display but also the bubble display is canceled. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the 8-piece pending effect has ended.

Thus, in the first control example, when a new starting winning prize is detected during the execution of the 8-ball pending effect, and the number of the ball-holding balls increases, the 8-ball ball that is the target of the 8 ball-holding effect is handled. A reserved pattern and a reserved pattern corresponding to a new reserved ball are displayed separately. Here, even if a new start winning is detected until the 8-piece pending effect is completed, if the entire sub-display area Ds is fixed to the fish school display, the player will be notified when the 8-piece pending effect ends. There is a possibility that it will make you feel uncomfortable. Although the reserved pattern is displayed, the display mode of the sub-display area Ds returns to the normal mode, which may give the impression that the 8-piece reserved effect has been terminated in the middle. It is from. On the other hand, in the first control example, by performing the split display, it is possible to clearly suggest to the player how long the 8 pending effect will continue when a new start winning is detected. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from having a sense of incompatibility at the end of the 8-piece holding effect.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the first control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 77. FIG. First, the details of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4) provided in the pachinko machine 10 will be described.

The main controller 110 executes major processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as the jackpot lottery, display setting of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the display result lottery of the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 64) for storing various counters for controlling these processes.

Here, with reference to FIG. 64, counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters and the like are used by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in order to set the jackpot lottery, the display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the lottery of the display result of the second symbol display device 83, and the like. used in

The setting of the jackpot lottery and the display of the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81 includes a first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and a first random number counter C1 used for selecting the jackpot type (jackpot pattern). Hit type counter C2, stop type selection counter C3 used to select the stop type of stop in the special symbol, variation type counter CS1 used to select the variation pattern, initial value setting of the first random number counter C1 A first initial value random number counter CINI1 is used. A second winning random number counter C4 is used for lottery of normal symbols (second symbol display device 83), and a second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 78), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 89). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 . Although the details will be described later, the RAM 203 has a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a in which each counter value for winning the first ball entrance 64 is stored, and each second ball entrance (second ball entrance 640, There is provided a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b in which each counter value is stored with respect to the winning to the right second ball entrance 640r). As described above, in this control example, up to four retained balls are provided for each of the first ball entrance 64 and each of the second ball entrances. For this reason, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 during a period in which a special symbol lottery is possible, such as when the special symbol is not displayed in a variable display or when the special symbol jackpot game is not in progress, each counter value is changed to a special value. It is stored in the symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, and each counter value is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b when a ball wins in one of the second ball entrances. After that, among the counter values stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the oldest counter value in terms of time is moved to the execution area, and the special symbol 1 or Various settings and control processes are executed for the variable display (dynamic display) of the special symbol 2 .

On the other hand, the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or each of the second ball entrances during a period in which the special symbol 1 cannot be drawn, such as during the variable display of the special symbols or during the jackpot game. When the number of reserved balls corresponding to the mouth is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example), each counter value is acquired, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball It is stored in the storage area 203b. In addition, when the corresponding number of reserved balls is the upper limit value (4 in this control example) or more, each counter value etc. is not acquired, and only prize balls (in this embodiment, 5 prize balls) is treated as an invalid ball to be paid out to the player.

In this control example, the upper limit of the number of held balls is four for each of the first ball entrance 64 and each of the second ball entrances. 3), or more than 4 (eg, 8). Moreover, it is good also as a structure which does not provide an upper limit.

Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399). It is configured to return to In particular, when the first winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that ranges from 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 78) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 89).

The value of the first hit random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (once per timer interrupt processing in this control example), and the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or each second ball entrance (second entrance). It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing of winning the ball mouth 640, right second ball entrance 640r). The value of the random number for the special symbol jackpot is defined in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 66(a)) provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. FIG. If the value of the first hit random number counter C1 matches the value of the random number that will be the big hit defined in the special symbol big hit random number table 202a, it is determined as the special symbol big hit.

Here, with reference to FIG. 66(a), the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a will be described. The special symbol jackpot random number table 202a is a table in which random numbers (determined values) determined to be winning in each game state in the special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 lottery are set. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 66(a), when the gaming state is a low probability gaming state, the value of the first per random number counter C1 obtained in the lottery of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is "7", and if it is "7", it is determined to be a big win. Also, when the game state is the high probability game state, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first winning random number counter C1 is within the range of "0 to 9" in the lottery of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2. If it is within the range of "0 to 9", it is determined as a jackpot.

Here, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area is a random number for a special symbol jackpot, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is a special symbol. It will be the one at the time of the big hit of the design. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big win is the display mode indicated by the value of the first winning type counter C2 stored in the same execution area.

The first winning random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0-399. As described above, in the low-probability state of the special symbol, there is one value of the first winning random number counter C1 that becomes the special symbol jackpot, and its random value "7" is the special symbol jackpot random number table as described above. 202a. Among the total number of random numbers of 400 as described above, the total number of random number numbers for a big hit is 1, so the probability of a big win for special symbols is "1/400". On the other hand, in the special symbol high probability state, there are 10 values of the first winning random number counter C1 for the special symbol jackpot. 202a. Among the total number of random numbers of 400 as described above, the total number of random number numbers that become a big hit is 10, so the probability of a special symbol big win is "1/40".

Returning to FIG. 64, the description continues. The value of the first win type counter C2 is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. Then, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a big hit, one of the big wins A to C is determined based on the value of the first winning type counter C2 and the big winning type selection table 202b (see FIG. 66(b)). The jackpot type will be selected.

Here, with reference to FIG.66(b), the detail of the jackpot classification selection table 202b is demonstrated. As shown in FIG. 66(b), in this jackpot type selection table 202b, the jackpot type to be selected is defined in association with each value range of the first hit type counter C2. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 66(b), the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 47" is defined in association with "jackpot A". This "jackpot A" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 16, and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to a probability variable state with special symbols. Since the number of rounds is the largest and the game state after the big win is set to a probability variable state that is advantageous to the player, the "jackpot A" is the most disadvantageous jackpot type for the player. Of the 100 counter values (random numbers) that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 48 random numbers select "jackpot A". ' is 48%.

In addition, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "48 to 87" in association with "jackpot B". This "jackpot B" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 16, and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to a time-saving state with normal symbols. Since the number of rounds is the largest along with "jackpot A", it is advantageous for the player in terms of the number of prize balls that the player can obtain, but the game state after the jackpot is the most disadvantageous because the probability variable state is not given after the jackpot. becomes. Of the 100 counter values (random numbers) that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 40 random numbers select "jackpot B". ' is 40%.

In addition, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "88 to 99" in association with "jackpot C". This "jackpot C" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is two and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to a probability variable state with special symbols. Since the number of rounds is the smallest, it is disadvantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that the player can obtain, but since the probability variable state is given after the big win, the game state after the big win is advantageous for the player. Of the 100 counter values (random numbers) that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, there are 12 random numbers that select "jackpot C". The ratio of selecting the jackpot C” is 12%.

Returning to FIG. 64, the description continues. The stop type selection counter C3 is, for example, incremented by one within a range of 0 to 99, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In this control example, the stop type at the time of loss displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop type selection counter C3, and after the ready-to-win occurs, the final stop symbol shifts by one before or after the ready-to-win symbol. "Reach outside the front and rear" (for example, 98, 99) to stop at the same time, and "Reach other than the front and back" (for example, the range of 90 to 97) in which the final stop symbol stops at a position other than the front and rear of the reach symbol after the same reach occurs. Three stop (effect) patterns such as "completely out of reach" (for example, the range of 0 to 89) are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (once per timer interrupt processing in this control example), and the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or each second ball entrance (second entrance). It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing of winning the ball mouth 640, right second ball entrance 640r).

In addition, from the value (random number) of the stop type selection counter C3, the random value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by a stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control It is provided in ROM 202 of device 110 . In addition, in this control example, this table is divided into one for when the probability of special symbols is high and one for when the probability of special symbols is low. is changing This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state or a special symbol low probability state.

For example, in a high-probability state, a table for high-probability situations with a wide random number range of 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type of "complete failure" so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary because the jackpot is likely to occur. is selected, making it easier for "completely out" to be selected. In this table, the "front-rear out-of-reach reach" is narrowed to 98 and 99, and the "non-front-rear out-of-reel reach" is also narrowed from 90 to 97, making it difficult to select the "front-rear out-of-reel reach" or the "non-rear-rear out-of-reel reach". In addition, in the low-probability state, the range of the random number corresponding to the stop type of "completely out" is as narrow as 0 to 79 in order to secure the time for the ball to enter the first ball entrance 64. table for is selected, making it difficult for "completely out" to be selected.

In this stop type selection table, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of "Reach other than front-rear deviation" is widened from 80 to 97, making it easier for "Reach other than front-rear deviation" to be selected. Therefore, in the low-probability state, it is possible to perform many ready-to-win displays with a long performance time, so that the time for the ball to enter the first ball entrance 64 can be secured, and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 can be continued. easier to do. In the latter table as well, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of "outside reach" is set to 98,99.

The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). One variation pattern is determined from the variation pattern table set by the variation type counter CS1. A variation time (dynamic display period) is set for this variation pattern, and the variation type counter CS1 is also a counter that determines the variation time. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 89), which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process. It should be noted that the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIGS. 67 and 68) storing a random value for determining one variation time of pattern variation from the value (random value) of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. located inside.

A plurality of data tables for selecting a variation pattern are defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIGS. 67 and 68). In this variation pattern selection table 202d, a plurality of variation pattern tables are set according to the game state, and variation pattern tables are set for each result of win/fail determination. Details of each variation pattern table will be described later with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68. FIG.

The second hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that increments by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second winning random number counter C4 completes one cycle, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In this example of control, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically at each timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 78), and the ball passes through either the left or right normal ball entrance (through gate) 67. It is acquired when it is detected, and stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c of the RAM203.

The value of the random number that is the winning of the normal symbol is defined in the normal symbol random number table 202c (see FIG. 66(c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is If the value of the random number to be a win defined in the normal symbol random number table 202c is matched, it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is a hit. The details of the normal per symbol random number table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. 66(c).

FIG. 66(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal per symbol random number table 202c. In this normal symbol random number table 202c, when the normal symbol probability is low (during the normal state of the normal symbol), there are 21 random numbers that are normal symbol hits, and the range is "5 to 20". . Among the 240 possible random numbers of the second winning random number counter C4, the total number of winning random numbers is 16, so the probability of winning the normal symbol is "16/240".

When the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal pattern low probability mode, when the ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired and the second pattern display device 83 is obtained. In , the variable display of normal symbols is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 20", it is determined that the winning is done, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol ), and the electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time". In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of normal symbols, the electric accessary 640a is opened only "0.2 seconds x 1 time" when the normal symbols are won. However, the open time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "0.5 sec x 2 times".

On the other hand, when the probability of normal symbols is high (during the time-saving state of normal symbols), there are 200 random numbers that are normal symbols, and the range is "5 to 204". The total number of random numbers that can be obtained by the second winning random number counter C4 is 240, and the total number of random numbers that will be a win is 200. Therefore, the probability of winning a normal symbol is "1/1.2". .

When the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal pattern high probability mode, when the ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is obtained, and the second pattern display device 83 is obtained. At , the variable display of normal symbols is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the obtained second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined to be elected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol ), the symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is opened “1 second×2 times”. In this way, when the probability of normal symbols is high, the variable display time is very short, from 30 seconds to 3 seconds, compared to when the probability of normal symbols is low. Since it becomes very long as “0.2 seconds×1 time→1 second×2 times”, the ball can easily enter the second ball entrance 640 . In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of normal symbols, the electric accessory 640a is opened only "1 second x 2 times" when normal symbols are won. The opening time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "3 seconds x 3 times".

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once per timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 78). In addition, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 89).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 controls the big winning lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the values of the counters and the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result in the second pattern display device 83 can be executed.

Next, referring to FIG. 65(a), the contents of the ROM 202 in the first control example will be described. As shown in FIG. 65(a), in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, as part of the fixed value data, a special symbol jackpot random number table 202a, a jackpot type selection table 202b, a normal symbol random number table 202c, and At least a variation pattern selection table 202d is stored.

As described above, the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 66(a)) is a data table in which the jackpot determination value of the first hit random number counter C1 is stored. The jackpot type selection table 202b (see FIG. 66(b)) is a data table in which the determination value for determining the jackpot type is stored. It is defined in association with the jackpot type. The normal symbol random number table 202c (see FIG. 66(c)) is, as described above, a data table in which normal symbol hit determination values are stored. Since each of these tables has already been described in detail together with the description of the various counters, the description thereof will be omitted here.

The variation pattern selection table 202d is a data table in which the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for determining the display mode of the variation pattern is defined for each display mode. Details of the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68. FIG.

FIG. 67(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection table 202d in the first control example. As shown in FIG. 67(a), the variation pattern selection table 202d in the first control example selects a variation pattern in the normal state of the game state (low probability state of special symbols and normal state of normal symbols). It is composed of a normal table 202d1 used for and a non-normal table 202d2 used to select a variation pattern in a game state (probability variable state or time saving state) other than the normal state.

First, the details of the normal table 202d1 will be described with reference to FIG. 67(b). As shown in FIG. 67(b), the normal table 202d1 is provided with a table to be referred to when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big win and a table to be referred to when the result is a loss. In each table, the range of the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern are defined in association with each stop type (stopped design) of symbols.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 67(b), when the success/failure determination result is a jackpot and the stop type is a jackpot A or B, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is within the range of "0 to 29" for a fluctuation time is defined in correspondence with normal reach A for 30 seconds, and super reach A is defined in correspondence with the range of "30 to 198" for fluctuation time of 60 seconds. In addition, for the stop type of the jackpot C, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined in the range of "0 to 100" in association with the normal reach B with the variation time of 34 seconds, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined. The range of "101 to 198" is defined in association with super reach B per variation time of 64 seconds.

On the other hand, when the result of the determination is out, the correspondence relationship between the variation pattern and the value range of the variation type counter CS1 differs according to the total value of the number of pending balls. Specifically, when the total number of held balls is 0 to 4, the outlier length variation A with a variation time of 10 seconds is applied to all possible values of the variation type counter CS1 for the complete outage stop type. are defined in association with each other. In addition, for the stop type of reach other than front and rear out, the value of the variation type counter CS1 in the range of "0 to 99" is defined in correspondence with the out normal reach A with a variation time of 30 seconds, and is defined to be "100 to 198". is defined in association with a deviation super reach with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds. Further, with respect to the stop type of the front-rear out-of-reach reach, all possible values of the variation type counter CS1 are defined in association with the out-of-reach super reach with a variation time of 60 seconds.

On the other hand, when the total number of held balls is 5 to 7, all the possible values of the fluctuation type counter CS1 are out of short fluctuation A with a fluctuation time of 5 seconds for the complete out of stop type. are defined in association with each other. In addition, for the stop type of reach other than front and back out, the value of the variation type counter CS1 in the range of "0 to 150" is defined in association with the out normal reach A with a variation time of 30 seconds, and "151 to 198". is defined in association with a deviation super reach with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds. Further, with respect to the stop type of the front-rear out-of-reach reach, all possible values of the variation type counter CS1 are defined in association with the out-of-reach super reach with a variation time of 60 seconds.

Thus, when the number of held balls increases (5 or more), a variation pattern with a shorter variation time is more likely to be selected than when the number of held balls is small. Therefore, since it is possible to reduce the possibility that a new start winning will occur during fluctuation, in a state where the number of reserved balls reaches the upper limit number (total of 8), the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance It is possible to prevent the ball from entering the opening 640 and the right second ball opening 640r and becoming an invalid ball. In addition, when the number of held balls is small, it is possible to easily generate a new starting prize during a long variation time by making it easier to select a variation pattern with a relatively long variation time. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the fluctuation display from being interrupted due to the running out of the reserved balls during the game, and thus it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

Next, details of the non-normal table 202d2 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 68, when the success/failure determination result is a big hit and the stop type is a big hit A or B, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 49" and the variation time is 30 seconds. Super reach A is defined in association with the range of "50 to 198" with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds. In addition, for the stop type of the jackpot C, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined in the range of "0 to 100" in association with the normal reach B with the variation time of 34 seconds, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined. The range of "101 to 198" is defined in association with super reach B per variation time of 64 seconds.

On the other hand, when the result of the determination is out of line, similar to the normal table 202d1, the correspondence relationship between the variation pattern and the value range of the variation type counter CS1 differs according to the total value of the number of held balls. Specifically, when the total number of held balls is 0 to 2, the deviation length variation B with a variation time of 7 seconds is applied to all possible values of the variation type counter CS1 for the stop type of complete deviation. are defined in association with each other. In addition, with respect to the stop type of reach other than front-rear deviance, all possible values of the fluctuation type counter CS1 are defined by associating denormal reach B with a fluctuation time of 15 seconds, and for the stop type of deviate reach In this case, all the possible values of the fluctuation type counter CS1 are defined in association with the deviation super reach with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds.

On the other hand, when the total number of held balls is 3 to 7, all the possible values of the fluctuation type counter CS1 are out of short fluctuation B with a fluctuation time of 2 seconds for the complete out of stop type. are defined in association with each other. In addition, all possible values of the variation type counter CS1 are defined for the stop types of the reach other than the before-and-after failure in association with the failure normal reach B with a variation time of 15 seconds. Further, with respect to the stop type of front-rear out-of-reach reach, out-of-reach super reach with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds is defined in association with all possible values of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

In this way, in the variable probability state of the special symbol and in the time-saving state of the normal symbol, it is configured so that a variation pattern of a short time is likely to be selected as compared with the normal state. Thereby, it is possible to improve the game efficiency in the advantageous variable probability state or the time saving state.

Next, details of the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. 65(b). FIG. 65(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 65(b), the RAM 203 includes a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, and a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. , a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, a time saving counter 203g, a probability variable flag 203h, a variable order storage area 203i, a variable execution flag 203j, and a big hit flag 203k , and a memory area 203z.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a has four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area), and each of these areas has a first hit random number counter C1 and a first hit type counter. Each value of C2, stop type selection counter C3, and fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas ( Among the vacant areas of the reservation first area to the reservation fourth area), the area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in ascending order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first reserved area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning. Note that if data is stored in all of the four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main control device 110, when a special symbol lottery is performed, each value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is executed. Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 that are shifted (moved) to the area and stored in the execution area, a special symbol lottery or the like is determined.

When data is shifted from the first reservation area to the execution area, the first reservation area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process that packs the winning data stored in other reservation areas (second reservation area to fourth reservation area) to reservation areas (first reservation area to third reservation area) with an area number smaller by 1. done. In this control example, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data shift is performed only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

In this pachinko machine 10, as soon as the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) and each value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1 is obtained according to the starting winning, the original special symbol is displayed. Aside from the jackpot lottery, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from the obtained values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1. In this way, before the original special symbol lottery is performed, based on the data corresponding to the starting winning prize (each value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1), various types obtained when the original lottery is performed Predicting the information is hereinafter referred to as prefetching the lottery result of the special symbol. The various types of information include acceptance/rejection, stop type, variation pattern, and the like.

Then, when the prefetching is completed, a prize winning information command including various information (whether or not, stop type, variation pattern) obtained by the prefetching is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . When the winning information command is received by the audio ramp control device 113, the audio ramp control device 113 extracts win/fail, stop type, and variation pattern from the winning information command, and stores them as winning information in the winning information storage area of the RAM 233. 223a.

Like the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b has four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area). In this special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, data (each counter C1-C3, CS1 ) are stored.

The normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area). Each of these areas stores a second winning random number counter C4.

More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through either the left or right normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, and the acquired data is stored in the four holding areas (holding first area to reserved fourth area) are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, like the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the data corresponding to the winning are stored while the winning order is maintained. Note that if data is stored in all of the four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main controller 110, when the normal symbol winning lottery is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( ), and based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

In addition, when the data is shifted from the first reserved area to the execution area, the first reserved area becomes empty. A shift process is performed to move the winning data stored in the holding area of 1 to a holding area with an area number smaller by 1. Also, the data shift is performed only for the reserved areas in which the winning data are stored.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable display of the special symbol 1 performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) ( It is a counter that counts the number of held balls (number of standby times) of the variable display performed) up to a maximum of 4 times. The value N1 of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is initially set to zero. 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4 (see S604 in FIG. 83). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the special symbol 1 is newly executed (see S206 in FIG. 79).

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is a special symbol performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the ball entering each second ball entrance (second ball entrance 640, right second ball entrance 640r). It is a counter that counts the number of held balls (number of standby times) of 1 variable display (variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81) up to four times. The value N2 of this special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e has an initial value set to zero, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. Every time the number of held balls of symbol 2 increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4 (see S612 in FIG. 83). On the other hand, the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the special symbol 1 is newly executed (see S211 in FIG. 79).

Values of these special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (number of times N1 of variable display in special symbol 1) and special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (number of times N2 of variable display in special symbol 2) are reserved balls. The voice lamp controller 113 is notified by the number command (see S207 and S212 in FIG. 79 and S605 and S613 in FIG. 83). The reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e are changed. command.

The voice lamp control device 113, every time the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e are changed, are controlled by the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110. It is possible to acquire the value of the number of reserved balls itself of the variable display of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 reserved in the device 110 . As a result, the number of holding balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113 is held by the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise and the like. Even if the displayed number of held balls deviates from the displayed actual number of held balls, the deviation can be corrected by the next received number of held balls command.

In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of pending balls based on the number of pending balls command, and every time the number of pending balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of pending balls. Send a pitch command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved design in the reserved display area Ds1b of the third design display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is the normal symbol (second symbol) variable display held ball number (standby number of times) up to four times. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set to zero. (See S804 in FIG. 86). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of normal symbols is newly executed (see S705 in FIG. 85).

When the ball passes through either the left or right normal ball entrance 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times M of fluctuation display is reserved in normal symbols) is less than 4, the second hit random number counter The value of C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S805 in FIG. 86). On the other hand, when the ball passes through either the left or right normal ball entrance 67 and the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c. (S803 in FIG. 86: No).

The time-saving medium counter 203g is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state with normal patterns, and if the value of the time-saving medium counter 203g is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state with normal patterns. If the value of the time saving medium counter 203g is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of normal symbols. The initial value of the counter 203g for reducing time is set to zero, and a lottery for special symbols is performed in the main control device 110, and 100 is set at the end of the big win B each time a "big win B" occurs. . That is, when the "jackpot B" is reached, 100 is newly set regardless of the value of the time saving counter 203g (see S1212 in FIG. 90). Thereafter, 1 is subtracted every time the variable display of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is completed until the value of the time saving counter 203g becomes 0 (S223 in FIG. 79).

When the normal pattern winning lottery is performed, the value of the time saving counter 203g is referred to, and if the value is 1 or more, the normal pattern lottery is performed based on the normal pattern random number table for high probability. is performed, the value of the time saving medium counter 203g is 0, and if the variable probability flag 203h, which will be described later, is off, the normal design lottery is performed based on the normal per design random number table for the low probability time. (See S710 and S711 in FIG. 85).

The variable probability flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a variable probability state of special symbols (high probability state of special symbols). Indicates that it is a probability variation state of special symbols. On the other hand, if the variable probability flag 203h is in an off state, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of special symbols (low probability state of special symbols). The variable probability flag 203h is set to OFF in the initial state, and is set to ON each time the "jackpots A and C" end timing. On the other hand, the variable probability flag 203h is turned off each time the pachinko machine 10 is powered off or the start of a big win is set.

When the special symbol 1 fluctuation start process (see FIG. 81) and the special symbol 2 fluctuation start process (FIG. 82) are executed by the MPU 201, special symbol 1 and special symbol 2 lotteries are executed respectively. In the special symbol 1 variation start processing and the special symbol 2 variation start processing, the probability variation flag 203h is referred to, and if the state is on, the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 1, based on the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability time A lottery for the special pattern 2 is performed. On the other hand, if the variable probability flag 203h is off, based on the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability, the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 are drawn (S403, S404 in FIG. 81, S503 in FIG. 82). , S504).

In addition, in this control example, while the variable probability state is set as the game state, the time saving state of normal symbols is also set. Therefore, when the lottery for winning the normal symbol is performed, the value of the time saving medium counter 203g and the probability variation flag 203h are referred to, and it is determined whether or not the normal symbol working time saving state. Specifically, the value of the time saving medium counter 203g is 1 or more, or if the probability variation flag 203h is ON (if the time saving state or the probability variation state), it is determined that the time saving state of the normal design, A lottery for normal symbols is performed based on a random number table per normal symbol for high probability. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving counter 203g is 0 and the probability variation flag 203h is off (if neither the time saving state nor the probability variation state), based on the normal symbol random number table for low probability, the normal symbol A lottery is held (see S710 and S711 in FIG. 85).

The change order storage area 203i stores information indicating the order in which the data (reserved balls) stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b are stored. It is a storage area for This change order storage area 203i is composed of eight reservation areas and one execution area, and data for identifying whether the lottery for the special symbol 1 or the lottery for the special symbol 2 is provided in each area. is stored. Specifically, for example, if 01H is stored, it means that the special symbol 1 lottery is suspended, and if 02H is stored, it means that the special symbol 2 lottery is suspended. means. Also, if 00H is stored, it means that the area is empty.

More specifically, the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or each second ball entrance (second ball entrance 640, right second ball entrance 640r) (start winning). The value corresponding to the ball entrance is stored in the lowest area (area with a small area number) among the empty areas of the eight reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation eighth area) (S607 in FIG. 83 , S615). That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first reserved area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning.

After that, in the main controller 110, when a lottery for special symbols is performed, the data stored in the variation order storage area 203i is shifted (moved) to the execution area side and moved to the execution area. Based on the information obtained, it is determined whether to execute the lottery for the special symbol 1 or to execute the lottery for the special symbol 2 (see S304 and S306 in FIG. 80).

When data is shifted from the first reservation area to the execution area, the first reservation area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process that packs the winning data stored in the other reservation areas (second reservation area to eighth reservation area) to the reservation area with the area number 1 smaller (first reservation area to seventh reservation area). done. By referring to this variation order storage area 203i at the start of variation, the special symbol lottery can be executed in order from the oldest retained ball in terms of time.

The variable execution flag 203j indicates whether a special symbol lottery is performed based on the reserved ball of the special symbol 1 when the variable display ends (the lottery condition of the next special symbol is satisfied) in the state where the reserved ball exists, It is a flag indicating whether or not to draw a lottery for a special symbol based on the reserved balls of the special symbol 2.例文帳に追加The variable execution flag 203j is composed of 2 bits, the upper bit corresponding to the special symbol 1 and the lower bit corresponding to the special symbol 2, respectively. If each bit is ON, it means that it is the execution timing of the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to that bit, and if it is OFF, it means that it is not the execution timing of the variable display. This variation execution flag 203j is set after determining the type of the oldest retained ball in terms of time from the data in the variation order storage area 203i (whether it is a retained ball of special symbol 1 or a retained ball of special symbol 2). , is updated to a state corresponding to the discriminated type (see S305 and S307 in FIG. 80).

The jackpot in-progress flag 203k is a flag indicating whether or not a jackpot is in progress. When this jackpot middle flag 203k is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot, and when it is off, it indicates that the jackpot is not in progress. The mid-jackpot flag 203k is set to ON when the start of the jackpot is set (see S221 in FIG. 79). On the other hand, it is set to OFF in the jackpot ending process executed at the end of the jackpot (see S1214 in FIG. 90).

The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 .

Next, with reference to FIGS. 69 to 73, the details of the electrical configuration of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 69 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 69, the ROM 222 includes a sub-fluctuation pattern selection table 222a, a press-time advance notice selection table 222b, a back surface switching table 222c, a special back surface switching table 222d, a continuous advance notice lottery table 222e, and an action scenario table 222f. and an effect upper limit number table 222g.

The sub-variation pattern selection table 222a is referred to for selecting a detailed aspect of the variation effect (variation display) based on the aspect of the rough variation effect (variation display) notified by the variation pattern command from the main controller 110. It is a table where In this sub-variation pattern selection table 222a, a detailed variation performance mode is defined in association with the value of a sub-variation selection counter 223t, which will be described later. A variation pattern command for display is set based on the mode of variation effect selected from the sub-variation pattern selection table 222a (see S3505 in FIG. 106).

The pressing time announcement selection table 222b is a table for selecting the type of announcement effect (notice type) to be executed when the player presses the frame button 22 in the normal pressing effect. The details of the press-down announcement selection table 222b will be described with reference to FIG. 70(a).

FIG. 70(a) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the advance notice selection table 222b when pressed. As shown in FIG. 70(a), the press time announcement selection table 222b defines the range of the value of the effect counter and the announcement type in association with each stop type in the variable display in which the normal press effect is set. It is The effect counter is configured as a loop counter that is periodically updated within the range of 0 to 198, and is updated during the main process (see FIG. 93) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, for example. (not shown).

As shown in FIG. 70(a), when the stop types are jackpots A and B, the value of the effect counter is defined in the range of "0 to 120" in association with the notice type of "fish school". On the other hand, the range of the effect counter value of "121 to 198" is defined in association with the advance notice type of "bubbles". Although illustration is omitted, the "school of fish" notice type indicates a notice effect in which a school of fish crosses the back of the third pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and the "bubbles" notice type indicates the third pattern. Shows a warning effect that bubbles will be generated on the back of the.

In addition, when the stop type is jackpot C, all possible values of the effect counter are defined in association with the notice type of "bubbles". On the other hand, in the case of out of the front and rear reach, the value of the effect counter is defined in the range of "0 to 15" in association with the notice type of "fish school", and in the range of "16 to 198", the notice type of "foam" is defined. are defined in association with each other.

In this way, when the number of rounds is 16 rounds A, B, the rate of selecting "fish school" as the notice type is higher than in the case of front and back reach, so the "fish school" notice effect occurs. In this case, the player's expectation for the big win can be heightened. On the other hand, the "bubble" notice type is more likely to be selected in the case of the jackpot C or the back-and-forth off reach. That is, when the advance notice effect of "bubbles" occurs and a big win is achieved, the possibility of a "big win C" increases. As described above, when the "jackpot C" is reached, the game state after the jackpot is set to the probability variable state, so that the possibility of winning the jackpot again in a short interval (small number of lotteries) becomes an advantageous state. Therefore, when the advance notice effect of "bubbles" occurs, it is possible to make the player strongly wish for a big win.

Returning to FIG. 69, the description continues. The back face switching table 222c is a table that defines the order of stages (back face images) to be changed when the player presses the frame button 22 in a state where the normal press effect and the special press effect are not generated.

The details of the rear surface switching table 222c will be described with reference to FIG. 70(b). FIG. 70(b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the rear surface switching table 222c. As shown in FIG. 70(b), the back surface switching table 222c stores the value of the mode counter 223i, which is updated each time the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected, and the type of the back surface image (back surface type). are defined in association with each other. The mode counter 223i is incremented by 1 within the range of "1 to 3" every time the frame button 22 is pressed during the stage (back type) changeable period and the stage (back type) is changed. be done. When the stage is changed while the value of the mode counter 223i is "3", the value is updated to "1".

As shown in FIG. 70(b), the value "1" of the mode counter 223i is associated with the back A (morning stage), and the value "2" is associated with the back B (evening stage). The back side C (night stage) is defined in association with "3". Therefore, every time the player operates the frame button 22, the back surface type can be changed in the order of back surface A→back surface B→back surface C→ . Therefore, it is possible to change the type of back surface according to the player's mood, thereby preventing (suppressing) the game from becoming monotonous.

Returning to FIG. 69, the description continues. The special back surface switching table 222d is a table that defines the order of special stage types (special back surface types) to be set during a specific time period when the time measured by the RTC 292 falls. The details of the special rear surface switching table 222d will be described with reference to FIG. 71(a).

FIG. 71(a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the special back surface switching table 222d. As shown in FIG. 71(a), this special back surface switching table 222d includes a special mode counter 223m whose value is updated every time a specific time period (every hour for three minutes after the power is turned on) is reached. and the type of special stage (special back side type) are defined in association with each other. The value of the special mode counter 223m is incremented by one within the range of "1 to 3" each time a new special stage is set (every time a specific time period is reached). Then, when the stage is changed while the value of the special mode counter 223m is "3", the value is updated to "1" similarly to the mode counter 223i.

As shown in FIG. 71(a), the value "1" of the special mode counter 223m is associated with the special back A (town stage), and the value "2" is defined with the special back B (forest stage). A special back surface C (sea stage) is defined in association with "3". Therefore, it is possible to change the special stage from special back A → special back B → special back C → . can. Therefore, since it is possible to change to a different special stage according to the time zone, it is possible to diversify the mode of the special stage.

Returning to FIG. 69, the description continues. The continuous advance notice lottery table 222e is a table that is referred to when determining whether or not to execute a continuous advance notice effect (8 pending effects). In the state that four reserved balls of the special pattern 1 and four reserved balls of the special pattern 2 are stored respectively, and one second before the end of the variable display being executed, this continuous notice is given. With reference to the lottery table 222e, it is determined whether or not to execute the continuous advance notice effect (8 pending effect). Details of the continuous advance notice lottery table 222e will be described with reference to FIG. 71(b).

FIG. 71(b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the continuous advance notice lottery table 222e. As shown in FIG. 71(b), the continuous announcement lottery table 222e defines the range of the value of the effect counter determined to execute the continuous announcement effect for each special symbol lottery result. It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not to execute the continuous advance notice effect (8 pending effect) is executed in order from the oldest pending ball in terms of time with respect to the eight pending balls. Then, when it is determined that the continuous notice performance is to be executed by the determination of any of the reserved balls, even if there is an undetermined reserved ball, the determination is terminated at that point, and the execution start of the continuous notice performance is set. . On the other hand, when it is determined that the continuous announcement effect is not to be executed in the determination made with respect to all the eight reserved balls, the continuous announcement effect is not set.

As shown in FIG. 71(b), when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, and the variation pattern is a hit super reach, and the hold ball read ahead becomes the determination target, the value of the production counter is "0 to 180", the continuous announcement effect is set. Of the 199 counter values (random numbers) that the value of the production counter can take, 181 counter values (random numbers) are determined to execute the continuous advance notice production, so it hits one of the eight suspended balls and achieves super reach. When there is a corresponding reserved ball, a continuous advance notice effect (8 reserved effects) is set at a rate of about 91% (181/199).

On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out, and the fluctuation pattern is out and it becomes super reach, if the prefetched reserved ball is judged, if the value of the production counter is within the range of "0 to 99" A continuous announcement effect is set. Of the 199 counter values (random numbers) that the value of the production counter can take, 100 counter values (random numbers) are determined to execute the continuous advance notice production, so super reach is lost among the 8 reserved balls. When there is a reserved ball corresponding to , a continuous advance notice effect (8 reserved effects) is set at a rate of about 50% (100/199).

In addition, since the results other than the two types of prefetch results (hit super reach, lose super reach) are not specified in the continuous notice lottery table 222e, regardless of the value of the effect counter, it is determined that the continuous notice effect is to be executed. never In this way, by adopting a configuration in which the continuous notice effect is executed only when the reserved ball corresponding to the hit super reach or the lost super reach is included in the reserve, the player's jackpot when the continuous notice effect is started. can raise expectations for

In addition, in this first control example, only when there is a ball on hold corresponding to a winning super reach or a losing super reach, there is a possibility that the continuous notice effect is set, but it is limited to this. can be set arbitrarily. For example, if a hold ball that causes a reach is included, it may be configured to determine whether or not the continuous notice effect can be executed for the hold ball, or all the hold balls are the hold balls that correspond to the stop type that is completely off. Even in the case where a ready-to-win situation occurs, the execution of the continuous advance notice effect may be determined with a lower probability than in the case where the ready-to-win situation occurs. As a result, it is possible to increase the execution frequency of the continuous advance notice effect.

In the first control example, it is determined whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect for each of the eight reserved balls, but the present invention is not limited to this. A configuration may be adopted in which it is determined at once whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect by acquiring all the prefetch results of the eight reserved balls. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load when determining whether or not to execute the continuous advance notice effect.

Returning to FIG. 69, the description continues. The operation scenario table 222f is a table that defines the light emission pattern (operation scenario) of each of the LEDs 1 to 40 of the rotating unit 500. FIG. In this motion scenario table 222f, the lighting states of the respective LEDs 1 to 40 are set in association with the value of the motion pointer 223ae that is updated according to the number of motion steps of the rotating motion of the rotating unit 500. FIG. Details of the operation scenario table 222f will be described with reference to FIG. 71(c).

FIG. 71(c) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the operation scenario table 222f. As shown in FIG. 71(c), in this operation scenario table 222f, combinations of lighting states (light emission patterns) to be set for each of the LEDs 1 to 40 are defined in association with values of the operation pointer 223ae. ing. As shown in FIG. 71(c), the data indicating the lighting state of each of the LEDs 1 to 40 is composed of 3 bits, and indicates the lighting state of the red LED, green LED, and blue LED in order from the upper bit. . More specifically, if each bit is 1 (on), it means that the LED of the corresponding color is set to the ON state, and if it is 0 (OFF), the LED of the corresponding color is set to the OFF state. means to set For example, if the data indicating the lighting state is "001B", it means to turn off the red and green LEDs and turn on the blue LED. Further, for example, if the data indicating the lighting state is "101B", it means that the green LED is set to OFF and the red and blue LEDs are set to ON. In this case, red and blue are synthesized, and the diffuser plate appears purple.

As shown in FIG. 71(c), the value "00H" of the operation pointer 223ae is associated with "000B" as the lighting state of LED1 to LED40. Therefore, while the value of the operation pointer 223ae is "00H", all of the LEDs 1 to 40 are set to the extinguished state. The value of the operation pointer 223ae is updated according to the number of steps of the drive motor 457 of the rotation unit 500 (the value of the step counter 223ad).

Further, the value "01H" of the operation pointer 223ae is associated with "000B" as the lighting state of LEDs 1 to 5, and "001B" is associated with the lighting state of LEDs 6 and 7. there is Although not shown, the lighting states of the LEDs 9, 10, 12, and 13 are also defined in association with "001B." On the other hand, "000B" is associated and defined as the lighting state of other LEDs. As a result, the drive motor 457 rotates in three steps, and the blue LEDs 6, 7, 9, 10, 12, and 13 are set to the lighting state from the fourth step. As a result, the right end of the 4th stroke (LEDs 6 and 7), the 5th stroke (LEDs 9 and 10), and the 6th stroke (LEDs 12 and 13) of the character "Atsu" displayed in the rotating display effect is displayed as an afterimage. can be made

Further, the value "02H" of the operation pointer 223ae is associated with "000B" as the lighting state of LEDs 1, 3 to 5, and "001B" as the lighting state of LEDs 2, 6, 7. stipulated. Although not shown, the lighting states of the LEDs 9, 10, 12, and 13 are also defined in association with "001B." On the other hand, "000B" is associated and defined as the lighting state of other LEDs. As a result, in addition to the right end of the 4th stroke (LEDs 6 and 7), the 5th stroke (LEDs 9 and 10), and the 6th stroke (LEDs 12 and 13), 2 The right end of the image (LED2) can be displayed as an afterimage.

Henceforth, the lighting state (light emission pattern) for each of the LEDs 1 to 40 is defined for each value of the operation pointer 223ae so as to display an afterimage forming the character "win". This combination of lighting states is set for one rotation of the rotating unit 500 . When the rotary unit 500 completes one turn, the value of the action pointer 223ae is reset to 00H, and the lighting states of the LEDs 1 to 40 are set again from the beginning of the action scenario table 222f. As a result, the lighting operation of each of the LEDs 1 to 40 can be the same for each round, so that the player can more reliably recognize the afterimage of the word "win" described above with reference to FIG.

Returning to FIG. 69, the description continues. The effect upper limit number table 222g is a table in which the upper limit value of the number of times of execution of the jackpot effect using the rotating unit 500 is defined. As described above, the rotating unit 500 has a substrate member 531 on which a plurality of LEDs 532 are mounted. operates to generate heat. Therefore, if the rotating unit 500 is operated frequently, the solder that connects the LED 532, the IC, the capacitor, and the like to the substrate may be melted due to heat generation, resulting in poor contact. Therefore, in this control example, in order to suppress the operation frequency of the rotation unit 500, the upper limit of the number of operations of the rotation unit 500 according to the elapsed time (time period) is defined in the effect upper limit number table 222g. Then, when the performance mode involving the operation of the rotating unit 500 is selected in a state where the upper limit value is reached, an alternate rendering in which the rotating unit 500 does not operate is provided. As a result, the number of operations of the rotation unit 500 can be reduced, so failures such as poor contact can be prevented (suppressed). Details of the effect upper limit number table 222g will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 72 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the effect upper limit number table 222g. As shown in FIG. 72, in this effect upper limit number table 222g, each time slot is defined in association with the upper limit of the number of operations of the rotation unit 500 in that time slot. The time period is determined by the time clocked by the RTC 292 electrically connected to the sound lamp control device 113 . Further, the number of operations of the rotation unit 500 is counted by a rotation display number counter 223 x provided in the RAM 223 .

As shown in FIG. 72, the upper limit number of effects table 222g defines "0 times" as the upper limit number of times for the time slot of "00:00 to 08:59". Therefore, even if an effect in which the rotating unit 500 operates is selected during this time period, the rotating unit 500 does not operate and the alternative effect is executed. The reason why the rotation unit 500 is not operated during the time period of "00:00 to 08:59" is that it is outside the business hours of general halls. Outside the opening hours of the hall, for example, a clerk's test shot or the like is executed to operate the rotation unit 500, and if the upper limit number of times is reached, the player may operate the rotation unit 500 when playing a game. I can't. In order to avoid this situation, in this control example, the upper limit value is set to 0 so that the rotation unit 500 does not operate during the time period "00:00 to 08:59", which is likely to be outside the opening hours of the hall. ing.

In addition, the upper limit number of times of "2 times" is defined in association with the time period of "09:00 to 11:59". Therefore, it is possible to limit the number of operations of the rotating unit 500 to a maximum of two times during about three hours. "4 times" is defined as the upper limit number of times in association with the time period of "12:00 to 14:59". Therefore, when the upper limit number of times (twice) of the presentation is executed in the time period of "09:00 to 11:59", the rotation unit 500 can be operated up to twice. On the other hand, if the rotation unit 500 did not operate during the time period of "09:00 to 11:59" (the value of the rotation display number counter 223x is 0), the time period of "12:00 to 14:59" The rotating unit 500 can be operated up to four times in a time slot. Similarly, in subsequent time periods, the upper limit value increases twice each time three hours elapse. As a result, the number of operations of the rotation unit 500 can be suppressed, so that it is possible to prevent (suppress) the substrate inside the rotation unit 500 from being destroyed by heat. Further, by prescribing a different upper limit number of times for each time slot, the effect using the rotating unit 500 can be made to appear evenly in each time slot.

Assuming that the pachinko machine 10 is configured to specify only the total upper limit number of times from when the power is turned on to when the power is cut off, the number of times from when the upper limit number is reached to when the power is cut off is set. During this time, it becomes impossible to execute the effect in which the rotation unit 500 operates. Therefore, the later the time slot for performing the trick, the less likely it is that the rotation unit 500 will be able to see the effect that the rotating unit 500 operates. It may let you. On the other hand, in this control example, the upper limit value of the number of operations of the rotation unit 500 is changed according to the time zone. As a result, regardless of the time at which the game is started, it is possible to execute an effect in which the rotation unit 500 operates until the upper limit number of times in each time period is reached. Therefore, even a player who can play the game only in a late time zone can play the game in anticipation of execution of an effect in which the rotating unit 500 operates. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the players who can only play games in late hours from feeling unfair.

Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 73 is a block diagram showing the contents of RAM 223. As shown in FIG. The RAM 223 contains a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, a fluctuation start flag 223d, a stop type selection flag 223e, an effect counter 223f, a time Effect execution flag 223g, input time storage area 223h, mode counter 223i, pressing period timer 223j, level storage area 223k, special mode counter 223m, touch effect valid time storage area 223o, interval counter 223p, A continuous notice flag 223q, a remaining notice number counter 223r, a split display flag 223s, a sub-variation selection counter 223t, a back face change prohibition flag 223u, a pressing effect flag 223v, a special notice flag 223w, and the number of rotation displays. At least a counter 223x, a rotation counter 223aa, a rotation display effect flag 223ab, a lighting set flag 223ac, a step counter 223ad, an operation pointer 223ae, a power-off flag 223y, and other memory area 223z are provided. .

The winning information storage area 223a includes one execution area, four areas (first area to fourth area) corresponding to the special symbol 1, and four areas (first area to fourth area) corresponding to the special symbol 2. ), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. In the pachinko machine 10, when the main controller 110 detects the starting prize for the first ball entrance 64 or each second ball entrance (second ball entrance 640, right second ball entrance 640r), , From the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS1 obtained according to the starting winning, when the special symbol lottery corresponding to the starting winning is performed Various information obtained (whether or not, jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, variation pattern) is predicted (estimated) in the main controller 110, and the predicted various information is sent from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113 Winning information Notified by command.

When the winning information command is received, the audio lamp control device 113 extracts various information (win or fail, jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, variation pattern) notified by the winning information command as winning information, and extracts the winning information. is stored in the winning information storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is divided into four areas (first area to 4th area) are stored in ascending order of area number (first to fourth). That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning.

Based on each piece of winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, determination of whether or not to execute continuous advance notice effect (8 pending effects) is executed. Before the variable display corresponding to each suspended ball is executed, by configuring the continuous notice effect (8 suspended effects) to be executable, for each suspended ball from before the start of the variable display It is possible to make the player feel a sense of anticipation of a big win.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is a variable display of the special symbol 1 performed in the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), and the special symbol 2 retained in the main controller 110. It is a counter that counts the number of holding balls (number of standby times) of the variable performance up to a maximum of 4 times for each type of special symbol. Similarly, the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is a variable display of the special symbol 2 performed in the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), and is suspended in the main controller 110. It is a counter that counts the number of pending balls (number of standby times) of the variable performance of the special symbol 2 up to 4 times at maximum for each type of special symbol.

As described above, the voice ramp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 Cannot get value. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the number of reserved balls command transmitted from the main controller 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c Then, the number of reserved balls is managed for each type of special symbol.

Specifically, in the main controller 110, when the start winning is detected and the number of pending balls of the variable display is added, or the variable display in the special symbol is executed in the main controller 110 and the number of the pending balls is subtracted. If so, it transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction or the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 or the special symbol 2 reserved ball from the reserved ball number command The value of the number counter 203e is acquired and stored in the counter corresponding to the command, out of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c (see S3008 in FIG. 101). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110. While synchronizing with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110, the values can be updated.

The values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c are used to display the reserved ball number pattern on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, the voice lamp control device 113, in response to receiving the reserved ball number command, stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c. , In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c after storage, a display reserved ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114. .

When the display control device 114 receives this display pending ball number command, the value of the pending ball number indicated by the command, that is, the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113, or the special symbol 2 pending ball number counter 223b The drawing of the image is controlled so as to display the number of pending ball symbols corresponding to the value of the number of ball counter 223 c in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 . As described above, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b changes its value while synchronizing with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110, and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is mainly While synchronizing with the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the control device 110, the value is changed. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number symbols displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third pattern display device 81 is also the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110. It can be changed while synchronizing. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variable display is held.

The fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on when the fluctuation pattern command of the special design 1 or the fluctuation pattern command of the special design 2 transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S3002 in FIG. 101), and the third design display device It is turned off when the variable display is set in 81 (see S3402 in FIG. 105). When the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on, a fluctuation pattern command for display is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 221 in the command output process (S2202) of the main process (see FIG. 93). It is transmitted toward the display control device 114 . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is used to perform the variation display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. Display control of the variable effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a special symbol stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S3005 in FIG. 101), and the stop type in the third symbol display device 81 is set. is turned off (see S3406 in FIG. 105). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type (jackpot type in the case of a jackpot) extracted from the received stop type command.

The effect counter 223f is a counter used for selection of variation patterns, selection of various effects, and the like. The effect counter 223f stores a random number in the range of 0 to 198 obtained from a random number generation IC (not shown) electrically connected to the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. The operating clock (operating frequency) of the IC for random number generation can be updated to separate random values for each of the eight reserved balls, at least when determining whether or not to execute continuous advance notice effects. An IC capable of operating at an operating clock of approximately 1 MHz (for example, 1 MHz) is employed. The value of this effect counter 223f is used when executing various judgments executed by the sound lamp control device 113, such as whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect, and determination of the notice type of the normal pressing effect.

The time effect execution flag 223g indicates whether or not to execute an effect (time effect) for changing to a special stage (special back surface type) in a specific time period (three minutes every hour after the power is turned on). is a flag. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example, an upper limit (for example, 3 months) is set for the period during which the pachinko machine 10 can execute the time production, and after the upper limit has passed, even if it becomes a specific time zone. It is configured so that the time production is not executed. As a result, the rarity of the time presentation can be increased, so that the player can be made to want to play a game with the pachinko machine 10 before reaching the upper limit period. Therefore, it is possible to improve the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 during the period until the upper limit period is reached. The time effect execution flag 223g has an initial value set to OFF, and is set to ON when it is determined that the date and time when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on is within the upper limit period during which the time effect can be executed (Fig. 92 S2103). On the other hand, since the contents of the RAM 223 are not backed up when the power is cut off, they are turned off each time the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off.

It should be noted that the execution may be performed without limitation without setting the upper limit period of the time presentation. In this case, the pachinko machine 10 that can be enjoyed for a long time can be provided because the time performance can be executed for a longer period.

The turn-on time storage area 223h is a storage area for storing data corresponding to the time when the pachinko machine 10 was powered on. As described above, in the first control example, the time presentation (change to a special stage) is executed for three minutes every hour after the power is turned on. Whether or not to start execution of the time effect is determined by the difference between the time stored in the input time storage area 223h and the current time measured by the RTC 292. When the power-on time for the pachinko machine 10 is obtained from the RTC 292, the turn-on time storage area 223h stores data corresponding to the time (see S2104 in FIG. 92).

As described above, the mode counter 223i is set when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during the period during which the back surface type (stage) can be changed (outside the periods of normal press effect, special press effect, time effect, and jackpot). , a storage area for storing data indicating the type of rear surface to be changed. This mode counter 223i is composed of a counter that can take four values of 0 to 3, and "1", "2", and "3" are the rear A (morning stage), rear B (evening stage), and rear B (evening stage), respectively. It corresponds to C (night stage). Also, "0" is a value that can be taken only at the time of initialization, and indicates a state in which the back surface type has not been set. The value of the mode counter 223i is updated by 1 every time the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected during the period in which the back face type can be changed (see S2402 in FIG. 95). is set. For example, when the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected while the value of the mode counter 223i is "2" (the back surface B is set), the value of the mode counter 223i is updated to "3". , the back face type is changed to back face C corresponding to the updated value "3". When the value of the mode counter 223i is updated while the upper limit value of "3" is set, the value is set to "1". Further, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the value is updated from the initial value of "0" to "1", and the back side A is set as the back side type (see S2105 in FIG. 92). .

The pressing period timer 223j is a timer that measures the acceptable period of the frame button 22 when the normal pressing effect or the special pressing effect is executed. When it is time to start executing a normal pressing effect or a special pressing effect, a timer value (effect period) corresponding to the type of pressing effect to be executed is set for the pressing period timer 223j (S2602 in FIG. 97). ), the value is decremented by 1 in the special notification sound setting process (see FIG. 96) executed every millisecond in the main process (see FIG. 93), or the pressing effect setting process (see FIG. 97). (See S2507 in FIG. 96 and S2606 in FIG. 97). When the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected in a state where the value of the pressing period timer 223j is 1 or more, an effect corresponding to the pressing effect being executed is executed.

The level storage area 223k is a storage area for storing information indicating the effect level (effect mode) of the touch effect, which is one of the interesting effects in the first control example. In this first control example, a touch sensor 290 is mounted on the screen of the third symbol display device 81 so that it can be determined whether or not the player has touched the screen of the third symbol display device 81 . In this first control example, an entertainment effect using the touch sensor 290 can be executed. Specifically, in the third symbol display device 81, an effect (touch effect) prompting to touch the screen is executed (not shown). This touch effect may be set during the execution of a variable effect that notifies a big hit, and the mode changes every time the player touches the screen (for example, the indicator displayed on the third symbol display device 81 increases) production is executed. In this touch effect, for example, the maximum value of the indicator is predetermined for each jackpot type, and the indicator becomes max when the jackpot A is the most advantageous to the player. In other words, when the touch effect appears during fluctuation, the jackpot is confirmed at that time, and when the displayed indicator reaches the maximum, it is decided that the jackpot A will be the most advantageous, so it is positive for the player. can be made to touch the screen.

It should be noted that this touch effect is executed as a substitute effect for the effect in which the rotation unit 500 operates. This is because the detection range of the touch sensor 290 and the rotation range of the rotation unit 500 are close to each other in this control example. That is, when the touch effect and the rotation display effect are executed at the same time, the player touches the rotating unit 500, which may damage the rotating unit 500 or injure the player. In addition, since it is difficult to touch the touch sensor 290 because it is blocked by the rotating unit 500, there is a risk that stress will be given to the player. Therefore, in this control example, in order to avoid conflict between the operation of the rotating unit 500 and the touch effect using the touch sensor 290, the touch effect is provided only as an alternative effect when the number of operations of the rotating unit 500 reaches the upper limit. is configured to be executable. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the touch effect and the rotating display effect from occurring at the same time. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling stressed by being relaxed and having difficulty touching the touch panel (touch sensor 290).

The level storage area 223k stores information corresponding to how much the effect mode has changed in this touch effect (change amount of the indicator). Each time it is detected that the player has touched the screen in the touch effect, the data in the level storage area 223k is updated within the range of the upper limit value or less, and the display mode (indicator amount) corresponding to the updated data is set. be. Further, in the touch effect, when the player's touch is not detected for a certain period of time (for example, two seconds), the data in the level storage area 223k is updated in the direction of decreasing the amount of the indicator, and the updated data A display mode corresponding to is set. By configuring the indicator amount to decrease if no touch operation is performed during execution of the touch effect, the player can be actively touched on the screen.

The special mode counter 223m stores a value corresponding to the type of special stage set in the time production when the conditions for executing the time production are met (the time measured by the RTC 292 reaches a specific time zone). is a counter. The value of the special mode counter 223m is incremented by 1 within the range of "1 to 3" each time a new specific time period occurs, and the special back face type corresponding to the value after the addition is set. Also, when the special mode counter 223m has a value of "3" and a specific time zone has newly arrived, the value is updated to "1" in the same manner as the mode counter 223i. As described above, the values "1", "2", and "3" of the special mode counter 223m correspond to special back A (town stage), special back B (Morikata stage), and special back C (sea stage), respectively. corresponds to

The touch effect valid time storage area 223o is a storage area for storing a period during which a touch on the screen (detection of the touch sensor 290) is treated as valid in the touch effect. In the touch effect effective time storage area 223o, the effective time corresponding to the touch effect is stored at the start of the touch effect, and the effective time is subtracted each time the touch sensor control process is executed (S2702 in FIG. 98). reference). Only when the effective time stored in the touch effect effective time storage area 223o remains, the effect for the player touching the screen is set.

The interval counter 223p is a counter for counting a period during which the touch sensor 290 is off (a period during which the player does not touch the screen) during the touch effect. As described above, in the touch effect of this control example, when the player's touch is not detected for a certain period of time (for example, two seconds), the data in the level storage area 223k is updated in the direction of decreasing the amount of the indicator. and a display mode corresponding to the updated data is set. It is determined by the value of the interval counter 223p whether or not to execute the effect of decreasing the amount of this indicator.

The continuation notice flag 223q is a flag indicating whether or not the continuation notice effect (8 pending effects, see FIG. 60(b)) is being executed. If this continuous notice flag 223q is on, it indicates that the continuous notice effect is being executed, and if it is off, it indicates that it is not being executed. This continuous announcement flag 223q is set to ON when the execution of the continuous announcement effect is set (see S3808 in FIG. 109). On the other hand, it is set to OFF at the end of the continuous announcement effect (see S3206 in FIG. 103).

The number-of-remaining-notices counter 223r is a counter that indicates the number of remaining times of continuous announcement effect (the number of times of variable display). The continuous advance notice effect continues over the variable display of the number of times of the value stored in the remaining notice number counter 223r. This remaining notice number counter 223r is set to a value of 8 when execution of the continuous notice effect is determined (see S3807 in FIG. 109), and each time the start of the variable display is set during the continuous notice effect The value is decremented by 1 (see S3508 in FIG. 106).

The split display flag 223s is set to split display (see FIG. 63) in the sub-display area Ds based on the detection of a new start winning prize and the increase in the number of pending balls during the execution of the continuous notice effect (8 pending effects). It is a flag indicating whether or not it is set. When the split display flag 223s is on, it indicates that the split display is set, and when it is off, it indicates that the split display is not set. As described above, the split display changes the back with the reserved pattern corresponding to the ball that is subject to the continuous notice effect and the reserved pattern that corresponds to the ball that is not subject to the continuous notice effect. This is a display mode for clarifying whether it is necessary to have a sense of expectation for. Here, even if a new start winning is detected until the 8-piece pending effect is completed, if the entire sub-display area Ds is fixed to the fish school display, the player will be notified when the 8-piece pending effect ends. There is a possibility that it will make you feel uncomfortable. Although the reserved pattern is displayed, the display mode of the sub-display area Ds returns to the normal mode, which may give the impression that the 8-piece reserved effect has been terminated in the middle. It is from. On the other hand, in the first control example, by performing the split display, it is possible to clearly suggest to the player how long the 8 pending effect will continue when a new start winning is detected. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from having a sense of incompatibility at the end of the 8-piece holding effect.

The sub-variation selection counter 223t is a counter used to select the detailed display mode of the variation pattern from the sub-variation pattern selection table 222a. The sub-fluctuation selection counter 223t stores a random number obtained from an IC for generating random numbers, like the effect counter 223f. As described above, the sub-variation pattern selection table 222a defines detailed variation pattern display modes in association with the range of values of the sub-variation selection counter 223t. By using the sub-variation selection counter 223t to select the display mode of the variation pattern, the display mode can be selected at random.

The back surface change prohibition flag 223u is a flag indicating whether or not it is a period during which it is prohibited to change the back surface type when it is detected that the frame button 22 has been pressed. indicates a certain period. On the other hand, if it is off, it indicates that the back surface type can be changed according to the operation of the frame button 22 . Specifically, the period during which the back surface type is prohibited to be changed is during execution of the normal press effect or the special press effect, during execution of the time effect, during the jackpot, or the like.

The pressing effect in-progress flag 223v is a flag indicating whether or not a normal pressing effect or a special pressing effect is being executed. This pressing effect flag 223v is composed of, for example, two bits, the upper bit being a flag corresponding to the normal pressing effect, and the lower bit being a flag corresponding to the special pressing effect. If each bit is 1 (on), it means that the pressing effect corresponding to the 1 (on) bit is being executed, and if it is 0 (off), the corresponding pressing effect is not being executed. indicate. Specifically, if the pressing effect flag 223v is "10B" in binary notation, it indicates that the normal pressing effect is being executed, and if it is "01B", it means that the special pressing effect is being executed. indicate. Also, if it is "00B", it indicates that none of the pressing effects is being executed. In the pressing effect flag 223v, the bit corresponding to the type of pressing effect to be started is set to 1 (on) when it is time to start the pressing effect (see S2603 in FIG. is set to 0 (off) in (see S2609 in FIG. 97).

The special notification in-progress flag 223w is a flag indicating whether or not the special notification sound can be output during execution of the special pressing effect (see FIG. 61). When the special notification flag 223w is ON, it indicates that the special notification sound can be output, and when it is OFF, it indicates that the special notification sound cannot be output. As described above, when the lottery for whether or not to output the special notification sound in the special pressing effect is determined as winning, the special notification sound is output every time the frame button 22 is operated until the special pressing effect ends. state is set. By configuring in this way, the player who wants to listen to the special notification sound can be made to operate the frame button 22 many times during execution of the special pressing effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the willingness of the player to participate in the game. This special notification in-progress flag 223w is set to ON when the special notification sound execution lottery is won (see S2504 in FIG. 96), and is set to OFF at the end of the special pressing effect (see S2510 in FIG. 96).

The rotation display frequency counter 223x is a counter for counting the number of executions of the effect (rotation display effect) that the rotation unit 500 operates. (see S3606 of ). Based on the variation pattern command, when the aspect with the rotation display effect is selected from the sub-variation pattern selection table 222a, the value of this rotation display number counter 223x and the upper limit specified in the above-described effect upper limit number table 222g By comparing with the value, it is determined whether the rotating display effect is set as it is as the aspect of the current variation pattern or the touch effect is set as the alternative effect. In this determination, as described above, it is determined that the alternative effect is set when the value of the rotation display number counter 223x has reached the upper limit value. Frequent operation of the rotation unit 500 can be prevented (suppressed) by avoiding execution of the rotation display effect the number of times exceeding the upper limit value and executing the alternative effect. Therefore, failure of the rotation unit 500 can be prevented (suppressed).

The rotation number counter 223aa is a counter that counts the number of rotations of the rotation unit 500 . Here, the rotation unit 500 is provided with an origin sensor (not shown). Since this origin sensor is already known, it will be briefly described. When the rotation unit 500 is at the origin position (rotational position shown in FIG. This is a sensor whose output is turned off (L) when a rotational position deviates from the position (for example, a rotational position different from that shown in FIG. 35(a), such as the rotational position shown in FIG. 35(b)). Since this origin sensor is electrically connected to the input/output port 225 of the sound lamp control device 113, the MPU 221 monitors the output of the origin sensor to determine whether the rotation position of the rotation unit 500 is the origin position. It is possible to easily determine whether or not Rotation number counter 223aa starts the rotation display effect, and each time the origin sensor is turned on due to the rotation of rotation unit 500 (every time rotation unit 500 goes around), 1 is added to the value (S2902 in FIG. 100). reference). Execution start of the rotation display effect is set according to the value of the rotation number counter 223aa.

The rotation display effect flag 223ab is a flag indicating whether or not the rotation display effect is being executed. If this rotation display effect flag 223ab is ON, it indicates that the rotation display effect is being executed, and if it is OFF, it means that it is outside the execution period of the rotation display effect. The rotation display effect flag 223ab is set to ON when it is determined that it is time to start the rotation display effect (see S2803 in FIG. 99), and it is set to OFF when it is determined that it is time to end the rotation display effect. (see S2807 in FIG. 99).

The lighting setting completion flag 223ac is a flag indicating whether or not setting of the light emission pattern specified in the operation scenario table 222f has started in the rotation display effect. When the lighting setting completion flag 223ac is on, it means that the setting of the light emission pattern has been started, and when it is off, it indicates that the setting of the light emission pattern has not been performed. While the lighting setting completion flag 223ac is on, the operation pointer 223ae is updated according to the driving amount (rotation amount) of the driving motor 457, and the lighting setting corresponding to the updated value is read from the operation scenario table 222f. and set to each of the LEDs 1-40.

The step counter 223ad is a counter that counts the number of driving steps of the driving motor 457 . The driving motor 457 is controlled by a known motor driver. That is, by outputting a command from the audio lamp control device 113 to the motor driver to notify the motor driver of the operating conditions such as the rotation speed, the motor driver controls the drive motor 457 according to the operation contents corresponding to the command. Specifically, the motor driver varies the operating speed (rotational speed) of the driving motor 457 by varying the output frequency of the control signal for setting the operation of one step to the driving motor 457 according to the command. be able to. In addition, every time the motor driver sets the drive motor 457 to operate in one step, it outputs an execution signal for notifying the audio lamp controller 113 that the operation in one step has been set. The value of the step counter 223ad is updated according to the number of receptions of this execution signal. Based on the value of the step counter 223ad, the sound lamp control device 113 can accurately grasp the progress of the rotation operation. In addition, in the first control example, the rotation unit 500 is rotated at a rotation speed of 0.1 second per revolution, for example. In addition, one step operation of the driving motor 457 causes the rotation unit 500 to operate 1/100 of a turn. Therefore, in this control example, the drive motor 457 is controlled at a speed of one step per millisecond. Along with this, during the rotation operation of the rotation unit 500, the motor driver outputs an execution signal every 1 millisecond.

The operation pointer 223ae is a pointer that indicates the progress of setting based on the operation scenario table 222f. Each time the value of the action pointer 223ae is updated, the light emission pattern corresponding to the updated pointer value is read from the action scenario table 222f and set.

The power-off flag 223y is a flag used to determine whether or not there has been a momentary power failure. This power-off flag 223y receives a power-off command from main controller 110 and is set to ON before the power-off process is executed (see S2218 in FIG. 93). After that, since the RAM 223 is a volatile memory, all the information in the RAM 223 disappears after a certain period of time (100 milliseconds) has passed. Therefore, when the power-off flag 223y is on (see 2008: Yes in FIG. 91) in the start-up process of the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 91), the power-off flag 223y is set to on and then This is when the audio lamp controller 113 wakes up before the time (100 milliseconds) elapses, that is, when there is a momentary power failure. In this case, all the information in the RAM 223 is not deleted, and unnecessary information (or incomplete information due to the deletion of only part of the information) remains in the work area of the RAM 223. Since there is a case, the information in the work area of the RAM 223 is cleared (see S2009 in FIG. 91). As a result, processing is not executed based on unnecessary (or incomplete) information, so each processing of the audio lamp control device 113 can be operated normally.

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

Next, referring to FIG. 74, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 74 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the sound lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238 , and the MPU 231 , work RAM 233 , character ROM 234 and image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240 . . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237 , and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241 . A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239 .

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with a different lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot or a different number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot, the symbols displayed by the third symbol display device 81 are different. Since there are models with exactly the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce costs.

The MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described below.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio ramp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110 . The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is designed so that a system reset is applied from the power supply 115 immediately after power is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same shall apply hereinafter). is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231 . Each time an instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer indicated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although the details will be described later, in this control example, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional game machines. The data of the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also control programs and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND-type flash memory 234a generally has a problem that the read speed becomes slow especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data continuously arranged in a plurality of pages, the data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed. It takes a long time before the data is output. Also, when reading discontinuous data, a long time is required each time the data is read. In this way, the NAND flash memory 234a has a slow read speed. This may take a long time, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate.

Therefore, in this control example, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. to store. The MPU 231 then executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233 . The work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third pattern display device 81 , and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240 . The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 to a resident video RAM 235, which is connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236 .

The character ROM 234 is constructed by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND type flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storage and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Here, the NAND type flash memory 234a has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can. Therefore, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to increase the interest of the player.

In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store control programs and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this way, the control program and fixed value data are provided to store the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since the characters can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data is retrieved from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 .

Here, the NAND type flash memory 234a, due to its nature, generates a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) when writing data, and generates defective data blocks into which data cannot be written. or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b applies known error correction to the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and avoids bad data blocks when reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a. data address translation.

The ROM controller 234b corrects errors in the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a that contains error bits. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

In addition, the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data blocks of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data blocks. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b reads one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data corresponding to the designated address. is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. Then, the ROM controller 234 b outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 after performing known error correction processing.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one page of data of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in each bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b, for example, outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while data is set in one bank, or outputs the data specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The processing of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub-storage unit in the character ROM 234, and is intended to complement the NAND type flash memory 234a. ). Of the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR-type ROM 234d stores programs that are not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND-type flash memory 234a. At least a first program storage area 234d1 is provided for storing a portion of the boot program to be executed.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third pattern display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after releasing the system reset. As a result, the display control device 114 can be put into a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 stores the boot program within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a), which should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word=2 bytes)) are stored. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and instructs the bus line 240 to specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 .

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and transfers the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. to specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d, selects the program previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d. , the instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231 .

Here, in this control example, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time to read the data of the first page after the address is specified until the data is output. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code that the MPU 231 should execute first after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read out and set the data in the buffer RAM 234c. You spend a lot of time waiting to receive your code. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory from which data can be read at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. Thus, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. , and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. , fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program are stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). 233a and the data table storage area 233b. The MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c that is stored, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is transferred to the program storage area 233a. The transfer process can be performed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, it is unnecessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c, so that the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the command pointer 231a to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to be set to a first predetermined address. As a result, when the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined number in the program storage area 233a. Set to a street address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processing can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processes. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and process the instructions.

Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount from the second program storage area 234a1. The instruction pointer 231a is programmed so as to include the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as a first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Execute the rest of the boot program contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control programs are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Also, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, the initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 110) executed after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 110) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to .

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding the NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third pattern display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 77) sent from the MPU 231 to be described later, and stores the frame in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, which will be described later. The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third pattern display device 81 to display the image on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加. The image controller 237 performs the one-frame image drawing process and the one-frame image display process during the one-frame image display time (20 milliseconds in this control example) on the third pattern display device 81 . parallel processing in

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 112(b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of causing the third pattern display device 81 to display the image developed by the previous drawing.

In this manner, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Image drawing is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 . That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, in general, the NAND-type flash memory 234a facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, but its read speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image is drawn by the image controller 237 while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. can be processed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed when drawing the image. , the time required for reading the image can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after display is determined by main controller 110 or display controller 114 are permanently resident in resident video RAM 235. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Further, when the display control device 114 draws an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, before the drawing is performed, the display controller 114 stores necessary data for drawing from the character ROM 234 in the normal video RAM 236. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal-use video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of , and the time required for reading the data can be saved, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, there is no need to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so there is no need to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. FIG. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given to the image controller 237 by the MPU 231 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the head address (storage source head address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and top of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains an address. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

The image controller 237 reads one block of data from a predetermined address in the character ROM 234 according to various information of this transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and stores it in the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 is not in use. , is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 . Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source start address to the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction are transferred.

As a result, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 in a short time. can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by transferring the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, these video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for image drawing processing. , it is possible to prevent the display on the third pattern display device 81 from being too late.

In addition, since image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are used for image drawing processing and third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine the period during which the display processing on the device 81 is not used, and to simplify the processing.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 can be retained while the power is turned on without being overwritten. 235e and an error message image area 235f are provided, and at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third pattern area 235d are provided.

The power-on main image area 235a is the power-on main image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 after power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. In addition, the power-on variation image area 235b is opened by the player while the main image at power-on is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first ball entrance 64 or each second entrance is displayed. When a ball is detected to enter the ball opening (second ball entrance 640, right second ball entrance 640r), power-on variation image that displays the lottery results performed by main controller 110 with a variation effect. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to . This power-on image is an image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234 .

The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 110).

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to use the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the rest of the image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person involved in the hall can confirm the power-on image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the power-on image on the third pattern display device 81 . can be done. Also, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the power-on image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the remaining image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is displayed. However, it is possible to wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying whether the operation has stopped during the time until the transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. can.

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacture, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Furthermore, by using the NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. As described above, in this control example, three kinds of normal back images and three types of back images for time effects (back A to C, special back) A to C) are set. Of these six types of back images, the back image corresponding to back A, which is the default setting, is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 when the power is turned on. On the other hand, other back images are transferred to the normal video RAM 236 when the conditions for changing to each back surface type are met.

The third symbol area 235d is an area for permanently storing the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, in the third pattern area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-described nine types of main patterns (see FIG. 59(b)) with numbers "0" to "9", which are the third patterns, are resident. be. As a result, when the third pattern display device 81 performs a variable effect, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. It is possible to quickly start a variable production. Therefore, after the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or each second ball entrance (second ball entrance 640, right second ball entrance 640r), the first symbol display device 37 changes. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the variable performance is not immediately started in the third pattern display device 81 even though the performance has been started.

Further, image data corresponding to sub-designs with no numbers are also resident in the third design area 235d. These image data are used for a demonstration effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning does not start even after a predetermined time has passed since one variable effect was stopped. be done. Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the sub-symbol with no number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols with no numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加

The character design area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character designs used in various effects displayed on the third design display device 81. FIG. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as a "young man" and a "woman" are displayed according to various effects, and data corresponding to these characters are resident in the character design area 235e. Therefore, when the display control device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, instead of newly reading the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, the display control device 114 reads the character data from the resident video RAM 235. The image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image by reading the image data pre-resident in the pattern area 235e. This eliminates the need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the character design can be changed immediately.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the sound ramp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound ramp control device 113 detects the occurrence of a vibration error. Notify the display controller 114 with an error command. Also, when the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the audio lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the error occurrence together with the error type by an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81 when an error command is received.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the standpoint of preventing fraud by the player and protecting the player against errors. In the pachinko machine 10, since image data corresponding to various error messages are preliminarily resident in the error message image area 235f, the display control device 114 displays the error message in the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading the image data previously resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is read after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data can be overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235, among the image data necessary for drawing the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data to be stored in each sub-area is predetermined.

The MPU 231 extracts image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 in a sub area provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 . , instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area for storing. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234 and transfers the read image data to the designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including transfer data information in a later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image controller 237 writes the one-frame image drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby rendering the one-frame image to the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and sent to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information with the third pattern display device 81, a process for displaying the image for one frame is executed.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 can expand the one-frame image drawn in one of the frame buffers and simultaneously , the image for one frame developed earlier can be read out from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 are used for drawing processing of an image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds of completion, the MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating designations, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for an image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 231. Configured. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and a stored image data discrimination. Flag 233j, drawing target buffer flag 233k, new pending ball number flag 233m, pending pattern number counter 233n, new continuous notice command flag 233o, continuous notice information storage area 233p, error occurrence flag 233q, error determination flag 233r, rear image change flag 233w and a rear image determination flag 233x.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing control programs executed by the MPU 231 . When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. After storing all the control programs in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main controller 110, and a display data table. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing.

These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. After all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect, an opening effect, , round effects, ending effects, and demonstration effects are provided.

The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. In addition, when the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variable performance is started, if the stop type of the variable performance is off, the stop symbol indicating the failure is finally stopped and displayed, and the stop type of the variable performance is the jackpot A or the jackpot B. If it is either, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in this variable effect, and can easily determine the game value to be given according to the jackpot type.

The opening performance is a performance for informing the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to a special game state from now on and that the specific prize winning port 65a that is normally closed will be repeatedly opened, and the round performance will start from now on. This is an effect for informing the player of the number of rounds to be started. The ending effect is a effect for informing the player of the end of the special game state.

In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning does not start even after a predetermined time has passed since one variable effect stopped. The third pattern composed of sub-patterns with no numbers "1" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player and the persons involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to each of the opening effect, round effect, ending effect and demonstration effect. Further, if there are 32 variable performance patterns to be set, the variable display data table, which is a display data table for the variable performance, is prepared with one table for one variable performance pattern, and a total of 32 tables.

Details of the display data table will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 75 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at that time in association with an address that represents the time (in this control example, 20 milliseconds) for which one frame of image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content (drawing content) of an image for one frame.

The drawing contents specify the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Rendering information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to render sprites, such as values, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third pattern display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for specifying an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement ratio. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed larger than the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be displayed smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed behind the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for specifying known α-blending coefficients used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. Color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when rendering the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, the drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address are one rear image, nine third patterns (design 1, design 2, . Rendering information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character, a young man's image, characters, and other characters used for various effects, is defined for each address. One or a plurality of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the magnification ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information are changed over time. Since it is fixed, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the back image type, is defined in the variable display data table. The type of the back face is to display one of the back faces A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (one of "morning stage", "evening stage", and "night stage"), or to display one of back faces A to C. Information specifying whether to display a rear image different from C is described. In addition, when specifying to display a back image different from back faces A to C (special back faces A to C, etc.), the back face type also includes information specifying which back face image to display. .

When the type of the back face specifies that one of the back faces A to C is to be displayed, the MPU 231 specifies the back face image corresponding to the stage determined by lottery among the back faces A to E as the object to be drawn. In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame is specified according to the lapse of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a rear image different from the rear faces A to C, the rear face image to be displayed is specified from the rear face type.

In this control example, only the back face type is specified as the drawing content of the back face image in the display data table. position information indicating whether should be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 identifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on this display data table (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) is started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started.

Furthermore, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed, and the image drawing based on the display data table (or the third pattern display device 81) according to the back surface type. display) may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display, or along with the back surface type and position information, the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. information indicating whether or not the background image is drawn) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. Alternatively, the position information may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of information indicating the elapsed time.

The third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, . . . ) describe symbol type offset information as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. Rather than directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop pattern, and in the pattern offset information from the start of the variation until the predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop pattern of the previous variation performance is described. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop pattern set according to the stop type command (stop type command for display) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113 Include information. As a result, the variable effect can be stopped with a stop pattern corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. - 特許庁

In addition, since a unique number is attached to each third symbol, the variable symbol in the previous variable effect or the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110 can be selected as the third symbol. , and the offset information is represented by the difference between the numbers attached to each third pattern, the third pattern to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information.

In addition, in the pattern offset information, the third pattern fluctuates at high speed during the predetermined time when the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third pattern is being variably displayed at high speed, the third pattern is invisible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third pattern is interrupted, the player is not made to recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"0000H", which is the top address of the display data table, describes "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 75) describes the data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing contents corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table are displayed. is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the selected display data table. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the next A drawing list (see FIG. 77), which will be described later, is created by specifying the image contents to be drawn. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, as the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table, so the image specified in the display data table is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

Here, as in a conventional pachinko machine, if a program to be executed by the MPU 231 is started each time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, the effect image becomes more diverse. Therefore, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a risk that the diversification of controllable effect images will be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114 .

In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason why it can be created is that the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance in the pachinko machine 10 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the mode of presentation. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. This configuration can be realized only when the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine the presentation mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize.

Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect. Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 235 for normal use from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 for normal use and its transfer timing are defined.

If all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. As a result, an increase in capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

The transfer data table contains transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") to be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table in correspondence with the address. (corresponding to addresses "0001H" and "0097H" in FIG. 76). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transferring at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transferring corresponding to that address. (corresponding to address "0002H" in FIG. 76).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). is included.

As in the case of the display data table, "0000H", which is the top address of the transfer data table, contains "Start" information indicating the start of the data table. "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233, which will be described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are identified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 77) to be described later is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 76, when the pointer 233f is "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information defined for the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added, and the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237 . On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined at the address "0002H" of the transfer data table. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the processing to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the display data. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load on transfer.

The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and is associated with an address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the timing of starting transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, various effects images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image on the third pattern display device 81 . The simple image display flag 233c is set to the main image executed by the MPU 231 after the image data corresponding to the power-on image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. It is set to ON in the process (see FIG. 110) (see S6005 in FIG. 110). Then, at the stage when all the resident target image data are stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process of the transfer setting process, the third symbol display device 81 is caused to display an image other than the power-on image. , is set to OFF (see S7805 in FIG. 121(b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 112(b)). When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 112(b)) and the simple display setting process (see S6308 in FIG. 112(b) S6309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to commands transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 113 to 117) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 118 to 120) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 during the V interrupt process (see S7701 in FIG. 121(a)), and when the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 121(b)) is executed to transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. However, if the simple image display flag 233c is off, normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 122) is executed to transfer image data required for drawing processing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to commands and the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on commands and the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and stores the display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It selects and stores the selected display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 77) is generated in which the content of the image drawing instruction for is described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

While incrementing the pointer 233f by 1, the MPU 231 draws an image to the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 77), which will be described later, is generated in which the content of the drawing instruction is described. As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

The transfer data table buffer 233e transfers a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. is a buffer for storing When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e by writing Null data, which means that there is no transfer target image data.

While incrementing the pointer 233f by one, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to a later-described rendering list (see FIG. 77) describing the content of image rendering instructions to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data necessary for drawing the sprite can be obtained. Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The pointer 233f is an address at which transfer data information of corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data should be obtained from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. is for specifying The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, display setting processing for V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame of image is completed (FIG. 112(b)). ), the pointer update process (see S7404 in FIG. 118) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

Every time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and stores the drawing content in the drawing list, which will be described later. (see FIG. 77), acquires the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and obtains the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. Therefore, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effects can be displayed.

In addition, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed based on the transfer data table before the corresponding display data table starts drawing a predetermined sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The drawing list area 233g is used by the image controller to draw an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list that instructs H.237.

Details of the drawing list will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 77 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball pattern 1, reserved ball pattern 2, ..., error pattern ) describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) for each sprite. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 .

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the type of RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and its type. The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucency value. alpha blending information, compositing with other sprites, color tone correction according to color information, and filtering according to filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, the pending number of balls to be displayed). Image, warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error, etc.), generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw the image for one frame, and provides the detailed information for each sprite. Create a draw list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the RAM type and address for storing the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type defined in the display data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can store the image data according to the sprite type. , the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

In addition, the MPU 231 sets other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite as defined in the display data table. copy the information as is.

Further, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged in the front side from the sprites to be arranged in the rearmost side in the image for one frame, and provides detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, followed by the third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, . . . ), effect (effect 1, effect 2, . Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, . . . , reserved ball pattern 1, reserved ball pattern 2, .

The image controller 237 executes drawing processing for each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and develops the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the first-drawn sprite can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the last-drawn sprite can be arranged on the frontmost side.

In the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, transfers the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a where the image data to be transferred is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 draws an image from a predetermined area of the character ROM 234 (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) based on the transfer data information. The data is read out and transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 .

The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. When one display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect to be displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the performance time by the image display time for one frame on the third pattern display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example).

Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of one frame of image are completed, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (FIG. 112(b)). )) is executed, the timer counter 233h is decremented by one (see S7406 in FIG. 118). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 judges that the presentation displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the presentation at the end of the presentation. perform various operations to

The stored image data determination flag 233j is set to indicate whether the image data corresponding to all sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

This stored image data determination flag 233j is generated by initial setting processing (see S6002 in FIG. 110) executed by the MPU 231 in the main processing when power is turned on. The storage image data determination flag 233j generated here is set to "OFF" indicating that the storage status for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The stored image data determination flag 233j is updated when an instruction to transfer image data to be transferred corresponding to one sprite is set during normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 122) executed by the MPU 231. will be In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Also, image data of other sprites to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite will always be in a non-stored state when the image data of one sprite is stored. Therefore, set the containment state corresponding to the other sprites to "off".

Also, when transferring the image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233j and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S7913 in FIG. 122). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "OFF" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, an instruction to transfer the image data is set (see S7914 in FIG. 122). , causes the image controller 237 to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of that image data is stopped. As a result, unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233k selects a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as "drawing target buffer") for developing an image drawn by the image controller 237 from among two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). ), and when the drawing buffer flag 233k is 0, it designates the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing buffer, and when it is 1, it designates the second frame buffer 236c. Then, the information of the specified drawing target buffer is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S8002 in FIG. 123).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. In parallel with the drawing process, the image controller 237 reads the drawn image information previously developed from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer, and transmits the image to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the buffer flag 233k to be drawn, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done by As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Also, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of the image for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the rendering process (see S6306 in FIG. 112B) is performed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating designations, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for an image for one frame.

The new pending ball number flag 233m is a flag for determining whether or not the number of pending symbols displayed in the pending display area Ds1b of the third symbol display device 81 is to be changed. If this new pending ball number flag 233m is on, it means that the number of pending symbols to be displayed is changed based on the display pending ball number command received from the sound lamp control device 113. If it is off, it is not changed ( It means that the command for the number of pending balls for display has not been received). The new pending ball number flag 233m is set to ON when a display pending ball number command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received (see S7001 in FIG. 116(a)). In addition, this new pending ball number flag 233m is referenced in various image setting processes (see S7501 in FIG. 119), and is set to OFF when the process of changing the number of displayed pending symbols is executed (FIG. 119 S7503). Thereby, it is possible to display the number of pending symbols corresponding to the display pending ball number command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

The reserved symbol number counter 233n is a counter for counting the number of displayed reserved symbols. The number of pending symbols corresponding to the counter value of the pending symbol number counter 233n is displayed in the pending display area Ds1b. The value of this reserved pattern number counter 233n is updated to the number of reserved balls indicated by the command each time a display reserved ball number command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 (see S7003 in FIG. 116).

The new continuation notice command flag 233o is a flag for determining whether or not to update the display setting of the continuation notice effect (8 pending effects). If this new continuous announcement command flag 233o is ON, it means that the display setting of the continuous announcement effect is updated based on the continuous announcement command for display received from the sound lamp control device 113, and if it is OFF, it is not updated. means that The new continuation notice command flag 233o is set to ON when the display continuation notice command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received (see S7101 in FIG. 116(b)). Also, this new continuous notice command flag 233o is referred to in various image setting processes (see S7504 in FIG. 119), and is set to OFF when the process of changing the number of displayed pending symbols is executed (see FIG. 119). 119 S7506). As a result, the display mode can be updated to correspond to the continuous announcement command for display received from the sound lamp control device 113 . Specifically, when the continuous notice command for display is a command indicating the start of the continuous notice effect, the notice image corresponding to the start of the continuous notice effect (see FIG. 60(a)) is set (expanded). be done. Also, if the continuous notice command for display indicates a split display (see FIG. 63), the split display data of the distribution notified by the command is set (expanded).

The error occurrence flag 233q is a flag for determining whether or not an error has occurred. If the error occurrence flag 233q is on, it means that the warning image is set (expanded), and if it is off, it means that it is not set. The error occurrence flag 233q is set to ON when an error command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received (see S7301 in FIG. 117(b)). The error occurrence flag 233q is referred to during various image setting processes (see S7507 in FIG. 119), and is set to OFF when the process for developing a warning image corresponding to the error type is executed ( See S7509 in FIG. 119). As a result, the warning image corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 113 can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

The error determination flag 233r is a flag indicating the type of error when an error occurs. A corresponding warning image is displayed based on the type of error indicated by the error determination flag 233r. This error determination flag 233r is updated based on the error type indicated by the command each time an error command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 (see S7302 in FIG. 117).

The back image change flag 233w is a flag for determining whether or not the type of the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is to be changed. If the back image change flag 233w is ON, it means that the type of the back image is changed, and if it is OFF, it means that no change is made. The back image change flag 233w is set to ON when a back image change command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received (see S7201 in FIG. 117(a)). The back image change flag 233w is referenced in the normal image transfer setting process (see S7909 in FIG. 122), and is set to OFF when the back image change process is executed (see S7910 in FIG. 122). As a result, the rear image corresponding to the rear image change command received from the audio lamp control device 113 can be displayed.

The back image discrimination flag 233x is a flag indicating the set back image type. This flag consists of, for example, 1 byte, and each bit is associated with each rear face type. If any bit of the back image determination flag 233x is on, it means that the back surface type corresponding to the bit that is on is set as the current back surface type. For example, if the 0th bit of the rear image determination flag 233x is ON, it means that the rear surface A is set. In the rear image determination flag 233x, when a rear image change command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received, the bit corresponding to the rear image notified by the command is set to ON (FIG. 117(a)). ) of S7202). At this time, all other bits are set to off. With this back image discrimination flag 233x, the currently set back surface type can be easily identified.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the first control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 78 to 90. FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 can be broadly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in this control example). There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing that is activated by input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. and main processing.

FIG. 78 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . Timer interrupt processing is periodic processing that is executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, various winning switch reading processes are executed (S101). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110, determines the states of the switches, and saves detection information (winning detection information).

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this control example). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this control example), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial random number counter CINI2 is is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203 .

Furthermore, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second winning random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in this control example, 399, 99, 99, 239), respectively, are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203. FIG.

Next, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104), and then, Start winning processing associated with winning (start winning) to the first ball entrance 64 or each second ball entrance (second ball entrance 640 or right second ball entrance 640r) is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is the process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate passage process accompanying the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is executed. (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passage processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86. FIG. After executing the through gate passage processing, the firing control processing is executed (S108), and other processing to be periodically executed is executed (S109), and the timer interrupt processing ends. Note that the shooting control process is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and that the stop switch 51b for stopping shooting is not operated. This is a process of determining on/off of the . Main controller 110 gives a ball launch instruction to launch controller 112 when ball launch is on.

Next, referring to FIG. 79, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 79 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 78), and the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third pattern performed in 81.

In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in the middle of a jackpot at the moment (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and during the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S201: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

If the special symbol jackpot is not being won (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times of holding the variation display in the special symbol N1) and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of times of holding the variation display in the special symbol N2) is obtained (S203). Then, among the special symbols 1 and 2, a variation execution determination process for determining the type of special symbol for starting variable display is executed (S204). The details of this variation execution determination process (S204) will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the process of S204 is finished, it is then determined whether or not to execute the variable display of the special symbol 1 based on the state of the variable execution flag 203j set in the variable execution determination process (S204) (S205). . In the process of S205, when it is determined that the variable execution flag 203j is in a state indicating the variable execution in the special figure 1 (that is, the upper bit is ON) (S205: Yes), the variable display of the special symbol 1 is started. Therefore, the process proceeds to S206.

In the process of S206, 1 is subtracted from the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (S206), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by calculation is set. (S207). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 89), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S207, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S208). In the process of S208, the data stored in the reservation first area to the reservation fourth area of the special symbol 1 reservation ball storage area 203a are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, a special symbol 1 variation start process for starting the variation display in the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S209), and this process is finished. The special symbol 1 fluctuation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S205, if it is determined that the variation execution flag 203j is not in a state corresponding to the variation start timing of the special symbol 1 (that is, the upper bit is off) (S205: No), then the variation execution flag 203j determines whether or not it is in a state indicating the timing of starting the fluctuation of the special symbol 2 (that is, the lower bit is ON) (S210). In the process of S210, when it is determined that the variation execution flag 203j indicates the timing of starting the variation of the special symbol 2 (lower bit is ON) (S210: Yes), to start the variation display of the special symbol 2 , S211.

In the processing of S211-S213, the same processing as the above-described processing of the reserved ball of special symbol 1 (processing of S206-S208) is performed for the reserved ball of special symbol 2. Specifically, 1 is subtracted from the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (S211), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e changed by calculation is set. (S212). The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the RAM 223 is updated by the reserved ball number command set here. After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S212, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S213). After shifting the data, a special symbol 2 variation start process for starting the variation display in the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S214), and this process ends. The details of the special symbol 2 fluctuation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the processing of S210, if it is determined that the state of the variation execution flag 203j is not the state indicating the variation start timing of the special symbol 2 (that is, the lower bit is ON) (S210: No), this processing is terminated as it is. .

On the other hand, in the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), whether the variation time of the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed It is determined whether or not (S215). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first pattern display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time has not elapsed (S215: No), the display contents of the first symbol display device 37 are updated (S216), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S215, if the variation time of the variable display being executed has passed (S215: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S217). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by special symbol 1 variation start processing (S209) or special symbol 2 variation start processing (S214), which will be described later with reference to FIG. 81 or FIG. When the special symbol 1 variation start process or the special symbol 2 variation start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area. More specifically, whether or not the special symbol jackpot is determined according to the value of the first winning random number counter C1, and in the case of the special symbol jackpot, depending on the value of the first winning type counter C2. It is determined whether the jackpot A, the jackpot B, or the jackpot C is given.

In this control example, when the jackpot A is reached, the first symbol display device 37 turns on the blue LED, when the jackpot B is reached, the red LED is turned on, and when the jackpot C is reached. Turn on the green LED. In addition, when it is out, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next variable display is started, but it may be turned on only for several seconds after the variable display is stopped.

After the process of S217 is completed, when the variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol lottery performed by the special symbol 1 variation start process or the special symbol 2 variation start process It is determined whether the result (this time's lottery result) is a special symbol jackpot (S218). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S218: Yes), the start of the special symbol jackpot is set (S219). When the start of the special symbol jackpot is set by the processing of S219, when the jackpot control processing (S1104) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 89), branching to S1201: Yes, opening command is set. As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, a big win effect is started.

After the process of S219 is completed, the variable probability flag 203h is set to OFF, and the value of the counter 203g during time saving is set to 0 (S220). The process of S220 is a process for making the state during the big hit the same as the initial state. Next, the jackpot medium flag 203k is set to ON (S221), and the process proceeds to S224.

On the other hand, in the process of S218, if the lottery result of this time is out of the special symbol (S218: No), it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203g is 1 or more (S222), and the value of the time saving counter 203g is 1 or more (S222: Yes), the value of the counter 203g during time saving is subtracted by 1 (S223), and the process proceeds to S224. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving counter 203g is 0 (S222: No), the process of S223 is skipped and the process proceeds to S224.

In the process of S224 executed after the process of S221, S222 or S223, the lighting of the LED which is the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol set in the process of S217 and the third symbol display device 81 A stop command is set (S224) to synchronize the fluctuation stop of the . After that, this process is terminated.

Next, the variation execution determination process (S204) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 80 is a flow chart showing the variation execution determination process (S204). This variation execution determination process (S204) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 79) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 78), and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display The effect pattern (variable effect pattern) of the variable effect performed by the device 81 is set to the value of the various counters stored in either the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. It is a process for determining whether to execute based on.

In the variation execution determination process, first, the variation execution flag 203j is initialized by setting 00B (S301), and then the data in the variation order storage area 203i is obtained (S302). Then, the data in the change order storage area 203i is shifted (S303). In the process of S303, the data stored in the first to eighth areas of the variation order storage area 203i are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, 1st area→execution area, 2nd area→1st area, 3rd area→2nd area, 4th area→3rd area, 5th area→4th area, 6th area→3rd area. 5 area, 7th area→6th area, 8th area→7th area, and so on. After shifting the data, it is determined whether or not the data in the execution area of the variation order storage area 203i is the data indicating the special symbol 1 (S304).

In the process of S304, when it is determined that the data in the execution area of the variation order storage area 203i is the data indicating the special symbol 1 (S304: Yes), the variation execution flag 203j is the variation start timing of the special symbol 1 is set to 10B indicating (S305), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

On the other hand, in the process of S304, if it is determined that the data in the execution area of the variation order storage area 203i is not the data indicating the special symbol 1 (S304: No), the data in the execution area of the variation order storage area 203i is the special symbol 2 (S306). In the processing of S306, when it is determined that the data in the execution area is the data indicating the special symbol 2 (S306: Yes), the state of the variation execution flag 203j is set to 01B indicating the variation start timing of the special symbol 2. (S307), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the data stored in the execution area of the variation order storage area 203i is not the data indicating the special symbol 2 (S306: No), this process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 81, the special symbol 1 fluctuation start process (S209) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 81 is a flow chart showing the special symbol 1 fluctuation start process (S209). This special symbol 1 variation start process (S209) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 79) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 78), and the various counters stored in the execution area Based on the value, a special symbol jackpot lottery (win/fail judgment) is performed, and processing for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variable effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81. is.

In the special symbol 1 fluctuation start process, first, each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area is acquired (S401).

Next, it is determined whether or not the special symbols are in the probability changing state (S402). Specifically, when the probability variation flag 203h is ON, it is determined that the probability variation is in progress, and when the probability variation flag 203h is OFF, it is determined that the probability variation is not in progress (that is, the special symbol is in a low probability state).

In the process of S402, when it is determined that the probability is changing (S402: Yes), based on the value of the first per random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S401 and the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability, A lottery result as to whether or not a special symbol jackpot is obtained (S403). Specifically, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is compared one by one with 10 random numbers stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability. As described above, 10 random numbers from "0 to 9" are set as the random numbers that become the jackpot of special symbols, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 and the random numbers that become these winnings match. If so, it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S405.

On the other hand, in the processing of S302, when it is determined that the probability variation is not in progress (the probability variation flag 203h is off) (S402: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol low probability state, so the second acquired in the processing of S401 Based on the value of the one-per-random-number counter C1 and the special symbol big-hit random number table for low probability, the lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol big-hit is obtained (S404). Specifically, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value of 1 stored in the special symbol big winning random number table for low probability. ``7'' is set as a random number value for a special pattern jackpot, and when the value of the first hit random number counter C1 matches ``7'', it is determined that the special pattern jackpot is won. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S405.

Then, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired in the process of S403 or S404 is a special symbol jackpot (S405), and when it is determined that it is a special symbol jackpot (S405: Yes), Based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S401, the display mode at the time of the big hit is set (S406). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S401 is compared with the random number value stored in the jackpot type selection table 202b, and three types of special symbol jackpots (jackpot A, It is determined what the jackpot type is among the jackpot B and jackpot C). As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 47", it is determined that it is a jackpot A (16 round probability variable jackpot), and if it is in the range of "48 to 87", It is determined to be a jackpot B (16 rounds normal jackpot), and if it is in the range of "88 to 99", it is determined to be a jackpot C (2 rounds probability variable jackpot) (see FIG. 66(b)).

In the process of S406, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C). Also, in order to stop and display the stop symbols corresponding to the jackpot types on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot types (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C) are set as stop types.

When the process of S406 is completed, next, the variation pattern at the time of the big win is determined (S407), and the process proceeds to S410. When the variation pattern is set in the process of S407, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 until it stops with the big winning symbol. A pattern variation time is determined. Specifically, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the variation pattern selection table 202d to determine the variation time of the symbol variation.

On the other hand, in the processing of S405, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S405: No), the display mode at the time of being out is set (S408). In the process of S408, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is set. Based on , as the stop type to be displayed in the third symbol display device 81, it is set whether it is front-back off reach, or front-back off reach, or complete off.

Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability variable state, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S401 is compared with the random value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. to set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", complete out is set, if it is in the range of "90 to 97", reach other than front and rear out is set, and "98 , 99”, set the front-rear out-of-reach reach. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state with special symbols, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability, and the stop type is set. . Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", complete out is set, if it is in the range of "80 to 97", reach other than front and rear out is set, and "98 , 99”, set the front-rear out-of-reach reach.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S409). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the lost symbol is determined. At this time, as in the processing of S408, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is checked, and based on the value of the variation type counter CS1, the variation time of the pattern variation such as normal reach, super reach, etc. to decide.

When the process of S407 or the process of S409 ends, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S407 or S409 is set (S410). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S406 or S408 is set (S411). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the processing of S1101 of the main processing (see FIG. 89). be done. The audio lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the processing of S411 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing.

Next, with reference to FIG. 82, the special symbol 2 fluctuation start process (S214) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 82 is a flow chart showing the special symbol 2 fluctuation start process (S214).

This special symbol 2 variation start process (S214) is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b and shifted to the execution area with respect to the special symbol 1 variation start process (see FIG. 81). The only difference is that the jackpot lottery and the determination of the variation pattern are performed, and the other aspects are the same, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the starting winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 83 is a flow chart showing this starting winning process (S105). This starting prize winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 78), and the first ball entrance 64 or each second ball entrance (second ball entrance 640 or the right side ball entrance) is executed. 2 ball entrance 640r) to determine whether or not there is a winning (starting winning), and if there is a starting winning, processing to hold the values indicated by various random number counters, and from the values indicated by the reserved various random number counters, It is a process for executing the pre-reading of the lottery result in the special symbol.

When the starting winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning) (S601). Here, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (S601: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times N1 of holding the variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S602). ). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit (4 in this control example) (S603).

Then, if there is a winning to the first ball entrance 64 (S601: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S603: Yes), special symbol 1 reserved 1 is added to the value (N1) of the ball number counter 203d (S604). Then, a special figure 1 reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by calculation is set (S605).

Special figure 1 pending ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in RAM 203, and external output processing (S1101) of the main processing (see FIG. 89) executed by MPU 201, which will be described later. , to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special figure 1 reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the special figure 1 reserved ball number command, and saves the extracted value as the special symbol 1 in the RAM 223. Stored in the reserved ball number counter 223b.

After setting the special figure 1 reserved ball number command by the processing of S605, each value of the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a (S606), and data corresponding to the first special symbol is set to the least significant bit of the variation order storage area 203i (S607). In the process of S607, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is referred to, and if the total value is 1, the first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 2, the second area is the first area, if the value is 3, the third area is the first area, and if the value is 4, the fourth area is the first area. By determining the value set in the variation order storage area 203i in the variation execution determination process (S204) described above, the first ball entrance 64 that triggers the lottery of the special symbol 1 as in this control example, Even when there are two kinds of second ball entrances that act as a lottery trigger for the special symbol 2, the variation can be started in the order of winning the entrance ball entrances.

When the process of S607 is completed, the prefetch process (S620) is executed, and the process proceeds to S609. On the other hand, if there is no winning to the first ball entrance 64 (S601: No), or even if there is a prize to the first ball entrance 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 4. If not less than (S603: No), the processing of S604 to S607 and S620 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S609.

In the process of S609, it is determined whether or not the ball has won (started winning) in any of the second ball entrances (second ball entrance 640 or right second ball entrance 640r) (S609). . If it is determined that the ball has entered each second ball entrance (second ball entrance 640 or right second ball entrance 640r) (S609: Yes), the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e The same processing as when winning the first ball entrance 64 is performed.

More specifically, the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of times N2 of holding the variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S610), and if the value is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example) ( S611: Yes), 1 is added to the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (S612), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is set (S613). Then, the values of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b (S614), and the first area of the variation order storage area 203i ( The least significant bit) is set to the data corresponding to the special symbol 2 (S615), the pre-reading process is executed (S620), and this process is finished. Note that the determination of the first area in S615 is performed in the same manner as the processing in S607.

In addition, in the processing of S609, whether there is no winning to each second ball entrance (second ball entrance 640 or right second ball entrance 640r) (S609: No), or each second ball entrance Even if there is a winning to the mouth (second ball entrance 640 or right second ball entrance 640r), if the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is less than 4 (S611: No) , the process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 84, the prefetching process (S620) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 84 is a flow chart showing this prefetching process (S620). This look-ahead process (S620) is executed in the start winning process (see FIG. 83), determines the lottery result of each special symbol in advance, and is a process for setting a winning information command based on the result of the prior determination. .

In the look-ahead process (S604), first, based on the value of the first hit random number counter C1 obtained in S606 or S614 of the start-up winning process described above, the win/loss determination result is determined (S621). It should be noted that the win/loss determination result determined here is determined in the case of winning in the normal game state. Since the fluctuation time is variably set according to the reserved number, the timing of starting fluctuation cannot be discriminated between the first special pattern and the second special pattern, so that the game state at the time of the start of fluctuation cannot be accurately discriminated. Therefore, it is only when the value of the first winning random number counter C1, which has a common jackpot determination value in both the high-probability game state and the low-probability game state, that the winning/failure determination result can be accurately determined is "7". Therefore, in the process of S621, it is determined whether or not it is determined as winning during the normal game state.

Next, it is determined whether or not the win/loss determination result in the process of S621 is a win (S622). If it is determined that the result of the success/failure determination is a win (S622: Yes), the jackpot type is selected based on the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired in S606 or S614 of the start winning process described above. , the lottery result is 1 (S623). Then, the process proceeds to S625.

On the other hand, in the process of S622, when it is determined that the result of the winning/failure determination is not a hit (that is, a loss) (S622: No), the lottery result 1 is regarded as a loss (S624), and the process proceeds to S625. In the process of S625, the stop type is selected based on the stop type selection counter C3 and the lottery result 1 obtained in S606 or S614 of the above-described startup winning process, and the lottery result is 2 (S625).

Next, based on the variation type counter CS1 and the lottery result 2 acquired in S606 or S614 of the above-described startup winning process, the variation pattern (variation time) is read ahead (S626). Then, a prize winning command is set based on the success or failure (lottery result 1), the stop type (lottery result 2), and the result of prefetching of the variation pattern (S627), and this process ends.

Thus, in this control example, the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or each of the second ball entrances (the second ball entrance 640 or the right second ball entrance 640r), When a new hold is stored, based on the hold-stored information (various counter values), the success/failure determination result is discriminated (read ahead) before the start of fluctuation and notified to the sound lamp controller 113 . As a result, based on the hold-stored hit/fail judgment result, the display mode of the hold ball is changed (for example, the color of the hold ball is changed to a different color than usual) and displayed, or before the start of variation It is possible to execute an effect to suggest the result of winning/failure determination to the player by displaying the notice pattern or the like.

Next, referring to the flowchart of FIG. 85, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 85 is a flow chart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 78), and the variation display of the normal symbol performed in the second symbol display device 83 and the electric motor associated with the second entrance 640 This is a process for controlling the opening time of the accessory 640a.

In the normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting (S701). During the winning of the normal symbol (second symbol), the second symbol display device 83 is displaying the winning, and the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is performed. including while As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is in the process of winning (S701: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S701: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is fluctuating (S702), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode of 83 is not fluctuating (S702: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times of suspension of variable display in normal symbols M) is acquired (S703). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is greater than 0 (S704), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S704: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S704: Yes), the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S705).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S706). In the process of S706, the data stored in the first reservation area to the fourth reservation area of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203c are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is obtained (S707).

Next, it is determined whether or not it is in the time saving state of normal symbols (S708). Specifically, when the value of the time saving medium counter 203g of the RAM 203 is 1 or more, or when the probability variation flag 203h is ON, it is determined that the normal symbol is in the time saving medium, the value of the time saving medium counter 203g is 0, and , If the probability variation flag 203h is off, it is determined that the normal state of the normal symbol.

In the processing of S708, when it is determined that the normal symbol is in the time-saving state (S708: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently in the middle of a jackpot (S709). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and during the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S709: Yes), the process proceeds to S711. In this control example, during the special symbol jackpot, the normal symbol lottery is less likely to win. This is because during the special symbol jackpot (that is, during the special game state), the player hits the ball to win the specific winning hole 65a, so the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entry hole 640 is opened. This is to prevent the ball that is to enter the second ball entry hole 640 as much as possible. In addition, since the specific winning hole 65a is provided immediately below the second ball-entering hole 640, even if the ball is prevented from entering the second ball-entering hole 640 during the special symbol jackpot, the second ball-entering hole 65a A large number of balls enter the ball entrance 640 . As a result, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is shifting to the special game state (jackpot state), the number of reserved balls for the special symbol 2 becomes the upper limit (4).

In the process of S709, if the special symbol jackpot is not in progress (S709: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time-saving state, so obtained in the process of S707. Based on the value of the second winning random number counter C4 and the second winning random number table for high probability, the lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol wins is acquired (S710). Specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second winning random number table 202c for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a hit of the normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,205 to 239", It is determined that it is out of the normal pattern (see FIG. 66(c)).

In the processing of S708, if it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the time saving state (the value of the time saving medium counter 203g is 0 and the probability variation flag 203h is off) (S708: No), the process proceeds to S711. In the process of S711, the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot, or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, so the value of the second winning random number counter C4 obtained in the process of S707 and the low Based on the second winning random number table for probability (see FIG. 66(c)), the lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol wins is obtained (S711). Specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second winning random number table 202c for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 20", it is determined that it is a hit of the normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 21 to 239", It is determined that it is out of the normal pattern (see FIG. 66(c)).

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the normal symbol obtained by the process of S710 or S711 is the normal symbol win (S712), and when it is determined that the normal symbol win is determined (S712: Yes), The display mode at the time of winning is set (S713). In the process of S713, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "O" is set to be illuminated as the stop symbol (second symbol).

Then, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is in the time saving state (S714), and if it is during the time saving (S714: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in the middle of the jackpot (S715). As a result of the determination in S715, when it is determined that the special symbol is in the midst of a jackpot (S715: Yes), the process proceeds to S717. In this control example, during the special symbol jackpot, in order to suppress the ball from entering the second ball entrance 640 as much as possible, even when the normal symbol wins, it is the same as when the normal symbol comes off. , the number of times of opening and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a are set.

In the processing of S715, when it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is not in progress (S715: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of the normal symbol. The opening period of the electric accessory 640a associated with the entrance 640 is set to 1 second, and the number of opening times is set to 2 (S716), and the process proceeds to S719. On the other hand, in the process of S714, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the time saving mode (S714: No), the process proceeds to S717. In the process of S717, the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot, or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of normal symbols, so the opening period of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is The time is set to 0.2 seconds, and the number of opening times is set to 1 (S717), and the process proceeds to S719.

In the process of S712, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the normal pattern (S712: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (S718). In the process of S718, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "x" is lit and displayed as the stop symbol of the normal symbol. After the setting of the display mode at the time of detachment is completed, the process proceeds to S719.

In the processing of S719, it is determined whether or not the time saving state of the normal design is in effect (S719), and if it is in the time saving state (S719: Yes), the variation time of the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 3 seconds. (S720), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is in the normal state of normal symbols (S719: No), the variation time of the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S721), and this process is finished. In this way, when the normal pattern has a high probability (time saving state), compared to the normal pattern when the probability is low (normal state), the time of the fluctuation display is very short as "30 seconds → 3 seconds". Furthermore, the opening period of the second ball entrance 640 becomes very long as "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", so that the ball can easily enter the second ball entrance 640. becomes.

In the processing of S702, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S702: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variation display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S722). The variable time here is the time set in advance by the process of S720 or the process of S721 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83 .

In the process of S722, if the variable time has not elapsed (S722: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S722, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has passed (S722: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S723). In the process of S723, the normal symbol lottery is won, and if the display mode is set by the process of S713, the "○" symbol as the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted display) on the second symbol display device 83. ). On the other hand, if the lottery for the normal symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the process of S718, the "x" symbol as the normal symbol is stopped (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83. is set to When the stop display is set by the process of S723, when the second symbol display update process (see S1107) of the main process (see FIG. 89) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is changed. After the game ends, the stop symbol (normal symbol) is stopped (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S713 or the process of S718.

Next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started, whether the normal symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is a normal symbol hit. is determined (S724). If the result of the lottery this time is a normal symbol hit (S724: Yes), the start of opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is set (S725), and this process ends. When the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S725, when the electric accessory opening/closing process (see S1105) of the main process (see FIG. 89) is executed next, the electric accessory 640a The opening/closing control is started, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S716 or S717 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S724, if the lottery result of this time is out of the normal symbol (S724: No), the process of S725 is skipped and the process ends.

Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 86 is a flow chart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passage processing (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 78) to determine whether or not the ball has passed through the through gate 67. This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the random number counter C4.

In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S801). Here, passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S801: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times of suspension of variable display in normal symbols M) is obtained (S802). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit (4 in this control example) (S803).

The ball has not passed through the through gate 67 (S801: No), or even if the ball has passed through the through gate 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S803 : No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the through gate 67 (S801: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S803: Yes), the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f 1 is added to the value (M) (S804). Then, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is the first among the free reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. area (S805), and the process ends. In addition, in the process of S805, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

FIG. 87 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 . That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 . Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power interruption occurrence information (S901), and ends the NMI interruption processing. do.

The above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout launch control device 111 in the same manner, and information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 213 by such NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. to start NMI interrupt processing.

Next, with reference to FIG. 88, startup processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 88 is a flow chart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S1001). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a wait process (one second in this control example) is executed. (S1002). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1003).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S1004), and if it is turned on (S1004: Yes), the process proceeds to S1010. On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S1004: No), it is further determined whether or not power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1005), and if not stored (S1005: No). , there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown did not end normally, so in this case as well, the process proceeds to S1010.

If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1005: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1006). If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved at the time of power shutdown, the backed-up data is destroyed. As will be described later in the processing of S1114 of the main processing (see FIG. 89), the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 203. FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the processing of S1010, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111, which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1010). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and becomes ready to start the game ball payout control. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S1011, S1012) of RAM 203. FIG.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S1011, S1012) is executed. Similarly, when power failure occurrence information is not set, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), initialization processing (S1011, S1012) of the RAM 203 is executed. . In the RAM initialization process (S1011, S1012), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1011), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1012). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S1013.

On the other hand, in the process of S1004, the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1004: No), power failure occurrence information is stored (S1005: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is If it is normal (S1007: Yes), while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203, the power failure occurrence information is cleared (S1008). Next, the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) transmits a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning to the game state at the time of drive power interruption (S1009), and the process proceeds to S1013. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the game ball payout control can be started while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213 .

In the process of S1013, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the execution of various effects is permitted to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. FIG. Next, the interrupt is permitted (S1014), and the process proceeds to main processing, which will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 89, main processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 after the start-up processing described above will be described. FIG. 89 is a flow chart showing this main process. Main processing of the game is executed in this main processing. As an overview, each process of S1101 to S1107 is executed as a periodical process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S1110 and S1111 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 78), output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is transferred to each sub-side control device (peripheral (S1101). Specifically, it determines whether or not there is winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 78). Send a prize ball command to In addition, it transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 79) and the start winning process (see FIG. 83). Also, the winning information command set in the look-ahead process (see FIG. 84) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, etc. necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . Also, the opening command, round number command, and ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 90) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . In addition, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch control device 112 when the ball is to be launched.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1102). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this control example). Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is finished, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1103), and then, in the case of the special symbol jackpot state, the execution of the jackpot production and the variable A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1104). In the jackpot control processing, the specific prize winning port 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific prize winning port 65a has passed or whether a specified number of balls have won in the specific prize winning port 65a. Then, when any one of these conditions is established, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a are repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In this control example, the jackpot control process (S1104) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, an electric accessary product opening/closing process for controlling the opening/closing of the electric accessary product 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is executed (S1105). In the electric accessary product opening/closing process, when the opening/closing control start of the electric accessary product 640a is set by the processing of S725 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 85), the opening/closing control of the electric accessary product 640a is started. The opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S716 or the processing of S717 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1106). In the first symbol display update process, S407 and S409 of the special symbol 1 variation start process (see FIG. 81), S507 of the special symbol 2 variation start process (see FIG. 82), or when the variation pattern is set by S509 , the first symbol display device 37 starts a variable display corresponding to the variable pattern. In this control example, among the LEDs 37a of the first pattern display device 37, from the start of the variation until the variation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is extinguished. At the same time, the green LED is lit, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is extinguished and the blue LED is lit, and if the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is extinguished. At the same time, the red LED is lit.

Note that the main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED change the lighting color of That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Also, in the first symbol display update process, it corresponds to the variation pattern set by S407, S409 of the special symbol 1 variation start process (see FIG. 81) and S507 or S509 of the special symbol 2 variation start process (see FIG. 82). When the fluctuation time has ended, the fluctuation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is terminated, and S406 and S408 of the special symbol 1 variation start process (see FIG. 81), the special symbol 2 variation start process (Figure 82), the stop symbol (first symbol) is stopped (lighted up) on the first symbol display device 37 in the display mode set by S506 or S508.

Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1107). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S720 or the process of S721 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 85), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83. do. As a result, the second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which the second symbol "O" symbol and the "X" symbol are alternately lit. In addition, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the processing of S723 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 85), the second symbol display device 83 is executed. Ending the current variation display, in the display mode set by the processing of S713 or the processing of S718 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 85), the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 ( display).

After that, it is determined whether power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1108). SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 milliseconds in this control example) has elapsed since the start of the main processing this time (S1109). ), if the predetermined time has already passed (S1109: Yes), the process proceeds to S1101, and the above-described processes after S1101 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time (4 milliseconds) has not yet passed since the start of the main processing this time (S1109: No), the remaining time until the predetermined time, that is, the execution timing of the next main processing. Within the time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1110, S1111).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1110). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum values (399 and 239 in this control example), they are cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the change type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1102 (S1111).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1101 to S1107 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1, and the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

In addition, in the processing of S1108, if information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1108: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 87 has been executed, so the power-off process after S1112 is executed. First, to prohibit the occurrence of each interrupt processing (S1112), to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as payout control device 111 and sound lamp control device 113) power off command indicating that the power has been cut off and transmit (S1113). Then, a RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1114), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1115), and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203 .

It should be noted that the processing of S1108 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1101 to S1107, or at the timing of the end of one cycle of the processing of S1110 and S1111 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of power failure is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. It can start from the processing of S1101. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1101, as in the case of initialization in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the processing at power-off, the stack By setting the pointer to a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S1101 can be started. Therefore, the control burden on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 90 is a flow chart showing this jackpot control process (S1104). This jackpot control processing (S1104) is executed in the main interrupt processing (see FIG. 89), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state with special symbols, execution of various effects according to the jackpot, specific winning This is a process for opening or closing the mouth (large opening) 65a.

In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether it is time to start the jackpot of the special symbol (S1201). Specifically, the process of S219 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 79) is executed, and if the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, it is determined that it is time to start the jackpot. In the processing of S1201, when it is determined that it is time to start a big hit (S1201: Yes), an opening command is set (S1215), and this processing ends.

The opening command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output processing (S1101) of the main processing (see FIG. 89). It is sent towards device 113 . Upon receiving the opening command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display opening command to the display control device 114 . When the display opening command is received by the display control device 114, the third pattern display device 81 starts the opening effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S1201, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the jackpot (S1201: No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot is in progress (S1202). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and during the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. In the process of S1202, if the special symbol jackpot is not in progress (S1202: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1202, when it is determined that the special symbol is in the middle of winning (S1202: Yes), next, it is determined whether it is time to start a new round (S1203). In the processing of S1203, if it is determined that it is time to start a new round (S1203: Yes), the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a is opened (S1204), and the number of rounds indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is displayed. A command is set (S1205). After setting the round number command, this process is terminated. The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (S1101) of the main processing (see FIG. 89) executed by the MPU 201, the sound lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113 . When the audio ramp controller 113 receives the round number command, it extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114 . When the display round number command is received by the display control device 114, the third pattern display device 81 starts a new round effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S1203, if it is determined that it is not time to start a new round (S1203: No), it is determined whether the condition for closing the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a is met (S1206). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, or after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, a predetermined number of balls When (for example, 10) or more prizes are won, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

In the processing of S1206, when it is determined that the condition for closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1206: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S1207), End the process. On the other hand, if the conditions for closing the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a are not met (S1206: No), it is determined whether it is time to start the ending effect (S1208). Specifically, when a special game state (16 rounds or all 2 rounds) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in normal times is completed, it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect.

In the process of S1208, when it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect (S1208: Yes), an ending command is set (S1209), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output processing (S1101) of the main processing (see FIG. 89). It is sent towards device 113 . Upon receiving the ending command, the sound lamp control device 113 selects the display mode of the ending effect based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223. FIG. Then, an ending command for display corresponding to the display mode of the selected ending effect is transmitted to the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the ending effect.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1208, if it is not the ending start timing (S1208: No), then it is determined whether or not it is the jackpot end timing (S1210). In the processing of S1210, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the jackpot (S1210: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S1210, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the jackpot (S1210: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the jackpot this time is the jackpot B (S1211), and if the jackpot B ( S1211: Yes), in order to shift to the time saving state of the normal symbol after the end of the jackpot B, 100 is set to the value of the time saving medium counter 203g (S1212), and the process proceeds to S1214.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1211, if it is determined that the current jackpot is not the jackpot B (that is, the jackpot A or C), in order to shift to a special symbol high probability state after the jackpot A or C ends, The variable probability flag 203h is set to ON (S1213), and the process proceeds to S1214.

In the processing of S1214, the jackpot medium flag 203k is set to OFF (S1214), and the processing is terminated. With this jackpot control process (see FIG. 90), various settings regarding the jackpot can be made.

<Regarding control processing of the audio ramp control device in the first control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 109. FIG. The processing of the MPU 221 can be broadly classified into startup processing that is started upon power-on and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, referring to FIG. 91, start-up processing executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 91 is a flow chart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S2001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing in S2219 (see FIG. 93) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure"). ) is started during execution (S2002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 93, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main controller 110 (see S2216 in FIG. 93), it executes power-off processing in S2219. Before the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing of S2219 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in-progress flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (S2002: No), the startup process this time was started after the power was completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurred and the power was shut off in S2219. Either it was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started when only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise (without receiving a power off command from the main controller 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2003).

Destruction of data in the RAM 223 is confirmed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S2006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed. If data destruction of RAM223 is confirmed (S2003: Yes), it will transfer to S2004 and will start initialization of RAM223. On the other hand, if destruction of data in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S2003: No), the process proceeds to S2008.

It should be noted that if the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power cut). ), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S2004. On the other hand, whether the current start-up processing was started after a momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off processing in S2219 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If the operation is started with the above, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S2003: No), and the process proceeds to S2008.

On the other hand, in the process of S2002, if it is determined that the power-off processing flag is ON (S2002: Yes), the current start-up process is performed after a momentary power failure occurs, and the power-off in S2219. It is started when the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset during execution of the process. In such a case, the memory state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct because the power-off process is in progress. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process moves to S2004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the processing of S2004, the storage area of the entire range of RAM 223 is checked (S2004). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, read for each byte to confirm whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined that the data is normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". All storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0 by this read/write check of the RAM 223 .

If the read/write check is normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S2006). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S2005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S2007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. Abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34 . In addition, it is possible to output a sound by the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or to transmit an error command to the display control device 114 and display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. can be

In the process of S2008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S2008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S2219 is executed (see S2218 in FIG. 93). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off processing of S2219 is executed. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S2219 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S2008: Yes), the work area of the RAM 223 is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S2009), and the process proceeds to S2010. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110 .

On the other hand, the process of S2008 is reached with the power-off flag turned off because the current start-up process was started after the power supply was completely shut off, for example. This is the case where the processing has been reached, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S2008: No), S2009, which is processing for clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2010.

The reason why the clearing process of S2009 is skipped is that when the process of S2008 is reached from S2004 via the process of S2006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S2004, When only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and start-up processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the audio lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

In the process of S2010, the initial value of RAM223 is set (S2010). Next, interrupt permission is set (S2011), and time setting processing is executed to set reference timing information (reference time) for determining the execution period (specific time zone) of the time presentation (S2012). , to the main processing.

Next, with reference to FIG. 92, the time setting process (S2012) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after the activation process of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. This time setting process (S2012) is a process for setting a reference time for determining whether or not a specific time zone (three minutes every hour since the power was turned on) has come. Based on the reference time set in the time setting process (S2012), it is determined whether or not to execute the time effect (set the special back face type).

FIG. 92 is a flow chart showing this time setting process (S2012). In this time setting process (S2012), first, time information measured by the RTC 292 is acquired (S2101), and it is determined whether or not the acquired time information is within the time limit data (S2102).

When it is determined that the time information acquired in the process of S2101 is within the time limit data (S2102: Yes), the time effect execution flag 223g is set to ON (S2103). As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example sets the time limit to three months.

When the processing of S2103 ends, the time information acquired in the processing of S2101 is set in the input time storage area 223h (S2104), and the process proceeds to S2105. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2102 that the acquired time information is not within the time limit data (S2102: No), the processes of S2103 and S2104 are skipped and the process proceeds to S2105. That is, if it is out of the time limit data, the time information is not set in the input time storage area 223h, so the time performance is not executed regardless of the time period. As a result, since the rarity of the time presentation can be increased, the player can be made to want to play the game with the pachinko machine 10 before the deadline. Therefore, it is possible to improve the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 within the time limit (within three months).

In the process of S2105, the mode counter 223i is set to 1 indicating the rear face A (S2105), and the process ends. In this way, the reference time (timekeeping information) for determining the type of effect period is stored in the input time storage area 223h of the RAM 223 by the start-up process. It is possible to determine whether or not it is the execution period of the time presentation.

In addition, if the timing of turning on the power (that is, the start-up process is performed) of the plurality of pachinko machines 10 in the hall is matched, the timing of storing the time information in the turn-on time storage area 223h of each pachinko machine 10. can also be matched. If the timing for storing the time information in the input time storage area 223h is matched, the timing for determining the specific time zone in each pachinko machine 10 can be matched, so the execution period of the time presentation can be matched. . As a result, the people involved in the hall can align the presentation periods of the pachinko machines 10 only by simultaneously turning on the power to the plurality of pachinko machines 10 in the hall. Therefore, since it is possible to display an effect with a sense of unity in a plurality of pachinko machines 10 in the hall, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 93, main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after startup processing of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 93 is a flow chart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has passed since the main process was started or since the previous process of S2201 was executed (S2201). If not (S2201: No), the process proceeds to S2212 without performing the processes of S2202 to S2211. In the process of S2201, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has elapsed because S2202 to S2211 are mainly processes related to display (effect), and there is no need to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). , the command determination process of S2212, the variable display setting process of S2213, the special background setting process of S2214, and the look-ahead effect selection process of S2215 are preferably executed in short cycles. By executing the process of S2212 in a short period, it is possible to prevent the command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed, and by executing the process of S2213 in a short period, the command received by the command determination process Based on this, it is possible to make settings related to variable production without delay. In addition, by executing the process of S2214 in a short period, switching to the special back face type can be performed without delay, and by executing the process of S2215 in a short period, a continuous announcement effect (8 pending effects ) can be made without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S2201 (S2201: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S2203 to S2215 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2202 ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S2208 described later (S2203), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S2204). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, it is notified that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). will be Also, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S2205 without notifying by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S2205, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the pending number display update process is executed (S2206). In the customer waiting effect process, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player for a predetermined period of time, a setting such as switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to a title screen is performed, and the setting is used as a command for display control. It is sent to device 114 . In the pending number display update process, a process of lighting a pending lamp (not shown) according to the values of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 pending ball number counter 223c is performed.

After that, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S2207). In this frame button input monitoring and effect processing, the input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed is monitored in order to enhance the effect of the effect, and the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed is dealt with. This is a process for setting effects. The details of this frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S2207) will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing is completed, the lamp editing processing is executed (S2208), and then the sound editing/output processing is executed (S2209). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81 . In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the processing of S2209, liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S2210). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110, the time required for the variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 and the time synchronized therewith are set. The lamp editing process of S2208 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. It should be noted that the sound editing/output processing of S2209 is also executed at the time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

When the process of S2210 ends, a rotating display operation setting process is executed (S2211). This rotation display operation setting process is a process for setting the effect operation of the rotation unit 500 . Details of this rotation display operation setting process (S2211) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the processing of S2212, command determination processing is executed to perform processing according to the command received from main controller 110 (S2212). The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. After the command determination process, a variable display setting process is executed (S2213). In the variable display setting process, a variable pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variable pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to perform a variable effect. As a result, the command is sent to display controller 114 . The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the process of S2213 ends, special background setting process is executed (S2214). This special background setting process is a process for determining whether or not to change to a background image for time presentation based on the current time clocked by the RTC 292 . The details of this special background setting process (S2214) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, a look-ahead effect selection process is executed (S2215). This look-ahead effect selection process is a process for determining the execution of a continuous advance notice effect (8 pending effects). Details of this look-ahead effect selection process (S2215) will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the process of S2215 is completed, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S2216). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110 . In the processing of S2216, if it is determined that the power-off occurrence information is stored (S2216: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S2218), and the power-off processing is executed. (S2219). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned off (S2220), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the processing of S2216 (S2216: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S2217), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S2217: No), the process returns to S2201, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2217: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes. Here, since the main processing is not executed when it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change after that. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, the player can call the hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the RAM destruction may be notified by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 .

Next, with reference to FIG. 94, frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S2207) executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 94 is a flow chart showing frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S2207). This frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S2207) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 93) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and as described above, the pressing of the frame button 22 is monitored. Then, it is a process of setting an effect corresponding to the case where the depression of the frame button 22 is detected.

In the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S2207), first, it is determined whether or not pressing of the frame button 22 has been detected (S2301). In the process of S2301, if it is determined that the pressing of the frame button 22 has been detected (S2301: Yes), a pressing control process for performing control corresponding to the pressing is executed (S2302). The details of this pressing control process (S2302) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 95 and 96. FIG. When the pressing control process ends, the process proceeds to S2304.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2301, if it is determined that the pressing of the frame button 22 has not been detected (S2301: No), pressing effect setting processing for updating the state of the pressing effect (normal pressing effect, special pressing effect) (S2303). The details of this pressing effect setting process (S2303) will be described later with reference to FIG. When the pressing effect setting process ends, the process proceeds to S2304.

When the process of S2302 or S2303 ends, the output of the touch sensor 290 is monitored, and the touch sensor control process for performing corresponding control is executed (S2304), and this process ends. Details of this touch sensor control processing (S2304) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Here, with reference to FIG. 95, the pressing control process (S2302) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 95 is a flow chart showing the pressing control process (S2302). This pressing control process (S2302) is, as described above, a process for performing corresponding control when pressing of the frame button 22 is detected.

In the pressing control process (S2302), first, it is determined whether or not the rear face change prohibition flag 223u is ON (S2401). In the process of S2401, if it is determined that the back surface change prohibition flag 223u is off (that is, not on) (S2401: No), the back surface type can be changed each time the frame button 22 is pressed by the player. It means that there is Therefore, in this case, first, the value of the mode counter 223i is updated in order to change the back surface type (S2402). Specifically, as described above, the value is updated by 1 within the range of 1 to 3. For example, if the value before update is 1, the value is updated to 2, and if the value before update is 2, the value is updated to 3. Also, if the value before updating is 3, the value is updated to 1.

After the process of S2402 is finished, next, the rear surface type corresponding to the updated value of the mode counter 223i is identified from the rear surface switching table 222c (see FIG. 70(b)) (S2403), and the display of the identified rear surface type is controlled. A display background image change command to be notified to the device 114 is set (S2404), and this processing ends. Based on this display back image change command, the display control device 114 changes the back image. As a result, the back face image can be changed each time the player's operation on the frame button 22 is detected, so that the back face type can be changed to the desired one at the player's favorite timing. Therefore, it is possible to provide a display mode that matches the taste of each player.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2401 that the back surface change prohibition flag 223u is ON (S2401: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the pressing period timer 223j is greater than 0 (that is, normal pressing effect or special pressing effect). (S2405), and if it is determined that the value of the pressing period timer 223j is not greater than 0 (that is, is 0) (S2405: No), this process ends. do.

In the process of S2405, when it is determined that the value of the pressing period timer 223j is 1 or more (greater than 0) (S2405: Yes), it means that either the normal pressing effect or the special pressing effect is being executed. . Therefore, in this case, the pressing effect in progress flag 223v is read to specify the type of the pressing period (pressing effect) (S2406). Then, it is determined whether or not it is the pressing period of the special pressing effect (pressing period at the time of continuous notice) (S2407), and if it is determined that it is the pressing period of the special pressing effect (S2407: Yes), the special pressing effect A special notification sound setting process for determining whether or not to set a special notification sound for the middle depression is executed (S2408), and this process ends. The details of this special notification sound setting process (S2408) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2407, if it is determined that it is not the pressing period of the special pressing effect (not the pressing period of the continuous notice) (S2407: No), it means that it is the pressing period of the normal pressing effect, so the normal pressing is performed. A process for determining the announcement type of the effect is executed. Specifically, the announcement type corresponding to the value of the effect counter 223f is selected from the announcement selection table 222b (see FIG. 70(a)) when pressed (S2409). Next, a display advance notice command for notifying the display control device 114 of the selected advance notice type is set (S2410), and this processing ends.

Next, the special notification sound setting process (S2408) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 96 is a flow chart showing the special notification sound setting process (S2408). This special notification sound setting process (S2408) is executed in the pressing control process (see FIG. 95) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and as described above, when the frame button 22 is pressed, This is processing for determining whether or not to set a special notification sound.

In the special notification sound setting process (S2408), first, it is determined whether or not the special notification flag 223w is ON (S2501), and if the special notification flag 223w is OFF (S2501: No), the jackpot It is determined whether or not the variable display is in progress (S2502). In the process of S2502, when it is determined that the fluctuation corresponding to the big win is being performed (S2502: Yes), a special notification execution lottery is then performed, and it is determined whether or not to set the special notification sound (S2503). Specifically, in the variation of the big hit, for example, it is determined that the prize is won in the execution lottery of the special notification at a rate of 20%. In the processing of S2503, when it is determined that the special notification execution lottery has been entered (S2503: Yes), the special notification flag 223w is set to ON, and the process proceeds to S2506 for setting the special notification sound.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2501, if it is determined that the special notification flag 223w is ON (S2501: Yes), the special notification execution lottery has already been won in the previous special notification sound setting processing (see FIG. 96). This means that the special notification sound can be set in accordance with the depression of the frame button 22 until the special depression period ends. to the processing of S2506. In the processing of S2506, a special notification sound command for sound is set for instructing the sound output device 226 to output a special notification sound (S2506). The special notification sound command set here is output to the audio output device 226 in the command output process of the main process (see S2202 in FIG. 93). The audio output device 226 that has received the special notification sound command outputs the special notification sound. As a result, it is possible for the player to perceive a big win by the special notification sound before the result of the big win variation being executed is announced. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel a sense of superiority.

After the process of S2506 is completed, the value of the pressing period timer 223j is decremented by 1 (S2507), and it is determined whether or not the value of the pressing period timer 223j after the subtraction is 0 (S2508). In the process of S2508, when it is determined that the value of the pressing period timer 223j after subtraction is 0 (S2508: Yes), the process proceeds to S2509.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2502, if it is determined that the variable display corresponding to the big hit is not being executed (S2502: No), or in the processing of S2503, if it is determined that the special notification execution lottery is not won ( S2503: No) sets a failure effect in which the special notification sound is not output (S2505), and proceeds to the processing of S2509. When this failure effect is set, for example, the button image (see FIG. 61) displayed on the third pattern display device 81 disappears, and the characters "Unfortunate" are displayed on the screen. As a result, the player can be made to recognize that he or she did not win the lottery for executing the special notification sound, or that the current variable display is a variable display corresponding to the loss. Therefore, as a result of the variable display being executed, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the variable display in anticipation of being notified of a big win.

In the processing of S2509, the end of the special pressing effect is set (S2509). After that, the back surface change prohibition flag 223u, the pressing effect flag 223v, and the special idle flag 223w are set to OFF (S2510), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2508 that the value of the pressing period timer 223j after subtraction is 1 or more (not 0) (S2508: No), the processes of S2509 and S2510 are skipped and this process ends.

With this special notification sound setting process (see FIG. 96), once the special notification sound execution lottery is won, the output of the special notification sound can be repeatedly set as long as the pressing period remains. Therefore, by continuing to press the frame button 22, the player can listen to the special notification sound as many times as desired, so that the player can feel a greater sense of satisfaction. In addition, the sooner the frame button 22 is pressed, the more the chance of listening to the special notification sound increases, so that the frame button 22 can be positively operated (depressed) when the special pressing effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the willingness of the player to participate in the special pressing effect.

Next, the pressing effect setting process (S2303) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 97 is a flow chart showing the pressing effect setting process (S2303). This pressing effect setting process (S2303) is executed when pressing of the frame button 22 is not detected in the frame button input monitoring/effecting process (see FIG. 94). This is a process for updating the aspect of the special pressing effect).

In this press effect setting process (S2303), first, it is determined whether or not it is time to start the press effect (normal press effect, special press effect) (S2601). As for the start timing of the pressing effect, the effect start time is determined in advance for each aspect of the variable display. Specifically, for example, the start timing of the normal pressing effect is determined to be one second after the occurrence of reach. In this control example, in variable display in which reach occurs, such as winning super reach and losing super reach, the reach occurs after 10 seconds from the start of the fluctuation. Therefore, in the variable display in which the normal pressing effect is executed, it is determined that the normal pressing effect starts at the timing when the elapsed time from the start of the variation reaches 11 seconds (10 seconds+1 second).

In the process of S2601, when it is determined that it is time to start the pressing effect (S2601: Yes), the upper limit value corresponding to the current pressing effect is set to the value of the pressing period timer 223j (S2602). Specifically, a timer value corresponding to 1 second is set for the normal pressing effect, and a timer value for 3 seconds is set for the special pressing effect. Here, the reason why the longer effect period is set for the special pressing effect is to increase the chances for the player to hear the special notification sound. As described above, in the first control example, when the special notification sound execution lottery is won in the special pressing effect, the special notification sound is generated every time the frame button 22 is pressed until the effect period of the special pressing effect ends. is configured to be configurable. Therefore, if the performance period is short, the performance period expires before the player listens to the special notification sound a sufficient number of times (operates the frame button 22), causing the player to feel dissatisfied. There is a risk that it will be lost. On the other hand, in the first control example, the effect period of the special pressing effect is set to be longer (three times longer) than the effect period of the normal pressing effect. With this configuration, when execution of the special notification sound is determined, the player can sufficiently press the number frame button 22 during the effect period of the special press effect. Therefore, the player can be satisfied.

In the process of S2602, after setting the upper limit value to the pressing period timer 223j, the bit corresponding to the current pressing effect in the pressing effect flag 223v is set to ON (S2603), and the background change prohibition flag 223u is turned ON. (S2604), and the process ends. As described above, the pressing effect flag 223v corresponds to the normal pressing effect in the upper bits and the special pressing effect in the lower bits.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2601, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the pressing effect (S2601: No), whether or not the value of the pressing period timer 223j is greater than 0 (whether or not the effect period of the pressing effect remains). is determined (S2605). In the process of S2605, when it is determined that the value of the pressing period timer 223j is 1 or more (the effect period of the pressing effect remains) (S2605: Yes), the value of the pressing period timer 223j is subtracted by 1 (S2606), It is determined whether or not the value of the pressing period timer 223j after subtraction is 0 (S2607).

In the process of S2607, when it is determined that the value of the pressing period timer 223j after subtraction is 0 (S2607: Yes), the termination of the pressing effect is set (S2608). After that, all the bits of the back surface change prohibition flag 223u and the pressing effect flag 223v are set to OFF (S2609), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2605 that the value of the pressing period timer 223j is not greater than 0 (that is, is 0) (S2605: No), in the process of S2607, the value of the pressing period timer 223j after subtraction is greater than or equal to 1 (not 0) (S2607: No), this processing ends.

By this pressing effect setting process (see FIG. 97), the value of the pressing period timer 223j can be updated, and the start and end of the pressing effect can be preferably set.

Next, the touch sensor control process (S2304) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing touch sensor control processing (S2304). This touch sensor control process (S2304) is executed in the frame button input monitoring/effect process (see FIG. 94), and as described above, monitors the output of the touch sensor 290 and detects if there is a touch operation. This is processing for executing corresponding control.

In the touch sensor control process (S2304), first, it is determined whether or not the touch effect is being executed (S2701). Here, the touch effect is one aspect of the interest effect executed during the variable display, and is an effect of the aspect that prompts the player to touch the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 . In the process of S2701, if it is determined that the touch effect is not being executed (S2701: No), the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2701, when it is determined that the touch effect is being executed (S2701: Yes), the effective time of the touch effect stored in the touch effect effective time storage area 223o is subtracted (S2702), It is determined whether or not the output of the touch sensor 290 is turned on (S2703).

In the process of S2703, if it is determined that the output of the touch sensor 290 is on (S2703: Yes), a display touch command indicating that the output of the touch sensor 290 is on is set (S2704). Next, 1 is added to the value in the level storage area 223k (S2705), and a display command indicating the degree of expectation corresponding to the value after the addition is set (S2706). Incidentally, when the value stored in the level storage area 223k reaches the upper limit value set corresponding to the touch effect being executed, updating the value of the level storage area 223k and setting the command are not performed. Not done. When the process of S2706 ends, the value of the interval counter 223p is reset (S2707), and the process proceeds to S2712.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2703 that the output of the touch sensor 290 is off (S2703: No), 1 is added to the value of the interval counter 223p (S2708), and the value of the interval counter 223p reaches the upper limit value. It is determined whether or not there is (S2709). In the processing of S2709, if it is determined that the value of the interval counter 223p is the upper limit value (S2709: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value stored in the level storage area 223k (S2710). Then, a display command indicating the degree of expectation corresponding to the value after subtraction is set (S2711), and the process proceeds to S2712.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2709 that the value of the interval counter 223p is not the upper limit value (S2709: No), the processes of S2710 and S2711 are skipped and the process proceeds to S2712.

In the process of S2712, it is determined whether or not the valid time of the touch effect has been updated to 0 by the process of S2702 (S2712). In the process of S2712, if it is determined that the effective time of the touch effect is 0 (S2712: Yes), the notification effect in the mode corresponding to the value of the level storage area 223k is set (S2713), and the touch effect ends. After setting (S2714), this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2712, if it is determined that the valid time of the touch effect is not 0 (S2712: No), the processing of S2713 and S2714 is skipped, and this processing ends.

Next, the rotating display operation setting process (S2211) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 99 is a flow chart showing the rotation display operation setting process (S2211). This rotation display operation setting process (S2211) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 93), and is a process for setting the effect operation of the rotation unit 500 as described above.

In the rotation display operation setting process (S2211), first, it is determined whether it is time to start the rotation display effect (S2801). Here, there is a possibility that the rotating display effect will be executed as part of the variable display corresponding to the big win, and for example, the execution will start five seconds before the variable stops. In the processing of S2801, if it is determined that it is time to start the rotating display effect (5 seconds before the stoppage of the variation of the variable display in the mode involving the rotating display effect) (S2801: Yes), the rotating display device is rotated. A start is set (S2802). Here, the driver IC for controlling the drive motor 457 is set at a rotational speed of one rotation per 0.1 seconds. Then, by setting the rotation display effect flag 223ab to ON, it indicates that the rotation display effect is being executed (S2803), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2801, if it is not the start timing of the rotating display effect (S2801: No), it is determined whether the rotating display effect flag 223ab is ON (S2804). If it is determined that the rotation display effect flag 223ab is off (that is, not on) (S2804: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S2804, if it is determined that the rotation display effect flag 223ab is ON (S2804: Yes), it means that the rotation display effect is being executed. (S2805). In the processing of S2805, if it is determined that it is time to end the rotation display effect (S2805: Yes), the end of the rotation display effect is set (S2806), the value of the rotation number counter 223aa, the rotation display effect flag 223ab, and All of the lighting set completion flags 223ac are reset (S2807), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2805, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the rotating display effect (S2805: No), then it is determined whether or not the lighting setting completion flag 223ac is ON (S2808). In the process of S2808, if it is determined that the lighting setting completion flag 223ac is ON (S2808: Yes), lighting for updating the lighting pattern of each of the LEDs 1 to 40 according to the progress of the rotation operation (rotational position). Setting update processing is executed (S2809), and this processing ends. Details of the lighting setting update process (S2809) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the processing of S2808, if it is determined that the lighting setting completion flag 223ac is off (that is, not on) (S2808: No), the first lighting setting (emission pattern ) has not been set, next it is determined whether or not the output of the origin sensor provided in the rotation unit 500 is ON (S2810). In this control example, the setting of the light emission pattern is started after the rotation speed of the rotation unit 500 is sufficiently stabilized. Specifically, the setting of the light emission pattern is started after the rotation unit 500 rotates 10 times.

In the process of S2810, if it is determined that the output of the origin sensor is off (that is, not on) (S2810: No), the rotation position of the rotation unit 500 is at an incomplete position, and setting of the light emission pattern should be started. Since it is not possible to

On the other hand, in the processing of S2810, if it is determined that the output of the origin sensor is ON (S2810: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the rotation speed counter 223aa (S2811), and the value of the rotation speed counter 223aa after the addition is It is determined whether or not it is 10 (S2812). That is, it is determined whether or not the rotation unit 500 has made 10 turns since the rotation operation of the rotation unit 500 was started. In the process of S2812, if it is determined that the value of the rotation number counter 223aa after addition is not 10 (S2812: No), the rotation speed may not be stable, and the light emission pattern setting should not be started. , the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2812, if it is determined that the value of the rotation number counter 223aa after the addition is 10 (S2812: Yes), a sufficient number of rotations (10 rounds) after the rotation operation of the rotation unit 500 is started. , and it can be considered that the rotation speed is stable, so the setting of the lighting pattern based on the operation scenario table 222f is started. Specifically, first, the operation pointer 223ae is reset (S2813). Then, the light emission pattern of the rotating unit 500 corresponding to the value (00H) of the operation pointer 223ae after reset is read from the operation scenario table 222f (see FIG. 71(c)) and set to each of the LEDs 1 to 40 (S2814). , the process ends.

By this rotation display operation setting process (see FIG. 99), the rotation display effect can be appropriately executed.

Next, the lighting setting update process (S2809) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the lighting setting update process (S2809). This lighting setting update process (S2809) is executed in the rotation display operation setting process (see FIG. 99). 40 is a process for updating the lighting pattern.

In this lighting setting update process (S2809), first, it is determined whether or not the output of the origin sensor provided in the rotation unit 500 is ON (S2901). In the process of S2901, if it is determined that the output of the origin sensor is ON (S2901: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the rotation speed counter 223aa (S2902), and the value of the step counter 223ad and the value of the operation pointer 223ae are is reset (S2903). Next, the light emission pattern corresponding to the value (00H) of the operation pointer 223ae after reset is read out from the operation scenario table 222f (see FIG. 71(c)) and set to each of the LEDs 1 to 40 (S2904), and this processing ends. do. Each time the origin sensor of the rotation unit 500 is turned on, the operation pointer 223ae is reset to reset the light emission pattern from the beginning of the operation scenario table 222f. It is possible to suppress the deviation of the timing of light emission and extinguishing of the LED.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2901 that the origin sensor is off (that is, not on) (S2901: No), the operation scenario table 222f (see FIG. 71(c)) and the value of the step counter 223ad are changed. Read (S2905), and determine whether or not the value of the step counter 223ad corresponds to the value of the operation pointer 223ae (S2906). If it is determined that the value of the step counter 223ad corresponds to the value of the operation pointer 223ae (S2906: Yes), this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2906 that the value of the step counter 223ad does not correspond to the value of the motion pointer 223ae (S2906: No), 1 is added to the value of the motion pointer 223ae (S2907), and after the addition is read out from the operation scenario table 222f (see FIG. 71(c)) and set in each of the LEDs 1 to 40 (S2908), and this processing ends.

By executing this lighting setting update process (see FIG. 100), it is possible to appropriately control lighting and extinguishing of the LEDs 1 to 40 according to the progress of the rotation operation. The afterimage of the character can be preferably made to be perceived by the player.

Next, the command determination process (S2212) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 101 is a flow chart showing this command determination process (S2212). This command determination process (S2212) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 93), and is a process for executing control according to the type of command received from main controller 110. FIG.

In the command determination process, first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and a variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110. It is determined whether or not (S3001). When it is determined that the variation pattern command has been received (S3001: Yes), the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S3002), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command ( S3003) and returns to the main process. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and referred to for determining the detailed display mode of the variation pattern in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 105) described later. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

On the other hand, in the process of S3001, if it is determined that the variation pattern command has not been received (S3001: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S3004). When the stop type command is received (S3004: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S3005), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S3006). Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 105) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3004 that the stop type command has not been received (S3004: No), then it is determined whether or not the pending ball number command has been received from main controller 110 (S3007). When it is determined that the pending ball number command is received (S3007: Yes), the special symbol (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) corresponding to the received pending ball number command is displayed on the pending ball number counter. , stores the value contained in the received pending ball count command (S3008), and terminates this process. Specifically, when the reserved ball number command received this time is the reserved ball number command corresponding to the special symbol 1, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 from the received reserved ball number command A value (number of times N1 of suspension of variable display in special symbol 1) is extracted, and this is stored in special symbol 1 suspension ball number counter 223b of voice lamp control device 113. On the other hand, if the reserved ball number command received this time is a reserved ball number command corresponding to the special symbol 2, the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110 (special The holding number N2) of the variable display in the symbol 2 is extracted and stored in the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113.

In addition, when the value of either the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is changed in the process of S3008, the updated counter value is notified to the display control device 114. A command for the number of pending balls for display is set. Since the actual number of reserved balls can be notified to the display control device 114 by this display reserved ball number command, the correct number of reserved symbols can always be displayed in the reserved display area Ds1b of the third pattern display device 81. can be displayed.

On the other hand, in the process of S3007, if it is determined that the reserved ball count command has not been received (S3007: No), it is determined whether or not the winning information command has been received from the main controller 110 (S3009). Then, when it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S3009: Yes), the winning command receiving process is executed (S3010), and this process ends.

Details of the winning command reception process (S3010) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 102 is a flow chart showing the winning command reception process (S3010).

In the winning command reception process, first, the winning information (win/fail, stop type, variation pattern) based on the winning command received from the main controller 110 is stored in the winning information storage area 223a (S3101). Next, it is determined whether or not the continuous notice flag 223q is currently set to ON (8-piece pending effect is being executed) (S3102), and the continuous notice flag 223q is set to ON (8-piece pending effect is being executed). is being executed) (S3102: Yes), it is determined whether or not the split display flag 223s is ON (S3103).

In the process of S3103, if it is determined that the split display flag 223s is off (that is, not on) (S3103: No), the value of the effect counter 223f and the continuous advance notice lottery table 222e (see FIG. 71(b)) and Based on the above, it is determined whether or not to execute the continuous advance notice effect (8 pending effects) for the new winning information (S3104). When the execution of the continuous notice effect (8 pending effects) is determined by this determination, the pending pattern corresponding to the new winning information and the pending pattern targeted for the 8 pending effects are displayed separately (see FIG. 63). ), and the continuous notice effect is extended to the reserved pattern for the new winning information.

When the processing of S3104 is completed, it is determined whether or not continuous notice is to be executed for the new winning information (S3105). If it is determined that the continuous notice is not executed for the new winning information (S3105: No), the special symbol reserved ball number counter (the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c value) is subtracted by 1 from the total value, and the remaining notice number counter 223r is overwritten (S3106).

Next, the split display flag 223s is set to ON (S3107). Then, the split display of the sub-display area Ds is set according to the value of the remaining notice number counter 223r (S3108), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in S3105, if it is determined that the continuous notice is executed for the new winning information (S3105: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c The total value is overwritten on the remaining notice number counter 223r (S3109), and this process is terminated. That is, in addition to the reserved patterns displayed at the start of the continuous advance notice performance (8 reserved performances), the continuous notice performance is set to be extended for the reserved patterns corresponding to the new winning information. By configuring in this way, the continuous announcement effect can be continued over a longer variable display, so that the player can have a longer expectation for the big win. In addition, even for new prizes, by determining the execution (extension) of continuous notice effects under the same conditions as at the start of continuous notice effects (8 pending effects), winning information with low expectations ( For example, it is possible to prevent the continuous announcement effect from being extended with respect to the stop type of complete failure. Therefore, it is possible to make the player who recognizes that the continuous notice performance (8 pending performances) has been set (extended) for the new winning information during the continuous notice performance have a higher sense of expectation. .

On the other hand, in the processing of S3102, if it is determined that the continuous notice flag 223q is off (that is, the continuous notice effect is not being executed) (S3102: No), and in the processing of S3103, the split display flag 223s is turned on. (that is, the split display has already been set) (S3103: Yes), this process ends.

By executing this winning command reception process (see FIG. 102), split display can be set when a new start winning is detected during execution of the 8 pending effects. As a result, it is possible to clearly suggest to the player how long the 8-pull pending effect will continue when a new start winning is detected.

In this first control example, once the split display (see FIG. 63) is set, it is determined whether or not to set (extend) the continuous advance notice effect (8 pending effects) for the new winning information. It was configured so that no judgment was made. That is, it is determined whether or not to set (extend) the continuous announcement effect for the new winning information only when the entire sub-display area Ds is the back of the school of fish, but it is not limited to this. . It may be determined whether or not to set (extend) the continuous announcement effect for the new winning information even after the display is divided into the back of the school of fish and the back of the bubble. That is, in the winning command reception process (see FIG. 102), the process of S3103 may be deleted, and when the continuous notice flag 223q is ON in the process of S3102 (S3102: Yes), the process of S3104 may be executed without fail. good. Then, when it is determined in the processing of S3104 that the continuous announcement effect is to be set (extended) for the new winning information, even if the split display is set, the entire sub display area Ds is displayed on the back of the school of fish. It is good also as composition which returns to a mode. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player clearly recognize that the continuous announcement effect has been extended with respect to the new winning information. In addition, if a new start winning is detected while the split display is set, and it is determined to set (extend) the continuous announcement effect for the new winning information obtained, the split display is maintained. Alternatively, the display area on the right side of the reserved pattern corresponding to the new winning information may be set on the back of the school of fish. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player more clearly recognize the reserved symbol corresponding to the highly anticipated reserved ball.

In addition, in this control example, it is determined whether or not to set (extend) the continuous notice effect (8 pending effects) for the new winning information during the continuous notice effect, and whether or not to newly start the continuous notice effect. Although the determination is made under the same condition (probability), the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as a continuous notice lottery table 222e (see FIG. 71(b)), a table to be referred to when the continuous notice effect is newly started, and a table to be referred to when a new start winning prize is detected during execution of the continuous notice effect. Tables may be separately provided to have different probabilities. In this case, the winning probability may be set higher in determining whether or not to set the continuous announcement effect for the new winning information during execution of the continuous announcement effect. With this configuration, once the continuous announcement effect is started, it becomes easy to set the continuous announcement effect for the new winning information, so that the continuous announcement effect continues over a larger number of variable displays. becomes easier. Therefore, the player can continue to have expectations for the big win for a longer period of time.

Returning to FIG. 101, the description continues. In the processing of S3009, if it is determined that the winning command has not been received (S3009: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop command has been received from the main controller 110 (S3011). Then, when the stop command is received (S3011: Yes), stop command reception processing for performing control corresponding to the stop command is executed (S3012), and the process returns to the main processing.

Here, the stop command reception processing (S3012) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 103 is a flow chart showing this stop command reception process (S3012). In the stop command reception process, first, the variable stop of the variable display in the third symbol display device 81 is set (S3201). Next, it is determined whether or not the continuous notice flag 223q is ON (S3202). If it is determined in S3202 that the continuous notice flag 223q is off (S3202: No), this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S3202 that the continuous notice flag 223q is ON (S3202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the value of the remaining notice number counter 223r is 0 (S3203). If it is determined in S3203 that the value of the remaining notice number counter 223r is 1 or more (not 0) (S3203: No), this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in S3203, when it is determined that the value of the remaining notice number counter 223r is 0 (S3203: Yes), it is determined whether or not the stop display of the jackpot symbol is set in the third symbol display device 81 (S3204). . In S3204, when it is determined that the stop display is not set for the big hit symbol (S3204: No), a continuous announcement command for display indicating the end of the continuous announcement is set (S3205), and the process proceeds to S3206.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S3204 that the stop display of the jackpot symbol has been set (S3204: Yes), the process of S3205 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3206. In the process of S3206, the continuation notice flag 223q and the split display flag 223s are set to OFF (S3206), and the process ends.

By executing this stop command receiving process, the advance notice effect can be ended appropriately when the continuous advance notice effect (8 pending effects) ends without being missed.

Returning to FIG. 101, the description continues. In the process of S3011, if it is determined that the stop command has not been received (S3011: No), then it is determined whether or not a command related to a big win has been received from the main controller 110 (S3013). And when it determines with having received the command relevant to a big hit (S3013: Yes), a big-hit related command process is performed (S3014), and it returns to a main process.

Here, with reference to FIG. 104, the jackpot related command processing (S3014) will be described. FIG. 104 is a flow chart showing this jackpot-related command processing (S3014). In the jackpot-related command process, first, it is determined whether or not an opening command has been received from the main controller 110 (S3301). Then, when it is determined that an opening command has been received (S3301: Yes), an opening command for display is set (S3302) for executing an opening effect in the third pattern display device 81, and this processing ends. do. The display opening command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed during the command output processing (S2202) of the main processing (see FIG. 93) executed by the MPU 221. It is sent towards the controller 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the opening effect.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3301 that the opening command has not been received (S3301: No), then it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S3303). When the round number command is received (S3303: Yes), the round number is extracted from the received round number command (S3304), and the display round number command is set according to the extracted round number ( S3305), the process ends. The display round number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output processing (S2202) of the main processing (see FIG. 93) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted toward the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3303 that the round number command has not been received (S3303: No), then it is determined whether or not an ending command has been received from main controller 110 (S3306). If it is determined that the ending command has been received (S3306: Yes), the display ending command is set (S3307), and this processing ends. The display ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is executed during the command output processing (S2202) of the main processing (see FIG. 93) executed by the MPU 221. It is sent towards the controller 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the ending effect. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3306 that the ending command has not been received (S3306: No), this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 101, the description continues. In the process of S3013, if it is determined that the jackpot-related command has not been received (S3013: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process corresponding to the received command is executed. (S3015), returning to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is a command used in the display control device 114, the command is displayed and controlled. A command is set to be sent to the device 114 .

By this processing, commands for performing various settings for the display control device 114 can be set based on commands output from the main control device 110 .

Next, the variable display setting process (S2213) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 105 is a flow chart showing this variable display setting process (S2213). This variable display setting process (S2213) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 93) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. In order to execute the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, A variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 .

In the variable display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variable start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S3401). Then, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not ON (that is, OFF) (S3401: No), it means that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so the process proceeds to S3405. do. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S3401: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned off (S3402). The variation pattern type in the variation performance extracted from the command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S3403).

Then, based on the extracted variation pattern, variation pattern selection processing for selecting a detailed mode of variation display is executed (S3404). Details of this variation pattern selection process (S3404) will be described later with reference to FIGS. After executing the variation pattern selection process, the process proceeds to S3405.

In the processing of S3405, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 233 is ON (S3405). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not ON (that is, is OFF) (S3405: No), it means that the stop type command has not been received from the main controller 110, so this variable display setting is performed. Terminate the process and return to the main process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S3405: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S3406). The stop type in the variable effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S3407).

Next, based on the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main controller 110, a display stop type command for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. (S3408), and the process ends. In the display control device 114, by receiving this stop type command for display, the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type indicated by this stop type command for display is stopped and displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The stop display of the variable production is controlled.

Next, the variation pattern selection process (S3404) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 106 is a flow chart showing this variation pattern selection process (S3404). This variation pattern selection process (S3404) is a process for selecting a detailed variation display mode based on the rough variation pattern notified by the variation pattern command from main controller 110. FIG.

In the variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 106), first, the value of the sub-variation selection counter 223t is obtained (S3501). Next, the sub-variation pattern selection table 222a is read (S3502), and from the read-out sub-variation pattern selection table 222a, the extracted variation pattern and the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the sub-variation selection counter 223t are selected (S3503).

After the processing of S3503 is completed, next, rotation display execution determination processing for determining whether or not to execute the rotation display effect is executed from the upper limit value of the rotation display effect (S3504). Details of this rotation display execution determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. When the rotation display execution determination process ends, the process proceeds to S3505.

In the process of S3505, based on the variation pattern type selected in the process of S3503, to generate a display variation pattern command for notification to the display control device 114, the command to send the command to the display control device 114 It is set in the ring buffer for transmission (S3505). In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third pattern display device 81 performs the variation display of the third pattern in the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command, Display control of the variable effect is started.

Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S3506). In the process of S3506, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the prize winning information storage area 223a are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of 1st area→execution area, 2nd area→1st area, 3rd area→2nd area, 4th area→3rd area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S3507.

In the process of S3507, it is determined whether or not the value of the remaining notice number counter 223r is greater than 0 (S3507). If it is determined that the value of the remaining notice number counter 223r is 1 or more (greater than 0) (S3507: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the remaining notice number counter 223r (S3508), and the process proceeds to S3509. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the remaining notice number counter 223r is not greater than 0 (that is, is 0) (S3507: No), the process of S3508 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3509.

In the processing of S3509, it is determined whether or not the split display flag 223s is ON (S3509). If it is determined that the split display flag 223s is ON (S3509: Yes), a display continuous notice command for notifying split display according to the value of the post-update remaining notice number counter 223r is set (S3510). End the process. As a result, the display mode of the sub-display area Ds in which split display (see FIG. 63) is set can be appropriately updated according to the number of pending symbols. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3509 that the split display flag 223s is off (S3509: No), this process ends.

Next, the rotating display execution determination process (S3504) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 107 is a flow chart showing this rotation display execution determination process (S3504). This rotation display execution determination process (S3504) is, as described above, a process for determining whether or not to execute the rotation display effect from the upper limit value of the rotation display effect.

When the rotation display execution determination process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern selected in the process of S3503 of the variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 106) accompanies the rotation display effect (S3601). In S3601, if the variation pattern selected in the process of S3503 does not involve a rotating display effect (S3601: No), there is no need to determine the upper limit number of times, so this process ends.

On the other hand, in S3601, if the variation pattern selected in the process of S3503 is a mode involving a rotating display effect (S3601: Yes), the current time is read from the RTC 292 (S3602), and the upper limit number of times corresponding to the read current time is set. The effect upper limit number table 222g (see FIG. 72) is read (S3603), and it is determined whether or not the value of the rotation display number counter 223x matches the read upper limit number (S3604). In S3604, if it is determined that the value of the rotation display number counter 223x does not match the upper limit number of times (S3604: No), it means that the number of times the rotation display effect is executed has not reached the upper limit number of times, so the current variation pattern. , the execution of the rotation display effect is set as it is (S3605). Next, 1 is added to the value of the rotation display number counter 223x (S3606), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S3604 that the value of the rotation display number counter 223x matches the upper limit number of times (S3604: Yes), this means that the number of times the rotation display effect has been executed has already reached the upper limit number of times. Execution of a winning touch effect is set as a substitute effect for the rotating display effect (S3607), and the process ends.

With this rotation display execution determination process (see FIG. 107), the number of times the rotation display effect that the rotation unit 500 operates can be limited to a predetermined upper limit value or less for each time slot. Here, since the rotating unit 500 is provided with a substrate member 531 on which a plurality of LEDs 532 are mounted, when an effect using the rotating unit 500 is performed, the LEDs 532 and the IC/capacitor mounted on the substrate operate. Heat is generated by doing so. Therefore, if the rotating unit 500 is operated frequently, the solder that connects the LED 532, the IC, the capacitor, and the like to the substrate may be melted due to heat generation, resulting in poor contact. Therefore, in the first control example, the upper limit of the number of operations of the rotation unit 500 according to the elapsed time (time period) is defined for each time period in order to suppress the operation frequency of the rotation unit 500 . Then, when the performance mode involving the operation of the rotating unit 500 is selected in a state where the upper limit value is reached, an alternate rendering in which the rotating unit 500 does not operate is provided. As a result, the number of operations of the rotation unit 500 can be reduced, so failures such as poor contact can be prevented (suppressed).

Next, the special background setting process (S2214) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 108 is a flow chart showing the special background setting process (S2214). This special background setting process (S2214) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 93) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and whether the time effect is set based on the time information measured by the RTC 292. This is processing for determining whether or not.

In the special background setting process (S2214), first, it is determined whether or not the time effect execution flag 223g is ON (S3701), and if the time effect execution flag 223g is OFF (S3701: No), the time effect is set. Since there is no possibility that the time effect is being executed, the present process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S3701, when it is determined that the time effect execution flag 223g is ON (S3701: Yes), time information is acquired from the RTC 292 (S3702), and the acquired time data is used for switching to the special back (time Execution of effect) It is determined whether or not the data corresponds to the timing (S3703).

In the processing of S3703, if it is determined that the acquired time data corresponds to the timing of switching to the special rear surface (S3703: Yes), the value of the special mode counter 223m is updated (S3704), and the updated The special back surface type corresponding to the value of the special mode counter 223m is identified from the special back surface switching table 222d (see FIG. 71(a)) (S3705). Then, the display back image change command for notifying the display control device 114 of the change to the specified special back surface type is set (S3706), the back surface change prohibition flag 223u is set to ON (S3707), and this End the process.

On the other hand, in the process of S3703, if it is determined that the time data acquired in the process of S3702 is not the switching timing to the special back face (S3703: No), is the acquired time data data indicating the end timing of the special back face? It is determined whether or not (S3708). In the process of S3708, if it is determined that it is not the special back end timing (S3708: No), the process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3708 that it is time to end the special back surface (S3708: Yes), the back surface type corresponding to the value of the mode counter 223i is identified from the back surface switching table 222c (see FIG. 70(b)). Then, a display rear surface change command is set for notifying the display control device 114 of the change to the specified rear surface type (S3709). Next, the rear face change prohibition flag 223u is set to OFF (S3710), and the process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 109, the look-ahead effect selection process (S2215) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 109 is a flow chart showing the prefetch effect selection process (S2215). This look-ahead effect selection process (S2215) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 93) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and is executed based on the look-ahead result of each reserved ball (8 balls). This is a process for determining whether or not the pending effect can be executed.

In the look-ahead effect selection process (S2215), first, it is determined whether or not the continuous notice flag 223q is ON (S3801). In the process of S3801, when it is determined that the continuous announcement flag 223q is ON (S3801: Yes), the continuous announcement effect (8-piece pending effect) is already being executed, so this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S3801, if it is determined that the continuous notice flag 223q is off (that is, not on) (S3801: No), the special symbol reserved ball number counter (the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special It is determined whether or not the total value of the symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c) is 8 (S3802).

In the processing of S3802, if it is determined that the total value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter (the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c) is 8 (S3802: Yes ), it is determined whether or not the variation display of the third symbol is being executed and it is one second before the variation is stopped (S3803). In the process of S3803, if it is determined that it is one second before the fluctuation stop (S3803: Yes), based on the value of the effect counter 223f and the continuous notice lottery table 222e (see FIG. 71 (b)), each hold It is determined whether continuous notice can be executed for the ball (S3804).

In the processing of S3805, when it is determined that the continuous notice is to be executed in the judgment of any of the held balls (S3805: Yes), it is decided to start the continuous notice effect for the currently held eight held balls. A continuous announcement command for display is set for notification to the display control device 114 (S3806). Then, the remaining notice number counter 223r is set to 8 (S3807), and the continuous notice flag 223q is set to ON (S3808). After that, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3802, the total value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter (the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c) is not 8 (that is, is 7 or less). (S3802: No), in the process of S3803, if it is determined that it is not 1 second before the fluctuation stop (S3803: No), and in the process of S3805, continuous notice is given in the execution determination for all the held balls is not executed (S3805: No), this process is terminated as it is without setting the start of the continuous announcement effect (8 pending effects).

<Regarding control processing of the display control device in the first control example>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 110 to 123. FIG. The processing of the MPU 231 can be broadly classified into main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and processing for one frame from the image controller 237. There is V interrupt processing that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when image drawing processing is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 and execute the V interrupt process.

First, with reference to FIG. 110, main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 110 is a flow chart showing this main process. The main processing is to execute initialization processing when the power is turned on.

Activation of this main process is specifically performed according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" and , the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. FIG. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 . Then, the MPU 231 fetches the received instruction code from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

Here, if all the boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND type flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read out and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present control example, the NOR ROM 234d stores a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is canceled, thereby speeding up the NOR ROM. Since it is a memory from which data can be read, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 is set so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. to start.

Here, referring to FIG. 111, the boot processing (S6001) will be described. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing boot processing (S6001) executed in the main processing in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. FIG.

As described above, in this control example, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of being stored in a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. The character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed is stored. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND-type flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, especially when performing random access. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM and the data table. A process of transferring and storing in the storage area 233b is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is canceled is executed. Of the control programs stored in the 2-program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S6101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the rest of the boot program included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101.

By setting the command pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6102, the MPU 231 can execute various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processing. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

After the command pointer 231a is set by the process of S6102, the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set command pointer 231a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. Of the control programs stored, the remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b (S6103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) of the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

After executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 110) is completed. By setting the top address of the program corresponding to the initializing process (see S6002 in FIG. 110) (S6105), the execution of the boot program is finished, and the boot process ends.

By executing the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 110) in this way, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to the program storage area 233a and data table storage area 233b of the work RAM 233 and stored therein. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processing is executed using

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a whose read speed is slow, the control program and fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the fixed value data after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect part.

On the other hand, without storing the entire boot program in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the rest of the boot program is stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a. , the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding the NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.

Note that in the boot process shown in FIG. 111, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 includes all remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. may be part of As for the boot program transferred here, a predetermined amount of the control program including all remaining boot programs is transferred to the program storage area 233a. 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S6101 transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the beginning of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting an address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing is further transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount of part of the remaining boot program, and subsequently stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a, and then the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set in the instruction pointer 231a in step S6101. and the processing of S6102 may be repeated a plurality of times, and then the processing of S6103 to S6105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the rest of the boot program not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at once, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. Using the boot program, a predetermined amount can be transferred to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in this control example, the first program storage area 234d1 stores a part of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released. It may be stored in the 1-program storage area 234d1. In this case, the MPU 231 may perform the processes of S6103 to S6105 without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102 after starting the boot process. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231, which becomes possible after the boot process, more quickly.

Now, return to the description of FIG. 110 . After the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings are made for the registers in the MPU 231 and the I/O device. In addition, processing for clearing the memory of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the image controller 237 is initialized, the image controller 237 is instructed to draw an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. and instruct execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be a different color according to the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, it is inspected whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the pachinko machine 10 It is possible to easily and immediately judge whether or not the activation can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). This transfer instruction contains the leading and trailing addresses of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating transfer end to the MPU 231 . By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or in a partial area of the built-in memory. It may be written. The MPU 231 reads information from this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby ascertaining that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing in S6003, the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to . This transfer instruction includes the starting address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235). , and the head address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination. It is transferred to the change image area 235b when the power is turned on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S6004, then the simple image display flag 233c is set. is turned on (S6005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 121(a)), which will be described later. Resident image transfer setting processing for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer is executed (see S7702 in FIG. 121(a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. Remains on until terminated. As a result, during this time, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 112B), the simple command determination processing (see S6308 in FIG. 112B) and the simple display setting processing are performed so that the power-on image is drawn. (See S6309 in FIG. 112(b)) is executed.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234. Due to its slow read speed, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a long time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Therefore, as in this main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on varying image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image at power-on is transferred to the third image. By displaying it on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player and the people involved in the hall can see the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 114 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed, so that the rest of the resident video RAM 235 can be resident. It is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped while the image data to be processed is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 .

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to prevent deterioration of the operation check efficiency by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234. FIG.

In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the power-on main image is the third symbol. When the player starts the game while the display is displayed on the display device 81, the first ball entrance 64 or each second ball entrance (the second ball entrance 640 or the right second ball entrance 640r ) and there is an instruction to start the variable performance from the main controller 110 via the audio lamp control device 113, that is, when a variable pattern command for display is received, when the power is turned on To perform a simple variation performance by immediately displaying a variation image during the variation performance period. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the third symbol display device 81 continues to display the main image when the power is turned on. is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, it takes a long time to transfer the data. However, in this pachinko machine 10, since it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after the power is restored, Immediately after the power is turned on, even while the main image is being displayed, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the processing of S6005, interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Accordingly, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S6006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 112(a). FIG. 112(a) is a flow chart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes command interrupt processing.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing or simple command determination processing of V interrupt processing to be described later, and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 112(b). FIG. 112(b) is a flow chart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 77) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

As described above, this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the image controller 237 and sent to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

Here, first, an outline of the flow of V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 112(b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301). If it is off (S6301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. In order to display on the display device 81, command determination processing (S6302) is executed, and then display setting processing (S6303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S6302), the content of the command from the sound lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demonstration display data table or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer data corresponding to the set display data table is transferred. The table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processed. This is because command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when V interrupt processing is executed, and there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when main controller 110 decides to start a variable effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are stored in the command buffer area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly comprehend the mode and stop type of the variable performance selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113, and generate a performance image corresponding to the mode. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . Details of the command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 113 to 117. FIG.

In the display setting process (S6303), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302), etc., an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 is displayed. specifically identify the content of In addition, depending on the status of processing, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

After the display setting process is executed, task processing is executed (S6304). In this task processing, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 specified by the display setting processing (S6303) or the simple display setting processing (S6309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters required for drawing such as the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 is caused to transfer image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236 a of the video RAM 236 , even when a continuous notice command or a back image change command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 , the image controller 237 is continuously instructed to A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous notice images used in the notice effect and the image data of the rear image after change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.例文帳に追加Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 121 and 122. FIG.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, based on the types of sprites that make up one frame determined in the task process (S6304) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S6305), 77, and transmits the drawing list to the image controller 237 together with the buffer information to be drawn. As a result, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Details of the rendering process will be described later with reference to FIG. 123 .

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S6307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of the stop type command for display is detected, the stop type indicated by the stop type command for display (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, front-back off reach, front-back off reach, complete The stop type table corresponding to (out) is compared with the stop type counter, and the stop design after the variable effect displayed on the third design display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, in the process of S6301, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S6301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third pattern display device 81, simple command determination processing (S6308) is executed, then simple display setting processing (S6309) is executed, and the process proceeds to S6304.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 113 to 117, details of the command determination process (S6302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 113 is a flow chart showing this command determination processing.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 113, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401). After completing the command determination process, the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S6303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S6402). All unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area are analyzed for their command types (S6403).

Then, among the unprocessed commands, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command (S6404), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S6404: Yes), the variation pattern command process is executed. (S6405) and returns to the processing of S6401.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command process (S6405) will be described with reference to FIG. 114(a). FIG. 114(a) is a flowchart showing variation pattern command processing. In this variation pattern command processing, processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

In the variation pattern command process, first, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is stored in the variation effect table storage area of the data table storage area 233b. (not shown) and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6501).

Here, since the main controller 110 always determines the start of variation at a time interval of several seconds or more, it does not receive two or more display variation pattern commands within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly used for display. There is a possibility that it will be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S6501, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern with a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the main control device will actually produce a variation effect with a shorter variation time than the set display data table. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation performance according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may make the player feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, as in this control example, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d, the variation longer than the set display data table can be actually obtained. Even if the variable effect with time is instructed by main controller 110, after the variable effect according to display data table buffer 233d is completed, main controller 110 will send the next display for display, as will be described later. Since the display of the third pattern display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the third pattern display on the third pattern display device 81 without any discomfort. 3 You can continue to see the variation of the pattern.

Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502).

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6504). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S6505), the variation pattern command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command process (see FIG. 114(a)), in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S6504, the display data table buffer 233d is stored by the process of S6501. From the set variable display data table, the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f are extracted, and the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 are specified, and at the same time S6502. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e by the processing of 1, and the necessary sprite image data in the set variable display data table is The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in advance.

Further, in the display setting process, the time counter 233h to which the time data is set by the process of S6503 is used to measure the time of the variable presentation specified in the variable display data table, and when the variable presentation in the variable display data table ends. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type command for display from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

Now, return to the description of FIG. 113 . In the processing of S6404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command in the unprocessed commands (S6406), If there is a display variation type command (S6406: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S6407), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the stop type command process (S6407) will now be described with reference to FIG. 114(b). FIG. 114(b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command processing is for executing processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the stop type command processing, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information indicated by the stop type command for display (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, front/rear out reach, reach other than front/rear out, or complete loss) is determined (S6601), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 112(b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device Finally, the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed in 81 is set (S6602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flags corresponding to the other stop symbols are turned off. (S6603), and the process ends.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has passed since the variation based on the data table is started. , offset information (design offset information) from the stop design set by the processing of S6602. In the above-described task processing (S6304), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, the stop design set by the process of S6602 is specified from the stop design determination flag set by S6603, and the specified stop By adding the design offset information acquired by the display setting process to the design, the third design to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to the specified third pattern is stored is specified. Image data corresponding to the third design is stored in the third design area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

It should be noted that since the main controller 110 always determines the start of fluctuation at a time interval of several seconds or more, two or more stop type commands for display are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore command determination processing is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the processing of S6601, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more stop type commands for display are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out, and the stop type Decide on a table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss is set by the processing of S6602.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 displays the "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is out". A stop pattern corresponding to the "big win" is displayed, and the player is misled into thinking that the pachinko machine 10 has "a special pattern big win", and there is a risk of degrading the reliability of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加On the other hand, as in this control example, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss, in fact, if it is a "special symbol jackpot", the third symbol display device 81 stops the complete loss. Even if the symbols are displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "jackpot of special symbols", so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 113, the description is continued. In the processing of S6406, if it is determined that there is no stop type command for display (S6406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an opening command for display among the unprocessed commands (S6408). If there is an opening command (S6408: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S6409), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the opening command process (S6409) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 115(a) is a flow chart showing the opening command process. This opening command process is for executing a process corresponding to the display opening command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the opening command process, first, the opening display data table is read from the opening effect table storage area (not shown) of the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in the process of S6701 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702).

Then, based on the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6701, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S6704). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S6705), the opening command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this opening command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S6704, from the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6701, At the same time as extracting the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and specifying the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81, the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored by the processing of S6702. From the set transfer data table, the transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image is transferred to the image storage area 236a.

Also, when this opening command process is executed, the opening transfer data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. As a result, image data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 while the opening effect is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 . As described above, the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, and due to its slow read speed, the jackpot effect (opening effect, round effect, ending effect) is produced. It takes a long time to transfer the image data used for the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 .

The number-of-rounds command for display indicating the number of newly started rounds is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 at the timing when the opening effect in the third pattern display device 81 ends, so it indicates the first round. If the image data necessary for the round effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the display round number command is received, there will be a lot of waiting time from the end of the opening effect to the start of the round effect. There is a risk that this will take time and cause the player to feel uneasy about whether or not the action has stopped.

In addition, the ending command for display instructing the start of the ending effect is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 at the timing when all the round effects (for 16 rounds or 2 rounds) in the third pattern display device 81 are completed. Therefore, if the image data necessary for the ending effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after receiving the ending command for display, it will be impossible to start the ending effect after the end of the round effect. There is a risk that a lot of waiting time will occur in the game, and that the player will feel uneasy about whether the action has stopped or feel a sense of incongruity.

Therefore, in this control example, when the opening command for display is received, the transfer of the data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect is started from there. , the transfer of the data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect is completed. As a result, when the opening effect in the third pattern display device 81 ends, the round effect can be immediately started in the third pattern display device 81, and the round effect in the third pattern display device 81 is all (for 16 rounds). , or for two rounds), the ending effect can be immediately started on the third pattern display device 81, so that the player may feel uneasy about whether the action has stopped or feel uncomfortable. do not have. Therefore, the player can be made to feel at ease.

As described above, in this control example, when it is determined that the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is the jackpot stop type, the transfer of the image data used in the opening effect is started, Control is performed so that the transfer of image data used in the opening effect is completed by the time the third pattern display device 81 finishes the variation effect that becomes a big hit. As a result, when the variation performance that becomes a big win is completed in the third pattern display device 81, the opening performance can be immediately started in the third pattern display device 81, so that the player is worried whether the operation has stopped. And it doesn't make you feel uncomfortable. Therefore, the player can be made to feel at ease.

Returning to FIG. 113, the description is continued. In the processing of S6408, if it is determined that there is no opening command for display (S6408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an ending command for display among the unprocessed commands (S6410). If there is an ending command (S6410: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S6411), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the ending command process (S6411) will now be described with reference to FIG. 115(b). FIG. 115(b) is a flow chart showing the ending command process. This ending command process is to execute the process corresponding to the display ending command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the ending command process, first, the ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is stored in the ending effect table storage area of the data table storage area 233b. (not shown) and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6801). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S6802). Then, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6801, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S6804). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to off (S6805), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this ending command process, the ending effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the special symbol jackpot ends, so that the player can recognize that the jackpot has ended. can be made

Now, return to the description of FIG. 113 . In the process of S6410, if it is determined that there is no ending command for display (S6410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a pending number of balls command for display among the unprocessed commands (S6412), If there is a pending ball number command for display (S6412: Yes), the pending ball number command process is executed (S6413), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, with reference to FIG. 116(a), the details of the pending ball count command process (S6413) will be described. FIG. 116(a) is a flow chart showing the pending ball count command process. This reserved ball number command processing is to execute a process corresponding to the display reserved ball number command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the pending ball number command process, first, the new pending ball number flag 233m is set to ON (S7001). Then, the number of reserved balls is extracted from the received number of reserved balls command for display (S7002), the reserved symbol number counter 233n is updated based on the extracted number of reserved balls (S7003), and this number of reserved balls command processing is terminated. and returns to the command determination process.

Now, return to the description of FIG. 113 . In the processing of S6412, if it is determined that there is no command for the number of pending balls for display (S6412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a continuous notice command for display among the unprocessed commands (S6414). If there is a continuous notice command for display (S6414: Yes), the continuous notice command process is executed (S6415), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the continuous notice command process (S6415) will now be described with reference to FIG. 116(b). FIG. 116(b) is a flow chart showing continuous notice command processing. This continuous announcement command process is to execute the process corresponding to the display continuous announcement command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the continuous notice command process, first, the new continuous notice command flag 233o is set to ON (S7101). Then, the distribution between the back surface of the school of fish and the back surface of the bubble is extracted from the continuous notice command for display (S7102). Next, based on the extracted distribution, the continuous announcement information storage area 233p is updated (S7103), the continuous announcement command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Now, return to the description of FIG. 113 . In the process of S6414, if it is determined that there is no continuous notice command for display (S6414: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S6416). If there is an image change command (S6416: Yes), the back image change command process is executed (S6417), and the process returns to S2201.

Here, with reference to FIG. 117, the details of the back image change command processing (S6417) will be described. FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing back image change command processing. The back image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the back image change command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the back image change command process, first, the back image change flag 233w is set to ON (S7201). As a result, it is possible to determine the change of the back image in the normal image transfer setting process (see S7703 in FIG. 121). Of the back image determination flags 233x provided for each back image type (back surfaces A to C and special back images A to C corresponding to time effects), the flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is selected. The back image determination flag 233x is turned on, and the back image determination flag 233x corresponding to another back image type is set to off (S7202), the back image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the normal image transfer setting process (see S7703 in FIG. 121), when it is detected that the background image change flag 233w set by the process of S7201 is turned on, from the background image determination flag 233x set by the process of S7202, Identify the back image type after the change. If the specified back image type is back B or C, image data corresponding to the back images are not resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so the image data is not stored. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so as to transfer from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 . If the back image type after change is back A, all the image data are resident in the resident video RAM 235, so the image is not transferred.

Further, in the task processing, if it is specified to display any one of the back faces A to C and the special back faces A to C corresponding to the time effect according to the back face type of the back face image specified in the display data table, From the back image discrimination flag 233x set by the process of S7202, the back image type to be displayed at that time is specified, and furthermore, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the back image is determined. The RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data corresponding to the range is stored and the address of the RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 for 20 milliseconds or less, two or more background image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. In this case, there is no case where two or more back image change commands are stored in the command buffer area. However, there is a possibility that part of the command may change due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command may be erroneously interpreted as the rear image change command. In the process of S7202, if it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the back image determination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image determination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set it according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

Now, return to the description of FIG. 113 . If it is determined in the processing of S6416 that there is no back image change command (S6416: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S6418). Otherwise (S6418: Yes), the error command process is executed (S6419), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the error command processing (S6419) will now be described with reference to FIG. 117(b). FIG. 117(b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. In this error command processing, processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

In the error command process, first, the error occurrence flag 233q indicating that an error has occurred is set to ON (S7301). Of the error determination flags 233r provided for each error type, the error determination flag 233r corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags 233r are set off (S7302). , terminates the error command processing and returns to the command determination processing.

In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S7301, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S7302, and the error type is handled. A process is executed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image to be displayed.

If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the process of S7302, the error discrimination flags 233r corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. . As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the people involved in the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence of the error.

Now, return to the description of FIG. 113 . If it is determined in the process of S6418 that there is no error command (S6418: No), then the process corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S6420), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

In the process of S6401, which is executed again after each command has been processed, it is again determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes ), and the processing of S6402 to S6418 is executed again. Then, the processing of S6401 to S6418 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. End the process.

Note that the simple command determination process (S6308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 112(b)) is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, only the commands necessary to display the power-on image, that is, the display fluctuation pattern command and the display stop type command, are extracted from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. It extracts and executes fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 114 (a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 114 (b)), which are processing corresponding to each command, and other commands , the command is discarded without executing the process corresponding to the command.

Here, in the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 114(a)) executed in this case, in the process of S6501, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on variation image is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on varying image which are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on varying image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S6502, the process of writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 118 to 120, the details of the display setting process (S6303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 118 is a flow chart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 118, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7401). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination processing to be executed first, the processing of S7402 and S7403 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S7404. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S7401: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination processing, and after setting the new command flag to off (S7402), Various image setting processes are executed to set an image corresponding to the command (S7403).

Details of the various image setting processes (S7403) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing various image setting processing (S7403).

In the various image setting processing (S7403), first, it is determined whether or not the new pending ball number flag 233m is ON (S7501), and if the new pending ball number flag 233m is ON (S7501: Yes), the pending symbol The number of reserved symbol data corresponding to the value of the number counter 233n is developed (S7502). Then, the new pending ball count flag 233m is set to OFF (S7503), and the process proceeds to S7504. On the other hand, if the new pending ball number flag 233m is not ON, that is, if it is OFF (S7501: No), the processing of S7502 and S7503 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S7504.

In the processing of S7504, it is determined whether or not the new continuation notice command flag 233o is on (S7504). (S7505). Then, the new continuous notice command flag 233o is set to OFF (S7506), and the process proceeds to S7507. On the other hand, if the new continuation notice command flag 233o is not ON, that is, if it is OFF (S7504: No), the processes of S7505 and S7506 are skipped and the process proceeds to S7507.

In the processing of S7507, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag 233q is ON (S7507). (S7508). Then, the error occurrence flag 233q is set to OFF (S7509), and the process returns to the display setting process. On the other hand, if the error occurrence flag 233q is not ON, that is, if it is OFF (S7507: No), the processes of S7508 and S7509 are skipped and the process returns to the display setting process.

Returning to FIG. 118, the description is continued. When the various image setting processes (S7403) have ended, or when it is determined in the process of S7401 that the new command flag is off (S7401: No), then the pointer update process is executed (S7404).

Details of the pointer update processing (S7404) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing (S7404). This pointer updating process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the respective buffers of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is the process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the address to which it should be applied.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7601). That is, the pointer 233f is basically updated so that it is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is specified after the address "0001H". When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the storage in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the process of S7601, it is then checked whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is End information. is determined (S7602). As a result, if it is End information (S7602: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the entity data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S7603). If it is a demonstration display data table (S7603: Yes), the display data table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S7604), the pointer 233f is initialized by setting it to 1 (S7605), this process is terminated, and the display is performed. Return to setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effects.

On the other hand, in the process of S7603, if it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S7603: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 (S7606 ), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is displayed. Since the drawing contents are always expanded, the third pattern display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3202, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the End information (S7602: No), this process ends and returns to the display setting process.

Here, returning to FIG. 118, the description is continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are developed from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7405). In the task processing, based on the drawing contents developed in the process of S7405 together with the previously developed warning image, etc., the types of sprites (display objects) that make up the image are specified, and the display coordinate position is determined for each sprite. , enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and other parameters required for drawing.

Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S7406), and it is determined whether or not the value of the clock counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7407). Then, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S7407: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S7407: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is time to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the fixed display flag is on. (S7408).

As a result, if the confirmation display flag is off (S7408: No), the production of the confirmation display has not yet been performed, and it is time to perform the production of the confirmation display. The processing of S7414 is executed. In the process of S7409, the confirmed display data table is read from the confirmed display effect table storage area of the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7409), and then Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e. By doing so, the contents are cleared (S7410). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the fixed display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S7411).

When the process of S7411 ends, the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7412). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S7413), the content of the stop symbol discrimination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S7414), returns to V interrupt processing.

Thus, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, etc., the fixed display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. You can set the drawing contents like this. In addition, only by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the fixed display data table, the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed to the fixed display effect. In addition, compared to the conventional case of changing the display contents by activating another program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore the MPU 231 is not overloaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 can be caused to display various types of effect images.

It should be noted that the last stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S7414 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before, and in the variable display data table, the variation based on the data table Until a predetermined time elapses after the start, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before is described. In the task processing (S6304), until a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variation, from the last stop design determination flag set by the processing of S7414, the stop design of the fluctuation production performed one before is specified. , the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the processing of S7408, if the fixed display flag is ON (S7408: Yes), the processing of S7415 to S7420 is executed in order to set the display mode of the demonstration effect. In the process of S7415, it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is ON (S7415). If the demonstration display flag is off (S7415: No), the demonstration display data table is read and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7416), and then Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the contents are cleared (S7417). Then, the time data corresponding to the rendering time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S7418).

When the processing of S7418 is completed, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7419), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S7420), and this processing is terminated and the V division is performed. return to load processing.

As a result, even after a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has passed after starting the final display of the third symbol, the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect or the display opening command is received. If not, the drawing contents can be set so that the third pattern display device 81 automatically displays the demonstration effect.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 121 and 122, the details of the transfer setting process (S6305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 121(a) is a flow chart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S7701). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7701: Yes), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so resident image transfer setting processing is performed. is executed (S7702) to end the transfer setting process and return to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not turned on as a result of the processing of S7701, that is, if it is turned off (S7701: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video data. It has been transferred to the RAM 235 . In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7703), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 . Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, resident image transfer setting processing (S7702), which is part of the transfer setting processing (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 121(b). FIG. 121(b) is a flow chart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S7702).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data has been given to the image controller 237 (S7801). ), and further determines whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S7802). In the processing of S7802, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer processing is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer processing has ended. . If it is determined by the process of S7802 that the transfer process has not ended (S7802: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process, so this resident image transfer setting process is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S7802: Yes), the process proceeds to S7803. Also, as a result of the processing of S7801, even if a transfer instruction for image data that has not been transferred has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S7801: No), the process proceeds to S7803.

In the process of S7803, it is determined whether or not all resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S7803). A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so as to transfer the resident image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7804), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

As a result, the transfer data information about the untransferred resident target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (where the data is transferred). The first address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores it in the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is not in use. , it is transferred to the specified address of the resident video RAM 235 . Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S7803, if all the resident target image data have been transferred (S7803: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S7805), and the resident image transfer setting processing ends. As a result, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 112B), the command Since the judgment processing (see FIGS. 113 to 117) and the display setting processing (see FIGS. 118 to 120) are executed, normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 displays the normal image. Further, subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 122) (see S7701: No in FIG. 121(a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 transfers all resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, excluding the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be held without overwriting while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the image controller 237 , the image drawing process can be performed. As a result, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a whose read speed is slow when drawing the image. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as rear images, third designs, character designs, and error messages, as well as main controller 110, sound lamp controller 113, and display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is immediately resident after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at any timing can be prevented. , high responsiveness can be maintained until the third pattern display device 81 displays some kind of image.

Next, referring to FIG. 122, normal image transfer setting processing (S7703), which is part of the transfer setting processing (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 122 is a flow chart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S7703).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S7404) of the previously executed display setting process (S6303) is used. Information described in the indicated address is acquired (S7901). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S7902). , and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S7903), furthermore, a transfer start flag, which is provided in the work RAM 233 and indicates that there is image data whose transfer is to be started in the ON state, is set to ON (S7904), and the process proceeds to S7905.

Also, in the processing of S7902, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but Null data (S7902: No), the processing of S7903 and S7904 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the processing of S7905. In the process of S7905, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S7905), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S7905: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S7906).

In the process of S7906, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined by the process of S7906 that the transfer process has not ended (S7906: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process, so the normal image transfer setting process is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S7906: Yes), the process proceeds to S7907. Also, as a result of the process of S7905, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process is completed (S7905: No), the process proceeds to S7907.

In the processing of S7907, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S7907). is turned off (S7908), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S7903 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the processing proceeds to S7913. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not ON, but OFF (S7907: No), then it is determined whether or not the back image change flag 233w is ON (S7909). Then, if the back image change flag 233w is not on but off (S7909: No), there is no image data to start transferring, so the normal image transfer setting process ends.

On the other hand, if the back image change flag 233w is on (S7909: Yes), it means that the back image has been changed. Of the back image determination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag 233x in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the image data to be transferred (S7911). Furthermore, the head address (storage source head address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag 233x in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination ( The start address of the normal video RAM 236) is obtained (S7912), and the process proceeds to S7913.

When the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is for back A, all the corresponding image data are resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 Data does not exist. Therefore, in the process of S7911, if the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is for the back A, the normal image transfer process ends.

In the process of S7913, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7913). The determination in the process of S3713 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233j. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is read from the stored image data determination flag 233j, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite to be transferred is normal video If it is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is "OFF", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

As a result of the processing in S7913, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7913: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , the normal image transfer setting process ends. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. can be planned.

On the other hand, if the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S7913 (S7913: No), a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set (S7914). As a result, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 receives the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the image to be transferred, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, the transfer destination). The start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is to be stored. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). forward to the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

After the processing of S7914, the stored image data determination flag 233j is updated (S7915), and this normal transfer setting processing ends. The stored image data determination flag 233j is updated by, as described above, setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the image data to be transferred to "ON", and by substituting the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are to be stored in the area to "off".

By executing the normal image transfer processing in this way, the processing corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination processing. When the displayed stop type information is determined to be the stop type of the jackpot, the image data used in the jackpot performance can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination processing, the image data used for the back image is stored in the back image of the resident video RAM 235 . Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in this control example, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. , a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. By executing the normal image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 sends data to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. can be done.

Here, the transfer data table stores the image data to be transferred so that the image data corresponding to the given sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the given sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, whereby the predetermined address is obtained according to the display data table. image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load on transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 123, details of the drawing process (S6306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 123 is a flow chart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites that make up one frame determined in task processing (S6304) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information , color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the drawing list shown in FIG. 77 is generated (S8001). That is, in the process of S8001, the type and address of the storage RAM in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites forming one frame determined in the task process (S6304). , parameters necessary for the sprite determined by task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, each sprite is rearranged in order from the sprite that should be placed on the backmost side to the sprite that should be placed on the front side in the image for one frame. As drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which sprite image data is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. If a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the top address (storage source top address) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored as the transfer data information is displayed at the end of the drawing list. , the final address (storage source final address), and the top address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S8002). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1, including information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. includes information instructing to develop the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws the image in order from the sprite described at the head of the drawing list, and develops it by overwriting in the frame buffer indicated by the drawing object buffer information. As a result, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the first-drawn sprite can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the last-drawn sprite can be arranged on the frontmost side.

When transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. ), and the head address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and the image data stored from the head address of the storage source to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a are sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236, when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. The image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 after that, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing object buffer information, and sends the image information along with the drive signal to the third pattern display device 81. Send to As a result, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . Further, while expanding the image drawn in one of the frame buffers, the image drawn from one of the frame buffers can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and drawing processing and display processing are simultaneously processed in parallel. be able to.

In the rendering process, after the process of S8002, the rendering target buffer flag 233k is updated (S8003). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The rendering target buffer flag 233k is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting "1" if the value was "0" and "0" if it was "1". done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of one frame of image are completed. This is performed each time the rendering process of the loading process (see FIG. 112(b)) is performed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. is executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for the first half is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By specifying these alternately, it is possible to perform display processing of an image for one frame continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing processing for an image for one frame is being performed.

As described above, in the first control example, when the number of reserved balls of special symbol 1 and the number of reserved balls of special symbol 2 both reach the upper limit value (4), eight reserved balls A continuous announcement effect that sets a special announcement effect over the variable display can be executed. The performance of the 8 ball reservation is configured to be more likely to be determined as the lottery results with high expectations are reserved in the reserved balls. Therefore, when the 8-piece pending effect is executed, the player can play the game in anticipation of a big win in the pending state.

In addition, in the first control example, when a new starting winning prize is detected during execution of the 8-ball reservation effect, and the number of the ball-holding balls increases, the reserved pattern corresponding to the ball-holding object of the 8-ball reservation effect is detected. , and the reserved pattern corresponding to the new reserved ball are displayed (dividedly displayed) in a manner in which the player can easily distinguish between them. Here, even if a new starting winning is detected until the 8-piece pending effect is completed, if the entire sub display area Ds is fixed to the display mode dedicated to the 8-piece pending effect, then the 8-piece pending effect is obtained. When only the reserved balls corresponding to the new start prize detected in the game are left, the operation as if the 8 reserved performance suddenly ended despite the remaining reserved symbols. It may become In other words, there is a possibility that the player will have the impression that the 8-piece holding effect has been terminated in the middle, which may make the player feel uncomfortable. On the other hand, in the first control example, by performing the split display, it is possible to clearly suggest to the player how long the 8 pending effect will continue when a new start winning is detected. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from having a sense of incompatibility at the end of the 8-piece holding effect.

In addition, in the first control example, the rotating unit 500 configured by a Versawriter is configured to be able to execute a rotating display effect for displaying a specific character. In this rotation display effect, by switching the light emission pattern of the plurality of LEDs 532 provided on the rotation unit 500 according to the progress of the rotation operation, a specific character (for example, "hit") is displayed in the trajectory of the light emitted by each LED. characters) are configured to be perceptible to the player as an afterimage. As a result, it is possible to provide a novel presentation that is different from the display presentation by a general display device.

Here, since the rotating unit 500 is provided with a substrate member 531 on which a plurality of LEDs 532 are mounted, when an effect using the rotating unit 500 is performed, the LEDs 532 and the IC/capacitor mounted on the substrate operate. Heat is generated by doing so. Therefore, if the rotating unit 500 is operated frequently, the solder that connects the LED 532, the IC, the capacitor, and the like to the substrate may be melted due to heat generation, resulting in poor contact. Therefore, in the first control example, the upper limit of the number of operations of the rotation unit 500 according to the elapsed time (time period) is defined for each time period in order to suppress the operation frequency of the rotation unit 500 . Then, when the performance mode involving the operation of the rotating unit 500 is selected in a state where the upper limit value is reached, an alternate rendering in which the rotating unit 500 does not operate is provided. As a result, the number of operations of the rotation unit 500 can be reduced, so failures such as poor contact can be prevented (suppressed). In this control example, the detection range of the touch sensor 290 and the rotation range of the rotation unit 500 are close to each other. Therefore, in order to avoid competition between the operation of the rotating unit 500 and the touch effect using the touch sensor 290, the touch effect can be executed only as an alternative effect when the number of operations of the rotating unit 500 reaches the upper limit. Configure. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from being puzzled by the simultaneous occurrence of the touch effect and the rotating display effect.

In addition, in the first control example, the upper limit value of the number of operations of the rotation unit 500 is increased by two times every three hours, but it is not limited to this. For example, regardless of the time zone, it may be configured such that the rotating display effect can be executed until the upper limit number of times per day (for example, 10 times) is reached. With this configuration, the earlier the game is played, the higher the possibility that the rotation display performance will be executed. can.

In this first control example, in order to prevent the touch effect and the rotating display effect from being executed at the same time, when the execution of the rotating display effect is canceled (when the number of times of executing the rotating display effect reaches the upper limit number If there is), it was configured to execute the touch effect as an alternative effect, but it is not limited to this. For example, whether or not to set a touch effect may be determined first, and only when the touch effect is not set, the rotation display effect may be selectable. In addition, it is not necessary to adopt a configuration that performs two-stage discrimination. In the sub-variation pattern selection table 222a, the variable display mode in which only the rotation display effect is set and the variable display mode in which only the touch effect is set are separately defined in association with the values of the different sub-variation selection counters 223t. It is good also as a structure which keeps. In addition, the sub-variation pattern selection table 222a defines a variable display mode in which the execution period of the touch effect and the execution period of the rotating display effect are staggered and both effects are executed in one variable display. good too. Even when these modifications are applied, it is possible to prevent the touch effect and the rotation display effect from being executed at the same time. Therefore, when the player tries to touch the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 according to the touch effect, the rotating unit 500 is touched, and the rotating unit 500 is damaged or the player is injured. This can be prevented (suppressed). In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling the stress of not being able to satisfactorily participate in the touch performance because it becomes difficult for the player to touch the display screen due to the rotating operation of the rotating unit 500 .

In this first control example, once the split display (see FIG. 63) is set, it is determined whether or not to set (extend) the continuous advance notice effect (8 pending effects) for the new winning information. It was configured not to do so. That is, it is determined whether or not to set (extend) the continuous announcement effect for the new winning information only when the entire sub-display area Ds is the back of the school of fish, but it is not limited to this. . It may be determined whether or not to set (extend) the continuous announcement effect for the new winning information even after the display is divided into the back of the school of fish and the back of the bubble. That is, in the winning command reception process (see FIG. 102), the process of S3103 may be deleted, and when the continuous notice flag 223q is ON in the process of S3102 (S3102: Yes), the process of S3104 may be executed without fail. good. Then, when it is determined in the processing of S3104 that the continuous announcement effect is to be set (extended) for the new winning information, even if the split display is set, the entire sub display area Ds is displayed on the back of the school of fish. It is good also as composition which returns to a form. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player clearly recognize that the continuous announcement effect has been extended with respect to the new winning information. In addition, if a new start winning is detected while the split display is set, and it is determined to set (extend) the continuous announcement effect for the new winning information obtained, the split display is maintained. Alternatively, the display area on the right side of the reserved pattern corresponding to the new winning information may be set on the back of the school of fish. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player more clearly recognize the reserved symbol corresponding to the highly anticipated reserved ball.

In addition, in this control example, it is determined whether or not to set (extend) the continuous notice effect (8 pending effects) for the new winning information during the continuous notice effect, and whether or not to newly start the continuous notice effect. Although the determination is made under the same condition (probability), the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as a continuous notice lottery table 222e (see FIG. 71(b)), a table to be referred to when the continuous notice effect is newly started, and a table to be referred to when a new start winning prize is detected during execution of the continuous notice effect. Tables may be separately provided to have different probabilities. In this case, the winning probability may be set higher in determining whether or not to set the continuous announcement effect for the new winning information during execution of the continuous announcement effect. With this configuration, once the continuous announcement effect is started, it becomes easy to set the continuous announcement effect for the new winning information, so that the continuous announcement effect continues over a larger number of variable displays. becomes easier. Therefore, the player can continue to have expectations for the big win for a longer period of time.

In the first control example, the display mode of the secondary display area Ds in which the reserved symbols are displayed is changed to the mode in which the image of the school of fish is displayed on the back as the continuous notice effect (8-piece pending effect). , but not limited to these. It is sufficient if the same system of production is set continuously over eight (plural) variable displays, for example, the display mode (color, shape, etc.) of the pending symbol that is the target of the continuous advance notice production is changed. You may As a result, the player can easily understand the reserved symbols to be subjected to the continuous advance notice effect. In addition, instead of changing the display mode of the back of the sub-display area Ds and the reserved pattern, or in combination, the display mode of the variable display of the third pattern for which the continuous advance notice effect is set is changed to a special mode. It is good also as a structure which carries out. Specifically, a specific character that does not appear (or is difficult to appear) in the variable display executed in a state where the continuous announcement effect is not set may be displayed, or the third pattern mode may be changed to a continuous announcement. The configuration may be such that the display mode is changed to a display mode dedicated to effect, or the back image is changed to a back face type dedicated to continuous advance notice effect. Also, the combination of stop symbols at the time of loss may be configured to be a special combination of stop symbols (so-called chance eye).

In the first control example, whether or not to newly execute the continuous notice effect (8 pending effect) is determined regardless of the number of the highly anticipated pending ball. However, it is not limited to this. A configuration may be adopted in which the more the lottery result with a high degree of expectation is reserved for the new reserved ball in terms of time, the easier it is to execute the 8 ball reservation performance. By configuring in this way, when the continuous notice effect is started, the expectation that the ball on hold in the second half will be a big hit can be increased, so the player expects until the end of the continuous notice effect. You can keep the feeling.

In the first control example, only two settings, ie, ON or OFF, are provided for the red, blue, and green LEDs in the LEDs 1-40. That is, in the settings of the LEDs 1 to 40 in the operation scenario table 222f, if the bit corresponding to each color is 1 (on), the LED of that color is turned on, and if it is 0 (off), the LED of that color is turned on. A simple control for turning off the lights was performed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the settings of the LEDs of each color may be finer. Specifically, it may be configured to have a plurality of stages of light emission states from turning off to full lighting. That is, the LED current value of each color LED can be changed in a plurality of steps (for example, 16 steps), thereby adjusting the brightness of each color to achieve gradation expression. Then, as the operation scenario table 222f, the data corresponding to the lighting state of each color is represented by the number of bits corresponding to the number of stages (for example, 16 bits for 16 stages). ), the LED current value of each color may be updated from the read bit data. By configuring in this way, red, green, blue, yellow (red + green), purple (red + blue), light blue (green + blue), and white (red + blue) can be expressed by combinations of red, green, and blue. In addition to green + blue) and black (all off), various colors can be realized. Specifically, by lighting red, green, and blue with current values corresponding to half the brightness of full lighting, gray can be expressed as a color. In addition, it is possible to express orange as a color by lighting all red (lighting at the maximum current value), lighting green at a current value corresponding to half the luminance when all lighting, and turning off blue. can.

<Modification of First Control Example>
Next, a modified example of the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 124 to 128. FIG. In the first control example described above, each of the LEDs 1 to 40 is configured as a set of three color LEDs of red, green, and blue, and the LEDs of each color can be turned on and off independently. , was configured to be able to express multiple colors.

On the other hand, in the modified example of the first control example, monochromatic LEDs are adopted as the LEDs 1 to 40, respectively. Specifically, LEDs 1-20 were each replaced with a single red LED, and LEDs 21-40 were each replaced with a single blue LED. As a result, the weight of the rotating unit 500 can be reduced, and the cost rate can be reduced.

The pachinko machine 10 in the modification of the first control example differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above in that the LEDs 1 to 20 are replaced with single red LEDs, and the LEDs 21 to 40 are replaced with single red LEDs. The point that each is replaced with a single blue LED, the point that part of the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed, and the part of the processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the first It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the first control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

First, the structure of the rotating unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 124(a). As shown in FIG. 124(a), in this modification, among the 40 LEDs 532 provided in the rotating unit 500, LED1 to LED20 are red LEDs, and LED21 to LED40 are blue LEDs. . In this control example, as the rotating display effect, only LEDs 1 to 20 composed of red LEDs are turned on to display red characters as afterimages, and only LEDs 21 to 40 composed of blue LEDs are turned on. A blue character effect is provided in which blue characters are displayed as afterimages by turning on the lights. In addition, the red character performance is configured to be easily selected by the variation pattern of the probability variable big wins (big wins A and C), and the blue character performance is configured to be easily selected by the variation pattern of the normal big win (big win B). By configuring in this way, when the rotation operation of the rotation unit 500 is started, the game can be played by paying attention to the lighting color.

In addition, in this modification, it is possible to execute a purple character effect that may be selected only in the variation pattern of the jackpot A (16-round probability variable jackpot) that is most advantageous to the player. This purple character rendering will be described with reference to FIG. 124(b). FIG. 124(b) is a diagram showing a mode of an afterimage during execution of the purple character effect. When the purple character effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 124(b), the red LED and the blue LED arranged at the target position of each red LED perform the same lighting operation at the same rotational position. As a result, an afterimage drawn by the red light emitted by the red LED and an afterimage drawn by the blue light emitted by the blue LED are alternately viewed at minute time intervals. In this case, it is difficult for the human eye to visually distinguish red characters from blue characters. , the afterimage is perceived as purple characters.

In this way, in this modified example, characters in three colors can be expressed using only two-color LEDs. As a result, the number of parts of the rotating unit 500 can be reduced, so that the production effect can be maximized while reducing the weight and the cost rate.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the modification of the first control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 125, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the modified example of the first control example will be described. FIG. 125 is a block diagram showing the structure of RAM 223. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 125, the RAM 223 in this modification differs from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first control example (see FIG. 73) in that a scenario storage area 223af is provided. Other configurations are the same as those of the RAM 223 in the first control example.

The scenario storage area 223af is a storage area for storing action scenarios corresponding to red character effects, blue character effects, and purple character effects. It should be noted that in the modification of the first control example, only the action scenario for the red character effect is specified for the action scenario table 222f. That is, only the light emission patterns for the LEDs 1 to 20 are defined, and the light emission patterns for the LEDs 21 to 40 are not defined. Therefore, if the action scenario read out from the action scenario table 222f is applied as it is, only the red character effect can be executed. Therefore, in this modification, an action scenario read from the action scenario table 222f is converted into a format corresponding to each effect and stored in the scenario storage area 223af, and based on the action scenario stored in the scenario storage area 223af. The light emission pattern is set by pressing. By configuring in this way, the amount of data in the single operation scenario table 222f can be reduced.

When the blue character effect is to be executed, the scenario storage area 223af stores data obtained by inverting the corresponding relationship between the LEDs of the operation scenario read from the operation scenario table 222f and the light emission patterns. That is, the light emission pattern of LED1 is converted into the light emission pattern of LED40, the light emission pattern of LED2 is converted into LED2, and each light emission pattern up to LED21 is inverted and stored in the scenario storage area 223af. As a result, it is possible to realize a blue character effect with simple control. Further, when the purple character effect is executed, the scenario storage area 223af is updated by inverting the correspondence relationship between the LEDs of the operation scenario and the light emission pattern each time the rotary unit 500 rotates. As a result, it is possible to realize a purple character effect with simple control.

<Regarding the control process of the sound ramp control device in the modified example of the first control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the modified example of the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 126 to 128. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 126, the rotating display operation setting process (S2211) in this modification will be described.

FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing the rotating display operation setting process (S2211) in this modified example. In the rotating display operation setting process (see FIG. 126) in the modified example of the first control example, each of the processes of S2801 to S2808 and S2810 corresponds to the rotating display operation setting process (see FIG. 99) in the first control example. The same processes as those of S2801 to S2808 and S2810 are executed.

Further, in the rotating display operation setting process (see FIG. 126) in the modification of the first control example, when it is determined in the process of S2808 that the lighting setting completion flag 223ac is ON (S2808: Yes), the first control Instead of the lighting setting update process (see FIG. 100) in the example, lighting setting update process 2 is executed (S2821), and this process ends. Details of this lighting setting update process 2 (S2821) will be described later with reference to FIG.

If it is determined in the processing of S2810 that the output of the origin sensor is ON (S2810: Yes), lighting start processing for setting the start of the light emission pattern is executed (S2822), and this processing ends. . Details of the lighting start process (S2822) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, details of the lighting setting update process 2 (S2821) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing lighting setting update processing 2 (S2821). This lighting setting update process 2 (S2821) updates the lighting pattern of each of the LEDs 1 to 40 in accordance with the progress of the rotation operation (rotational position) of the rotary unit 500, similar to the lighting setting update process (see FIG. 100). This process is for

Of the lighting setting update process 2 (see FIG. 127) in the modified example of the first control example, each process of S2901 to S2903, S2906, and S2907 is the lighting setting update process in the first control example (see FIG. 100). , S2901 to S2903, S2906, and S2907 are executed.

In addition, in the lighting setting update process 2 (see FIG. 127) in the modified example of the first control example, after the process of S2902 ends, it is next determined whether or not the current rotation display effect is the purple character effect ( S2911), if it is a purple character effect (S2911: Yes), a scenario is generated by reversing the correspondence relationship between the LEDs and light emission patterns of the operation scenario currently stored in the scenario storage area 223af, and the scenario storage area 223af is overwritten (S2912), and the process proceeds to S2903. The process of S2911 is executed each time the rotary unit 500 completes one turn and returns to the origin position. Therefore, when the purple character effect is set, the red LED emission pattern changes every time the rotary unit 500 makes one turn. , and the emission pattern for the blue LED can be set alternately. Therefore, afterimages drawn by red light and afterimages drawn by blue light are alternately perceived at minute time intervals, and as a result, red and blue are synthesized by the integration effect, and violet can be perceived. Therefore, afterimages of different colors can be expressed using only the red LED and the blue LED.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2911, if it is determined that the current rotation display effect is not the purple character effect (the red character effect or the blue character effect) (S2911: No), the scenario stored in the scenario storage area 223af Since (light emission pattern) can be used as it is, the process of S2912 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2903.

In the process of S2903, as in the first control example, the values of the step counter 223ad and the action pointer 223ae are reset to initial values (S2903). Next, the light emission pattern corresponding to the value (00H) of the operation pointer 223ae after reset is read out from the scenario storage area 223af and set in each of the LEDs 1 to 40 (S2913), and this processing ends.

In addition, in the lighting setting update process 2 (see FIG. 127) in this modified example, when it is determined in the process of S2901 that the output of the origin sensor is OFF (S2901: No), The operation scenario (light emission pattern) and the value of the step counter 2233ad are read (S2914), and the process proceeds to S2906.

In addition, in the lighting setting update process 2 (see FIG. 127) in this modified example, when the process of S2907 is completed, the light emission pattern corresponding to the value of the operation pointer 223ae updated by the process of S2907 is read out from the scenario storage area 223af. The settings are made for each of the LEDs 1 to 40 (S2915), and the process ends.

Next, the lighting start process (S2822) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 128 is a flow chart showing the lighting start process (S2822). This lighting start process (S2822) is executed in the rotation operation setting process (see FIG. 126), determines whether or not the rotation speed of the rotation unit 500 is stabilized, and if the rotation speed is stabilized, each LED 1 to This is a process for setting 40 light emission patterns.

In the lighting start process (S2822), first, 1 is added to the value of the revolution counter 223aa (S3901). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the rotational speed counter 223aa after addition is 10 (S3902). That is, as in the first control example, it is determined whether or not the rotation speed of the rotation unit 500 has reached a rotation speed at which it can be considered sufficiently stable. In the process of S3902, if it is determined that the value of the rotation speed counter 223aa is not 10 (9 or less) (S3902: No), the rotation speed after the start of the rotation operation is small and the rotation speed is stable. Since there is a possibility that there is no light emission pattern, the processing is terminated as it is without setting the light emission pattern.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S3902 that the value of the rotation speed counter 223aa is 10 (S3902: Yes), the operation scenario defined in the operation scenario table 222f is read (S3903), and the read operation scenario are converted according to the effect type (red character effect, blue character effect, purple character effect) and stored in the scenario storage area 223af.

Specifically, it is determined whether or not the current rotating display effect is a blue character effect (S3904). After reversing the correspondence with the pattern, the operation scenario after reversal is stored in the scenario storage area 223af (S3905), and the process proceeds to S3907. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3904 that the current rotating display effect is not a blue character effect (a red character effect or a purple character effect) (S3904: No), the action scenario read out in the process of S3903 is processed. It is stored in the scenario storage area 223af as it is without (conversion) (S3906), and the process proceeds to S3907.

In the process of S3907 executed after the process of S3905 or S3906, the value of the action pointer 223ae is reset to the initial value (00H) (S3907), and the light emission pattern corresponding to the value of the action pointer 223ae after reset is stored in the scenario storage area. 223af and set to each of LEDs 1 to 40 (S3908), and this processing ends.

By this lighting start processing (see FIG. 128), the action scenario is processed (converted) according to the type of presentation, and the light emitting operation of each of the LEDs 1 to 40 can be started in the action scenario after the processing (conversion).

As described above, in the modified example of the first control example, monochromatic LEDs are adopted as the LEDs 1 to 40, respectively. Specifically, LEDs 1-20 were each replaced with a single red LED, and LEDs 21-40 were each replaced with a single blue LED. As a result, the weight of the rotating unit 500 can be reduced, and the cost rate can be reduced.

In addition, in the modification of the first control example, the type of LED to be lit (red LED or blue LED) is switched for each round, and the lighting position and the lighting position are controlled to be the same position. The production is configured to be executable. As a result, the red afterimage caused by the emission of the red LED and the afterimage of blue caused by the emission of the blue LED are combined, and the player can perceive the afterimage as a purple afterimage. Therefore, even with a small number of types of LEDs, it is possible to express a greater number of colors, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

In this modified example, the rotation speed of the rotation unit 500 is set constant (one rotation in 0.1 seconds) regardless of the type of rotation display effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the purple character effect is set, the rotary unit 500 may be configured to rotate at a rotational speed faster (for example, twice) than the rotational speed of other effects. With this configuration, it is possible to shorten the time interval from when the LED of one color emits light to when the LED of the other color emits light at the same position during the rendering of purple characters, so that an afterimage is eliminated. It can be made to perceive purple more clearly. Therefore, the presentation effect can be further enhanced.

In this modified example, two types of red and blue LEDs are used, but the type of LED is not limited to this, and any type of LED may be used. For example, green and white LEDs may be employed, or yellow and orange LEDs may be employed. By configuring in this way, the degree of freedom in design can be improved. Also, the LED is not limited to one color, and an LED in which LED chips of two or more different colors are arranged in one package may be adopted. By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the number of colors that can be expressed, so that the presentation effect can be enhanced. Specifically, for example, as the LEDs 1 to 20, LEDs configured by a combination of a red LED, a blue LED, and a green LED are employed as in the first control example. On the other hand, as the LEDs 21 to 40, LEDs composed of a combination of cyan, magenta, and yellow are employed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to expand the expressible color gamut.

In this modified example, only two settings, ie, ON or OFF, are provided for each of the LEDs 1 to 20 composed of red LEDs and for each of the LEDs 21 to 40 composed of blue LEDs. That is, if the bit corresponding to each of LEDs 1 to 40 in the operation scenario table 222f is 1 (on), the LED corresponding to that bit is turned on, and if it is 0 (off), the LED corresponding to that bit is turned off. Although simple control was performed to allow the user to perform the control, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, each LED may be set more finely. Specifically, it may be configured to have a plurality of stages of light emission states from turning off to full lighting. That is, the LED current value of each LED may be configured to be changeable in a plurality of steps (for example, 16 steps), thereby adjusting the brightness of each LED to enable gradation expression. Then, as the operation scenario table 222f, the data corresponding to the lighting state of each LED is represented by the number of bits corresponding to the number of stages (for example, 16 bits for 16 stages). ), the LED current value of each LED may be updated from the read bit data. By configuring in this way, various colors can be realized in addition to the three colors of red, blue, and purple. Specifically, all the red LEDs that have reached a predetermined lighting position are lit, and in the next cycle, the blue LEDs that have reached the same lighting position are lit with half the brightness of the full lighting, resulting in a pink color. can be expressed. In this case, the LEDs 1 to 20 are configured with a combination of red, green, and blue LEDs as in the first control example, and the LEDs 21 to 40 are configured with a combination of LEDs of different colors (for example, cyan, magenta, and yellow). may be configured. By configuring in this way, it is possible to realize afterimages in more diverse colors. In addition, since an afterimage of a color that can be represented by a combination of red, green, and blue and an afterimage of a color that can be represented by a combination of cyan, magenta, and yellow can be switched at high speed in a very short time, it is possible to eliminate these afterimages. By superimposing, it is possible to realize an afterimage with a wider color gamut than can be expressed only with red, blue, and green. Therefore, the presentation effect can be further enhanced.

In this modified example, only one operation scenario table 222f defining the light emission pattern for red LEDs (for LEDs 1 to 20) is provided. Although the correspondence relationship between the LEDs and the light emission pattern in the light emission pattern for red characters is reversed and set so that the light emission pattern can be set for the blue LED, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, two types of light-emitting patterns for rendering red characters and light-emitting patterns for blue-letter rendering are provided. It is good also as a structure which switches alternately every round. By configuring in this way, it is possible to express a mode that does not have rotational symmetry in the vertical direction as a display mode of the afterimage, so that the degree of freedom of rotation display effects can be improved.

In this modified example, only three types of effects are provided: a red character effect consisting only of red afterimages, a blue character effect consisting only of blue afterimages, and a purple character effect consisting only of purple afterimages. However, an effect in which an afterimage of each color coexists may be executed. Specifically, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a light emission pattern having a light emission position where only one of a blue LED and a red LED emits light and a light emission position where both of them emit light is provided. By configuring in this way, it is possible to diversify the variations of the display mode of the afterimage in the rotation display effect.

In the first control example and its modified example, the light emission pattern for one rotation of the rotation unit 500 is defined as the operation scenario table 222f (see FIG. 71(c)), and the same data is used as it is or processed. (Reversing the correspondence relationship between the LEDs and the light emission patterns). For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of different scenarios are defined as light emission patterns for one round, and the operation scenario to be applied is switched for each rotation number of the rotation unit 500 (value of the rotation number counter 223aa). Then, it may be configured such that the mode of the afterimage changes according to the rotation speed (the value of the rotation speed counter 223aa). Specifically, for example, the three characters of "hit" may repeatedly approach and separate from each other according to the number of rotations, thereby creating an afterimage that looks as if each character is shaking. Also, the characters may be gradually changed according to the number of revolutions (for example, characters such as "congratulations"). By configuring in this way, it is possible to diversify the effect modes of the rotating display effect, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Regarding the second control example>
Next, a second control example of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 129 to 147. FIG. In the first control example described above, the number of times a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of times a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 or the right second ball entrance 640r are four times, which is the upper limit value. (When a total of 8 balls are put on hold), a series of advance notice effects (8 pending effects) are executed over the variable displays corresponding to the 8 ball passes. A possible gaming machine has been described.

On the other hand, in the present second control example, as the effect display executed by the third symbol display device 81, a giving effect of giving a ticket (privilege) is displayed, and the number of tickets given in the giving effect is displayed. In accordance with the above, the reel performance is displayed during the jackpot game. The reel effect is that the patterns are stopped and displayed in a manner in which three patterns are aligned (any of "○○○", "△△△", and "□□□"), and the probability variation game state is established after the jackpot game. is given (that is, winning the variable probability jackpot). Since this reel effect is configured to be executed (displayed) during the jackpot game after the execution of the normal opening effect indicating that the normal game state is provided after the jackpot game, the jackpot game is started. Since it is possible to inform the player who was aware that the normal gaming state will be granted when the can be given to the player, and the interest of the player can be improved.

In the second control example, when the winning information is suspended based on the winning of the game ball, the fluctuation type is removed prior to the suspension, and the short fluctuation winning information is continuously suspended. Based on this, it is configured to change (overwrite) those outlier short fluctuations to short reach fluctuation types and execute continuous short reach production. When winning prize information for a big win based on the winning of a game ball is reserved, the short reach performance is set so as to be executed three times in succession as a continuous short reach performance, and winning prize information resulting in a loss is reserved. is set so that the short reach is continuously executed twice as the continuous short reach effect. As a result, the player plays the game expecting that the short reach will be executed three times in a row in the continuous short reach performance, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the second control example, when the continuous short reach effect is being executed, the change of the back image based on the depression of the frame button 22 is not executed. As a result, it is possible to suppress (prevent) the inconvenience of giving the player the impression that the continuous short reach effect executed over a plurality of fluctuations is temporarily interrupted due to the change of the back image. Therefore, the interest of the player can be improved. Also, when the continuous short reach effect is being executed, if the back image is changed based on the passage of time (that is, the back image is changed synchronously in a plurality of game machines, so-called island interlocking effect is executed), the rear image can be changed. As a result, the change of the rear image based on the lapse of time (so-called island-linked effect) is executed without delay, so that the interest in the game can be improved. In this case, the continuous short reach performance is terminated in the middle, and a benefit (ticket used in the reel performance described above) is provided according to the progress of the completed continuous short reach performance. As a result, it is possible to reduce the dissatisfaction felt by the player when the continuous short reach performance is terminated in the middle.

In this second control example, the contents of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 in the sound ramp control device 113 are partially changed from the first control example, and the processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 is the same. The difference is that the part is changed and the process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 is partially changed. Other points are the same as the first control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the first control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

First, among the effects executed in the second control example, the reel effects displayed during execution of the jackpot game will be described with reference to FIGS. 129 and 130. FIG. FIG. 129 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a reel effect executed during a jackpot game. Specifically, FIG. 129(a) is a diagram showing an example of the point in time when the first reel effect executed during the jackpot game is started, and FIG. 129(b) shows a winning reel effect as the reel effect. It is the figure which showed an example of the time of being performed and displaying a specific aspect (display with three patterns aligned).

Also, FIG. 130 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a reel effect executed during a jackpot game. Specifically, FIG. 130(a) is a diagram showing an example of the point in time when all the reel effects are reel effects and the last lost reel effect is completed, and FIG. 130(b) is a probability variable gaming state. It is a diagram showing an example of a promotion ending effect that is executed when all the reel effects executed in the jackpot game to be shifted to are the losing reel effects (or when the reel effects are not displayed). .

The reel effect is an effect that is executed (displayed) during execution of the jackpot game according to the number of tickets granted based on execution (display) of the grant effect. Specifically, the number of reel effects that can be executed is variable according to the number of tickets. For example, if one ticket is given, one reel effect can be executed, and four tickets are given. If so, the reel effect can be executed four times. By displaying a specific mode (display in which three symbols are aligned) in the reel effect, it is notified that the game state will shift to the variable probability game state after the jackpot game being executed is finished. As a result, by displaying the giving effect of awarding the ticket, the player is given an impression that the degree of expectation for displaying the specific mode in the reel effect in the jackpot game to be executed thereafter has increased. It is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, by displaying a specific mode in the reel production, it is notified that the jackpot game based on the normal jackpot is being executed, but the transition to the variable probability game state is performed. The player can be given the impression that he has improved (so-called promoted), and the interest of the player can be improved.

In this control example, the value of the ticket counter 223bb is added (the number of tickets is increased) by displaying the grant effect in the variable effect until the jackpot game is started. When the value of the ticket counter 223bb is 1 or more, the reel effect can be executed in the jackpot game. When the reel effect is executed with the value of the ticket counter 223bb being 8, first, as shown in FIG. The display of the reel effect is started in the lower right part of the screen of 81 . The reel effect displayed at the bottom right of the screen is three reels that rotate and display three types of graphics (a circle, a triangle, and a square) side by side. A message "If you get 3 of them within 8 times, you will be promoted!" is displayed. Also, in the upper right part of the screen, the characters "Tickets x 8" indicating the number of tickets given by the giving effect executed before the start of the jackpot game (that is, the value of the ticket counter 223bb) are displayed. be done.

Note that the trigger for starting the reel effect is not limited to the start of the fourth round, and may be another trigger. For example, the trigger for starting the reel effect may be varied according to the value of the ticket counter 223bb, or the trigger for starting the reel effect may be varied according to the effect time of the reel effect to be executed. As a result, it is possible to suppress (prevent) the performance time of the reel performance from exceeding the execution time of the jackpot game, and to suitably display the reel performance.

The reel effect of this control example is an effect in which one ticket is consumed (reduced) for each reel variation. FIG. 129(b) shows a case where a jackpot game progresses from the state of FIG. 129(a) where the number of tickets is 8, reels are changed six times, and a winning reel effect is executed. It is a diagram.

When the number of tickets is eight (see FIG. 129(a)) and the number of reels is changed six times, the number of tickets becomes two, and as shown in FIG. 129(b), the third symbol display device 81 The characters "Ticket x 2" are displayed in the upper right part of the screen. In the winning reel effect, the symbols displayed on the three reels displayed in the lower right portion of the screen are all the same symbols (in this case, circular symbols) and are stopped and displayed. At the top of the reel, the characters "get promotion" are displayed, suggesting that the variable probability gaming state is provided after the execution of the jackpot game. Here, when the reel effect is executed, a normal opening effect indicating that the normal game state is provided after the execution of the big win game is displayed as the opening effect of the big win game. As a result, the winning reel performance is displayed to the player who has recognized that the normal game state will be given after the execution of the big win game, so that the variable probability game state advantageous to the player is given after the execution of the big win game. Since it is notified that the award is given, the player can be given an impression that the given privilege has improved (that is, promoted), and the player's interest can be improved.

After the winning reel performance is executed, the reel performance is ended and the big winning game is executed because it is already notified that the variable probability game state is given after the execution of the big winning game.

On the other hand, a case where the winning reel effect is not executed (displayed) in the eight reel effects will be described. FIG. 130(a) is a diagram showing an example of a case where no win effect is executed (displayed) in eight reel effects and the eighth losing reel effect is executed (displayed).

When the number of tickets is eight (see FIG. 129(a)) and the number of reels is changed eight times, the number of tickets becomes zero, and as shown in FIG. 130(a), the third symbol display device 81. In the upper right part of the screen, the characters "Ticket x 0" are displayed. Then, when the final out-reach effect is executed (displayed), and the symbols on the three reels are stopped and displayed with symbols that are not the same, the characters "Sorry!" are displayed above the reels ( See FIG. 130(a)). Then, when the execution (display) of the reel effect is finished and the jackpot game of the 16th round is finished after that, the ending effect indicating the end of the jackpot game is executed (displayed).

In this control example, as the ending effect of the jackpot game, an image simulating a closed door is displayed in the center of the screen, and an effect of opening the door is displayed. In the promotion ending production, when the door is opened, as shown in FIG. 130(b), the letters "promotion" are displayed in the opened door, and a variable probability game state is given after the jackpot game ends. is reported. On the other hand, in the normal ending effect, an image simulating a door is displayed in the same way, and the word "Unfortunate" is displayed inside the opened door. As a result, even when the normal ending effect is displayed, the player can expect that the door will be opened and the characters "promotion" will be displayed, so that the player's interest can be improved.

In this control example, the timing at which each reel is stop-displayed in the reel effect is determined in advance, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, each reel may be stopped and displayed based on pressing the frame button 22, or based on the game ball passing through a specific area (for example, the first ball entrance 64). , may be stopped and displayed. As a result, each reel is stopped and displayed based on the player's operation, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be enhanced. Similarly, the trigger for starting the reel effect may be started based on the depression of the frame button 22, or the passage of the game ball to a specific area (for example, the first ball entrance 64), , may be started based on a predetermined number of balls or more entering the specific winning hole 65a (so-called over-winning).

In this control example, a variable probability opening effect is provided to inform that the variable probability game state is provided at the start of the jackpot game, but it may not be provided. As a result, it becomes impossible to determine whether or not the variable probability game state is provided at the time when the jackpot game is started, so that the attention can be paid to the performance during the jackpot game.

In this control example, one reel effect is executed for one ticket granted in the grant effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. A reel effect may be executed when a predetermined number or more of tickets are accumulated, a reel effect may be executed once for a plurality of tickets, or a reel effect may be executed for one ticket. A plurality of reel effects may be executed. Furthermore, a reel effect may be executed (displayed) in which the effective lines are changed (for example, 3 lines) according to the number of consumed tickets. The number of tickets to be consumed may be determined by lottery, or may be made selectable by the player. That is, the number of tickets given by the giving effect may be stored, and the mode of the reel effect to be executed may be varied according to the stored number of tickets.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 131 and 132, the continuous short reach effect executed in the second control example will be described. The continuous short reach performance is a performance for notifying that the next change will be a big win by executing the short reach three times in succession. In the continuous short reach effect in this control example, the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a is 4 or more (that is, the retention is 4 balls or more), and the winning information of the short fluctuation is out of the fluctuation type. This is an effect that is executed when the game is held continuously. The details of the conditions for setting the execution of the continuous short reach effect will be described later with reference to the winning command reception process 2 (FIG. 139).

Here is the flow of setting the continuous short reach effect when the winning information that will be a big hit is withheld, and the back change (special back setting) based on the passage of time during the execution of the continuous short reach effect. The transition effect displayed in will be described. In this control example, regardless of the number of reserved prize information (the number of reservations), either short deviation variation or long deviation variation is selected by lottery as the variation type.

First, as shown in FIG. 131(a), the winning information stored (retained) in the winning information storage area 223a includes a short variation in retention 1, a long variation in retention 2, a short variation in retention 3, and a retention. In a state in which the short deviation deviation is stored in 4 and the short deviation deviation is stored in suspension 5, when the winning prize information that becomes a big hit is suspended as suspension 6, as shown in FIG. Winning information up to three times before is changed (overwritten) so as to be a continuous short reach performance. As described above in the first control example, the area of the prize winning information storage area 223a is the area of suspension 1 to suspension 8, and the timing of suspension is older in order from the area of suspension 1 (that is, executed (first order) is stored.

Specifically, the winning information of Hold 1 and Hold 2 is not changed, Hold 3 is changed to short reach (first time), Hold 4 is changed to short reach (second time), Hold 5 is changed (overwritten) to short reach (third time) ) is done. After 3 consecutive short reach is executed by these suspension 3 to suspension 5, the variation to become a big hit will be started.

After that, when four variations based on hold 1 to hold 4 are executed, as shown in FIG. becomes. As shown in FIG. 132(a), the screen of the third symbol display device 81 in this state displays the characters "morning mode" indicating the current background (mode) on the left side of the area Dm1 at the top of the screen. In the center of the area Dm1, the characters "Consecutive reach twice" indicating the number of consecutively executed short reach are displayed, and in the right part of the area Dm1, "Ticket x2” is displayed. In the area Dm2 in the center of the screen, the second short reach effect being executed is displayed, and in the area Ds1b indicating the current number of pending balls in the area Ds at the bottom of the screen, two circular figures are displayed. is 2 balls.

In this state, when it is time to execute the island-linked effect, the rear image is changed and a special rear image (background of town mode) is set. If the background image is changed to a special background image during execution of the continuous short reach effect, a transition effect shown in FIG. 132(b) is executed. In this transition effect, as shown in FIG. 132(b), the effect in which the ticket (here, two) given in the grant effect is given according to the number of times the short reach has continued (here, two times) is displayed on the screen. The number of tickets displayed in the area Dm2 in the center is updated according to the number of issued tickets. In addition, the variable display that was displayed in the area Dm2 before the transition effect was displayed is displayed in a simple form with only numbers in the area Dm3 at the lower right of the area Dm2, and is displayed in the central part of the area Dm1. The display showing the number of consecutive reach times is hidden. While the transition effect is being displayed, the variable display is displayed in the region Dm3 in a simple manner with only numbers, so even if the display period of the transition effect straddles the timing at which the next variable display is started, it is preferable. , a variable display can be performed.

When the background image is changed to a special background image (background of town mode), the short reach (third time) of Hold 1 stored in the winning information storage area 223a is removed as shown in FIG. 131(d). It is changed (overwritten) to fluctuation, and the continuous short reach production is ended. As a result, the continuous short reach effect set before the rear image is changed to the special rear image can be terminated at the timing when the rear image is changed. As a result, the effect of the rear image and the variable display can be executed integrally, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the second control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 133 to 135. FIG. The pachinko machine 10 in the second control example differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example in that the content of the ROM 222 and the content of the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 are partially changed. are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

FIG. 133(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. As shown in FIG. 133(a), the ROM 222 in this control example is different from the ROM 222 in the first control example in that a given effect selection table 222ba and a reel effect selection table 222bb are added, and other points are the same. be. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 133(b), the details of the given effect selection table 222ba will be described. FIG. 133(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the given effect selection table 222ba. As shown in FIG. 133(b), the given effect selection table 222ba is a table that defines the type of given effect selected corresponding to the value of the effect counter 223f.

Specifically, for the value "0 to 179" of the effect counter 223f, "none" indicating that the given effect is not selected as the given effect type is defined. Since the effect counter 223f is a loop counter that is updated within the range of 0 to 198, the probability that the effect type "none" is selected is 180/198.

For the value "180 to 194" of the effect counter 223f, "granted effect A" indicating the effect of giving one ticket is defined as the type of the given effect. The probability that this imparting effect A is selected is 15/198.

For the value "195 to 198" of the effect counter 223f, "granted effect B" indicating the effect of giving two tickets is defined as the type of the given effect. The probability that this imparting effect B is selected is 4/198.

A given effect for giving a ticket is displayed according to the given effect selected based on the given effect selection table 222ba. Depending on the number of tickets granted by the granting performance, whether or not the reel performance is executed in the jackpot game and the number of reel performances to be executed are varied. As a result, the player can expect that the given effect will be executed (displayed), so that the amusement of the game can be improved. Details of the reel effect will be described in the reel effect setting process (see FIG. 137).

Next, the contents of the reel effect selection table 222bb will be described with reference to FIG. 133(c). The reel effect selection table 222bb is a table for selecting the effect mode to be executed during the jackpot game according to the number of times the above-described grant effect is executed and the ticket is granted. As shown in FIG. 133(c), the reel effect selection table 222bb includes a short reel effect selection table 222bb1 in which a reel effect with a short effect time is likely to be selected, and a long reel effect selection table in which a reel effect with a long effect time is likely to be selected. 222bb2 are provided.

Details of the short reel effect selection table 222bb1 and the long reel effect selection table 222bb2 will now be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 134(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the short reel effect selection table 222bb1. As shown in FIG. 134(a), in the short reel effect selection table 222bb1, reel effect types are defined corresponding to the jackpot types and the value of the effect counter 223f.

Specifically, when the jackpot type is the probability variable jackpot, the value of the effect counter 223f is defined as "0 to 14", and the effect time is 5 seconds. 19”, a winning long reel effect with a performance time of 10 seconds is defined, and a short reel effect with a performance time of 5 seconds is defined for the value of the performance counter 223f, “20 to 169”. A deviating short reel effect with a effect time of 10 seconds is stipulated for the value "170 to 198".

On the other hand, when the jackpot type is the normal jackpot, a short reel effect with a performance time of 5 seconds is stipulated with respect to the value of the performance counter 223f "0 to 149", and the value of the performance counter 223f is "150 to 198". A long reel effect with an effect time of 10 seconds is stipulated.

Next, details of the long reel effect selection table 222bb2 will be described with reference to FIG. 134(b). FIG. 134(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the long reel effect selection table 222bb2. As shown in FIG. 134(b), in the long reel effect selection table 222bb2, reel effect types are defined corresponding to the jackpot types and the value of the effect counter 223f.

Specifically, when the jackpot type is the probability variable jackpot, a winning short reel effect is defined for the value "0 to 2" of the effect counter 223f, and a win for the value "3 to 19" of the effect counter 223f. A long reel effect is defined, a short reel effect is defined for the value "20 to 149" of the effect counter 223f, and a long reel effect is defined for the value "150 to 198" of the effect counter 223f. .

On the other hand, when the jackpot type is the normal jackpot, the loss short reel effect is defined for the value "0 to 99" of the effect counter 223f, and the loss long reel effect is defined for the value "100 to 198" of the effect counter 223f. performance is specified.

Thus, in the second control example, as reel effects executed according to the value of the ticket counter 223bb during the jackpot game, a short reel effect with a short effect time and a long reel effect with a long effect time can be selected. It has become. As a result, the variety of reel effects can be increased, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, a short reel performance selection table 222bb1 in which a short reel performance with a short performance time is likely to be selected and a long reel performance selection table 222bb2 in which a long reel performance with a long performance time is likely to be selected are provided, depending on the progress of the big win game. , which table is used is variable. As a result, it is possible to suppress (prevent) the performance time of the reel performance from exceeding the execution time of the jackpot game, and to suitably display the reel performance.

Next, with reference to FIG. 135, the details of the RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 135 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in this control example. As shown in FIG. 135, the RAM 223 in this control example has a promoted flag 223ba, a ticket counter 223bb, a reel effect setting timing 223bc, a reel effect timing counter 223bd, a continuous short reach counter 223be, and a continuous The difference is that a short reach setting flag 223bf is added, and the other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The promoted flag 223ba is a flag for determining whether or not an effect suggesting a shift to the probability variable gaming state after the end of the jackpot game is executed (displayed) in the jackpot game. It indicates that an effect suggesting transition to a game state has been executed (or is being executed (displayed)), and if it is off, it is not executed (displayed). This promoted flag 223ba is set to ON when the winning reel effect is selected in the reel effect setting process (see FIG. 137) (see S4110 in FIG. 137). Also, in the opening effect setting process (see FIG. 141), it is set to ON when the variable probability opening effect is selected (see S4106 in FIG. 141).

Then, in the jackpot command-related process 2 (FIG. 140) reference, when the ending command for the jackpot game based on the probability variable jackpot is received (see S3334 in FIG. 140), when the promoted flag 223ba is on (that is, If it has already been notified to shift to the variable probability gaming state), the variable probability ending effect indicating the ending of the variable probability big win is selected as the ending effect of the jackpot game (see S3335 in FIG. 140). On the other hand, when the promoted flag 223ba is off (that is, when it is not notified to shift to the probability variation gaming state), as the ending effect of the jackpot game, promotion indicating that the probability variation gaming state is given thereafter An ending is selected (see S3336 in FIG. 140). As a result, in the jackpot game, although it was notified that it would shift to the normal game state, it was notified that it would shift to the probability variable game state, so the benefits that were given improved (So-called, promoted ) can be given to the player, and the interest of the player can be improved.

The ticket counter 223bb is a counter for counting the number of tickets given by the executed (displayed) giving effect. This ticket counter 223bb is incremented according to the selected grant effect (see S3535 in FIG. 143) when the grant effect is selected in the variation pattern selection process 2 (see FIG. 143). In addition, when the special back side is set based on the passage of time during the execution of the continuous short reach effect, the number of times of execution of the continuous short reach effect (that is, the value of the continuous short reach counter 223be) is added. (See S3733 in FIG. 144). Then, it is referred to in the reel effect setting process (see FIG. 137), the reel effect corresponding to the value of the ticket counter 223bb is executed (displayed) during execution of the big win game, and the reel effect is executed (displayed). is decremented by 1 (see S4016 in FIG. 137). Further, when the winning reel effect is executed (displayed), the value of the ticket counter 223bb is initialized to 0 ( See S4011 in FIG. 137).

The reel effect setting timing 223bc is an area in which a value indicating the setting timing of the reel effect is stored. Specifically, the timing for setting the reel effect is stored as the elapsed time (milliseconds) after the start of the jackpot game. When the value of a reel effect timing counter 223bd, which will be described later, matches the reel effect setting timing 223bc, it is determined that it is time to set the reel effect (see S4003 in FIG. 137).

The reel effect timing counter 223bd is a counter for counting the elapsed time (milliseconds) from the start of the big win game, and is a counter for determining the execution timing of the reel effect to be executed during the big win game. This reel effect timing counter 223bd is incremented by 1 when it is determined that the jackpot game is being played in the reel effect setting process (see FIG. 137) executed every 1 millisecond in the main process 2 (see FIG. 136). (see S4002 in FIG. 137). Then, in the reel effect setting process (see FIG. 137), it is referred to for determining whether or not it is time to set the reel effect (see S4003). When the value becomes 0 (that is, when the reel effect ends), it is cleared to 0 (see S4012 in FIG. 137).

The continuous short reach counter 223be is a counter for counting the number of times the short reach effect is continuously executed. This continuous short reach counter 223be is incremented by 1 when the short reach fluctuation pattern is selected in the fluctuation pattern selection process 2 (see FIG. 143) (see S3537 in FIG. 143), and a fluctuation pattern other than the short reach is selected. is initialized to 0 (see S3539 in FIG. 143). The value of the continuous short reach counter 223be is referred to when the special back setting is executed based on the passage of time (see S3731 in FIG. 144), and the value of the continuous short reach counter 223be is greater than 0 ( That is, when the continuous short reach effect is being executed), the transition effect corresponding to the value of the continuous short reach counter 223be is displayed.

The continuous short reach setting flag 223bf is a flag for determining whether the continuous short reach effect has been set. When it is on, it indicates that the continuous short reach effect has been set. Indicates that the reach effect is not set. This continuous short reach setting flag 223bf is set to ON when the execution of the continuous short reach effect is set in the winning command reception process 2 (see FIG. 139) (see S3137 in FIG. 139). Then, in the jackpot-related command process 2 (see FIG. 140), when the opening command indicating the start of the jackpot is received, it is set to OFF (see S3332 in FIG. 140). This continuous short reach setting flag 223bf is referred to in the winning command receiving process 2 (see FIG. 139), and when the continuous short reach setting flag 223bf is off, execution of the continuous short reach effect is set. ing. As a result, it is possible to prevent the continuous short reach effect from being set redundantly.

<Control Processing Executed by Audio Ramp Control Device 113 in Second Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 136 to 144, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 in this second control example will be described. This control example differs from the above-described first control example in that main processing 2 (see FIG. 136) is executed instead of the main processing (see FIG. 93). Main processing 2 (see FIG. 136) is different from the main processing (see FIG. 93) of the first control example in that reel effect setting processing (see FIG. 137) is added and command determination processing (see FIG. 101) is replaced with command determination processing 2 (see FIG. 138) is executed as a command determination processing 2 (see FIG. 138), variable display setting processing 2 (see FIG. 142) is executed in place of the variable display setting processing (see FIG. 105), and special background setting processing (see FIG. 108) is replaced with a special background setting process 2 (see FIG. 144), and the look-ahead effect selection process (see FIG. 109) is deleted. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, the main process 2 executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the main process 2, the processes of S2201 to S2211 are executed in the same manner as the main process (see FIG. 93) in the first control example described above.

After finishing the process of S2211, the reel effect setting process is executed (S2231), and the process proceeds to the process of S2212. After shifting to the processing of S2212, the command determination processing 2 is executed (S2212), the variable display setting processing 2 is executed (S2213), the special back surface setting processing 2 is executed (S2214), and the processing shifts to S2216. After S2216, the processes of S2216 to S2219 are executed in the same manner as in the first control example described above.

Details of the reel effect setting process (S2231) will now be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This reel effect setting process (S2231) is a process for executing (displaying) a reel effect according to the value of the ticket counter during the jackpot game.

In the reel effect setting process (S2231), first, it is determined whether or not a jackpot game is being executed (S4001). In the process of S4001, when it is determined that the big win game is not being executed (S4001: No), it is not the timing to execute the reel effect, so the process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S4001, when it is determined that the jackpot game is being executed (S4001: Yes), in order to count the elapsed time from the start of the jackpot game, the value of the reel effect timing counter 223bd is updated by adding 1 (S4002), and based on the updated value of the reel effect timing counter 223bd and the value of the reel effect setting timing 223bc, it is determined whether or not it is the reel effect setting timing (S4003). .

In the process of S4003, if it is determined that it is not the set timing for the reel effect (S4003: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4003, if it is determined that it is time to set the reel effect (S4003: Yes), the value of the effect counter 223f is acquired (S4004), and whether or not the value of the ticket counter 223bb is greater than 5 is determined (S4005).

In the processing of S4005, if it is determined that the value of the ticket counter 223bb is greater than 5 (S4005: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the number of rounds of the jackpot game currently being executed is 8 or more. (S4006). In the processing of S4006, when it is determined that the number of rounds of the jackpot game is 8 or more (S4006: Yes), the value of the ticket counter 223bb (that is, the number of remaining executions of the reel effect) remains large. , when the remaining time of the jackpot game is short. In this case, using the short reel effect selection table 222bb1 in which a reel effect with a short effect time is likely to be selected, a reel effect is selected based on the jackpot type and the value of the effect counter 223f (S4007), and the process of S4009 is performed. to As a result, it is possible to execute all the remaining reel effects in the remaining time of the jackpot game. Incidentally, when all the remaining reel effects cannot be executed, the value of the ticket counter 223bb may of course be taken over until the next big winning game is executed without initializing the value of the ticket counter 223bb.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4005, if it is determined that the value of the ticket counter 223bb is 5 or less (S4005: No), the value of the ticket counter 223bb is small (that is, the number of remaining reel effects to be executed) is small. Therefore, a reel effect is selected using the long reel effect selection table 222bb2 in which a reel effect with a long effect time is likely to be selected (S4008), and the process proceeds to S4009. As a result, in the jackpot game, the reel performance is not terminated early, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

In addition, in the processing of S4006, when it is determined that the number of currently executed jackpot rounds is smaller than 8 (S4006: No), it means that the remaining time of the jackpot game is long, so the reel with a long effect time. A reel effect is selected by using the long reel effect selection table 222bb2 in which the effect is likely to be selected (S4008), and the process proceeds to S4009. As a result, in the jackpot game, the reel performance is not terminated early, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

In the process of S4009, it is determined whether or not the reel effect selected in the process of S4007 or S4008 is a winning reel effect (S4009). In the processing of S4009, when it is determined that the winning reel effect is selected (S4009: Yes), the promoted flag 223ba is set to ON (S4010), and the value of the ticket counter 223bb is cleared to 0 (S4011). , the reel effect setting timing 223bc and the reel effect timing counter 223bd are cleared (S4012), and the process proceeds to S4016.

On the other hand, in the process of S4009, if it is determined that the winning reel effect has not been selected (that is, the losing reel effect has been selected) (S4009: No), then the value of the ticket counter 223bb is greater than 0. It is determined whether or not it is larger (S4013).

In the processing of S4013, when it is determined that the value of the ticket counter 223bb is greater than 0 (S4013: Yes), it is the case of executing the reel effect based on the value of the ticket counter 223bb. The value of the reel effect setting timing is updated to the timing when the effect of the reel effect ends (S4014), the value of the ticket counter 223bb is subtracted by 1 (S4015), and the process proceeds to S4016.

On the other hand, in the process of S4013, if it is determined that the value of the ticket counter 223bb is 0 (S4013: No), it means that the reel effect is not executed in the jackpot game currently being executed. The process of S4012 is executed to clear the information, and the process proceeds to S4016.

In the process of S4016, a display reel effect command indicating the reel effect selected in the process of S4007 or S4008 is set (S4016), and this process ends. The reel effect command for display set in the process of S4016 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and the command output process (S2202) of the main process 2 (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 221 is executed. Inside, it is sent to the display controller 114 . When the display reel effect command is received, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the reel effect corresponding to the received command.

In this way, by the reel effect setting process (S2231), the reel effect corresponding to the number of tickets granted by the grant effect is executed during the jackpot game. In addition, the reel performance is variable depending on the progress of the jackpot game (that is, the remaining time of the jackpot game), which of the long reel performance with a long performance period and the short reel performance with a short performance period is likely to be selected. be done. Thereby, it is possible to suitably execute the reel effect according to the game time of the big winning game.

When a jackpot game with a short playing time (for example, two rounds of jackpot) is executed, a special reel effect (see FIG. 177) that consumes a lot of the tickets granted by the grant effect is executed. good too. As a result, even when a jackpot game with a short playing time is executed, reel effects can be favorably executed.

Specifically, a description will be given with reference to FIG. FIG. 177 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a reel effect executed during a jackpot game.

FIG. 177(a) shows the display screen at the time when the jackpot game with a short playing time (two rounds) is executed when the number of tickets given by the giving effect is eight, and the reel effect is started in the jackpot game. An example is shown.

When the jackpot game of two rounds is executed, the reel performance is started at the timing when the first round is started. In this reel effect, the probability of matching three symbols (winning probability) is set to differ according to the number of tickets consumed. Specifically, when the number of tickets consumed is 3, the probability of winning is 80%, when the number of tickets consumed is 2, the probability of winning is 60%, and the number of tickets consumed is 1. In this case, the winning probability is 40%. The relationship between the number of tickets consumed and the probability of winning is displayed in the central part on the right side of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 . As a result, the player can be made to recognize that the probability of winning differs depending on the number of tickets consumed, and since the probability of winning is set high when the number of tickets consumed is large, three patterns are arranged. can be expected by the player.

Then, the characters "2 consumed tickets" indicating the number of tickets to be consumed are displayed above the reels displayed as the reel effect, and the first reel variable display is executed. In addition, in the first variable display of the reels, all the tickets (8 tickets) may be consumed, and the probability of winning may be increased according to the number of all the tickets consumed.

When the reel fluctuation display for the first time ends, the display screen shifts to that shown in FIG. 177(b). Specifically, the number of tickets is reduced (consumed) from 8 to 6, the round of the jackpot game shifts to the second round, and the second reel fluctuation display is started. In the second reel variation display, the reels where three tickets are consumed are displayed in the lower right part of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the characters "reels increased" are displayed in the upper part thereof. Further above it, another reel on which three tickets are consumed is displayed. A reel effect is executed in which a total of 6 tickets are consumed by these multiple (two) reels.

Since the probability of winning when three tickets are consumed is 80%, the probability that one of the reels is stopped in a specific mode (a mode in which three symbols are aligned) is 96%, which is a higher probability. It becomes a reel effect that is stopped and displayed in a specific mode. As a result, the interest of the player can be improved, and the reel performance can be executed by consuming all the tickets granted by the grant performance even in the jackpot game with a short performance time, so that the reel performance can be preferably executed.

In this way, by varying the effect mode of the reel effect according to the type of the jackpot game, even in the jackpot game with a short playing time, all the given tickets can be used to execute the reel effect. A reel effect can be suitably executed.

In addition, in the reel effect in which two reels are variably displayed at the same time, one benefit (indicating that the number of rounds of the jackpot is increased by 16 rounds) is displayed based on the stop display of a specific display mode on one reel. display) is given, and another privilege (display indicating that the game state shifts to the variable probability game state) is given based on the fact that the specific display mode is stopped on the other reel.

Also, the reel effect is executed during the jackpot game in accordance with the number of tickets given by the giving effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, reel effects may be executed (displayed) during execution of variable display in order to suggest the current game state. Specifically, when a specific mode is displayed in the reel effect, it is notified that the current game state is the probability variable game state (so-called latent probability variable game state). As a result, even when the jackpot game is not executed, the effect based on the ticket given by the giving effect can be executed, and the number of tickets can be preferably controlled. Further, the reel effect may indicate whether or not there is winning information for a big win in the winning information storage area 223a, instead of suggesting the current gaming state.

When the reel performance is executed during the execution of the variable display, the performance mode of the reel performance (the number of tickets to be consumed, the performance time, etc.) is variable according to the variable time of the variable display. good too. Thereby, it is possible to suitably execute (display) the reel effect according to the fluctuation time. Further, it is of course possible to vary the effect mode of the reel effect according to the timing at which the rear surface is changed.

Next, details of the command determination process 2 (S2212) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This command determination process 2 (S2212) executes the winning command receiving process 2 (see FIG. 139) instead of the winning command receiving process in the command determining process (see FIG. 101) of the first control example. The difference is that the jackpot related command process 2 is executed instead of the related command process, and the other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

In command determination processing 2 (S2212), the processing from S3001 to S3009 is executed in the same manner as the command determination processing (see FIG. 101) in the first control example. Then, in the process of S3009, when it is determined that the winning command has been received (S3009: Yes), the winning command reception process 2 is executed (S3010), and this process ends. The details of this winning command reception process 2 (S3010) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S3009, if it is determined that the winning command has not been received (S3009: No), the process proceeds to S3011, and the processes of S3011 to S3013 are executed in the same manner as in the first control example.

In the process of S3013, when it is determined that a jackpot-related command has been received (S3013: Yes), a jackpot-related command process 2 (S3014) is executed, and this process ends. The details of this jackpot-related command process 2 (S3014) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the details of the winning command reception process 2 (S3010) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Winning command reception processing 2 is processing that is executed when it is determined in command determination processing 2 (see FIG. 138) that a winning command has been received.

In the winning command receiving process 2 (S3010), information of the received winning information command is first set in the corresponding winning information storage area 223a (S3101), and the process proceeds to S3131.

In the process of S3131, it is determined whether or not the continuous short reach setting flag 223bf is off (S3131). In the process of S3131, when it is determined that the continuous short reach setting flag 223bf is ON (S3131: No), it means that the continuous short reach effect has already been set, so this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3131, if it is determined that the continuous short reach setting flag 223bf is off (S3131: Yes), it is checked whether there are four or more prize winning information reserved in the winning prize information storage area 223a. It is determined (S3132). In the process of S3132, when it is determined that the pending winning information is 3 or less (S3132: No), the continuous short reach effect cannot be set, so the process is terminated as it is.

In the process of S3132, if it is determined that there are four or more pending winning information (S3132: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the current winning information is information about a jackpot (S3133). . In the processing of S3133, when it is determined that the winning information of this time is a big hit (S3133: Yes), it is determined whether or not the value of the effect counter 223f is 19 or less (S3134).

In the process of S3134, if it is determined that the value of the effect counter 223f is greater than 19 (that is, a value of 20 to 198) (S3134: No), this process is performed without setting the continuous short reach effect. exit.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3134, if it is determined that the value of the effect counter 223f is 19 or less (S3134: Yes), then all the winning information up to three before the current winning information is removed It is determined whether or not it is a variation type (S3135).

In the process of S3135, if it is determined that all the winning information up to three times before the current winning information is not short fluctuation (S3135: No), this process is performed as it is without setting the continuous short reach effect. finish.

On the other hand, in the process of S3135, if it is determined that the winning information up to three times before this winning information is all out of the short fluctuation type (S3135: Yes), to set the continuous short reach effect , the winning information up to three times before the current winning information is overwritten with the short reach variation type (S3136), and the process proceeds to S3137.

In the process of S3133, if it is determined that the winning information of this time is out (S3133: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the effect counter 223f is 1 or less (S3138). In the processing of S3138, if it is determined that the value of the effect counter is greater than 1 (that is, a value of 2 to 198) (S3138: No), this process without setting the continuous short reach effect exit.

On the other hand, in the process of S3139, if it is determined that the value of the effect counter 223f is 1 or less (S3138: Yes), then all of the winning information up to two points before the current winning information is removed and the short fluctuation occurs. It is determined whether or not it is a variation type (S3139).

In the processing of S3139, if it is determined that all the winning information up to two times before the current winning information is not a short fluctuation fluctuation type (S3139: No), this is performed without setting the continuous short reach effect. End the process.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3139, if it is determined that the winning information up to two times before this winning information is out of the short fluctuation type (S3139: Yes), the winning information up to two times before this winning information Winning information is overwritten on the short reach variation type (S3140), and the process proceeds to S3137.

In the process of S3137, the continuous short reach setting flag 223bf indicating that the continuous short reach effect has been set is set to ON (S3137), and this process is terminated.

In this way, when the winning prize information is a jackpot, the continuous short reach effect is set if the value of the effect counter 223f updated in the range of 0 to 198 is 19 or less. That is, when the winning information indicates a big hit, the continuous short reach effect is set with a probability of 19/198 (approximately 10%). On the other hand, when the winning information is out, if the value of the effect counter 223f is 1 or less, a continuous short reach effect is set. That is, when the winning information is out, the continuous short reach effect is set with a probability of 2/198 (approximately 1%). As a result, when the continuous short reach performance is set, there is a high possibility that the winning information is a jackpot. , can improve the interest of the player.

In addition, in this control example, regardless of the game state, when two or more outlier short fluctuations are set as the fluctuation type, it is configured to set the continuous short reach effect, but it is not limited to this. . For example, it may be configured to set the continuous short reach effect only in the time-saving gaming state. In addition, it is of course possible to vary the probability of setting the continuous short reach effect according to the game state.

Next, details of the jackpot-related command process 2 (S3014) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the jackpot related command processing 2 (S3014), similarly to the jackpot related command processing (see FIG. 104) of the first control example, it was determined that a jackpot related command was received in the command determination processing 2 (see FIG. 138). This is the process that is executed when

In jackpot-related command processing 2 (S3014), first, it is determined whether or not an opening command has been received as a jackpot-related command (S3301). When it is determined that an opening command has been received in the process of S3301 (S3301: Yes), the opening effect setting process is executed (S3331), the continuous short reach setting flag 223bf is set to OFF (S3332), and this process exit.

Here, the details of the opening effect setting process (S3331) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This opening effect setting process (S3331) is a process executed for setting an opening effect when it is determined that an opening command has been received in the jackpot related command process 2 (see FIG. 140).

In the opening effect setting process (S3331), first, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is a variable probability jackpot (S4101). In the processing of S4101, when it is determined that the current jackpot is a variable probability jackpot (S4101: Yes), it is determined whether or not the value of the ticket counter 223bb is greater than 0 (S4102). In the process of S4102, when it is determined that the value of the ticket counter 223bb is greater than 0 (that is, the reel effect can be executed) (S4102: Yes), the value of the effect counter 223f is obtained (S4103). , the value of the effect counter 223f is determined (S4104), and the opening effect is selected.

Specifically, in the processing of S4104, when it is determined that the value of the effect counter 223f is 99 or less (that is, the value is between 0 and 99) (S4104: Yes), the probability variable opening effect is selected. (S4105), the promoted flag 223ba is set to ON (S4106), the value of the ticket counter 223bb is set to 0 (S4107), and the process proceeds to S4112.

On the other hand, in the process of S4104, when it is determined that the value of the effect counter 223f is 100 or more (that is, the value is between 100 and 198) (S4104: No), reel effects are executed during the jackpot game. Then, the process proceeds to S4109.

Also, in the process of S4101, if it is determined that the type of jackpot to be started is the normal jackpot (S4101: No), then it is determined whether the value of the ticket counter 223bb is greater than 0 ( S4108), a process for executing a reel effect is executed according to the determination result.

In the processing of S4108, when it is determined that the value of the ticket counter 223bb is greater than 0 (S4108: Yes), the normal opening effect is selected in order to execute the reel effect (S4109), and the reel effect setting timing is reached. 223bc is set (S4110), and the process proceeds to S4112.

On the other hand, in the process of S4108, when it is determined that the value of the ticket counter 223bb is 0 (S4108: No), since it is a case where the reel effect cannot be executed, the normal opening effect is selected (S4111), The process proceeds to S4112.

In the process of S4112, an opening effect command for display indicating the opening effect selected in any one of the processes of S4105, S4109, and S4111 is set (S4112), and the process ends.

Thus, in this control example, when the jackpot game based on the variable probability jackpot is executed, the opening effect is the same as when the jackpot game based on the normal jackpot game is executed (that is, after the jackpot game). There is a possibility that an effect indicating transition to a normal game state) is selected. In this case, by displaying a specific mode (display in which three symbols are aligned) in the reel effect executed during the jackpot game, it is notified that the game state will shift to the variable probability game state. As a result, even when the opening performance based on the normal jackpot game is displayed, the player can play the game in anticipation of the display of a specific mode (display in which three symbols are aligned) in the subsequent reel performance. It is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Returning to FIG. 140, the description continues. If it is determined in the process of S3301 that the opening command has not been received (S3301: No), then it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received (S3303).

In the processing of S3303, when it is determined that the round number command is received (S3303: Yes), the processing of S3304 and S3305 is executed in the same manner as the jackpot related command processing (see FIG. 104) in the first control example. to terminate this process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3303 that the round number command has not been received (S3303: No), then it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received (S3306). In the process of S3306, if it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S3306: No), this process ends. In addition, in the command determination process 2 (see FIG. 138), although it is determined that a jackpot-related command has been received, the ending command is not received (that is, various jackpot-related commands are not received) If it is determined that an error has occurred, it is possible that an error has occurred, so error processing that indicates the occurrence of an error (for example, outputting a sound indicating the occurrence of an error, setting an error command for display, etc.) should be performed. can be Accordingly, it is possible to quickly notify the occurrence of an abnormality.

On the other hand, in the process of S3306, if it is determined that the ending command has been received (S3306: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the jackpot game being executed was based on the variable probability jackpot (S3333). In the processing of S3333, when it is determined that the jackpot game being executed is based on the normal jackpot (S3333: No), the normal ending indicating that the jackpot game based on the normal jackpot ends is selected ( S3337), the process proceeds to S3338.

In the processing of S3333, when it is determined that the jackpot game being executed is based on the variable probability jackpot (S3333: Yes), it is determined whether or not the promoted flag 223ba is ON (S3334).

In the process of S3334, when it is determined that the promoted flag 223ba is ON (S3334: Yes), it is a case where it has already been notified that the game state will shift to the probability variation game state after the jackpot game, so it is based on the probability variation jackpot. A variable probability ending indicating that the jackpot game ends is selected (S3335), and the process proceeds to S3338.

On the other hand, in the process of S3334, if it is determined that the promoted flag 223ba is off (S3334: No), it is not notified that the game state will shift to the probability variation game state after the jackpot game, and the normal game is played after the jackpot game. Since it is a case where the production (similar to the jackpot game based on the normal jackpot) that is transferred to the state is executed, the game state that is transferred after the jackpot game has changed (promoted) from the normal game state to the variable probability game state. Select the promotion ending indicating that (S3336), and shift to the processing of S3338. The process of S3336 can give the player an impression that the given privilege has improved (so-called promotion), and the player's interest can be improved.

In the processing of S3338, the ending command for display indicating the ending effect selected in the processing of S3335 to S3337 is set, and this processing ends.

Next, the details of the variable display setting process 2 (S2213) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This variation display setting process 2 (S2213) is the variation pattern selection process 2 (see FIG. 143) instead of the variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 106) in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 105) of the first control example. The only difference is that it executes The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

In the fluctuation display setting process 2 (S2213), first, the processes of S3401 to S3403 are executed in the same manner as in the first control example, then the fluctuation pattern selection process 2 is set (S3404), and the process proceeds to S3405. After S3405, the processes from S3405 to S3411 are executed in the same manner as in the first control example, and this process ends.

Next, details of the variation pattern selection process 2 (S3404) executed in the variation display setting process 2 (see FIG. 142) will be described with reference to FIG. The variation pattern selection process 2 (S3404) is a process for selecting the display mode of the variation pattern according to the variation pattern command notified from the main controller 110 and setting the variation pattern command for display. Also, in the variable display executed according to the set variation pattern, it is a process for selecting whether or not to execute a given effect and setting a display given effect command for displaying the selected given effect. .

In the variation pattern selection process 2 (S3404), first, in order to set the variation pattern, similarly to the variation pattern selection process in the first control example, S3501 to S3506 (excluding the process of S3504) are executed to set the given effect. Therefore, the process proceeds to S3531. In the process of S3531, it is determined whether or not the value of the ticket counter 223bb is 8 or less (S3531). In the process of S3531, when it is determined that the value of the ticket counter 223bb is 9 or more (S3531: No), the process proceeds to S3536 without setting the given effect. This prevents the occurrence of a problem that the value of the ticket counter 223bb becomes excessively large and the reel performance executed (displayed) based on the value of the ticket counter 223bb cannot be executed (displayed) during the jackpot game. (suppression) can.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3531, when it is determined that the ticket counter is equal to or less than 8 (S3531: Yes), a given effect is selected from the given effect selection table 222ba based on the value of the effect counter 223f (S3532). Then, in the processing of S3532, it is determined whether or not the grant effect has been selected (S3533), and when it is determined that the grant effect has been selected (S3533: Yes), the display grant indicating the selected grant effect An effect command is set (S3534), the value of the ticket counter 223bb is added according to the selected given effect (S3535), and the process proceeds to S3536. In the process of S3535, specifically, when the grant effect A is selected, the value of the ticket counter 223bb is incremented by 1, and when the grant effect B is selected, the value of the ticket counter 223bb is incremented by 2. . Therefore, in this control example, when the value of the ticket counter 223bb is 8 or less, the grant effect can be selected. Become.

In addition, it is not limited to this, and the ratio of selecting the given effect may be varied according to the value of the ticket counter 223bb. For example, when the value of the ticket counter 223bb is 8, the value of the ticket counter 223bb may be set to 9 at the maximum by giving only the giving effect A.

Also, the rate at which the given effects are selected may be varied according to the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a. For example, when winning information for a variable probability jackpot is stored in the winning information storage area 223a, the ratio of selecting the given effect may naturally be increased.

In the process of S3533, when it is determined that the given effect is not selected (S3533: No), the processes of S3534 and S3535 are skipped and the process proceeds to S3536.

In the process of S3536, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern selected in the process of S3505 is short reach (S3536). In the process of S3536, when it is determined that the variation pattern is short reach (S3536: Yes), 1 is added to the continuous short reach counter 223be (S3537), and the back surface change prohibition flag 223u is set to ON ( S3538), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S3536, when it is determined that the variation pattern is not short reach (S3536: No), the continuous short reach counter 223be is initialized to 0 (S3539), and this process ends.

By setting the background change prohibition flag 223u to ON in the processing of S3538, the modification of the background image based on the depression of the frame button 22 is prevented in the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (FIG. 94). Here, if the back image is changed during execution of the continuous short reach effect, the continuous short reach effect is terminated in the middle. On the other hand, in this control example, the back image is not changed even if the frame button 22 is pressed while the continuous short reach effect is being executed. As a result, even if the player gets excited or presses the frame button 22 by mistake, the back image is not changed, preventing (suppressing) the continuous short reach performance from ending halfway. can. It should be noted that an image such as a character image may be displayed based on pressing of the frame button 22 during the continuous short reach effect, and the continuous short reach effect may be continued.

Next, the details of the special background setting process 2 (S2214) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the special background setting process 2, in contrast to the special background setting process (FIG. 108) in the first control example, when the background image is changed to the special background image during execution of the continuous short reach effect, a transition effect is displayed. The difference is that the The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

In the special background setting process 2 (S2214), first, the processes from S3701 to S3703 are executed as in the first control example. In the processing of S3703, if it is determined that it is the special back switching timing based on the time information acquired from the RTC 292 in the processing of S3702 (S3703: Yes), then whether the value of the continuous short reach counter 223bf is greater than 0 It is determined whether or not (S3731).

In the processing of S3731, when it is determined that the value of the continuous short reach counter 223bf is greater than 0 (S3731: Yes), a transition effect corresponding to the value of the continuous short reach counter 223be indicating the number of times of execution of the continuous short reach is shown. A transition effect command for display is set (S3732). The transition effect command for display set by the processing of S3732 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and the command output processing (S2002) of the main processing 2 (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 221 is executed. Inside, it is sent to the display controller 114 . When receiving the display transition effect command, the display control device 114 displays a transition effect in which tickets are given according to the number of consecutive short reach. As a result, the background screen is switched during execution of the continuous short reach, and even if the continuous short reach effect ends, the effect of giving the ticket is displayed, so that the player is not dissatisfied. It can be suppressed (prevented).

When the processing of S3732 is finished, the value of the ticket counter 223bb is updated according to the transition effect set in the processing of S3732 (S3733), the value of the continuous short reach counter 223be is initialized to 0, and the continuous short reach setting flag 223bf is turned off (S3734), and the process proceeds to S3735.

In the processing of S3735, the variation type corresponding to the shifted special back surface is reselected and overwritten with respect to the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a whose variation type is short reach (S3735), and the processing of S3704 is performed. Move to By the processing of S3735, it is possible to execute (display) a variation with a variation type corresponding to the set special back surface.

On the other hand, in the process of S3731, when it is determined that the value of the continuous short reach counter 223bf is 0 (S3731: No), the process of S3732 to S3735 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3704.

After proceeding to the process of S3704, the processes of S3704 to S3707 are executed in the same manner as in the first control example, and this process ends.

<Regarding control processing executed by the display control device in the second control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 145 to 147. FIG. This control example differs from the above-described first control example in that reel effect command processing, transition effect command processing, and grant effect command processing are added in command determination processing (see FIG. 145). are identical. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, the command determination processing executed by the MPU 221 in the display control device 114 in this control example will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the command determination process, the processes of S6401 to S6411 are executed in the same manner as the command determination process (see FIG. 113) in the first control example described above.

Then, in the process of S6410, if it is determined that the ending command for display has not been received (S6410: No), then it is determined whether or not the reel effect command for display has been received (S6431).

In the process of S6431, when it is determined that the reel effect command for display has been received (S6431: Yes), the reel effect command process is executed (S6432), and the process returns to the process of S6401. Details of the reel effect command process (S6432) will be described later with reference to FIG. 146(a).

On the other hand, in the process of S6431, if it is determined that the reel effect command for display has not been received (S6431: No), then it is determined whether or not the transition effect command for display has been received (S6433).

In the process of S6433, when it is determined that the transition effect command for display has been received (S6433: Yes), the transition effect command process is executed (S6434), and the process returns to S2601. Details of the transition effect command process (S6434) will be described later with reference to FIG. 146(b).

On the other hand, in the processing of S6433, if it is determined that the transition effect command for display has not been received (S6433: No), then it is determined whether or not the grant effect command for display has been received (S6435). In the processing of S6435, if it is determined that the display giving effect command is received (S6435: Yes), the giving effect command process is executed to display the giving effect during the execution (display) of the variable display. (S6436), returning to the processing of S6401. Details of the effect command process (S6436) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S6435, if it is determined that the transition effect command for display has not been received (S6435: No), the processes of S6416 to S6420 are executed in the same manner as in the first control example, and the process of S2601 is executed. back to

Next, with reference to FIG. 146(a), details of the reel effect command process (S6432) will be described. FIG. 146(a) is a flow chart showing reel effect command processing. In this reel effect command processing, a process corresponding to the display reel effect command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

In the reel effect command processing, first, the reel effect display data table corresponding to the reel effect indicated by the display reel effect command is determined, and the determined reel effect display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S8501). Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the reel effect display data table is determined, and the determined transfer data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S8502).

Then, based on the reel effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S8501, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S8503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S8504). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S8505), the reel effect command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Next, details of the transition effect command process (S6433) will be described with reference to FIG. 146(b). FIG. 146(b) is a flowchart showing transition effect command processing (S6433). This transition effect command process (S6443) is to execute the process corresponding to the transition effect command for display received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the transition effect command process, first, the transition effect display data table corresponding to the transition effect indicated by the transition effect command for display is determined, and the determined transition effect display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S8601). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S8602).

Then, based on the transition effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S8601, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S8603), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S8604). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S8605), the transition effect command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 147, the details of the given effect command process (S6436) will be described. FIG. 147 is a flow chart showing the giving effect command process (S6436). The given effect command process (S6436) executes a process corresponding to the display given effect command received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the imparting effect command process, first, the imparting effect display data table corresponding to the imparting effect indicated by the imparting effect command for display is determined, the determined imparting effect display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data is displayed. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S8701). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S8702).

Then, based on the given effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S8701, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S8703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S8704). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S8705), the imparted effect command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

As described above, in the second control example, as the effect display executed by the third symbol display device 81, the grant effect of giving a ticket (privilege) is displayed, and the ticket given in the grant effect is displayed. According to the number of , the reel performance is displayed during the jackpot game. The reel effect is that the patterns are stopped and displayed in a manner in which three patterns are aligned (any of "○○○", "△△△", and "□□□"), and the probability variation game state is established after the jackpot game. is given (that is, winning the variable probability jackpot). Since this reel effect is configured to be executed (displayed) during the jackpot game after the execution of the normal opening effect indicating that the normal game state is provided after the jackpot game, the jackpot game is started. Since it is possible to inform the player who was aware that the normal gaming state will be granted when the can be given to the player, and the interest of the player can be improved.

In addition, in this control example, it is configured so as to suggest a game state to be shifted after the big win game depending on the effect mode of the reel effect, but it is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to suggest the number of rounds of the jackpot game. Specifically, when the reel production is stopped and displayed in a specific mode (a mode in which three symbols are aligned), the jackpot game is executed up to 16 rounds, and otherwise, the jackpot game ends in 8 rounds. should be configured to In addition, according to the number of awarded tickets and the type of ticket, it is of course possible to make it easier for a specific mode to be stop-displayed in the reel effect.

In addition, the ticket is given when the giving effect is displayed during the execution of the variable display, but it is not limited to this. For example, a ticket may be given based on the fact that game balls enter the specific winning hole 65a, or a predetermined number or more of gaming balls enter the specific winning hole 65a (so-called over winning). The ticket may be granted based on the fact that the As a result, it is possible to increase the variety of opportunities for awarding a ticket, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In addition, in the second control example, based on the result of the lottery as to whether or not the ticket is to be awarded, the grant effect of granting the ticket is executed. For example, a ticket may be given when a predetermined variation pattern (for example, fish school reach) is executed as a variation display for displaying the lottery result of the special symbol. Also, a ticket may be given when all of the plurality of predetermined variation patterns are executed. In this case, the player can select the effect (or combination of multiple effects) to which the ticket is given, and the variation pattern (for example, normal reach) that is executed less frequently than the variation pattern that is executed frequently (for example, normal reach) For example, it is preferable to increase the number of tickets given to those who select Super Reach.

By configuring in this way, in addition to the enjoyment of knowing the lottery result, it is possible to obtain a ticket (a privilege not based on the special pattern lottery is obtained) for the variable display for displaying the lottery result of the special pattern. ) Since it is possible to provide amusement, it is possible to enhance the production effect. In addition, the player can select (set) the condition (variation pattern, for example) under which tickets are awarded, and the number of tickets to be awarded can be varied based on the degree of difficulty in achieving the selected (set) condition. By doing so, the player can play the game while predicting the variable display that will be executed in the future, so that it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early.

In addition, when the game ends with the ticket acquired, a specific effect right erasing means for erasing the acquired ticket may be provided. As a result, it is possible to prevent the acquired ticket from being used by the next player. Furthermore, the information about the acquired ticket may be displayed in a form that the player can acquire (for example, password information or two-dimensional code information). As a result, by inputting information about the ticket obtained when the game is executed next time, the ticket obtained in the previous game may be continuously used. This makes it possible to increase the desire to participate in the next game.

In the second control example, the rate at which the effect of awarding the ticket is executed is always constant regardless of the game state of the pachinko machine 10, but the effect of awarding the ticket is executed based on the game state. For example, a game state in which it is easy to win a big hit (a time-saving game state in which it is easier to execute a lottery of special symbols than in a normal game state, or a special symbol than in a normal game state) If a high-probability game state in which the probability of winning in the lottery is high, etc.) is set, it is preferable to make it easier to award a ticket than in a normal game state. As a result, when the period (time or the number of lotteries of special symbols) until the jackpot game is executed is short, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the number of tickets to be provided, regardless of the game state. It is possible to execute an effect (reel effect using a ticket) during the jackpot game.

In addition, when the number of acquired tickets is small (or none), such as immediately after power-on of the pachinko machine 10 or immediately after the end of the jackpot game (after the end of the jackpot game in which all the tickets obtained in the jackpot game are used), the jackpot is won. If this happens, there is a possibility that the effect using the ticket cannot be executed during the jackpot game (the number of times that can be executed is reduced). Therefore, immediately after turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 or immediately after finishing the jackpot game, it is preferable to execute an effect in which a ticket is provided under a condition different from the lottery (fluctuation) of the special symbols. For example, if it is configured such that an effect is executed in which a ticket is given on condition that the frame button 22 is pressed (operated) or a game ball enters a ball entrance provided on the game board 13. good. By constructing in this way, even when a big win is won immediately after turning on the power or immediately after the end of the big win, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the performance using the ticket cannot be executed during the big win game.

In the second control example, the ticket grant effect is executed in which a ticket is awarded based on the game played on the pachinko machine 10. For example, the ticket giving effect may be executed when an RTC (real time clock) counts a predetermined time. As a result, the number of tickets can be automatically increased in the pachinko machine 10 where the player is not playing, and the player can easily play the game.

In addition, in the second control example, an effect using the acquired ticket is executed during the big win, and based on the result of the effect, the game state set after the end of the big win game is a game state advantageous to the player (for example, , variable probability gaming state), but the acquired ticket may be used for other purposes. For example, in a game state in which it is difficult for the player to grasp whether the currently set game state is advantageous to the player (so-called latent probability variable state), an effect using the acquired ticket is executed. As a result of the effect, an effect of suggesting (informing) the player of the current game state may be executed. In this case, it is good to execute the effect during a winning game (for example, a small winning game) in which the game state is not changed. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect using the obtained ticket even in a state in which no big winning game is executed, and the amusement of the game can be improved. In addition, by executing the performance using the period during which the winning game (small winning game) is executed in which the game state is not changed, it becomes easy to divert the performance data of at least a part of the performance executed during the big winning game. Therefore, the amount of data used for presentation can be reduced.

Further, it is preferable to determine the period during which the player can execute the performance using the ticket acquired by the player, and set a specific performance from a plurality of performances based on the determination result. As a result, for example, if a selection period is set for the player to select whether or not to execute the effect, and the player selects to execute the effect during the selection period, the effect will be different according to the remaining effect executable period. A performance can be executed, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored early. In addition, by providing a plurality of effects with different effect periods as effects to be executed using the tickets acquired by the player, for example, various timings during the jackpot game and various jackpot games with different jackpot game periods can be performed. A performance using the ticket acquired by the player can be executed, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, in the present control example, the fact that the ticket has been granted is notified by the grant effect, and the number of tickets to which the ticket has been granted is notified, but this is not the only option. For example, the number of issued tickets may not be displayed. In addition, it is possible to adopt a mode in which it is difficult for the player to recognize the given effect (for example, bubbles are displayed in a part of the background). As a result, since it is possible to draw the player's attention to the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the amusement of the game can be improved. In addition, when reel effects are displayed, it is possible to impart unexpectedness, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In the second control example, when the winning information is suspended based on the winning of the game ball, the fluctuation type is removed prior to the suspension, and the short fluctuation winning information is continuously suspended. Based on this, it is configured to change (overwrite) those outlier short fluctuations to short reach fluctuation types and execute continuous short reach production. When winning prize information for a big win based on the winning of a game ball is reserved, the short reach performance is set so as to be executed three times in succession as a continuous short reach performance, and winning prize information resulting in a loss is reserved. is set so that the short reach is continuously executed twice as the continuous short reach effect. As a result, the player plays the game expecting that the short reach will be executed three times in a row in the continuous short reach performance, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in this control example, it is configured to change (overwrite) the deviation short fluctuation to the short reach fluctuation type and execute the continuous short reach effect, but it is not limited to this. For example, it may be constructed such that the continuous short reach effect is executed regardless of the fluctuation time of the special symbols. Specifically, when the deviation short variation is executed, the performance is controlled so that the short reach performance is executed once, and when the deviation long variation is executed, the short reach performance is simulated twice. The effect may be controlled so that it is executed twice (so-called pseudo-ream may be used). As a result, even when the short variation is not continuous as the variation display of the special symbols, the continuous short reach effect can be executed.

In addition, although it is configured to change (overwrite) the fluctuation type of short fluctuation to the fluctuation type of short reach, it is not limited to this. For example, only the stop type may be changed to the reach mode without changing the fluctuation type. As a result, even if a plurality of variable time periods are provided, it is possible to easily stop and display in a reach mode (specific mode) simply by changing the stop type.

In the second control example, when the continuous short reach effect is being executed, the change of the back image based on the depression of the frame button 22 is not executed. As a result, it is possible to suppress (prevent) the inconvenience of giving the player the impression that the continuous short reach effect executed over a plurality of fluctuations is temporarily interrupted due to the change of the back image. Therefore, the interest of the player can be improved. Also, when the continuous short reach effect is being executed, if the back image is changed based on the passage of time (that is, the back image is changed synchronously in a plurality of game machines, so-called island interlocking effect is executed), it is configured so that the rear image can be changed. As a result, the change of the rear image based on the lapse of time (so-called island-linked effect) is executed without delay, so that the interest in the game can be improved. In this case, the continuous short reach performance is terminated in the middle, and a benefit (ticket used in the reel performance described above) is provided according to the progress of the completed continuous short reach performance. As a result, it is possible to reduce the dissatisfaction felt by the player when the continuous short reach performance is terminated in the middle.

It should be noted that, when the continuous short reach effect is being executed, it is of course possible to change the rear image based on the depression of the frame button 22 . Also when the background image is changed based on pressing of the frame button 22, the transition effect may be displayed. Naturally, the configuration may be such that the continuous short reach performance is continuously executed.

In addition, in the second control example, the 8-piece pending effect in the first control example described above is not executed, but the 8-piece pending effect may of course be configured to be executable.

<Third control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 148 to 161. FIG. In the first control example described above, when it is detected that the frame button 22 has been pressed, or when it is detected that a specific time period has come, only the back image displayed on the back side of the third pattern is changed. was. In other words, only the rear image is switched while maintaining the modes of the third pattern and the reserved pattern, and the image data for displaying the third pattern and the image data for displaying the reserved pattern are shared.

On the other hand, in the third control example, a stage (rear surface D) is provided on which the third pattern and the reserved pattern can be switched to different modes together with the rear image. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game from becoming monotonous.

In addition, in the third control example, there is provided a pending notice effect that changes the display mode of the pending symbol in accordance with the degree of expectation of the winning information (holding ball) corresponding to the pending symbol. In this pending notice effect, the player can be made to recognize the degree of expectation for a big win according to the state of the pending symbol, so that before the variable display corresponding to the pending symbol is started, the pending ball is displayed. can inspire a sense of anticipation.

In addition, when the display mode of the reserved design is changed and switched to the back side D, the display mode of the reserved design is also changed in conjunction with the rear image. In this control example, when switching to the back surface D in a state in which the pending advance notice effect is set, the change is made to the suspension advance notice effect corresponding to the back surface D. - 特許庁As a result, it is possible to set an effect mode corresponding to the changed back surface type while continuing the pending advance notice effect before and after the change of the back surface type.

The pachinko machine 10 in the third control example differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example in that the configuration of the ROM 222 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed. The configuration of the work RAM 233 provided in the display control device 114 is partially changed, the processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is partially changed, and the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 The point is that some of the processes that are executed have been changed. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and other processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the first control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 148 and 149, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in this third control example will be described. In FIG. 148(a), when the back surface A is set as the back surface type, the suspension notice effect is set to the third suspension symbol HY1 from the right among the suspension symbols displayed in the suspension display area Ds1b. It is the figure which showed the display aspect in a case.

As shown in FIG. 148(a), the reserved symbol HY1 in which the reserved notice effect is set is set in a color different from that of the other reserved symbols. This color change basically continues until the pending symbol HY1 is moved to the execution display area and the variable display corresponding to the pending symbol HY1 is completed. Although the details will be described later, in the suspension notice effect, the suspension symbol is changed to any one of blue, green, red, and rainbow colors. The degree of expectation for a big win is set so that blue is the lowest, and green, red, and rainbow colors have the highest degree of expectation in this order. As a result, when the pending advance notice effect is generated, the player's interest in the game can be improved because the player's attention can be drawn to the color in which the target pending symbol changes.

Next, with reference to FIG. 148(b), the display mode when the back face D is set will be described. This back face D may be set by the player operating the frame button 22 during the period in which the back face type can be changed. Specifically, in the third control example, according to the operation of the frame button 22, the back surface type is changed in the order of back surface A→back surface B→back surface C→back surface D→back surface A→ . As described above, when the back face D is set, the display mode of the third symbol and the display mode of the reserved symbol are changed in addition to the back face type. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 148(b), the main display area Dm is changed so that the third pattern is composed only of numbers. Further, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls by the number of reserved symbols, the number of reserved balls is displayed numerically in the reserved ball number display area Ds1c of the small display area Ds. Furthermore, the characters "simple mode" are displayed above the main display area Dm. Thus, when the back face D is set, the third pattern and the reserved pattern are displayed in a simple and easy-to-understand manner, so that beginners of the game and players who are not good at lively performances can play the game with peace of mind. can be done.

It should be noted that the display mode of the pending symbol at the time of change is common between the case where the state is changed to the back side D in the state where the pending advance notice effect is set and the case where it is not. On the back side D, an effect (special pending notice effect) corresponding to the pending notice effect is executed when the variation is stopped. The details of this special holding notice effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 149(a) and (b).

FIGS. 149(a) and 149(b) are diagrams showing the display mode when the display is changed to the back side D in the state where the advance notice on hold is set, and the variable display which was being executed at the time of the change is stopped and displayed. As shown in FIG. 149(a), when the variation is stopped, the mode of the third symbol and the mode of the pending symbol are displayed in the same mode as when the special pending notice effect is not set. Also, during 0.1 seconds out of 0.5 seconds during which the third symbol is stop-displayed, the special holding notice effect is executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 149(b), the number "3" is displayed on the front surface of the third symbol display device 81 for only 0.1 seconds during the stop display. This number "3" is displayed until the pending symbol HY1, for which the pending notice effect was set before the back surface type was changed to the back surface D, is moved to the execution display area (variation display corresponding to the pending symbol HY1 is started). It shows the number of remaining fluctuations until the 149(b) is displayed for 0.1 second each time the variable display is executed and the third symbol is stopped and displayed, and the number is subtracted by 1 each time the variable display is performed. . As a result, the player who visually recognizes the number can easily understand the start timing of the variable display corresponding to the pending symbol HY1 in which the pending notice effect is set.

In addition, the color of the numbers displayed in the special pending notice effect (see FIG. 149(b)) is set to the same color as the color of the pending symbol in the pending notice effect that was set before the change to the back face D. . For example, when the player operates the frame button 22 to switch to the back side D in a state in which a pending notice effect to change to a red pending symbol is set, a special pending notice effect (Fig. 149 (b) ) is also set to red. The same is true for other colors.

Thus, in the third control example, as one type of back surface type (stage), the back surface D, in which the display mode of the third pattern and the reserved pattern is also variable in addition to the back image, is provided. On the back surface D, the display mode of the third pattern is changed to a simple mode composed only of numbers, and the mode of the reserved pattern is also changed to a simple mode showing the number of reserved balls numerically. Since the reserved pattern is in a mode different from the other back surface types (rear surfaces A to C), it is not possible to apply the reserved advance notice performance set for the other back surface types to the back surface D as it is.

However, if the suspension notice effect is terminated when the rear surface D is changed, there is a possibility that the player will have difficulty in recognizing the number of the suspension ball for which the suspension notice effect was set. be. In addition, there is a risk that the player may have suspicion that the pending ball for which the pending advance notice effect has been set has disappeared due to the cancellation of the pending notice effect. On the other hand, when a pending notice effect is set, it is also possible to keep displaying each pending symbol including the pending symbol HY1 for which the pending notice effect is set as it is even after the change to the back face D. However, the display mode of the third symbol and the display mode of the reserved symbol do not match each other, and there is a possibility that the display content may make the player feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, in the third control example, regardless of whether or not the pending notice effect is set for any of the pending symbols, the display mode is configured to be the same when the back surface D is changed. are doing. Then, when the third symbol is stop-displayed, the number of remaining fluctuations is displayed for 0.1 second until the fluctuation display based on the holding ball for which the holding notice effect is set is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute the special pending notice effect without changing the mode of the pending symbol or the mode of the third symbol. It is possible to prevent (suppress) the display content of D from causing a sense of incongruity. Further, the player can reduce the possibility of overlooking the special holding notice performance by executing the special holding notice performance at the timing of the stop display of the third symbol that the player pays the most attention to.

In this control example, while the third symbol is stopped and displayed, the special holding notice effect is executed for only 0.1 seconds, but the timing and period of displaying the special holding notice effect are determined arbitrarily. may

In this control example, as a special hold notice effect, the number of remaining fluctuations until the start of the fluctuation display based on the highly anticipated hold ball is displayed on the full screen for 0.1 seconds, but this is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, in the state where the pending notice effect is set (see FIG. 148(a)), when it is changed to the back side D, characters indicating the remaining number of times until it corresponds to the pending symbol HY1 and the degree of expectation of the pending symbol HY1 A design or the like may be configured to be displayed on the third design display device 81 . Specifically, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which characters such as "Something may happen in three more times!?" In addition, for example, when the start timing of the variable display corresponding to the reserved design for which the pending notice effect has been set comes, the reserved design in the same manner as the reserved design displayed before changing the back surface type is reduced. It may be configured to be displayed in the display area Ds.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the third control example>
Next, the electrical configuration in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 150 to 152. FIG. First, referring to FIG. 150, the ROM 222 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described. FIG. 150 is a block diagram showing the configuration of ROM 222. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 150, the ROM 222 in the third control example differs from the ROM 222 in the first control example in that a pending notice execution determination table 222dc is provided in addition to the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first control example. The pending announcement execution determination table 222dc is a table that is referred to when determining whether or not to execute the pending announcement effect. In the third control example, each time a new winning information command is received from the main controller 110, the pending advance notice execution determination table 222dc is referred to determine whether or not to set the pending advance notice effect. The mode (the color of the reserved symbol) is discriminated. Details of the pending notice execution determination table 222dc will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 151 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the pending notice execution determination table 222dc. As shown in FIG. 151, the pending advance notice execution determination table 222dc associates the value range of the effect counter with the type of pending advance notice effect (color of the pending symbol) for each type of winning information (lottery result). stipulated.

Specifically, when the winning information is hit super reach, the value "0" of the effect counter 223f is defined to correspond to "rainbow color" as the notice type. In addition, the value of the effect counter 223f in the range of "1 to 12" is defined in association with "red" as the notice type, and the value in the range of "13 to 22" corresponds to "green" as the notice type. The range of "23, 24" is defined in association with "blue" as the advance notice type. On the other hand, since the range of "25 to 198" is not defined, when the pending notice execution determination table 222dc is referred to while the value of the effect counter 223f is within this range, the continuous notice effect is set. not.

On the other hand, when the prize information is hit and normal reach, the value of the effect counter 223f ranges from "0 to 7", and "red" is defined as the advance notice type. In addition, the value of the effect counter 223f is defined to correspond to the range of "8 to 13" with "green" as the notice type, and the value of the effect counter 223f "14" is associated with "blue" as the notice type. stipulated. On the other hand, since the range of "15 to 198" is not defined, when the pending notice execution determination table 222dc is referred to while the value of the effect counter 223f is within this range, continuous notice effect is set. not. Since the random number (counter value) to which the continuous notice performance is not set is larger in the win normal reach than in the win super reach, the win super reach can be expected at the stage when the suspension notice performance is set.

When the prize information is lost and super ready-to-win is achieved, the value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "90, 91", and "red" is defined as the advance notice type. In addition, the value of the effect counter 223f is defined to correspond to the range of "92 to 98" with "green" as the notice type, and the value of the effect counter 223f "99" is associated with "blue" as the notice type. stipulated. On the other hand, since the range of "0 to 89, 100 to 198" is not defined, when the pending notice execution determination table 222dc is referred to while the value of the effect counter 223f is within this range, continuous The advance notice effect is not set. Since the random number (counter value) corresponding to the execution of the continuous notice effect is set smaller than the winning super reach and the winning normal reach, when the pending notice effect is set, it is expected that it will be a big hit. can.

When the prize information is lost and normal reach occurs, the value "98" of the effect counter 223f is defined in association with "green" as the notice type. Also, "blue" is defined as the advance notice type in association with the value "99" of the effect counter 223f. On the other hand, since the range of "0 to 97, 100 to 198" is not defined, when the pending notice execution determination table 222dc is referred to while the value of the effect counter 223f is within this range, continuous The advance notice effect is not set. Since the random number (counter value) corresponding to the execution of the continuous notice effect is set less than the hit super reach, the hit normal reach, and the lose super reach, it is possible to make a big hit when the pending notice effect is set. can be expected.

As shown in FIG. 151, the "rainbow color" notice type is configured to be selectable only in the "win super reach". As a result, since it is determined that a big win will occur when the pending pattern becomes "rainbow colored", a big win will occur until the variable display corresponding to the "rainbow colored" pending pattern is executed for the player. The game can be played while giving the player a sense of superiority for having sensed the situation in advance. In addition, the "red" notice type is configured so that it will not be selected in the lost normal reach. As a result, when the notice type of "red" occurs, it is confirmed that it will be a big hit or will develop into a super reach, so there are strong expectations for the reserved ball corresponding to the reserved pattern that has changed to "red". can be made

Next, the configuration of the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. 152(a). FIG. 152(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 in this third control example. As shown in FIG. 152(a), the work RAM 233 of the third control example has the configuration of the work RAM 233 of the first control example (see FIG. 74), a new hold notice command flag 233da, and a hold notice information storage area. 233db are provided. Various display data tables corresponding to the rear surface D are provided as types of display data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. Various display data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b are transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 when the power is turned on, like the other display data tables.

The new suspension notice command flag 233da is a flag for determining whether or not to set a suspension notice effect. If this new pending notice command flag 233da is ON, it means setting the pending notice effect (changing the mode of the pending symbol), and if it is OFF, it means that the pending notice effect is not performed. The new hold notice command flag 233da is set to ON when the display hold notice command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received (see S9001 in FIG. 158(a)). Also, this new pending notice command flag 233da is referred to in various image setting processing 3 (see S7552 in FIG. 161), and is set to OFF when the image data for the pending notice effect is developed (S7555 in FIG. 161). reference). Thereby, it is possible to display the image of the pending symbol corresponding to the pending notice command for display received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

The pending notice information storage area 233db is a storage area in which data indicating the content of the set pending notice effect is stored. The reserved notice information storage area 233db is provided with a dedicated storage area for each reserved symbol, and data corresponding to the type of reserved notice set for each reserved symbol is stored in each storage area. Specifically, for example, when "00H" is stored as the data corresponding to the type of notice, it indicates that the pending notice is not set in the reserved pattern corresponding to the storage area in which the data is stored. means. On the other hand, when "01H" is stored, it means that the "blue" notice type is set, and when "02H" is stored, the "green" notice type is set. If "03H" is stored, it means that the "red" notice type is set, and if "04H" is stored, it means that "rainbow This means that the notification type of "color" is set. With each data stored in this pending notice information storage area 233db, the display mode of the pending symbol can be updated accurately.

In addition, in the third control example, the display data table includes a special suspension notice data table for setting a special suspension notice effect when the back face D is set. Details of this special hold notice data table will be described with reference to FIG. 152(b).

FIG. 152(b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the special hold notice data table. As shown in FIG. 152(b), this special hold notice data table defines only the display contents for the address (value of the pointer 233f) in the range of 02E1H to 02E5H. As described above, the value of the pointer 233f is updated every 20 milliseconds, so the special hold notice data table defines display contents for 0.1 seconds (20 milliseconds×5).

As shown in FIG. 152(b), in this special hold notice data table, a rear picture for special hold notice is defined as a rear picture for each address (value of pointer 233f). Also, as the character 1, a special reservation notice pattern 3 is defined. Eight types of 1 to 8 are provided for the special reservation notice symbols, and each of them is composed of images of numbers 1 to 8. FIG. In the example of FIG. 152(b), since the special reservation notice pattern 3 is specified, it is composed of the same number 3 image as shown in FIG. 149(b).

When a new display variation pattern command is received with the special suspension notice effect set, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern, its variation display data table, and this special suspension notice effect A special pending notice data table corresponding to the aspect is selected. Then, in the display data table buffer 233d, the read two types of display data tables are synthesized. More specifically, in the variable display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the range of the pointer 233f (example in FIG. Then, data 02E1H to 02E5H) are overwritten with the specified contents of the special hold notice data table. As a result, there is no need to separately provide a table in which the special pending advance notice effect of each mode is set and a table in which the special pending notice effect is not set as the variable display data table (0.1 It suffices if only the data for the second is defined separately as the special hold notice data table), so the amount of data in the character ROM 234 and the work RAM 233 can be reduced.

<Regarding control processing of the audio ramp control device in the third control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 153 to 155. FIG. First, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 153, the winning information command receiving process 3 executed in place of the winning command receiving process (see FIG. 102) in the first control example will be described.

In the winning information command receiving process 3 (see FIG. 153), the processes in S3101 to S3108 are the same as the processes in S3101 to S3108 in the winning information command receiving process (see FIG. 102) in the first control example. is executed. In addition, in the winning information command reception process 3 (see FIG. 153) in the third control example, after the process of S3101 is completed, whether or not to set the pending advance notice effect, and the type in the case of setting the pending notice effect is executed (S3121), and the process proceeds to S3102. Details of this pending notice setting process (S3121) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing the pending notice setting process (S3121). When this pending notice setting process (S3121) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the current back plane type is back plane D (S4201). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the mode counter 223i is "4" corresponding to the rear D. Then, in the process of S4201, when it is determined that the back face D is set (S4201: Yes), this process is terminated without setting the pending advance notice effect.

Further, when it is determined in the process of S4201 that other than the back D is set (S4201: No), it is then determined whether or not the value of the pending notice counter 223ca (not shown) is greater than 0 (S4202 ). The pending notice counter 223ca is a counter indicating the remaining number of times until the variable display is executed based on the pending ball corresponding to the pending symbol for which the pending notice effect is set, and the pending notice effect is set. Each time, the current number of pending balls is set. Therefore, in the process of S4202, it is determined whether or not the suspension notice effect is being executed.

In the processing of S4202, when it is determined that the value of the pending notice counter 223ca is greater than 0 (the pending notice effect is already being executed) (S4202: Yes), The processing from S4203 to S4207 is skipped, and this processing ends. In addition, in this control example, it is configured so as not to set the suspension notice effect redundantly, but it may be set redundantly.

In the process of S4202, if it is determined that the value of the pending notice counter 223ca is 0 (S4202: No), then the value of the effect counter 223f is acquired (S4203), and the value of the acquired effect counter 223f, By comparing with the pending advance notice execution determination table 222dc (see FIG. 151), whether or not the pending advance notice can be executed for the new winning information, and if the pending advance notice effect is to be set, the advance notice type is determined (S4204).

After the processing of S4204 is finished, it is next determined whether or not the determination made in the processing of S4204 results in execution of the pending notice (S4205). If it is determined that there is (S4205: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4205, if it is determined to execute the pending notice effect (S4205: Yes), the display control device 114 displays the notice type of the pending notice effect specified from the pending notice execution determination table 222dc in the process of S4204. (S4206). Next, the value of the reservation notice counter 223ca is updated to the sum of the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c (S4207), and this processing is terminated. .

By executing this pending notice setting process (see FIG. 154), it is possible to determine whether or not the pending notice effect can be executed and the notice type of the pending notice effect each time a new start winning prize is detected.

Next, with reference to FIG. 155, stop command reception processing 3 (S3051) executed instead of the stop command reception processing (see FIG. 103) in the first control example will be described. FIG. 155 is a flow chart showing this stop command reception process 3 (S3051). In the processing of S3201 to S3206 of the stop command reception processing 3 (S3051), the same processing as the processing of S3201 to S3206 in the stop command reception processing of the first control example (see FIG. 103) is executed. .

Further, in the stop command reception process 3 (see FIG. 155) in the third control example, whether the process of S3206 is completed, or whether it is determined in the process of S3202 that the continuous notice flag 223q is off (S3202: No), If it is determined in the process of S3203 that the value of the remaining notice number counter 223r is 1 or more (S3203: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the pending notice counter 223ca is greater than 0 (S3251). That is, it is determined whether or not the suspension notice effect is being executed.

In the process of S3251, when it is determined that the value of the pending notice counter 223ca is 0 (the pending notice effect is not set) (S3251: No), there is no need to update the value of the pending notice counter 223ca. This process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S3251, if it is determined that the value of the pending notice counter 223ca is 1 or more (S3251: Yes), then the value of the pending notice counter 223ca is updated by subtracting 1 (S3252), and A display pending notice command for setting the display mode of the pending symbol corresponding to the subsequent pending notice counter 223ca is set (S3253), and this process is terminated. By executing this stop command receiving process 3 (see FIG. 155), each time the variable display is completed in the state where the pending notice is set, the pending symbol set with the pending notice effect is preferably displayed on the execution display area DS1a side. can be moved to

<Regarding control processing of the display control device in the third control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 156 to 161. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 156, command determination processing of the display control device 114 in the third control example will be described. This command determination process (S6302), like the first control example, analyzes the contents of the command from the sound lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process, and executes the process according to the command. It is a process for execution.

In the command determination processing (see FIG. 156) in the third control example, S6401 to S6404, S6406 to S6416, and S6418 to S6420 correspond to S6401 to S6401 in the command determination processing in the first control example (see FIG. 113). The same processes as those of S6404, S6406 to S6416 and S6418 to S6420 are executed. Further, in the command determination processing (see FIG. 156) in the third control example, when it is determined that the display variation pattern command is received in the processing of S6404 (S6404: Yes), the variation pattern command processing in the first control example Instead of (S6405), variation pattern command processing 3 is executed (S6451), and this processing ends. The details of this variation pattern command process 3 will be described later with reference to FIG.

In addition, in the command determination process (see FIG. 156) in the third control example, if it is determined in the process of S6414 that the unprocessed command does not include the continuous announcement command for display (S6414: No), Next, it is determined whether or not there is a pending notice command for display (S6452). In the processing of S6452, if it is determined that the pending notice command for display is included in the unprocessed commands (S6452: Yes), the pending notice for executing the processing corresponding to the received pending notice effect command Command processing is executed (S6453), and this processing ends. The details of this pending notice command process (S6453) will be described later with reference to FIG. 158(a).

In addition, in the command determination process (see FIG. 156) in the third control example, if it is determined in the process of S6416 that the back image change command exists in the unprocessed commands (S6416: Yes), the first control example In place of the back image change command process (see FIG. 117(a)) in , back image change command process 3 is executed (S6454), and the process returns to S6401. The details of this back image change command process 3 (S6454) will be described later with reference to FIG. 158(b).

Next, referring to FIG. 157, variation pattern command processing executed instead of variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 114(a)) in the first control example in the command determination processing (see FIG. 156) described above. 3 (S6451) will be described in detail. FIG. 157 is a flow chart showing this variation pattern command process 3 (S6451).

Of the variation pattern command processing 3 (see FIG. 157), in each processing of S6501 to S6505, each processing of S6501 to S6505 of the variation pattern command processing in the first control example (see FIG. 114 (a)) is the same Processing is performed. Further, in the variation pattern command process 3 (see FIG. 157) in the third control example, when the process of S6502 is finished, it is next checked whether or not the currently set back face type is back face D. 233x (S6551).

In the process of S6551, if it is determined that the currently set back plane type is back plane D (S6551: Yes), then the pending notice is issued based on the data stored in the pending notice information storage area 233db. It is determined whether or not it is set (S6552). In the processing of S6552, when it is determined that the pending notice effect is set (S6552: Yes), the special pending notice data table corresponding to the data stored in the pending notice information storage area 233db is determined. That is, from the data in the holding notice information storage area 233db, the number of remaining times until the start of the variable display based on the holding ball for which the holding notice effect is set and the notice type are specified, and the special holding notice data corresponding to them is specified. A table is determined from the data table storage area 233b. Then, the defined content of the determined special hold notice data table is overwritten in the value range of the corresponding pointer 233f in the display data table buffer 233d (S6553), and the process proceeds to S6503.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6551 that other than the back D is set (S6551: No), or if it is determined in the process of S6552 that the pending notice effect is not set (S6552: No), Since there is no need to set execution of the special holding notice effect, the process of S6553 is skipped and the process proceeds to S6503.

Next, the details of the pending notice command process (S6453) will be described with reference to FIG. 158(a). This pending notice command process (S6453) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 156) in the third control example, and as described above, control corresponding to the display pending notice command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is performed. This is a process for performing

In this hold notice command process (see FIG. 158(a)), first, the new hold notice command flag 233da is set to ON (S9001), and then the hold notice effect is set from the received hold notice command for display. A pending symbol and a type of pending notice are extracted (S9002). Next, based on the extracted reserved design and the type of reserved notice, the data in the reserved notice information storage area 233db is updated (S9003), and this process is finished. Based on the data in the pending advance notice information storage area 233db updated by the process of S9003, the image data for the pending advance notice effect is specified in various image setting processing 3 (see FIG. 161) described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 158(b), the details of the back image change command process 3 (S6454) will be described. This back image change command process 3 (S6454) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 156) in the third control example, and corresponds to the back image change command received from the sound lamp control device 113 as described above. This is processing for control.

In the processes of S7201 and S7202 in the back image change command process 3 (see FIG. 158B) in the third control example, S7201 of the back image change command process (see FIG. 117) in the first control example , and S7202 are executed. In addition, in the back image change command process 3 (see FIG. 158(b)) in the third control example, when the process of S7201 ends, next, whether or not the back surface type before the change (that is, the current state) is the back surface D is determined. is determined based on the rear image determination flag 233x (S7251).

In the process of S7251, if it is determined that the current back face type is back face D (S7251: Yes), the third pattern and reserved pattern are changed in accordance with the change from back face D to another back face type. The process at the end of the rear face D is executed (S7252), and the process proceeds to S7201. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7251 that the back face type at the time of receiving the back face image change command is not back face D (S7251: No), the process of S7252 is skipped and the process proceeds to S7202.

In the back image change command process 3 (S6454) in the third control example, after the process of S7202 is completed, it is determined whether or not the back image change command received this time is a command indicating a change to the back image D. It is determined whether (S7253), if it is determined that it is a command indicating a change to the back D (S7253: Yes), along with the change from other back type to the back D third design and reserved design Back D transition processing is executed to change the aspect of (S7254), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S7253, if it is determined that the command is not a command to change to the back side D (S7253: No), the process of S7254 is skipped and the process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 159, the details of the back face D end time processing (S7252) executed in the back face image change command processing 3 (see FIG. 158(b)) will be described. As described above, this process at the end of the back face D (S7252) is a process for changing the mode of the third pattern and the reserved pattern as the back face type is changed from the back face D to another face face type.

In this process at the end of the rear face D, first, the variable display data table after the change to the rear face D corresponding to the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is read out and overwritten in the display data table buffer 233d. (S9101). Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table overwritten in the display data table buffer 233d is determined and overwritten in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S9102). In each of these processes, the value of the pointer 233f is held without being initialized. Therefore, even if the frame button 22 is operated during the variable display, the variable display can be restarted in the changed mode. can be done.

Next, based on the data stored in the pending advance notice information storage area 233db, it is determined whether or not the pending advance notice is set (S9103). The pending symbol data corresponding to the mode of the pending notice effect indicated by the data stored in the notice information storage area 233db is expanded (S9104), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S9103, if it is determined that the pending notice effect is not set (S9103: No), the process of S9104 is skipped and the process ends.

In this way, by executing the process at the end of the back face D, it is possible to change the display mode of the back face type, the third pattern, etc. during the variable display being executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 160, the rear D transition processing (S7254) executed in the rear image change command processing 3 (see FIG. 158(b)) will be described. This process at the time of transition to the back surface D (S7254) is a process for changing the mode of the third symbol and the reserved symbol in accordance with the change from another back surface type to the back surface D.

In the rear D transition processing (see FIG. 160), first, the variable display data table for the rear D corresponding to the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is determined, and the display data table buffer 233d is selected. (S9201). Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the set variable display data table is determined and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S9202).

Next, based on the data stored in the pending advance notice information storage area 233db, it is determined whether or not the pending advance notice is set (S9203). A special hold notice data table corresponding to the form of the hold notice effect indicated by the data stored in the notice information storage area 233db is determined, and the determined special hold notice data table is defined in the display data table buffer 233d. Overwrite the specified contents of the special hold notice data table for the range of pointer values (S9204), and terminate this process. As a result, in the state where the suspension notice effect is set, when the display is changed to the back D during the execution of the variable display, the special suspension notice effect (see FIG. 149(b)) ) can be executed. On the other hand, in the process of S9203, when it is determined that the pending notice effect is not set (S9203: No), the process of S9204 is skipped and the process ends as it is.

In this way, by executing the processing at the time of transition to the back surface D, it is possible to change the display mode of the back surface type, the third pattern, etc. during the variable display being executed.

Next, referring to FIG. 161, various image setting processes 3 (S7453) executed in the display setting process (see FIG. 118) instead of the various image setting processes (see FIG. 119) in the first control example. Details will be explained. This various image setting process 3 (S7453) is a process for setting various images such as an image at the time of pending symbol and continuous advance notice effect (8 pending effect).

Of the various image setting processes 3 (see FIG. 161), S7501 and S7503 to S7509 of the various image setting processes (see FIG. 118) in the first control example are performed. The same processing as is performed.

In addition, in the various image setting processing (see FIG. 161) in the third control example, in the processing of S7501, when it is determined that the number of new pending balls flag 233m is ON (S7501: Yes), then the number of pending symbols Reserved design data corresponding to the value of the counter 233n and the current back face type (state of the back face image discrimination flag 233x) is expanded (S7551), and the process proceeds to S7503. Specifically, in the process of S7551, if the back surface type is other than the back surface D, the number of pending symbols corresponding to the value of the pending symbol number counter 233n is developed in the pending display area Ds1b. On the other hand, if it is the back D, the number data corresponding to the value of the reserved pattern number counter 233n is developed in the reserved ball number display area Ds1c.

Further, in the various image setting processing 3 (see FIG. 161) in the third control example, it is determined in the processing of S7504 that the new continuous notice command flag 233o is OFF (S7504: No), or the processing of S7506 has ended. If so, it is determined whether or not the new hold notice command flag 233da is ON (S7552). In the process of S7552, if it is determined that the new hold notice command flag 233da is ON (S7552: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the currently set back surface type is back surface D (S7553). , When it is determined that the back D does not appear (S7553: No), the reserved design data corresponding to the data stored in the reserved notice information storage area 233db is expanded (S7554), and the process proceeds to S7555. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7553 that the currently set back surface type is the back surface D (S7553: Yes), the process of S7554 is skipped and the process proceeds to S7555.

In the process of S7555, the new hold notice command flag 233da is set to OFF (S7555), and the process proceeds to S7507. If it is determined in the processing of S7504 that the new hold notice command flag 233da is off (S7552: No), the processing of S7553 to S7555 is skipped and the process proceeds to S7507.

By executing this various image setting process 3 (S7453), it is possible to set an appropriate display mode in consideration of the set back face type and pending notice effect.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example, among the back types that can be changed based on the player's operation on the frame button 22, the third symbol and the reserved symbol are also switched to different modes. is configured to be provided. Specifically, the third pattern is changed to a pattern consisting only of numbers, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by a single reserved pattern consisting of numbers. . With such a configuration, when the back image is changed to the back D, the player can feel novelty, so that the game can be prevented (suppressed) from becoming monotonous.

In addition, in the third control example, when the back surface type is changed to the back surface D in a state where the suspension notice effect in which the mode (color tone) of the suspension pattern changes is set, the suspension notice effect corresponds to the back surface D. It is configured to change the mode. Specifically, for each stop display of the third symbol, for 0.1 second, the number of remaining fluctuations until the fluctuation display corresponding to the holding ball for which the holding notice is set is executed is displayed numerically, The color of the numbers suggests the degree of expectation of the pending notice. By configuring in this way, it is possible to take over the suspension notice effect set in the back face type before the change without destroying the concept of the simple and easy-to-understand display mode of the back face D. - 特許庁In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the special holding notice performance by executing the special holding notice performance at the time of stop display of the third pattern which the player pays most attention to.

In the third control example, when the back surface type is changed to D, the special pending notice effect is executed. A configuration may be adopted in which the mode of the suspension notice effect is made different. It is possible to diversify the mode of the suspension notice effect by making the mode of the suspension notice effect different for each back surface type. Further, when the back face type is changed, the configuration may be such that the suspension notice effect itself is cancelled. By configuring in this way, regardless of whether or not the pending advance notice effect is set, when the back surface type is changed, the same pending design mode may be developed, so that the back surface type can be changed. Processing load can be reduced.

In the third control example, when the suspension notice effect is set, the color is changed only once, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the color may be changed in a plurality of steps during the period from when the reserved symbol is newly displayed in the reserved display area Ds1b based on the start winning to when the corresponding variable display is finished. Specifically, for example, when the reserved design for which the reserved notice is set by the reserved notice setting process (see FIG. 154) is displayed, a predetermined trigger (for example, the start of the variable display corresponding to the other reserved design A configuration may be adopted in which a lottery is executed as to whether or not the status of reserved symbols is to be ranked up to a mode with a higher degree of expectation at the timing or the timing of a new start winning prize. In this case, in the lottery for the suspension notice effect at the time of the start winning, by configuring the probability that it will be set to blue or green corresponding to the low expectation with a high probability, the suspension ball corresponding to the high expectation suspension ball Also in this case, a configuration may be adopted in which the mode corresponding to the low expectation level is easily changed step by step to the mode corresponding to the high expectation level. By constructing in this way, even when the low-expectation pending notice effect occurs, the player can expect to change to a mode corresponding to the high-expectation after that, so that the player can expect a big win. You can inspire anticipation more often. In addition, in a configuration in which the pending notice effect can be ranked up, if the back face is changed to D while the pending notice effect is set, a rank-up lottery is performed in the same manner as when the back face type is not changed. may be In addition, when winning the rank-up lottery in the special suspension notice effect, the character color of the special suspension notice effect (see Fig. 149 (b)) displayed during the stop of fluctuation is simply changed to the color after the rank-up. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which an effect dedicated to rank-up is separately provided in a state in which the special holding notice effect is set. As an effect dedicated to rank-up in the special pending notice effect, for example, at the timing of winning the rank-up, a dedicated character appears, the color tone of the back is changed, and the word "rank-up" is displayed. exemplified. By configuring in this way, even when the back side D is set, the player can be made to clearly understand that he/she has won the rank-up lottery. Further, in the back face D, the timing of performing the rank-up lottery may be different from that of the other back face types. Specifically, for example, in the back planes A to C, a rank-up lottery is executed each time the fluctuation start timing is reached in a state where the pending notice effect is set, while when the rear plane D is set, the fluctuation A configuration may be adopted in which a rank-up lottery is executed when the game is stopped. Then, when the rank-up lottery is won on the back D, the rank-up effect is also executed in the special holding notice effect (see FIG. 149 (b)) executed during the stop display of the third symbol. good too. By configuring in this way, it is possible to expect a rank increase at different timings according to the set back surface type. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Modified Example of Suspension Notice Effect in Third Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 174, a modification of the suspension notice effect in the third control example will be described. In the suspension notice effect in the third control example described above, the suspension notice effect is configured to suggest the degree of expectation of the suspension symbol by changing the color of the suspension symbol. That is, a lottery was conducted to determine whether or not to set a reservation notice separately for each reservation symbol (regardless of the results of the look-ahead of other reserved balls). On the other hand, in this modification, instead of changing the mode of the reserved pattern, the combination of the look-ahead result of one or more reserved balls is converted into a numerical value (point) and displayed. bottom. Then, the higher the degree of expectation of the held ball is, the higher the number of points is converted to. As a result, the higher the displayed points, the higher the expectation for a big win.

In this modification, the look-ahead result of the held ball is converted to 1 point when it is completely lost, converted to 2 points when it is normal reach, and is converted to 10 points when it is super reach or various jackpots. and

First, with reference to FIG. 174(a), the configuration of the sub-display area Ds in this modified example will be described. As shown in FIG. 174(a), in this modification, a horizontally elongated substantially rectangular display area (point display area) for displaying a point is formed on the upper right side of the sub-display area Ds when viewed from the front. The example of FIG. 174(a) shows the standby state (fluctuation stopped state), and since there is no reserved symbol, "0pt" is displayed as the point.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 174(b) to 174(e), a method for increasing or decreasing points when the number of held balls increases or decreases will be described. FIG. 174(b) is a diagram showing a display mode when 5 start winnings are detected during variation corresponding to the deviation, and 5 pending symbols appear in the pending display area Ds1b during variation. be. In addition, as the reserved balls corresponding to these five reserved patterns, there are four completely lost (1st, 2nd, 4th, and 5th reserved patterns) and one lost super reach (3rd reserved pattern). exemplifies the case where it is configured. As shown in FIG. 174(b), when the number of held balls increases by 5 during variation, 1 point is uniformly added as a provisional point for each held ball. As a result, the characters "5pt" are displayed in the point display area.

Then, when the deviation fluctuation during fluctuation is completed and each reserved pattern is shifted to the execution display area Ds1a, for each reserved ball corresponding to the four reserved patterns displayed in the reserved display area Ds1b after the shift Look ahead and calculate accurate points. The reserved symbols displayed in the reserved display area Ds1b after the shift are composed of one reserved symbol (10 points) corresponding to the lost super reach and three reserved symbols (1 point) corresponding to the completely lost. So the correct point is 13 points. Therefore, the character "13pt" is displayed in the point display area.

Instead of looking ahead at the time of starting winning and reflecting the exact points immediately, by calculating and reflecting the accurate points collectively at the end of the variable display (shift of the pending pattern), during the fluctuation It is possible to make it difficult for a player to recognize the breakdown of points when a plurality of reserved ball patterns are increased at the same time. Therefore, by increasing the number of held balls, when the number of points increases greatly at the end of the variable display, all the increased held balls can be expected to make a big hit.

After the correct points are reflected, it becomes the end timing of the variable display, and every time one reserved design is shifted to the execution display area Ds1a, the points corresponding to the shifted reserved design are subtracted and displayed from the point display area. be done. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 174(d) and (e), when the pending symbol corresponding to the complete loss (1 point) is shifted to the execution display area Ds1a, the points displayed in the point display area 1 point is subtracted from (see FIG. 174(d)), and when the reserved symbol corresponding to the lost super reach (10 points) is shifted to the execution display area Ds1a, 10 points are displayed in the point display area. is subtracted (see FIG. 174(e)).

Thus, in this modification, the mode of the pending notice effect is configured such that the look-ahead result for each pending pattern is converted into points, and the total value of the points for each pending pattern is displayed in the point display area. there is By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to understand which of the reserved symbols corresponds to the highly anticipated reserved ball. It is possible to make the player feel a sense of expectation for a big hit with respect to the reserved balls corresponding to all the reserved symbols displayed in the display area Ds1b.

<Modified example of special holding notice effect in the third control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 175 and 176, a modification of the special holding notice effect in the third control example will be described. In the above-described third control example, in a state where the pending notice effect is set, when the third pattern mode and the pending pattern mode are changed to the back face D different from the other back face types, a special pending notice effect (figure 149(b)) has been described. An example will be described.

Here, the case of changing from the rear surface A to the rear surface B will be described as an example. The back faces A and B are stages in which the third pattern and the reserved pattern are displayed in common, and only the back face image is different. FIG. 175(a) is a diagram showing a state in which the back face A is set and the pending notice effect is set to the third pending symbol HY1 from the left in the pending display area Ds1b. The aspect of the suspension notice effect executed on the back face A is the same as that of the third control example described above. That is, an effect is executed in which the display color of the reserved symbol displayed corresponding to the reserved ball is changed to any one of blue, green, red, and rainbow colors according to the result of the look-ahead for the reserved ball.

As shown in FIG. 175(b), when the player presses the frame button 22 in a state where the pending notice effect is set, and the back image changes to back B, the back image is changed and the pending display area Ds1b is displayed. , the display mode of each reserved design including the reserved design HY1 is reset to the mode of the normal reserved design. It should be noted that the appearance of the display mode is merely changed to the display mode of the normal pending symbol, and the setting of the pending notice effect itself is memorized.

Thereafter, every time a new variable display is started, a lottery (suspended notice revival lottery) is executed to determine whether or not to revive the display mode of the pending notice effect. As shown in (b), the setting of the pending notice effect before changing the background image is restored.

In addition, in the pending notice revival lottery, the pending pattern that was set with the pending notice effect before changing the back image is the pending pattern corresponding to the highly anticipated pending ball, so that it is easier to be judged as winning. is set. Specifically, for example, if the hold notice is a hold pattern of a hold ball that corresponds to a hit super reach or a hit normal reach, after changing the back image, the hold notice revival lottery will be held at a rate of 50% every time the fluctuation starts. If you win and the reservation notice is removed and if it is a reservation pattern of the reservation ball corresponding to the super reach, after changing the back image, you will win the reservation notice revival lottery at a rate of 30% every time the fluctuation starts, and the reservation notice will be removed Normal reach If it is a reserved pattern corresponding to , after changing the rear image, the player wins the reserved notice resurrection lottery at a rate of 10% every time the variation starts. In other words, the more the reserve notice is set for the reserve ball with a high degree of expectation, the easier it is to win the reserve notice revival lottery. As a result, when the pending notice is revived after the back surface type is changed, the player's expectation for the big win can be heightened. In addition, a player who wants to determine the degree of expectation of a pending advance notice performance by whether or not the pending notice performance will be revived can be made to positively change the back face type during the setting of the pending notice performance. Therefore, it is possible to improve the willingness of the player to participate in the game.

<Modified Example of Rotating Unit 500>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 162 to 164, modified examples of the rotation unit 500 used in each of the above-described embodiments or control examples will be described. The structure of the Versalighter exemplified below will be described with the number of LEDs 532 reduced to eight (LEDs 1 to 8) to simplify the description.

The rotating unit 500 described above is configured in an elongated shape centered on the rotation axis, and the display surface side (game machine front side) of the elongated rotating unit 500 has an even opening that allows light to pass through (the opening of the rotating unit 500 By irradiating light from the back side (lower side from the viewpoint of FIG. The light divided into 40 can be visually recognized from the front side of the game machine.

With this configuration, by executing the rotation control of the rotation unit 500 and the light emission control of the LED, it is possible to execute a display effect in a wide area for the player.

However, in the structure of the rotating unit 500 described above, since a plurality of LEDs 532 are arranged along the longitudinal direction of the rotating unit 500 (see FIG. 28), the distance of each LED 532 from the rotation axis of the rotating unit 500 is different. become. As a result, when the rotation unit 500 is rotated, a stronger centrifugal force is applied to the LEDs located farther from the rotation axis than to the LEDs located closer to the rotation axis. There is a problem that it becomes easy to cause damage and malfunction.

On the other hand, in the first modification of the rotating unit 500, the LEDs 532 (LED1 to LED8) forming the rotating unit 500 are arranged in the vicinity of the rotation axis of the rotation unit 500, and the LEDs 532 are arranged in the vicinity of the rotation axis. A light guide path is provided for transmitting the light emitted from each LED 532 to each of the 8 partitioned diffusion plates. Thereby, when the rotation unit 500 is rotated, the centrifugal force applied to each LED532 can be reduced, and damage and malfunction of LED532 can be suppressed (prevented). In addition, since each LED 532 is configured to have the same distance from the rotation shaft 580e of the rotation unit 500, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the force applied to the LEDs from being unevenly applied to some of the LEDs during the rotation operation.

Specifically, this will be described with reference to FIG. 162(a). FIG. 162(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a cross-sectional view of the rotation unit 500 in the first modified example as seen from above, with the upper side of the paper surface facing the front side of the game machine.

As shown in FIG. 162(a), a central wall portion 580e is provided in the central portion of the rotating unit 500 to divide the inside of the rotating unit into left and right, and LEDs 1 to 4 are arranged on the left side of the central wall portion 580e. LEDs 5 to 8 are arranged on the right side.

Eight sections (openings 580a1 to 580a8) are provided in a horizontal row on the front side of the rotating unit 500 (the front side of the gaming machine), and each section (openings 580a1 to 580a8) is provided with Light emitted from each of the LEDs 532 described above hits a diffusion plate (not shown), so that it is possible to visually recognize that each section is lit from the front side of the rotating unit 500 (the front side of the gaming machine).

A light guide path is provided inside the rotation unit 500 so that the diffuser plate provided in each of the openings 580a1 to 580a8 is irradiated with light only from the corresponding LED. Specifically, the light emitted from the LED 1 passes through the first light guide path 580d1 and is guided in a variable direction by the reflecting member 580c1 provided at the tip of the first light guide path 580d1. It passes through the light guide path 580b1 and reaches the diffusion plate provided in the opening 580a1. Similarly, the light emitted from the LEDs 2-8 passes through the first light guide paths 580d2-580d8, the direction of the light is changed by the reflecting members 580c2-580c8, and the second light guide paths 580b2-b8 are guided. It is possible to pass through and reach the diffusion plates provided in the openings 580a2 to 580a8. Each of the first light guide paths 580d1-580d8 is configured independently, and each of the second light guide paths 580b1-580b8 is configured independently. As a result, the light emitted from each of the LEDs 1 to 8 can reach only the corresponding openings 580a1 to 580a8, and afterimage display occurs when the diffusion plates of the openings (sections) 580a1 to 580a8 are lit. The outline of the can be clarified.

As described above, in the first modified example, the LEDs 1 to 8 are collectively arranged in the vicinity of the rotation axis. As a result, the rotation starting energy required for starting the rotation of the rotation unit 500 can be reduced, so that the power consumption can be reduced and the response of the rotation operation can be improved. It is possible to enhance the performance effect of.

Next, in the second modification of the rotating unit 500, the light emitted from the LED 532 provided inside the rotating unit 500 is configured to be incident on the reflector, and the angle of the reflector is variably controlled. , by varying the direction in which the irradiated light propagates, the lighting section (opening) is configured to be variable. This eliminates the need to provide LEDs 532 corresponding to the respective sections (openings), thereby reducing power consumption.

Specifically, a second modification of the rotation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 162(b). FIG. 162(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a cross-sectional view of the rotary unit 500 in the second modified example as viewed from above, with the upper side of the paper surface facing the front side of the gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 162(b), inside the rotation unit 500 in the second modification, LED1 for lighting the diffusion plate provided in the openings 580a1 to 580a4 on the left side of the rotation unit 500, and the rotation unit LEDs 2 are provided for lighting diffusion plates provided in openings 580a5 to 580a8 on the right side of 500. FIG. The LED 1 is provided on the back side of the game machine (back side of the rotating unit 500) in the vicinity of the rotating shaft in the left area divided by the central wall portion 585g that divides the inside of the rotating unit 500 into left and right. On the other hand, the LED 2 is provided on the back side of the gaming machine near the rotation axis (back side of the rotation unit 500) in the right area divided by the central wall portion 585g inside the rotation unit 500. FIG.

In the left area inside the rotation unit 500, a partition member 585c1 made of black-colored plastic is provided to prevent direct light from propagating from the LED 1 provided near the rotation axis to the openings 580a1 to 580a4. It is erected (integrally molded) from the back side of the game machine of the rotating unit 500 (back side of the rotating unit 500). Here, of the regions partitioned by the partition member 585c1, the region near the rotation axis and where the LED 1 is provided is called a first region 585d1, and the side farther from the rotation shaft than the first region and the opening 580a1 580a4 is provided is called a second region 585e1.

A reflecting member 585a1 is provided in a region on the front side of the game machine near the rotation shaft inside the rotary unit 500 and at a position where the light from the LED 1 arranged on the back side of the game machine is incident. After the light emitted from the LED 1 passes through the first region 585d1, it is reflected by the reflecting member 585a1 and propagates to the second region 585e1. The light propagated to the second region 585e1 is reflected by the reflecting wall portion 585f1 provided on the back side of the gaming machine of the second region 585e1, and propagates to the front side of the gaming machine. If the light is propagated to any one of the openings 580a1 to 580a4, the diffuser plate arranged there is irradiated with the light, and the diffuser plate is lit.

The direction of light propagating through the second region 585e1 is determined by the angle reflected by the reflecting member 585a1. Here, the reflecting member 585a1 is provided with a driving motor 585b1 for adjusting the angle. By driving the driving motor 585b1 and varying the angle of the reflecting member 585a1, the light incident from the LED1 is The direction of reflection (propagation destination) can be varied.

The configuration in which the diffusion plates of the openings 580a5 to 580a8 are lit by the LED2 is the same as the configuration in which the diffusion plates of the openings 580a1 to 580a4 are lit by the LED1 described above, so detailed description thereof will be omitted. .

As described above, in the second modification, the light emitted from the LED 532 provided inside the rotation unit 500 is configured to be incident on the reflector, and the angle of the reflector is variably controlled, so that the illumination By changing the direction in which the emitted light propagates, it is configured to change the section (opening) to be lit. This eliminates the need to provide LEDs 532 corresponding to the respective sections (openings), thereby reducing power consumption.

Also, the LEDs, the reflecting members, and the like are arranged in the vicinity of the rotating shaft of the rotating unit 500 . As a result, the rotation starting energy required for starting the rotation of the rotation unit 500 can be reduced, so that the power consumption can be reduced and the response of the rotation operation can be improved. It is possible to enhance the performance effect of.

The light wavelengths (colors) of the LEDs 1 and 2 may be made different to make the color of the light emitted from the openings 580a1 to 580a4 different from the color of the light emitted from the openings 580a5 to 580a8. For example, let LED1 be a red LED and let LED2 be a blue LED. As a result, the colors that are displayed as afterimages when rotated can be red, blue, or a combination of red and blue (purple), thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

Next, in the third modification of the rotating unit 500, the light emitted from the LED 532 provided inside the rotating unit 500 is emitted from the light emitting portion provided on the surface of the rotating unit 500 via an optical fiber (light guide path). configured to reach Thereby, lighting control of each section of the rotating unit 500 can be performed while arranging the LED 532 in the vicinity of the rotating shaft. As a result, the rotation starting energy required to start the rotation of the rotation unit 500 can be reduced, so that the power consumption can be reduced and the response of the rotation operation can be improved, so that the rotation effect can be achieved. It is possible to enhance the performance effect of.

Specifically, with reference to FIG. 163(a), a third modification of the rotating unit 500 will be described. FIG. 163(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a cross-sectional view of the rotary unit 500 in the third modified example as viewed from above so that the upper side of the paper faces the front side of the gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 163(a), a center wall portion 590f that divides the inside of the rotation unit into left and right is provided in the center portion of the rotation unit 500, and an LED 1 is located near the rotation axis in the left region of the center wall portion 590f. 590a1 to 590a4 in which . On the other hand, inner sections 590a5 to 590a8 in which LEDs 5 to 8 are arranged are arranged in the vicinity of the rotation axis of the right region divided by the central wall portion 590f.

The internal sections 590a1-590a4 and the light emitting units 590c1-590c4 provided on the front side of the gaming machine of the rotary unit 500 are connected by optical fibers 590b1-590b4, respectively. As a result, the light emitted from the LED 2 in the inner section 590a2 propagates through the optical fiber 590b2 and reaches the light emitting portion 590c2, which emits light (see FIG. 163(a)). Similarly, the light-emitting portions 590c1, 590c3, and 590c4 emit light as the light emitted from the LEDs 1, 3, and 4 propagates through the optical fibers 590b1, 3, and 4.

Similarly, in the right side area, LEDs 5 to 8 provided in the inner sections 590a5 to 590a8 control the light emitting portions 590c5 to 590c8 to emit light. Since the details are the same as those of the left area, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Thus, in the fourth modified example, the light emitted from the LED 532 provided inside the rotation unit 500 reaches the light emitting portion provided on the surface of the rotation unit 500 via the optical fiber (light guide path). configured to Thereby, lighting control of each section of the rotating unit 500 can be performed while arranging the LED 532 in the vicinity of the rotating shaft. As a result, the rotation starting energy required to start the rotation of the rotation unit 500 can be reduced, so that the power consumption can be reduced and the response of the rotation operation can be improved, so that the rotation effect can be achieved. It is possible to enhance the performance effect of.

Next, in the fourth modification of the rotating unit 500, one LED 532 is provided in each of the left side area and the right side area in contrast to the above-described third modification, and the light emitted from the LED 532 is emitted to each optical fiber. A blocking member capable of blocking the light from entering 590b is provided. As the blocking member, a known liquid crystal optical shutter is used, and the passage of light is blocked by applying a voltage (5 V), and the passage of light is permitted by canceling the application of the voltage. Accordingly, even if one LED 532 is provided in each of the left side area and the right side area, the light emission control of each of the light emitting portions 590c1 to 590c8 can be performed individually. As a result, the number of LEDs 532 can be reduced without impairing the performance effect, so power consumption can be reduced, and problems due to heat generation can be suppressed (prevented).

In addition, by adjusting the voltage applied to the blocking member, the amount of light that passes through can be adjusted. Emission brightness can be adjusted.

Specifically, with reference to FIG. 163(b), a fourth modification of the rotating unit 500 will be described. FIG. 163(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a cross-sectional view of the rotation unit 500 in the fourth modified example as viewed from above so that the upper side of the paper faces the front side of the gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 163(b), a central wall portion 590f is provided in the central portion of the rotating unit 500 to divide the inside of the rotating unit into left and right. 1 region 590g1 is provided. On the other hand, the second area 590g2 is arranged near the rotation axis of the right side area divided by the central wall portion 590f.

The LED1 is arranged in the first region 590g1, and the LED2 is arranged in the second region. Optical fibers 590c1-c4 are connected to the first region 590g1 for propagating the light emitted from the LED 1 to the light-emitting portions 590c1-590c4.

The connecting portion where the first region 590g1 and the optical fibers 590c1 to c4 are connected can block the light emitted from the LED 1 in the first region 590g1 from entering each optical fiber. A blocking member 590e1 is provided. As described above, the blocking member 590e1 uses a well-known liquid crystal optical shutter, which blocks the passage of light by applying a voltage (5 V) and permits the passage of light by canceling the application of the voltage. be.

This blocking member 590e1 can individually control the light incident on each of the optical fibers 590c1-4.

Accordingly, even if one LED 532 is provided in each of the left side area and the right side area, the light emission control of each of the light emitting portions 590c1 to 590c8 can be performed individually. As a result, the number of LEDs 532 can be reduced without impairing the performance effect, so power consumption can be reduced, and problems due to heat generation can be suppressed (prevented).

Next, in the fifth modification of the rotating unit 500, the blocking member 590e1 is removed from the above-described fourth modification, and the LED 532 is a multicolor LED capable of emitting multicolor light. The optical fibers 590b1 to 590b8 are optical fibers capable of propagating light of specific wavelengths, and are optical fibers capable of propagating light of different wavelengths. Each of the optical fibers 590b1 to 590b8 cannot propagate light with a large amount of attenuation even if light with a wavelength other than the specific wavelength is incident thereon. Thus, by controlling the wavelength (kind of color) of the light emitted from the multicolor LED 532, the light emitting units 590c1 to 590c8 that emit light can be varied by changing the optical fiber 590b through which the emitted light is propagated. be able to. As a result, the light emitting portion 590c that emits light can be varied only by changing the wavelength (kind of color) of the emitted light. Afterimage display can be performed by light emission of the portion 590c.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 164(a), the light-emitting portion provided on the surface portion (front portion) of the rotating unit 500 is composed of a member (for example, a polarizing plate) that can transmit only light of a specific wavelength. Alternatively, by varying the color of light emitted by the LED 532 inside the rotating unit 500, only the light emitting portion 590c at a specific location may be configured to be capable of emitting light.

In this case, the lighting of the plurality of light emitting portions 590c can be controlled by setting the color of light emitted by the LED 532 to a color obtained by combining a plurality of wavelengths.

As a result, it is possible to control the lighting of an arbitrary light-emitting portion 590c by controlling the lighting of the multicolor LED 532 without using an optical fiber as in the fifth modification described above. As a result, even if the number of LEDs 532 is reduced, it is possible to perform afterimage display by light emission from the light emitting section 590c without impairing responsiveness.

Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 164(b), a prism 595d1 may be provided to refract the light emitted from the multicolor LED 532 arranged inside the rotating unit 500 to the openings (580a1 to 580a8). good. Light emitted from the multicolor LED 532 is refracted by the prism 595d1 and propagated to the openings (580a1 to 580a8). Here, the amount (angle) refracted by the prism 595d1 varies depending on the wavelength (ie, color) of the irradiated light. For example, light with a short wavelength (blue) is refracted more, and light with a longer wavelength (red) is refracted less. Therefore, by adjusting the wavelength (that is, color) of the light emitted from the multicolor LED 532, the amount (angle) of diffraction (refraction) is adjusted, and the light is emitted to an arbitrary opening (580a1 to 580a8). be able to.

Although the above-described rotating unit 500 is configured such that power for causing the LEDs 532 (LEDs 1 to 8) to emit light is supplied from the outside of the rotating unit 500, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a power supply means (battery) may be provided inside the rotating unit 500 so that power can be supplied to each LED 532 from the power supply means. This eliminates the need to connect the rotating LEDs 532 to the outside in order to supply power to the LEDs 532 of the rotating unit 500, thus eliminating the need for the signal transmission mechanism 458 in the above-described embodiment. , the wiring can be simplified. Moreover, since the signal transmission mechanism 458 can be dispensed with, maintainability can be improved, and problems due to breakage of the signal transmission mechanism 458 can be prevented.

In this case, by configuring the power supply means (battery) to be charged in a non-contact manner, each LED 532 can be driven to emit light even if the capacity of the power supply means (battery) is reduced. As a result, since the capacity of the power supply means (battery) can be reduced, the weight of the power supply means (battery) can be reduced, and the power required to rotate the rotating unit 500 can be reduced. In addition, since the energy required to shift the rotating unit 500 from the stopped state to the rotating state is reduced, the response when rotating the rotating unit 500 can be improved, and the performance using the rotating unit 500 can be improved. It is possible to enhance the performance effect.

In addition, a switching element (for example, MOSFET, etc.) for controlling whether power is supplied from the power supply means (battery) to each LED (whether or not the LED is lit), and a signal for the switching element are output. It is also possible to provide an MPU for performing the rotation within the rotation unit 500, and to transmit the control instruction to the MPU by wireless communication. This eliminates the need for a signal line for controlling lighting of each LED. In this case, the drive power may be supplied from the power supply means (battery) to the MPU and switching elements provided inside the rotation unit 500 as well.

Furthermore, in the above-described rotating unit 500, the player can perceive a specific character or pattern as an afterimage by rotating the unit 500, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, an afterimage may naturally be displayed by repeatedly (vibrating) the rotating unit 500 up and down (or left and right).

In addition, the above-described rotating unit 500 arranges the LEDs 532 (or openings (lighting portions)) symmetrically from the rotation axis (rotation center), rotates about the rotation axis, and controls the lighting of the LEDs 532. In the above, it is configured to display an afterimage, but it is not limited to this. For example, as shown in FIG. 178(a), an opening 580a whose lighting is controlled by the light emitted from the LED 532 in only one direction from the rotation axis (rotation center) may be provided. As a result, the energy required for rotating the rotation unit 500 can be reduced, so that the response of the rotation operation can be improved, and the afterimage display effect can be enhanced. Moreover, since the rotating unit 500 can be made smaller, the space can be saved.

A rotating unit 500 shown in FIG. 178(a) is obtained by dividing the rotating unit 500 in the first modified example described above into only the left half. Specifically, the wall portion 580e on the right side of the paper surface is used as the rotation axis (rotation center), and the LEDs 1 to 4 are arranged in the vicinity of the rotation axis. Light emitted from each of the LEDs 1 to 4 is reflected by reflecting members (half mirrors) 580c1 to 580c4 and transmitted to diffusion plates (not shown) provided in the openings 580a1 to 580a4. Thus, by controlling the lighting of each of the LEDs 1 to 4, the lighting of the diffuser plates of the openings 580a1 to 580a4 can be controlled.

By controlling the rotation of the rotating unit 500 about the rotation axis and controlling the lighting of each of the LEDs 1 to 4, an afterimage can be displayed. By providing the LEDs 1 to 4 near the rotation axis, the centrifugal force applied to each of the LEDs 1 to 4 can be reduced when the rotation unit 500 is rotated. It is possible to suppress (prevent) the error movement. In addition, since only the wall portion 580e is arranged on the back side of each of the LEDs 1 to 4, the heat dissipation efficiency of each of the LEDs 1 to 4 can be improved, and the solder connecting the LEDs 1 to 4 melts under the influence of heat generation. It is possible to prevent (suppress) the problem that there is a risk of contact failure due to contact failure.

It should be noted that the rotating unit 500 may be made to perform repetitive motion (pendulum motion) in a locus that draws a circular arc. As a result, for example, the space required for afterimage display can be reduced by performing repetitive motions in a locus that draws a semicircle, so that afterimage display can be performed even in a limited space, increasing variations in games. can be done.

Furthermore, it is also possible to provide a case of repetitive motion in a semicircle and a case of rotational motion. As a result, it is possible to further increase the variation of the operation of the rotating unit 500, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

Further, the shape of the rotating unit 500 when viewed from the front of the game machine is not limited to a substantially rectangular shape, and may be a substantially square shape so as not to rotate. Specifically, it will be described with reference to FIG. 178(b). FIG. 178(b) is a schematic diagram showing the rotation unit 500 when viewed from the front of the gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 178(b), when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, a total of 64 openings 580a11 to 580a88 are arranged in eight vertical rows and eight horizontal rows in the rotary unit 500. As shown in FIG. A total of eight openings, that is, openings 580a11 to 580a18, are arranged in a horizontal row at the top, and openings 580a21 to 580a28, openings 580a31 to 580a38, openings 580a41 to 580a48, openings 580a51 to 580a58, openings 580a51 to 580a58, Openings 580a61 to 580a68, openings 580a71 to 580a78, and openings 580a81 to 580a88 are arranged in order. By controlling lighting of each of these openings 580a, a predetermined display can be performed.

For example, as shown in FIG. 178(b), the uppermost openings 580a31, 580a41, 580a23, 580a26, 580a32, 580a37, 580a42, 580a47, 580a52 to 580a57, 580a62, 580a67, 580a72, 580a77, 580a82, 580a are lit. The letter "A" can be displayed by controlling to do so. Thereby, a predetermined display can be displayed without rotating the rotating unit 500 .

An LED unit 589 is provided on the left side of each step provided with the opening 580a, and LEDs 11 to 88 are arranged inside the LED unit 589 corresponding to each step. Specifically, the LEDs 11 to 18 are provided corresponding to the uppermost stage where the openings 580a11 to 580a18 are provided. Each of the LEDs 11 to 18 is provided corresponding to each of the openings 580a11 to 580a18. For example, the light emitted from the LED 11 controls lighting of the opening 580a11. Similarly, the openings 580a12 to 580a18 are configured to be lighting controlled corresponding to the LEDs 12 to 18.

As a detailed structure, the lighting of each opening 580a is controlled using the structure of the first modified example of the rotation unit 500 described above (the structure in which each light guide path is provided). It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and the structures of the second to fifth modified examples may of course be employed. In addition, a known edge-light type light guide plate may be configured in which light entering from the side surface is diffused over the entire surface so that the display section can be visually recognized. This eliminates the need to dispose an LED or the like as a light source on the back side of the gaming machine, so the rotation unit 500 can be made thinner. Further, by providing an area where the light entering from the side is reflected to the front side and an area where the light is not reflected, specific characters or patterns may be displayed only when the light is entered from the side. By providing a plurality of layers in which the light entering from the side faces is reflected to the front side, it is possible to display characters and patterns in a plurality of modes. The characters and patterns of the plurality of modes are arranged, for example, so that the size increases in order from the inner layer, and the characters and patterns are displayed as a moving image in which the characters and patterns become larger by allowing light to enter in order from the inner layer. be able to.

The position where the LED unit 589 is provided is not limited to the left side, but may be the right side, the top side or the bottom side, or both the left side and the right side. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent (suppress) unevenness in luminance between the opening 580a far from the LED unit 589 and the opening 580a close to the LED unit 589. FIG. Furthermore, in the case of arranging on both the left and right sides, it may be configured such that the displays appearing by the light emission of the left and right LEDs are different. For example, the left LED unit 589 is provided with a red LED, and the right LED unit 589 is provided with a blue LED. By displaying letters and patterns (for example, the letter "A") with the left LED, red letters and patterns can be displayed, and in the case of the right LED, blue letters and patterns are displayed. can. Furthermore, by combining the left LED and the right LED to emit light, it is possible to display purple characters and patterns.

Alternatively, the LED units 589 may be provided on the left side and the upper side so that the opening 580a is lit when the LEDs on the left side and the LED on the upper side are lit. Specifically, a polarizing plate is provided so that purple is visible through the opening 580a, red light is emitted from the left LED, and blue light is emitted from the upper LED. The purple light reaches only the opening 580a where both the left LED and the right LED are in a lighting state, and the lighting of the light can be visually recognized. As a result, one LED is provided corresponding to each row and each row, and by combining the lighting of each, it is possible to control the lighting of an arbitrary opening 580a, so that the total number of LEDs can be reduced. can reduce manufacturing costs.

Furthermore, when light is incident on each opening 580a from a plurality of positions (for example, the left side and the upper side), the LED unit 589 is arranged at one position (for example, the left side), and the light emitted from the LED unit 589 A light guide path (for example, an optical fiber) may be used to allow light to enter from a plurality of positions.

Also, a plurality of types of diffuser plates may be provided in the opening 580a. Specifically, a diffusion plate that is lit by the light emitted from the LEDs provided in the LED unit 589 and a diffusion plate (or a blocking plate) that is not lit are provided. Thus, by lighting one LED, it is possible to provide an opening 580a that is turned on and an opening 580a that is not turned on. That is, by preparing a display area in which a lighting position to be in the lighting state and a non-lighting position to be in the lighting state are predetermined, and irradiating the display area with light, predetermined characters and patterns are displayed. can be displayed.

Further, the plurality of types of diffuser plates may be configured to have different lighting modes when light is irradiated. For example, different lighting colors may be used, or different patterns may be displayed when the lighting is on. As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of the display mode displayed on the front side of the rotating unit 500, so that it is possible to enhance the presentation effect.

The opening 580a to be turned on may be turned on when light of a specific wavelength is irradiated, or may be turned on when light is irradiated from a specific angle. may Furthermore, the above-described display area (lighted position and non-lighted position) is made of a light-transmitting material (acrylic plate with a specific area subjected to reflective processing). By arranging it on the side, the visibility of the third pattern display device 81 is normally not impaired, and predetermined characters and patterns are displayed only when light is irradiated from a specific wavelength or a specific angle. can do. Thus, even if the display area (rotating unit 500) is arranged on the front side of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, the performance by the rotating unit 500 can be executed without impairing the visibility of the third pattern display device 81. . Further, an effect integrated with the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 may be executed. As a result, it is possible to further increase the variation of effects, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, it is of course possible to make the distance between the openings 580a very small (for example, 1 mm) so that the characters and patterns to be displayed can be clearly displayed. Furthermore, only one opening 580a may be provided, and characters and patterns may be displayed by controlling the lighting of only a specific area of the opening 580a. As a result, the spaces between the openings 580a that cannot be controlled for lighting can be eliminated, so that characters and patterns to be displayed can be displayed more clearly.

In each control example and each modified example described above, the drive control of the drive motor 457 of the rotation unit 500 and the lighting control of the LED 532 are performed by the sound lamp control device 113, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be controlled by the display control device 114 or the main control device 110, or a separate control device may be provided. Further, the driving control of the drive motor 456 may be performed by the audio lamp control device 113 and the lighting control of the LED 532 may be performed by the display control device 114 . Thereby, the control load can be distributed. In addition, by executing the lighting control of the LED 532 by the display control device 114, it is possible to easily synchronize with the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81, thereby enhancing the effect of the effect.

<Regarding the fourth control example>
Next, a fourth control example of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 165 to 173. FIG. The fourth control example is configured such that the continuous short reach effect used in the above-described second control example is executed by different control. The continuous short reach effect in the fourth control example will be described below. First, in the above-described second control example, as the continuous short reach effect, when the winning information is suspended based on the winning of the game ball, the fluctuation type is removed before the suspension, and the short fluctuation winning information is displayed. Based on the fact that they are held continuously, the deviation short fluctuation is changed (overwritten) to the short reach fluctuation type, and the continuous short reach performance is executed. Then, when the prize winning information that becomes a big hit based on the winning of the game ball is suspended, the short reach performance is set so as to be executed three times in succession as the continuous short reach effect, and the winning prize information that is a failure is suspended. In this case, the short reach performance is configured to be executed twice in a row as the continuous short reach performance, so that the player has expectations for the number of short reach performances (continuous number of times) in the continuous short reach performance. , was trying to improve the interest of the game.

On the other hand, in the present fourth control example, it is configured to give regularity to the ready-to-win symbols (hereinafter referred to as ready-to-reach symbols) that are stopped and displayed in each short-to-reach performance executed in the continuous short-to-reach performance. ing. As for the regularity of this reach pattern, a detailed description will be given later, but the reach pattern stopped and displayed in the continuous short reach is higher than the reach pattern stopped and displayed in the short reach executed before one variation. It is configured so that it does not become a reach pattern that is disadvantageous to the person. By configuring in this way, when the continuous short reach performance is executed, in addition to the number of times the short reach continues for the player, attention is also paid to the pattern (reach pattern) stopped and displayed at each short reach. It becomes possible to make it possible, and the interest of the game can be further improved.

In addition, in the fourth control example, the variation after the continuous short reach effect is executed, that is, the variation corresponding to the winning command for which the execution of the continuous short reach effect is determined (hereinafter referred to as the effect target change) Also, it is configured to execute a special effect related to the continuous short reach effect. A detailed description of this special effect will be given later, but it is configured so that the effect during execution indicating that the continuous short reach effect is being executed is continuously displayed even during the fluctuation of the effect object fluctuation ( See FIG. 167(b)). By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute a short reach continuous effect as a series of continuous effects including a change in the object of effect, so that it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand effect.

In addition, as described above, when configured to display the effect during execution indicating that the continuous short reach effect is being executed even for the effect target variation, a predetermined timing during the effect target variation, that is, If the reach mode is not displayed at the timing when the reach mode is displayed in the short reach (for example, after 1 second from the start of fluctuation), the player can easily grasp the end timing of the continuous short reach performance. There is a problem that the production effect cannot be enhanced.

On the other hand, in the fourth control example, as the variation pattern of the effect target variation, a special variation pattern (special reach) in which the reach state is displayed at the same timing as the short reach (for example, 1 second after the start of variation) is configured to be configurable. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the end timing of the continuous short reach effect, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

In the fourth control example, the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the sound ramp control device 113 are partially changed from the above-described second control example, and the processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 is changed. It differs from the partially changed point. Other points are the same as the second control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the second control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

First, the flow of the continuous short reach effect executed in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 165 to 167. FIG. FIG. 165 is a timing chart showing the flow of the continuous short reach effect in the fourth control example. Specifically, FIG. 165(a) is a diagram showing an example of the special symbol variation when the continuous short reach production is executed, and FIG. It is the figure which showed an example of the display content of the 3rd pattern display apparatus 81. FIG. 166 and 167 are schematic diagrams showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the continuous short reach effect is being executed. Specifically, FIG. 166(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the case where the first short reach is executed as the continuous short reach effect, and FIG. 166(b) shows 2 It is a schematic diagram which shows an example when the short reach of the time of the time is performed. Also, FIG. 167(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the case where the third short reach effect is executed as the continuous short reach effect, and FIG. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a case where the first variation (effect target variation) is being executed after the ready-to-win is finished;

Here, as shown in FIG. 165 (a), as a special symbol variation, the deviation short variation B (see FIG. 68) with a variation time of 2 seconds (hereinafter referred to as short deviation variation) is executed three times in a row, After that, the continuous short reach effect will be described by taking as an example a case where a super reach A (see FIG. 68) (hereinafter referred to as a long hit variation) with a variation time of 60 seconds is executed.

As shown in FIG. 165(b), when the first short deviation variation is executed as the special symbol variation, the current is continuous in the upper area Dm1 (see FIG. 132(a)) in the third symbol display device 81. "Continuous reach mode" is displayed as a display during execution indicating that the short reach effect is being performed, and further, "Continuous reach once" is displayed as an execution count display indicating the number of reach times executed during the continuous short reach effect. (See FIG. 166(a)). Further, in the short reach state with the fluctuation time of 2 seconds, the ready reach mode is displayed in which the third pattern is in the reach state after one second from the start of the fluctuation.

Here, with reference to FIG. 166(a), the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 will be specifically described. In FIG. 166(a), among the three pattern rows arranged in the vertical direction in the central area Dm2 of the third pattern display device 81, numbers are placed at the center positions of the upper and lower symbol rows. Symbols marked with "4" are stopped and displayed, and a so-called ready-to-win state is displayed in which the middle symbol row continues to fluctuate. Further, in the upper area Dm1, the in-execution display and the execution count display are displayed as described above. Since other elements are the same as those of the second control example described above, the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Returning to FIG. 165, the description continues. After the first short reach is completed, short reach (2nd time) and short reach (3rd time) are executed respectively so as to correspond to short out variation 2 and short out variation 3 of special symbol variation. In this case, the display of the number of times of execution displayed in the upper area Dm1 of the third symbol display device 81 is, for short reach (second time), "2 consecutive times of reach" (see FIG. 166(b)), and for short reach (third time). ), it is updated and displayed as “3 consecutive reach times” (see FIG. 167(a)). In this way, by displaying the execution display indicating that the continuous short reach performance is being executed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can easily grasp the current performance situation. Further, by displaying on the third symbol display device 81 the execution count display indicating the number of times of reach executed during the continuous short reach performance, the player can easily know the number of times of reach executed during the continuous short reach performance. can be grasped.

Then, when the special symbol variation per long is executed after the short deviation (short deviation 1 to short deviation 3) of the special symbol variation set three times in a row (see FIG. 165 (a)), the third symbol display device In the upper area Dm1 of 81, "continuous reach mode" which is the display during execution is continuously displayed, and "continuous reach 4th time" is displayed as the display of the number of times of execution. Then, in the central region Dm2, a special reach with a variation time of 60 seconds is executed (see FIG. 167(b)). This special ready-to-win is a ready-to-win effect set so that the ready-to-win state is displayed one second after the special symbol variation is started.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to display the reach mode at the same timing as when the short reach is executed (that is, 1 second after the special symbol fluctuation is started), so the final of the continuous short reach production It is possible to prevent the player from noticing the fluctuation immediately after the special symbol fluctuation is started. Specifically, when an effect corresponding to a special symbol variation for a long period of time (for example, 60 seconds) is executed, the player is notified using the period until the ready-to-win state is displayed. A foretelling effect suggesting that the degree of expectation for winning is high is executed. In addition, since the ready-to-win state is displayed after the period for executing the above-described advance notice effect has passed, an effect is executed to ensure a predetermined period of time (for example, 20 seconds) until the ready-to-win state is displayed. There is a case where such an effect is executed after the continuous short reach (short reach 1 to 3) ends, and when the reach mode is not displayed 1 second after the start of the fluctuation, the continuous short reach effect There is a problem that it is noticed that it is the final change. Therefore, even if the special symbol variation after the end of the continuous short reach (short reach 1 to 3) is a long-term special symbol variation, the same timing as when the short reach is executed (that is, the special symbol variation starts By executing the special ready-to-win state in which the ready-to-win state is displayed 1 second after the game is played, it is possible to prevent the player from noticing the final variation of the continuous short-to-reach performance.

Next, with reference to FIG. 167(b), the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 when the special reach is executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 167(b), even when the special reach is being executed, the execution progress display and the execution count display are displayed in the upper region Dm1. In the central region Dm2, symbols with the number "1" and symbols with the number "9" in the upper and lower symbol rows are stop-displayed in a ready-to-win manner. The symbol row is displayed in a variable manner. When the symbols attached with the numbers "1" and the symbols attached with the numbers "9" become a hit (when the same symbols are stopped and displayed in a row), a jackpot game is awarded. In addition to that, it is the most advantageous symbol for the player who is given a high probability state (so-called probability variable state) in which the lottery result of the special symbol is likely to be a big win after the big win game is over.

Here, the ready-to-win symbols set for each ready-to-win effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 166 and 167. FIG. In the fourth control example, in a plurality of ready-to-reach performances executed during the continuous short-reach performance, the same ready-to-reach symbols that are more disadvantageous to the player than the once stop-displayed ready-to-reach symbols are stop-displayed during the continuous short-to-reach performance. configured to prevent For example, in the short reach (first time) shown in FIG. 166 (a), a pattern with the number "4" (normal pattern that is not given a probability variation state based on the hit) is displayed, and shown in FIG. 166 (b) In the short reach (second time), the pattern with the number "1" (the variable pattern that gives a probability state based on the hit) and the pattern with the number "2" (normal pattern) are the reach mode (double Reach mode) is displayed, and in the short reach (third time) shown in FIG. In the special reach, as described above, the pattern with the number "1" (variable probability pattern) and the pattern with "9" (variable probability pattern) are displayed in the reach mode (double reach mode).

In this way, in the continuous short reach performance, the reach symbols that are more disadvantageous to the player than the once stop-displayed reach symbols are not stop-displayed during the same continuous short-reach performance. During the continuous short reach performance, the player can play the game while anticipating both the number of consecutive short reach and the stop-displayed reach pattern, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

In addition, in the fourth control example, as in the above-described second control example, when the continuous short reach effect is executed, the high probability (about 85%) is a high probability of hitting the jackpot. As a result of this continuous short reach production, the person will pay attention to which pattern (variable pattern or normal pattern) will hit rather than whether or not it will be a big hit. Therefore, the single reach mode in which only the probability variation pattern is the reach mode is set as the reach pattern that is more advantageous to the player than the double reach mode in which the normal pattern and the probability variation pattern are the reach mode, but it is not limited to this. If the degree of expectation for a big hit is not high as a result of the continuous short reach performance, the double reach pattern may be set as a reach pattern more advantageous to the player than the single reach pattern.

Furthermore, during the continuous short reach performance, it may be possible to suggest the form of the ready reach symbol to be stopped and displayed in the next short reach (normal symbol, variable probability symbol, single reach, double reach). In this case, for example, using the symbols that are finally stopped and displayed in the short reach, that is, the symbols that are stopped and displayed in the middle pattern row of the central region Dm2 of the third pattern display device 81, the suggestive notification is executed. do it. By configuring in this way, the symbol that is finally stopped and displayed within a short reach (fluctuation time of 2 seconds) is for a short period of time (for example, 0.25 seconds) that the player cannot sufficiently identify the symbol. Since only the symbols are stop-displayed, it is possible to vaguely inform the player of the ready-to-win symbols to be stop-displayed in the next short reach. As a result, it is possible to make the player expect the next short reach while suggesting the contents of the next short reach.

Also, during the continuous short reach production, the method of suggesting the form of the reach pattern that is stopped and displayed in the next short reach (normal pattern, probability variation pattern or single reach, double reach) is limited to the above However, for example, some information (for example, visual information such as color and size, character information that makes the pattern image, etc.) that forms the ready-to-win pattern that is stopped and displayed is displayed in advance, or is stopped and displayed. It is possible to display a plurality of symbols (a plurality of symbols in a range not including the number of all symbols) including the reach symbol. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to make the player expect the next short reach while suggesting the contents of the next short reach.

In addition, the ready-to-win symbols that have already been stopped and displayed may be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 as a history display during the continuous short-to-win effect. As a result, the player can easily grasp the progress of the continuous short reach effect. In addition, a plurality of orders of ready-to-win symbols that are advantageous to the player (for example, an order based on the ease of winning or an order based on the benefits given at the time of winning) are set. is set and the continuous short-reach performance is executed, the player can enjoy the continuous short-reach performance while predicting the order set this time by checking the history of the ready-to-reach symbols that have already been stopped and displayed. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the fourth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 168 and 169, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in this fourth control example will be described. The pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described second control example in that the content of the ROM 222 and the content of the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 are partially changed. , are otherwise the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

FIG. 168(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. As shown in FIG. 168(a), the ROM 222 in this control example differs from the ROM 222 in the second control example in that an effect ready-to-win pattern selection table 222da is added, and other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 168(b), details of the presentation ready-to-win pattern selection table 222da will be described. FIG. 168(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the effect ready-to-win pattern selection table 222da. As shown in FIG. 168(b), the production ready-to-reach symbol selection table 222da is a short-reach ready-to-reach symbol type that is executed in a continuous short-reach effect in accordance with the success/fail determination result and the value of the stop symbol counter 223da. is a table in which

This reach symbol selection table 222da for the effect, winning command reception process 4 (see S3010 in FIG. 170) winning continuous short reach effect setting process (see S3151 in FIG. 171), or continuous short reach effect setting process for losing ( In S3152 of FIG. 172), it is referred to when setting the reach pattern of each variation (short reach variation) (see S4514 of FIG. 171 or S4614 of FIG. 172).

Concretely, when the winning/failure determination result is odd odd hit and the value of the stop symbol counter 223da is "0 to 99", the reach symbol type "variable odd A" is selected. In this reach symbol type "variable probability A", "normal symbol, single line" is defined for the value of continuous short reach counter 223be "1", and "normal/variable probability symbol, double line" is defined for "2". ” is defined, and “variable pattern, single line” is defined for “3”. The continuous short reach counter 223be counts the number of changes in the continuous short reach effect (the number of times the reach is executed), and the counter value "1" indicates the first reach (short reach (first time)) of the continuous short reach effect. )). Henceforth, the value "2" of a counter shows the reach of the 2nd time in continuous short reach production, and the value "3" of a counter shows the reach of the 3rd time in the production of continuous short reach. Further, since the stop symbol counter 223da is a loop counter that is updated within the range of 0 to 198, the probability that the ready-to-win symbol type "probability variation A" is selected is 100/199.

When the value of the stop symbol counter 223da is "100 to 194", the ready-to-win symbol type "probability variation B" is selected. In this reach symbol type "probability variation B", the value of the continuous short reach counter 223be is defined as "normal/probability variation pattern, double line" for "1", and "normal/probability variation pattern, double line" is defined for "2". Double line” is defined, and “variable pattern, single line” is defined for “3”. The probability that this reach symbol type "probability variation B" is selected is 95/199.

When the value of the stop symbol counter 223da is "195 to 198", the ready-to-win symbol type "probability variable C" is selected. In this reach symbol type "probability variation C", "premium symbol" is defined for values of the continuous short reach counter 223be of "1" to "3". A "premium symbol" is a symbol exclusively for continuous short reach (for example, a symbol imitating a whale character) which is displayed in a display mode different from the symbol which is variably displayed by the normal special symbol variation, and which is stopped and displayed. It is a pattern that confirms that the most advantageous privilege is given to the player by being drawn. The probability that this reach symbol type “probability variation C” is selected is 4/199.

Next, when the winning/failure determination result is a normal win and the value of the stop symbol counter 223da is "0 to 99", the ready-to-win symbol type "normal A" is selected. In this reach pattern type "normal A", "normal pattern, single line" is defined for the value of the continuous short reach counter 223be "1", and "normal/probability variable pattern, double line" is defined for "2". ” is defined, and “normal / probability variation pattern, double line” is defined for “3”. The probability that this reach symbol type "normal A" is selected is 100/199.

When the value of the stop symbol counter 223da is "100 to 198", the ready-to-win symbol type "normal B" is selected. In this reach symbol type "normal B", "normal symbol, single line" is defined for values of the continuous short reach counter 223be of "1" to "3". The probability that this reach symbol type "normal B" is selected is 99/199.

Finally, when the result of the determination is "miss" and the value of the stop symbol counter 223da is "0 to 99", the ready-to-win symbol type "miss A" is selected. In this reach symbol type "off A", "normal symbol, single line" is defined for the value of the continuous short reach counter 223be "1", and "normal/probability variable symbol, double line" is defined for "2". ” is stipulated. It should be noted that, if the success/failure determination result is out, the value of the continuous short reach counter 223be is set so that the short reach is not executed three times in succession during the continuous short reach effect as in the second control example described above. No reach symbol is defined for "3". The probability that this reach symbol type "outlier A" is selected is 100/199.

When the value of the stop symbol counter 223da is "100 to 149", the ready-to-win symbol type "off B" is selected. In this reach symbol type "off B", "normal symbol, single line" is defined for the value of the continuous short reach counter 223be "1", and "variable symbol, single line" is defined for "2". stipulated. The probability that this reach symbol type "outlier B" is selected is 50/199.

When the value of the stop symbol counter 223da is "150 to 198", the ready-to-win symbol type "off C" is selected. In this reach symbol type "off C", the value of the continuous short reach counter 223be is "1" and "2", and "normal/probability variation symbol, double line" is defined. The probability that this ready-to-win symbol type "missing C" is selected is 49/199.

As described above, in the fourth control example, when it is determined that the continuous short reach effect is to be executed, the continuous short reach effect is executed with reference to the effect reach symbol selection table 222da. It is configured to set a reach pattern in advance for each short reach variation. As a result, it is possible to execute the ready-to-win pattern announcement performance for notifying the ready-to-win symbols to be stop-displayed in the next short reach, and to improve the amusement. In addition, when setting the reach pattern in advance for each short reach fluctuation, since it is configured to select the reach pattern type that defines the reach pattern for each short reach fluctuation, the reach pattern according to the regularity can be reliably displayed, and the production effect can be enhanced.

In addition, the ready-to-win pattern selection table 222da for effect described with reference to FIG. After a ready-to-win pattern corresponding to the condition (rank) of the pattern is randomly selected, it is stopped and displayed as a ready-to-win state. It is also possible to define even the "number" to be displayed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 169, the details of the RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 169 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in this control example. As shown in FIG. 169, the RAM 223 in this control example is different from the RAM 223 in the second control example in that information to be set (stored) in the winning information storage area 223a is added, and a stop symbol counter 223da is added. , and the other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The winning prize information storage area 223a has the same configuration as that of the second control example described above. Various information is configured to be set for each variation in which the ready-to-win effect is executed, and when a variation pattern command is received, the above-described various information is referred to and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display content to be displayed is determined.

Specifically, the winning command reception process 4 (see S3010 in FIG. 170) is performed for the winning continuous short reach effect setting process (see S3151 in FIG. 171), or the continuous short reach effect setting process for losing (see FIG. 172 S3251 reference), when it is determined that the continuous short reach effect is executed (S4511 of FIG. 171: Yes, or S4611 of FIG. 172: Yes), winning information corresponding to each short reach variation is stored (See S4512 in FIG. 171 or S4612 in FIG. 172), and a continuous short reach is set in each winning information storage area 223a corresponding to the variation in which the continuous short reach effect is executed. The variation type of production is set (see S4513 in FIG. 171 or S4613 in FIG. 172), and the continuous short reach is stored in the winning information storage area 223a in which the winning information corresponding to the variation in which the continuous short reach production is started is stored. Start information indicating the start of the effect is set (see S4514 in FIG. 171 or S4614 in FIG. 172).

In this way, by setting the effect information related to the continuous short reach effect in the winning information storage area 223a, it is possible to easily set the effect to be executed for a plurality of variations.

The stop pattern counter 223da is a counter used when selecting the ready-to-win pattern of each short reach to be executed in the continuous short-to-reach effect by referring to the effect ready-to-win pattern selection table 222da. The stop pattern counter 223da is composed of a 1-byte loop counter that is updated within the range of 0 to 198, and for example, the value is incremented by 2 each time the main process (see FIG. 93) is executed. Updated. By setting the value to be updated to be different from the production counter 223f described above, when the production is set by acquiring the value of the production counter 223f and the value of the stop symbol counter 223da, the production to be set is It suppresses bias.

<Control Processing Executed by Audio Ramp Control Device 113 in Fourth Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 170 to 173, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 in this fourth control example will be described. In this control example, in place of the winning command receiving process 2 (see FIG. 139), the winning command receiving process 4 (see FIG. 170) is executed in contrast to the above-described second control example. (see FIG. 173) in that variation pattern selection processing 4 (see FIG. 173) is executed instead. Winning command reception processing 4 (see FIG. 170) is different from winning command reception processing 2 (see FIG. 139) in the second control example by setting processing for winning continuous short reach effect (see FIG. 171) and continuous short reach effect for losing. The difference is that setting processing (see FIG. 172) is added, and the other parts are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 170, winning command reception processing 4 (S3010) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described. FIG. 170 is a flow chart showing the contents of winning command reception process 4 (S3010). When the winning command receiving process 4 (S3010) is executed, the processes of S3101 to S3134 are executed in the same manner as the winning command receiving process 2 (see FIG. 139) in the second control example.

When the process of S3134 is finished and it is determined that the value of the effect counter 223f is equal to or less than "19" (S3134: Yes), the winning continuous short reach effect setting process is executed (S3151). The reach effect setting process (S3151) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. After completing the process of S3151, the process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3133, similarly to the winning command reception processing 2 (see FIG. 139) of the second control example described above, it is determined that the winning information of this time is not a jackpot (S3133: No). When it is determined that the value of the effect counter 223f is equal to or less than "1" (S3139: Yes), a continuous short reach effect setting process for losing is executed (S3152). The continuous short reach effect setting process for loss (S3152) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. Then, when the process of S3152 is finished, the process ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 171, the winning continuous short reach effect setting process (S3151) executed in the winning command reception process 4 (see FIG. 170) will be described. FIG. 171 is a flow chart showing the contents of the winning continuous short reach effect setting process (S3151). This winning continuous short reach effect setting process (S3151) is a process for setting a continuous short reach effect when the received winning command is a big win.

In the winning continuous short reach effect setting process (S3151), first, it is determined whether or not all of the winning information up to three times before the current winning information are of the short fluctuation type (S4511).

In the processing of S4511, if it is determined that the winning information up to three times before the current winning information is all out and is not a short fluctuation (S4511: No), this processing is performed as it is without setting the continuous short reach effect. finish. On the other hand, in the processing of S4511, if it is determined that the winning information up to three times before this winning information is all out of the short fluctuation fluctuation type (S4511: Yes), to set the continuous short reach effect , the processing of S4512 to S4516, which will be described later, is executed.

First, in the process of S4512, "3" is set to the upper limit value of the continuous short reach counter 223be (S4512). Here, the value of the continuous short reach counter corresponding to each winning information storage area 223a targeted for the continuous short reach effect is set. Next, the variable type indicating the continuous short reach effect is set in the winning information storage area 223a corresponding to the winning information up to three times before the current winning information (S4513), and the process proceeds to S4514.

In the process of S4514, the ready-to-win pattern for each variation is determined based on the effect ready-to-win pattern selection table 222da, and set in the corresponding winning prize information storage area 223a (S4514). ” is set in the winning information storage area 223a (S4515). Next, the continuous short reach setting flag 223bf is set to ON (S4516), and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 172, the consecutive short reach effect setting process for losing (S3152) executed in the winning command reception process 4 (see FIG. 170) will be described. FIG. 172 is a flow chart showing the contents of the continuous short reach effect setting process for losing (S3152). This continuous short reach effect setting process for loss (S3152) is a process for setting a continuous short reach effect when the received winning command is a loss.

In the continuous short reach effect setting process for loss (S3152), first, it is determined whether or not all of the winning information up to two points before the current winning information are of the variation type of short variation (S4611).

In the processing of S4611, if it is determined that all the winning information up to 2 times before the current winning information is not short fluctuation (S4611: No), this processing is performed as it is without setting the continuous short reach effect. finish. On the other hand, in the process of S4611, if it is determined that the winning information up to two times before this winning information is all out of the short fluctuation fluctuation type (S4611: Yes), to set the continuous short reach effect , the processing of S4612 to S4616, which will be described later, is executed.

First, in the process of S4612, "2" is set to the upper limit value of the continuous short reach counter 223be (S4612). Here, the value of the continuous short reach counter corresponding to each winning information storage area 223a targeted for the continuous short reach effect is set. Next, the variable type indicating the continuous short reach effect is set in the winning information storage area 223a corresponding to the winning information up to two times before the current winning information (S4613), and the process proceeds to S4614.

In the process of S4614, the ready-to-win pattern for each variation is determined based on the effect ready-to-win pattern selection table 222da, and set in the corresponding winning prize information storage area 223a (S4614). ” is set in the winning information storage area 223a (S4615). Next, the continuous short reach setting flag 223bf is set to ON (S4616), and this process is terminated.

Next, variation pattern selection processing 4 (S3404) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 173 is a flowchart showing the contents of variation pattern selection processing 4 (S3404). In this variation pattern selection process 4 (S3404), in addition to the variation pattern selection process 2 (see FIG. 143) of the second control example described above, the value of the continuous short reach counter 223be becomes the upper limit value. It is configured to set the background command so that the continuous short reach effect is continuously executed until the change).

In the variation pattern selection process 4 (S3404), first, the same processes as S3501 to S3505 of the variation pattern selection process 2 (see FIG. 143) of the second control example described above are executed. Then, after finishing the processing of S3505, it is determined whether or not the continuous short reach setting flag 223bf is set to ON (S3551). In the process of S3551, if it is determined that the continuous short reach setting flag 223bf is not set to ON (S3551: No), the process for setting the continuous short reach effect (processing of S3552 to S3559) is skipped, and the The same processing as S3506 of variation pattern selection processing 2 (see FIG. 143) of 2 control examples is executed, and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S3551, when it is determined that the continuous short reach setting flag 223bf is set to ON (S3551: Yes), the start indicating the start of the continuous short reach effect is displayed in the winning information storage area 223a corresponding to this change. Information is set, that is, it is determined whether it is the start timing of continuous short reach production (S3552). The start information indicating the start of the continuous short reach effect is obtained by the processing of S4515 of the continuous short reach effect setting process for winning (see FIG. 171) or the process of S4615 of the continuous short reach effect setting process for losing (see FIG. 172). This is set (stored) in the winning information storage area 223a.

In the process of S3552, if it is determined that it is time to start the continuous short reach effect (S3552: Yes), that is, if the variation pattern for starting the continuous short reach effect is selected, the value of the continuous short reach counter 223be is added by 1 (S3553), a short reach background command for display is set (S3554).

This short reach background command for display is a running display (see FIG. 166(a)) indicating that the continuous short reach effect is being executed, and an execution count display indicating the number of reach times executed during the continuous short reach effect. (See FIG. 166(a)) is a command output to the display control device 114 in order to display it in the upper region Dm1 of the third pattern display device 81. FIG. It should be noted that the display of the number of times of execution displayed in the upper region Dm1 of the third pattern display device 81 is displayed every time a new variation is executed until the normal background command for display is output (until the continuous short reach effect is completed). is set so that the number of times is incremented by 1. This execution count display update process may be set by adding update information for the execution count display to the display variation pattern command set by the sound lamp control device 113 , or by setting a new display by the display control device 114 . It may be configured to execute a process of adding 1 to the number of times of display when a variation pattern command for display is received.

After completing the processing of S3554, the above-described processing of S3506 is executed, and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S3552, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the continuous short reach effect (S3552: No), then it is determined whether the value of the continuous short reach counter 223be is 1 or more (S3555). Here, if it is determined that the value of the continuous short reach counter 223be is not equal to or greater than 1 (S3555: No), that is, in a state in which the continuous short reach effect is set, the winning information for still starting the continuous short reach effect. is stored on hold, the process relating to the continuous short reach effect is skipped, the process moves to S3506, and after the above-described process of S3506 is executed, this process ends.

In the process of S3555, when it is determined that the value of the continuous short reach counter 223be is 1 or more (S3555: Yes), the value of the continuous short reach counter 223be is added by 1 (S3556), and the value of the continuous short reach counter 223be is It is determined whether the value is one more than the upper limit (S3557). Here, when it is determined that the value of the continuous short reach counter 223be is not one more than the upper limit value (S3557: No), the processing of S3558 and S3559 is skipped and the processing of S3506 is performed. After executing the process, the process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3557, if it is determined that the value of the continuous short reach counter 223be is 1 more than the upper limit value (S3557: Yes), the normal background command for display is set (S3558), and the continuous short reach setting is performed. The flag 223bf is set to OFF (S3559), the process proceeds to S3506, and after executing the above-described S3506 process, this process ends. Thus, by setting the short reach background command for display until the value becomes 1 more than the upper limit value of the continuous short reach counter 223be, the continuous short reach effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81. This can be displayed up to the first rotation after the end of the continuous short reach variation, that is, the variation corresponding to the winning command determined to execute the continuous short reach performance (variation of the performance object). Thereby, it is possible to execute continuous performance with the plurality of outlier fluctuations updated so that the short reach fluctuation is executed as the continuous short reach performance and the performance target fluctuation.

As described above, in the fourth control example, the patterns that become ready-to-win (hereinafter referred to as ready-to-win patterns) that are stopped and displayed in each short-to-reach that is executed in the continuous short-to-win effect are given regularity. Configure. As for the regularity of this reach pattern, a detailed description will be given later, but the reach pattern stopped and displayed in the continuous short reach is higher than the reach pattern stopped and displayed in the short reach executed before one variation. It is configured so that it does not become a reach pattern that is disadvantageous to the person. By configuring in this way, when the continuous short reach performance is executed, in addition to the number of times the short reach continues for the player, attention is also paid to the pattern (reach pattern) stopped and displayed at each short reach. It becomes possible to make it possible, and the interest of the game can be further improved.

In addition, in the fourth control example, the variation after the continuous short reach effect is executed, that is, the variation corresponding to the winning command for which the execution of the continuous short reach effect is determined (hereinafter referred to as the effect target change) Also, it is configured to execute a special effect related to the continuous short reach effect. A detailed description of this special effect will be given later, but it is configured so that the effect during execution indicating that the continuous short reach effect is being executed is continuously displayed even during the fluctuation of the effect object fluctuation ( See FIG. 167(b)). By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute a short reach continuous effect as a series of continuous effects including a change in the object of effect, so that it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand effect.

In addition, as described above, when configured to display the effect during execution indicating that the continuous short reach effect is being executed even for the effect target variation, a predetermined timing during the effect target variation, that is, If the reach mode is not displayed at the timing when the reach mode is displayed in the short reach (for example, after 1 second from the start of fluctuation), the player can easily grasp the end timing of the continuous short reach performance. There is a problem that the production effect cannot be enhanced.

On the other hand, in the fourth control example, as the variation pattern of the effect target variation, a special variation pattern (special reach) in which the reach state is displayed at the same timing as the short reach (for example, 1 second after the start of variation) is configured to be configurable. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the end timing of the continuous short reach effect, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

In the fourth control example, when it is determined that the continuous short reach production is executed, the reach pattern selection table 222da for production is referred to, and each short reach variation executed in the continuous short reach production is performed in advance. It is configured to set reach patterns. As a result, it is possible to execute the ready-to-win pattern announcement performance for notifying the ready-to-win symbols to be stop-displayed in the next short reach, and to improve the amusement. In addition, when setting the reach pattern in advance for each short reach fluctuation, since it is configured to select the reach pattern type that defines the reach pattern for each short reach fluctuation, the reach pattern according to the regularity can be reliably displayed, and the production effect can be enhanced.

In this way, in the continuous short reach performance, the reach symbols that are more disadvantageous to the player than the once stop-displayed reach symbols are not stop-displayed during the same continuous short-reach performance. During the continuous short reach performance, the player can play the game while anticipating both the number of consecutive short reach and the stop-displayed reach pattern, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

In addition, in the fourth control example, as in the above-described second control example, when the continuous short reach effect is executed, the high probability (about 85%) is a high probability of hitting the jackpot. As a result of this continuous short reach production, the person will pay attention to which pattern (variable pattern or normal pattern) will hit rather than whether or not it will be a big hit. Therefore, the single reach mode in which only the probability variation pattern is the reach mode is set as the reach pattern that is more advantageous to the player than the double reach mode in which the normal pattern and the probability variation pattern are the reach mode, but it is not limited to this. If the degree of expectation for a big hit is not high as a result of the continuous short reach performance, the double reach pattern may be set as a reach pattern more advantageous to the player than the single reach pattern.

Furthermore, during the continuous short reach performance, it may be possible to suggest the form of the ready reach symbol to be stopped and displayed in the next short reach (normal symbol, variable probability symbol, single reach, double reach). In this case, for example, using the symbols that are finally stopped and displayed in the short reach, that is, the symbols that are stopped and displayed in the middle pattern row of the central region Dm2 of the third pattern display device 81, the suggestive notification is executed. do it. By configuring in this way, the symbol that is finally stopped and displayed within a short reach (fluctuation time of 2 seconds) is for a short period of time (for example, 0.25 seconds) that the player cannot sufficiently identify the symbol. Since only the symbols are stop-displayed, it is possible to vaguely inform the player of the ready-to-win symbols to be stop-displayed in the next short reach. As a result, it is possible to make the player expect the next short reach while suggesting the contents of the next short reach.

Also, during the continuous short reach production, the method of suggesting the form of the reach pattern that is stopped and displayed in the next short reach (normal pattern, probability variation pattern or single reach, double reach) is limited to the above However, for example, some information (for example, visual information such as color and size, character information that makes the pattern image, etc.) that forms the ready-to-win pattern that is stopped and displayed is displayed in advance, or is stopped and displayed. It is possible to display a plurality of symbols (a plurality of symbols in a range not including the number of all symbols) including the reach symbol. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to make the player expect the next short reach while suggesting the contents of the next short reach.

In addition, the ready-to-win symbols that have already been stopped and displayed may be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 as a history display during the continuous short-to-win effect. As a result, the player can easily grasp the progress of the continuous short reach effect. In addition, a plurality of orders of ready-to-win symbols that are advantageous to the player (for example, an order based on the ease of winning or an order based on the benefits given at the time of winning) are set. is set and the continuous short-reach performance is executed, the player can enjoy the continuous short-reach performance while predicting the order set this time by checking the history of the ready-to-reach symbols that have already been stopped and displayed. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As described above, in the fourth control example described above, the ready-to-win pattern that is stopped and displayed in the short-to-reach state is used to execute an effect to suggest the result of the continuous short-to-win effect to the player. Symbols other than the ready-to-reach symbols stop-displayed in the short reach may be used to suggest the result of the continuous short-reach production to the player. You may make it suggest the result of production. Even in this case, when it is determined that the continuous short reach effect is to be executed, by setting in advance the symbol to be stopped and displayed at the end with the short reach fluctuation, the same effect as this control example can be obtained. be able to.

In addition, when the arrangement of the symbols stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 becomes a predetermined arrangement (for example, an arrangement shifted by one frame from the ready-to-win mode (so-called chance eye)), the player's expectation of a big win. In the pachinko machine 10 having a configuration for informing, a plurality of chances for which different jackpot expectations are set (for example, a chance for single reach and a chance for double reach, and a chance for double reach) A chance game in which the symbol is stopped and displayed in a Y-shape) may be set, and the chance game mode may be used instead of the ready-to-win mode of the fourth control example, or the ready-to-win mode and the chance game mode may be combined. The degree of expectation that is advantageous to the player may be set stepwise, and the continuous short reach performance may be executed.

In the fourth control example, in the continuous short reach production, if the result of the continuous short reach production is hit, the number of times of the short reach that is continuously executed is 3 times, and if the result of the continuous short reach production is lost. Although the number of times of short reach to be continuously executed is set to be two times, the number of times of short reach to be executed in continuous short reach performance may be determined by lottery. In this case, it is preferable to set the number of times of the short reach to be executed when the result of the continuous short reach effect is a hit, more than when the result is a loss. As a result, even when the number of times of short reach is set by lottery, it is possible to perform an effect in which the higher the number of consecutive times, the higher the expectation of winning.

In the present fourth control example, the continuous short reach effect is set such that the fluctuation time of 2 seconds is continuously set for a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times) as the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol fluctuation. However, the condition is not limited to this, and the condition may be satisfied even when an outlier fluctuation with a long fluctuation time is set. In this case, it is possible to execute an effect similar to that of the present control example by configuring the effect similar to the short reach to be executed a plurality of times in one variation pattern.

Specifically, in the winning command receiving process, when it is determined to execute the continuous short reach effect, the winning command receiving process is completed before (one before) the winning command that is the target of the determination, and the winning command is won. The fluctuation time information of the winning information stored in the information storage area 223a is extracted. Then, a pseudo short reach effect pattern is set in which the short reach effect is executed a plurality of times within the variable time (for example, 15 seconds) set in the variable time information. In this case, for example, as a variation pattern with a variation time of 15 seconds, a variation pattern in which the first pseudo-out variation (9 seconds) and pseudo short reach variation (2 seconds) are executed three times, and the second pseudo-out variation (11 seconds ) and pseudo short reach fluctuation (2 seconds) are executed twice, and a fluctuation pattern in which the third pseudo deviation fluctuation (13 seconds) and pseudo short reach fluctuation (2 seconds) are executed once are prepared in advance. Then, in the winning command reception process, when it is determined to execute the continuous short reach effect, a variation pattern corresponding to the set number of times of short reach is set. By configuring in this way, even in a state in which a large amount of winning information (reserved balls) is not accumulated, it is possible to suitably execute the continuous short reach effect, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In this fourth control example, using the fluctuation time of the special symbol, it is configured to execute a continuous short reach effect, but other periods (waiting period, period during the game, etc.) are used ( In combination), it may be configured to execute a continuous short reach production. For example, an effect similar to the short reach may be configured to be executable using the jackpot ending period. As a result, it is possible to execute the continuous short reach effect even for the fluctuation of the first rotation after the end of the big win.

In this case, when a plurality of pieces of winning information about winning a jackpot are set in the winning information set (stored) in the winning information storage area 223a, after the ending period of the jackpot game to be executed first and after the jackpot game ends, A continuous short reach performance is executed using the special symbol variation set by the special symbol variation corresponding to the next big hit.

Specifically, when the winning information set (stored) in the winning information storage area 223a is set to the winning information of winning the second jackpot, the winning information of winning the first jackpot is set. Interval (the number of times of special symbol variation executed between winning information corresponding to two big hits) is calculated, and based on the calculation result and the number of short reach times executed in continuous short reach production, the big hit A performance mode of a short reach performance executed during the ending period of a game is set. Then, the short reach performance of the performance mode set in the ending period of the jackpot game is executed. By configuring in this way, using the ending period of the jackpot game and the special symbol fluctuation period executed after the jackpot game is over (straddling the jackpot game period and the special symbol fluctuation period) A series of continuous effects (continuous short Reach production) can be executed. Therefore, immediately after the end of the big win game (for example, after the end of the big win game, the special pattern variation in the second rotation), even if the next big win is won, the continuous performance (continuous short reach performance) is preferably executed. can be done.

In the case of using the above-described configuration, after the jackpot game is over, if the next jackpot is won in the first special symbol variation, the short reach effect executed during the ending period of the previous jackpot game is special. It is preferable to use a specification (for example, to make a premium pattern appear) to give the player a special feeling. Thus, in addition to the joy of winning consecutive big wins, the player can be given the joy of executing a special performance.

In addition, in the above-described example, the example using the ending period of the jackpot game and the special symbol variation executed after the jackpot game ends, but other than that, for example, the special symbol variation that becomes the jackpot and the jackpot You may comprise so that a continuous short reach production|presentation may be performed using the opening period of a game. In this case, since there is no need to execute a continuous short reach effect using a plurality of winning information set (stored) in the winning information storage area 223a, for example, the variation pattern of the special symbol variation that wins the jackpot A continuous short reach effect may be set when setting the .

Specifically, when it is determined that the continuous short reach effect is executed in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 105) for the special symbol variation that has been won in the big hit, the special symbol variation time and the opening period of the jackpot game to be executed thereafter To set a variation pattern in which continuous short reach production is executed using and. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 executes a continuous short reach effect across the timing when the special symbol indicating the win is stopped and displayed (the timing when the big win game is started). Then, the type of the jackpot game being executed this time is notified according to the result of the continuous short reach performance that ends during the opening period. By configuring in this way, there is no need to execute the process of changing the variation pattern for the plurality of winning information set in the winning information storage area 223a (so-called the process of setting the continuous effect based on the look-ahead process). A continuous performance can be executed.

Further, the continuous short reach performance described above is executed during the interval period of the jackpot game, and the performance that makes one think that the jackpot has been won multiple times is executed using one jackpot game. good. Specifically, as the types of jackpot games, a jackpot game that is advantageous to the player (for example, a 16-round jackpot) and a jackpot that is more disadvantageous to the player (for example, an 8-round jackpot) are set. During an interval period set between the eighth round and the ninth round, a continuous short reach performance is executed. Then, when the result of the continuous short reach performance is a predetermined result (the winning patterns are aligned), the performance during the big winning game is executed from the 9th round to make it look like a new big winning game is executed. As a result, the player can be made to think that he or she has won a plurality of jackpot games, and the amusement of the game can be improved. In the above example, as the types of jackpot games, a gaming machine is used in which a jackpot game that is advantageous to the player (for example, a 16-round jackpot) and a jackpot that is more disadvantageous to the player (for example, an 8-round jackpot) are set. However, in addition to the above-mentioned jackpot game, in the case of a specific determination result set in part when it is determined that the result of the lottery of special symbols is lost, the game ball in the jackpot game In a gaming machine having a privilege game (for example, a small win) in which a variable winning means that is opened so that a ball can be entered is opened for a predetermined period (for example, 1.6 seconds), the performance mode of the big win game is the first half performance mode and the second half. The first half performance mode is set in the same way as the performance mode of the small win game, and the period (interval period) after the first half performance mode is completed is used to execute the continuous short reach performance, and the continuous short reach performance is performed. It may be configured such that the second half effect mode is executed when the result is a predetermined result. As a result, it is difficult to determine whether the small winning game is being executed or the first half performance mode of the big winning game is being executed for the player, and it is executed after the continuous short reach performance which is executed after the first half performance mode. It is possible to make the player think that the latter half performance mode is the start of a new jackpot game.

Furthermore, the above-mentioned various periods (that is, the period spanning a plurality of special symbol fluctuations, the period spanning the end period of the jackpot (small hit) game and the special symbol fluctuation executed after the jackpot (small hit) game ends), the jackpot Continuously executed in the period between the special symbol variation that won the (small win) and the jackpot (small win) game start period in which the big win (small win) game is executed, the period during the big win (small win) game) It is preferable to configure so that a plurality of short reach effects can be executed. As a result, the performance data of performances executed in various periods can be shared, the volume of the performance data can be reduced, and the performances can be executed without making the players feel uncomfortable. can be done.

The present invention may be applied to a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, once the jackpot hits, the expected value of the jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 times, 3 times) including the pachinko machine (commonly known as 2 times rights product, 3 times rights product) may be implemented as Further, after the big winning pattern is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as arepachi, mammoth, slot machines, and so-called game machines combining a pachinko machine and a slot machine may be implemented.

In the slot machine, for example, the pattern is changed by operating the control lever in a state where the pattern effective line is determined by inserting a coin, and the pattern is stopped and fixed by operating the stop button. It is. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "provided with a display device that confirms and displays identification information after variably displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed, and the stop is displayed. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value under the condition that the combination of time identification information is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a game machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device for displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then confirming and displaying the symbols, and is equipped with a ball launching handle. There are things that are not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the pattern starts to change due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the determined symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols, and the player is given a special game. A lot of balls are paid out to the tray at the bottom. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

In the following, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Using the Center Cover 620 as an Example>
A game board having an opening in the center, a liquid crystal display device disposed so as to be visible through the opening of the game board, and the liquid crystal display device emitting light and receiving light reflected by the light object and a sensor device for detecting the presence of the object on the front side of the liquid crystal display device, the sensor device is arranged on the front side of the liquid crystal display device, at least the front side is formed as a convex curved surface, and is made of a light transmissive material A game machine A1 characterized by comprising a front member consisting of.

Here, a game board having an opening in the center, a liquid crystal display device arranged to be visible through the opening of the game board, and an object (for example, a player's hand) that emits light and emits light 2. Description of the Related Art A game machine is known that includes a sensor device (motion sensor) that detects the presence of an object on the front side of a liquid crystal display device by receiving reflected light (eg, JP-A-2014-208139). In this case, if the sensor device is visibly exposed to the player, the player loses interest. Therefore, the sensor device is arranged on the back side of the decorative member and is difficult to be visually recognized by the player. The sensor device detects the existence of an object by emitting light and receiving the light reflected by the object through the open portion on the side of the decorative member. The further apart (backward) the sensor device is arranged from the decorative member, the less likely it is to be visually recognized by the player, but the narrower the range in which the object can be detected becomes, and the sensor device is placed in the open portion on the side of the decorative member. The closer the object is arranged, the wider the detectable range of the object becomes, but the more likely it is to be visually recognized by the player. That is, there is a problem that it is difficult to secure a range in which an object can be detected while making the sensor device less visible to the player.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, since it is disposed on the front side of the liquid crystal display device and has at least the front surface formed as a convex curved surface and is provided with a front member made of a light transmissive material, light is emitted from the sensor device. The reflected light can be reflected by the front member to reach the object, and the light reflected by the object can be reflected by the front member to reach the sensor device. Therefore, the sensor device can be arranged away from the open portion on the side of the decorative member (retracted to the back side), so that the sensor device is difficult for the player to visually recognize and the object can be detected. A detectable range can be secured. In addition, since the front member is made of a light-transmitting material, it is possible to ensure the visibility of the pattern displayed on the liquid crystal display device.

In addition, since the front surface is a convex curved surface, when the light emitted from the sensor device is reflected by the front surface of the front member, the angle of reflection (reflection angle) is made more acute at a position closer to the sensor device. On the other hand, at a position far from the sensor device, the angle of reflection (each reflection) can be made more obtuse, so that the detectable range of the object can be easily expanded accordingly. The same applies to the case where the light reflected by the object is reflected in front of the front member.

In the gaming machine A1, the gaming machine A2 is characterized in that the thickness dimension of at least the portion formed as the curved surface of the front member is set to a substantially constant value.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1, the thickness dimension of at least the portion formed as the curved surface of the front member is set to a substantially constant value, so that the front member acts as a convex lens. can be suppressed, and the visibility of the pattern displayed on the liquid crystal display device can be ensured. In addition, since a space can be formed on the back side of the front member, a space for displacing other members (displaceable members formed to be displaceable) can be secured accordingly.

In the gaming machine A2, a displacement member is provided so as to be displaceable between the liquid crystal display device and the front member, and the front member has a first portion of the peripheral edge of the front member that is closer to the front than the second portion. A gaming machine A3 characterized in that it is arranged at a position where

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effects of the game machine A2, the front member is arranged at a position where the first portion of the peripheral edge of the front member is closer to the front than the second portion, so that the game can be played. The first portion can be used as a passage for the displacement member to be displaced between the back side of the board and the back side of the front member. On the other hand, since the second portion of the peripheral edge of the front member is positioned closer to the back side than the first portion, the curvature of the front member can be increased accordingly in a limited space.

The first part of the front member is disposed at a position substantially the same as the rear surface of the game board or at a position closer to the front than the rear surface of the game board, and the second part of the front member is positioned closer to the rear surface of the game board. A gaming machine A4 characterized in that it is arranged at a position on the back side.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effects of the game machine A3, the first portion of the front member is disposed at a position substantially the same as the back surface of the game board or at a position closer to the front side than the back surface of the game board. Interference of the displacement member with the first portion can be suppressed more reliably, and the size of the displacement member can be increased accordingly. In addition, since the second portion of the front member is disposed at a position closer to the back than the back of the game board, the curvature of the front member can be increased, and the front of the front member can be illuminated accordingly. It can be easily used as a reflective surface. That is, it is possible to secure a range in which an object can be detected while making it difficult for the player to visually recognize the sensor device.

In the game machine A3 or A4, a center frame is provided at the inner edge of the opening of the game board, and the displacement member is formed to be displaceable between the back side of the game board and the back side of the front member. and a rotating member rotatably disposed on the body member, wherein the second portion of the front member is connected to the center frame.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effects of the game machine A3 or A4, the second portion is connected to the center frame, so that the displacement member (main body member) is displaced to the rear side of the front member and the rotating member is rotated. The second portion (front member) can block the wind generated by As a result, it is possible to suppress the flow of the ball from being affected by the action of the wind. In addition, even if a wind is generated by the rotation of the rotating member and dust is blown away by the wind, the second portion (the front member) can block the blown dust and dust.・It is possible to suppress the deterioration of detection accuracy due to flying up on the light path of light reception.

In the gaming machine A5, the center frame has a stage on which a ball can roll, and the second part of the front member is connected to a range including at least the stage of the center frame. Gaming machine A6.

Here, it is conventionally known that the stage of the center frame is provided with a rear wall so that the ball rolling on the stage does not fall to the rear side. However, in such a conventional product, the wind generated by the rotation of the rotating member winds around the rear wall standing from the stage toward the front side, or is folded back by the glass plate on the front side of the game board. to affect the ball rolling on the stage. On the other hand, in order to eliminate the influence of the wind on the sphere rolling on the stage, if the rear wall is curved to the front side to cover the periphery of the sphere on the stage (i.e., form a closed passage). Since it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the ball rolling on the stage, the interest in the game is lost.

On the other hand, according to the game machine A6, in addition to the effects of the game machine A5, the second part of the front member is connected to the range including at least the stage of the center frame, so that the rotary member is rotated. The wind generated by this can be blocked by the second portion (front member). As a result, since it is not necessary to cover the periphery of the stage, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the ball rolling on the stage, and to suppress the effect of the wind on the downflow of the ball.

In the game machine A5 or A6, the game machine A7 is characterized in that the first portion of the front member is arranged at a predetermined distance from the inner edge or center frame of the opening of the game board.

According to the game machine A7, in either the game machine A5 or A6, the first portion of the front member is arranged with a predetermined gap between the inner edge of the opening of the game board or the center frame. , the back side and the front side of the game board and the front member can be communicated with each other through such a predetermined space. As a result, the heat generated from the displacement member (main body member or rotating member) can be suppressed from remaining on the back side of the game board and the front member.

A gaming machine A8 in the gaming machine A7, wherein the first portion of the front member is formed in a vertically upper region of the periphery of the front member.

According to the game machine A8, in addition to the effects of the game machine A7, the first portion of the front member is formed in the vertically upper region of the peripheral edge of the front member, so that the rotating member can be rotated. The wind generated in can be directed toward the upper area of the game area (area above the opening of the game board), and the flow of the ball can be suppressed from being affected by the action of the wind. That is, the ball flowing down the upper area of the game area is the initial ball that has been launched from the launcher and flowed into the game area. Compared to a moving ball, it is less affected by the wind. In other words, it is possible to direct the wind toward a region where the ball is less affected by the wind. Therefore, the rotational speed of the rotating member can be increased by that amount, and the performance effect can be improved.

Here, when heat is generated from the displacement member (main body member or rotating member), the air warmed by the heat rises. A gap (predetermined gap) that is formed in the area, that is, allows the back side and the front side of the game board and the front member to communicate can be formed higher up. As a result, the heat generated from the displacement member (main body member or rotating member) is made easier to flow to the front side of the game board and the front member through the gap, thereby preventing heat buildup on the back side of the game board and the front member. can be suppressed.

A game machine A9 in any one of the game machines A1 to A8, wherein the front surface of the front member is formed as a curved surface whose normal direction is directed downward at least from the horizontal direction.

Here, since the front member is arranged on the front side of the liquid crystal display device, it almost faces the player's face (faces the face directly). Therefore, when the front surface of the front member is formed as a convex curved surface, light from the fluorescent lamps installed on the ceiling of the store or from other gaming machines is reflected toward the player, and the player feels dazzled. There is a risk that the visibility of the liquid crystal display device will be degraded (the liquid crystal display device will become difficult to see due to the reflection of light from fluorescent lamps and other game machines on the front member).

On the other hand, according to the game machine A9, in addition to the effects of the game machines A1 to A8, the front surface of the front member is formed as a curved surface whose normal direction is directed downward at least from the horizontal direction. Light incident on the front surface of the front member can be reflected downward. That is, when light from a fluorescent lamp installed on the ceiling of the store or another game machine is incident on the front of the front member, it is possible to suppress the light from being reflected toward the player, and as a result, It is possible to prevent the player from feeling dazzled and the deterioration of the visibility of the liquid crystal display device.

In the gaming machine A9, the first portion of the front member is formed in a vertically upper region of the peripheral edge of the front member, and the front member has a thickness dimension of at least a portion formed as the curved surface. A gaming machine A10 characterized in that it is set to a constant value and that the horizontal component increases toward the front located vertically upward.

According to the game machine A10, in addition to the effects of the game machine A9, the first portion of the front member is formed in the vertically upper region of the peripheral edge of the front member, and the front member is formed at least as a curved surface. The thickness dimension of the portion where the can be raised along the back surface of the front member, and the raised air (heat) is transferred to the first part of the front member (the game board and the gap (predetermined )) to the front side of the game board and the front member. As a result, it is possible to prevent heat from being accumulated on the back side of the game board and the front member.

<Regarding the concept of the invention with the sorting device 700 as an example>
In a gaming machine comprising a passage member forming a passage through which a ball can pass, and a bent portion being formed in a part of said passage member, said passage member having an opening formed in a side wall of said bent portion. A gaming machine B1 characterized by:

Here, there is known a gaming machine provided with a passage member that forms a passage through which a ball can pass (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2015-97764). In this case, a bent portion is also formed in a part of the passage member. By forming the bent portion, it is possible to change the throwing direction of the ball (the position at which the ball flows out from the path to the game area), so that the degree of freedom in layout can be increased. However, when a bent portion is formed in a part of the passage member as in the above-described conventional game machine, the flow of the balls in the bent portion tends to be stagnant. Therefore, when multiple balls pass through a curved part in a row, the trailing ball catches up with the leading ball, and the trailing ball pushes the leading ball against the side wall, preventing both of them from rolling. , there is a problem that ball clogging may occur.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B1, since the passage member has an opening formed in the side wall of the bent portion, when a plurality of balls are connected and pass through the bent portion, the preceding ball is followed by the passage member. Even if the moving ball catches up, the leading ball can hardly be pressed against the side wall, and the rolling of both can be easily continued. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging.

The bent portion is formed by a first portion of the passage member and a second portion connected to the downstream side of the first portion and having a direction in which the ball passes in a direction different from that of the first portion. range. In this case, each of the first portion and the second portion may be a passage extending linearly, or may be a passage extending curvedly. It may be a passage having a shape in which are combined.

In the game machine B1, the bent portion of the passage member includes a vertical passage that extends in a substantially vertical direction and an extension passage that extends downward from the vertical passage, and the opening extends in the vertical direction. A game machine B2 characterized in that it is formed in an area where a passage and the extension passage intersect.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effects of the game machine B1, the bent portion of the passage member includes a vertical passage that extends in a substantially vertical direction and an extension passage that extends downward from the vertical passage. , and since the opening is formed in the region where the vertical passage and the extended passage intersect, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging.

That is, the area where the vertical passage and the extended passage intersect is the position where the ball that has flowed down (dropped) down the vertical passage changes direction and starts rolling in the extending direction of the extended passage. It is easy for the ball following the ball to catch up. Therefore, when the preceding ball is pressed against the side wall by the following ball, both cannot roll, and ball clogging is likely to occur. On the other hand, according to the game machine B2, since the opening is formed in the area where the vertical path and the extended path intersect, even if the trailing ball catches up with the leading ball, the leading ball is pushed to the side wall. It is possible to make it difficult to press and make it easier to continue the rolling of both. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging.

In the game machine B2, the opening is an area where the vertical path and the extended path intersect, and is formed in the left and right side walls when the ball rolls along the extension direction of the extended path. A gaming machine B3 characterized by:

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effects of the game machine B2, the opening is an area where the vertical path and the extended path intersect, and when the ball rolls along the extension direction of the extended path Therefore, even when the trailing ball catches up with the leading ball, it is difficult to press the trailing ball against the left and right side walls, and the rolling of both can be easily continued. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging.

In the game machine B3, the area where the vertical path and the extended path intersect, the bottom wall serving as a rolling surface and the back side when the ball rolls along the extending direction of the extended path A game machine B4 is characterized in that a side wall of the game machine B4 is formed with an inclined surface inclined downward at an angle larger than the downward inclination of the extension passage.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effects of the game machine B3, in the area where the vertical path and the extended path intersect, along the extension direction of the bottom wall and the extension path that will be the rolling surface When the ball rolls, the side wall on the back side forms an inclined surface that is inclined downward at an angle larger than the downward inclination of the extended passage, so the ball flowing down (falling) down the vertical passage changes direction. When the ball starts rolling in the extending direction of the extending passage, the ball can be quickly rolled by utilizing the downward inclination of the inclined surface. As a result, the leading ball can be easily rolled before the trailing ball catches up, and the trailing ball causes the trailing ball to roll on the back side (along the extending direction of the extending passage). Since it is possible to suppress being pressed against the side wall on the back side when rolling, it is possible to make it easier to continue the rolling of both. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging.

The slope of the inclined surface may be a straight slope, a curved slope, or a combination of these slopes. In addition, the downward inclination angle of the inclined surface need not be greater than the downward inclination angle of the extended passage over the entire inclined surface. The point is that it is sufficient if the angle is larger than the angle of the descending inclination of the passage.

In any one of the game machines B2 to B4, a game board having a game area formed on the front side is provided, and at least an area of the bent portion of the passage member where the vertical passage and the extended passage intersect is the game board. A gaming machine B5 characterized by being arranged on the front side of a board.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B2 to B4, at least the area where the vertical path and the extended path intersect (that is, the portion where the opening is formed) of the bent portion of the path member ) is arranged on the front side of the game board, so if a clogged ball occurs at the bent part of the passage member, the glass plate can be opened to remove the clogged ball from the bent part on the front side of the game board. can be accessed through an opening to the Therefore, it is possible to improve the workability of the work for removing ball clogging.

In any one of game machines B2 to B5, the opening is a side wall in an area where the vertical path and the extended path intersect, and is positioned at a height corresponding to the radius of a ball from a bottom wall serving as a rolling surface. A game machine B6 characterized by being formed in a range including.

According to the game machine B6, in any of the game machines B2 to B5, the opening is the side wall in the area where the vertical path and the extended path intersect, and corresponds to the radius of the ball from the bottom wall that serves as the rolling surface. Since the ball is formed in a range including the height position where the vertical passage reaches the bottom wall of the extended passage, the ball can be easily received in the opening. Therefore, even when the trailing ball catches up with the leading ball, the leading ball is less likely to be pressed against the side wall, and the rolling of both can be easily continued. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging.

In any one of game machines B2 to B6, a game board having a game area formed on the front side is provided, and at least an area of the bent portion of the passage member where the vertical passage and the extended passage intersect is the game board. A game machine B7 is arranged on the front side of a board, and the opening is formed to have a size through which a ball can pass.

According to the game machine B7, in any one of the game machines B2 to B6, at least a region (that is, a portion where the opening is formed) where at least the vertical passage and the extension passage intersect among the bent portions of the passage member is used for the game. Since it is arranged on the front side of the board and the opening is formed in a size that allows the balls to pass through, it is possible to easily suppress the occurrence of ball clogging.

That is, if the size of the opening is such that the ball cannot pass through, the opening can be used to make it difficult for the preceding ball to be pressed against the side wall. Forms may be formed that push the preceding ball into the center of the opening, causing the preceding ball to be nested (snapped) into the opening. In this case, the rolling motion of the trailing ball is hindered by the ball that is stuck in the opening, resulting in ball clogging.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B7, even if the following ball pushes the preceding ball toward the center of the opening, the preceding ball is pushed from the opening to the outside of the passage member (the front side of the game board). game area), and it is possible to avoid that the preceding ball is fitted (fitted) into the opening. As a result, the rolling of the trailing ball can be continued, and the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

In addition, the opening is formed in such a size that the ball can pass through, and the opening is arranged on the front side of the game board (that is, the game area), so that the ball flowing down the game area can be prevented. It can flow into the passage member through the opening. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. For example, when a sensor for detecting winning balls is provided downstream of the bend, in addition to the balls that have flowed into the passage member from the upstream of the bend, the balls that have flowed into the passage member from the opening are also used as winning holes. can be detected. Especially in this case, since the opening (the area where the vertical passage and the extension passage intersect) is arranged on the front side of the game board, the player can visually recognize the ball flowing into the passage member from the opening. be able to.

In the game machine 7, the game machine B8 is characterized in that the lower end of the inner edge of the opening is set at a position separated from the bottom wall of the extension passage by a predetermined distance.

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B7, the lower end of the inner edge of the opening is set at a position separated from the bottom wall of the extended passage by a predetermined distance, so that the lower end of the inner edge of the opening and the extended passage A side wall can be left (formed) between the bottom wall of the Therefore, even if the opening is formed in a size that allows the ball to pass through, it is possible to prevent the ball from unnecessarily flowing out of the passage member to the outside (game area) through the opening.

In game machines B1 to B8, the passage member is formed so as to slope downward toward the bent portion, is connected to the upstream side of the bent portion, and extends substantially linearly along the width direction of the game area. A pair of passage members are arranged in such a manner that the upstream side of the inclined passage is positioned at the center of the game area in the width direction and the bent portion is positioned outside the game area in the width direction. A game machine B9 characterized in that a prize winning device is positioned between the bent portions of the passage member.

According to the game machine B9, the passage member is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the bent portion, is connected to the upstream side of the bent portion, and is an inclined passage extending substantially linearly along the width direction of the game area. A pair of passage members are arranged in a posture in which the upstream side of the inclined passage is positioned at the center in the width direction of the game area and the bent portion is positioned outside the width direction of the game area, and the bent portion in the pair of passage members A winning device is positioned between.

In this case, if the angle of the downward inclination of the inclined passage is made small (the downward inclination is gentle), the falling speed of the balls will be low, and ball clogging will easily occur at the bent portion. On the other hand, if the angle of the downward inclination of the inclined passage is made large (the downward inclination is steep), the falling speed of the balls can be increased, and ball clogging at the bent portion can be made difficult to occur. This increases the required space in the height direction, making it difficult to install the winning device.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B9, by forming an opening in the side wall of the bent portion, it is possible to make it difficult for balls to clog in the bent portion. The downward slope can be gradual). As a result, the space in the height direction required for arranging the inclined passage can be reduced, and it is possible to arrange the winning device. That is, the arrangement of the passage member and the winning device described in the game machine B9 is an arrangement that is impossible in the conventional product, and is made possible only by forming an opening in the side wall of the bent portion as described above. .

In the game machine B9, a game board having a game area formed on the front side is provided, and at least an area of the bent portion of the passage member where the vertical path and the extended path intersect is located on the front side of the game board. A gap through which at least a ball can pass is formed between a portion of the bent portion of the passage member disposed on the front side of the game board and the lower edge portion of the game area. A gaming machine B10 characterized by:

Here, an opening is formed in the center of the game board, and the liquid crystal display device is visually recognized by the player through the opening. In recent years, with the demand for larger liquid crystal display devices, the opening at the center of the game board has also become larger, so that the space between the lower edge of the opening at the center of the game board and the lower edge of the game area has become narrower. Therefore, in the conventional product, it is difficult to dispose the passage member and the member corresponding to the winning device described in the game machine 9 in the space between the lower edge of the opening in the center of the game board and the lower edge of the game area. there were. That is, as described above, when the downward inclination angle of the inclined passage is made small (the downward inclination is gentle), the falling velocity of the balls becomes low, and ball clogging easily occurs at the bent portion. On the other hand, if the angle of the downward inclination of the inclined passage is made large (the downward inclination is steep), the falling speed of the balls can be increased, and ball clogging at the bent portion can be made difficult to occur. This increases the required space in the height direction, making it difficult to install the winning device. In addition, since the arrangement position of the bent portion in the vertical direction is lowered (lowered), it becomes difficult to secure a gap through which the ball can pass between the bent portion and the lower edge of the game area. Out ports must be provided on both sides.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B9, the formation of the opening in the side wall of the bent portion makes it difficult for balls to be clogged in the bent portion. The angle of the descending inclination of the passage can be made small (gentle descending inclination). As a result, the arrangement position in the vertical direction of the bent portion can be raised (raised), so that a gap through which the ball can pass can be secured between the bent portion and the lower edge of the game area. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the need to provide outlets on both sides of the bent portion. In other words, the arrangement of the passage member and the winning device described in the game machine B9 is further combined with the arrangement described in the game machine B10 (the arrangement in which a gap through which a ball can pass is formed between the bent portion and the lower edge of the game area). is an arrangement that is not possible with conventional products, and is made possible only by forming an opening in the side wall of the bent portion as described above.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Using the Rotation Unit 500 as an Example>
In a gaming machine comprising a rotary display device having a plurality of light emitting means and blinking the light emitting means according to a rotational position to display an afterimage by an afterimage effect, the rotary display device comprises the plurality of light emitting means. are arranged in rows, a body member that houses the substrate, and a base member that rotatably supports the body member; A gaming machine C1 characterized by comprising a plurality of through holes penetrating through a side wall facing in the direction of rotation.

Here, there is known a game machine equipped with a rotating display device that has a plurality of light emitting means (LEDs) and performs afterimage display by an afterimage effect by blinking the light emitting means according to the rotational position (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open Nos. 2015-100385 and 2015-053968).

In this case, in the technique disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-100385, since the light emitting means is exposed, the appearance is spoiled. On the other hand, in the technique disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-053968, the light emitted from the light emitting means is visually recognized through a translucent member (push button). Thus, the luminous means are not exposed. However, in this case, even if the member (reel) on which the light-emitting means is arranged is rotated, the rotation is not visually recognized, so there is no point in performing afterimage display by the afterimage effect. That is, a similar display can be performed by arranging a plurality of light emitting means in a matrix and controlling the blinking of each light emitting means.

Therefore, the applicant of the present application has devised a rotating display device in which a substrate on which a plurality of light emitting means are arranged is accommodated in a main body member, and the main body member is rotatably pivotally supported by a base member. publicly known). According to this, since the light-emitting means is housed in the main body member, the light-emitting means is difficult to be visually recognized, and the appearance is not spoiled. In addition, since the afterimage display by blinking of the light emitting means can be visually recognized while the rotation of the main body member can be visually recognized, interest can be enhanced. However, in this case, since the light-emitting means is accommodated in the main body member, a new problem was found in that it is difficult to cool the light-emitting means. The light emitting means (LED) and the ICs and capacitors that control them are soldered to the substrate. , may cause poor contact.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, since the main body member has a plurality of through holes penetratingly formed in the side wall facing the rotation direction, when the main body member is rotated, the main body member passes through the plurality of through holes. outside air can be taken into the inside of the Therefore, the heat generated when the light emitting means operates can be cooled.

A game machine C2 in the game machine C1, wherein the main body member is formed in a container-like shape with an open back side.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effects of the game machine C1, the main body member is formed in a container-like shape with the back side open, so that outside air taken in from the through-hole of the side wall is efficiently taken in from the back side. can be exhausted. Therefore, the heat generated when the light emitting means operates can be cooled. In addition, by discharging the air from the back side of the main body member in this way, it is possible to suppress the influence of the discharged air on the ball flowing down the game area (or rolling on the stage).

In the game machine C2, the main body member is formed in a rectangular shape in a front view, which is elongated along the diameter direction of the rotation plane of the main body member, and the front wall forming the front side is inclined toward the longitudinal end side. A gaming machine C3 characterized by being formed in a curved shape that recedes to the side.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effects of the game machine C2, the main body member is formed in a rectangular shape that is elongated along the diameter direction of the rotation plane of the main body member when viewed from the front (that is, when viewed in the direction of the rotation axis). Therefore, by utilizing the centrifugal force that accompanies the rotation of the main body member, the air inside the main body member can be caused to flow toward the ends in the longitudinal direction (outward in the radial direction during rotation) and be exhausted from the rear side. Therefore, along with the air flow, outside air can be taken into the main body member from the back side at and near the rotating shaft. That is, since the rotation speed is low around the rotating shaft and its vicinity, outside air is not taken in efficiently (or cannot be taken in) from the through-hole of the side wall. outside air is taken in from the side, and the taken outside air is caused to flow toward the longitudinal end side (outside in the radial direction during rotation) by centrifugal force, forming a flow of air that is exhausted from the rear side on the outside side in the radial direction). be able to. As a result, heat generated when the light emitting means operates can be cooled. In particular, it is possible to achieve cooling of the rotating shaft and the light emitting means arranged in the vicinity thereof.

In this case, if the front wall forming the front side of the main body member has a shape parallel to the plane of rotation of the main body member (i.e., if the main body member has a rectangular parallelepiped shape), centrifugal force causes the longitudinal ends (during rotation Since the angle of the portion where the air flowed radially outward) changes direction toward the rear side is approximately a right angle, a vortex is likely to be formed at this portion. Therefore, the flow of air is obstructed, and smooth exhaust from the rear side becomes difficult.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C3, the front wall forming the front side is formed in a curved shape that recedes toward the back side toward the longitudinal end side, so that the centrifugal force causes the longitudinal end side (during rotation) The angle of the portion where the air flowing radially outward) can be gradually flowed to the back side, and the air flowed to the longitudinal end (radial direction outward) changes direction toward the back side can be made larger than a substantially right angle, the formation of a vortex at such a portion can be suppressed, and the air can flow smoothly. Therefore, exhaust from the back side can be performed more smoothly. As a result, cooling of the rotating shaft and the light-emitting means arranged in the vicinity thereof can be achieved more reliably.

In the game machine C2 or C3, the body member has a rotating shaft and an open area on the back side in the vicinity of the rotating shaft that is larger than an open area on the back side on the longitudinal end side. Machine C4.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C2 or C3, the main body member has a rotating shaft and an open area on the back side near the rotating shaft that is larger than the open area on the back side on the longitudinal end side. is also increased, the centrifugal force accompanying the rotation is used to flow the air inside the body member to the longitudinal end side (radially outward during rotation), and from the rear side on the radially outward side By exhausting, when the outside air is taken in from the rear side of the rotating shaft and its vicinity, it can be taken in efficiently.

The gaming machine C5 of the gaming machine C4 is characterized in that the main body member has a rotating shaft and an open portion on the rear side in the vicinity of the rotating shaft formed in a circular shape concentric with the rotating shaft.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effects of the game machine C4, the main body member is formed such that the rotation axis and the open portion on the back side in the vicinity of the rotation axis are formed in a circle concentric with the rotation axis. It is possible to suppress the disturbance of the outside air on the back side of the rotating shaft and its vicinity (formation of flow in the rotating direction) accompanying the rotation of the rotor. As a result, outside air can be efficiently taken in from the rear side of the rotating shaft and its vicinity.

In any one of the game machines C2 to C5, the base member is provided with a shaft member that rotatably supports the body member, and the shaft member is reduced in diameter from the back side to the back side of the body member. A gaming machine C6 characterized by:

According to the game machine C6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines C2 to C5, the shaft member that rotatably supports the main body member on the base member has a diameter that decreases from the back side to the back side of the main body member. Therefore, when outside air is taken in from the rear side of the rotating shaft and its vicinity as the body member rotates, the outside air can flow smoothly along the outer peripheral surface of the shaft member, and the flow resistance can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to efficiently take in outside air from the rear side of the rotating shaft and its vicinity, so that the cooling of the light emitting means disposed on the rotating shaft and its vicinity can be achieved more reliably.

In any one of game machines C1 to C6, the substrate is housed in the main body member in such a manner that the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted or the surface opposite to the surface faces the side wall of the main body member. Characterized game machine C7.

According to the game machine C7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines C1 to C6, the board is arranged such that the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted or the surface opposite to that surface faces the side wall of the main body member. Since it is housed in the member, the outside air introduced from the through hole formed in the side wall can be efficiently blown to the light emitting means or the IC/capacitor, thereby enhancing the heat dissipation effect. As a result, it is possible to effectively cool the heat generated when the light emitting means or the IC/capacitor operates. In addition, when the substrate is housed in the body member, the front or back surface of the substrate faces the side wall of the body member, so that the width dimension of the body member when viewed from the front (the dimension in the direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction) ) can be reduced. As a result, in a state where the main body member (rotary display device) is stopped, it is possible to ensure the visibility of the members and devices arranged on the back side thereof.

A gaming machine C8 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines C1 to C7, it comprises smoke generating means for generating smoke in the displacement area of the main body member of the rotary display device.

According to the game machine C8, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines C1 to C7, the smoke generating means for generating smoke in the displacement area of the main body member of the rotary display device is provided, so that the flashing of the light emitting means can be highlighted. can be done. In addition, while the rotating display device is hidden by the smoke, only the blinking of the light emitting means can be seen, so that the presentation effect of the light can be enhanced.

In a conventional rotating display device, smoke is pushed out to the outer peripheral side as the main body member rotates, making it difficult to obtain the effect of smoke. is formed and outside air can be circulated so that smoke can remain around the body member. As a result, the light emitting means can be blinked in an atmosphere filled with smoke, and the above effects can be achieved.

As a smoke generator, for example, a type that heats and vaporizes water-based or oil-based oil (liquid) to generate smoke (smoke). Examples include a type that retains fine particles and a type that ejects carbon dioxide gas.

In the game machine C8, a game board having an opening in the center, a liquid crystal display device arranged to be visible through the opening of the game board, and a liquid crystal display device arranged on the front side of the liquid crystal display device and projecting on the front side a front member formed in a curved shape and made of a light-transmitting material, wherein at least a main body member of the rotating display member is positioned between the liquid crystal display device and the front member. Machine C9.

According to the game machine C9, in addition to the effects of the game machine C8, a game board having an opening in the center, a liquid crystal display device arranged so as to be visible through the opening of the game board, and a front side of the liquid crystal display device a front member disposed on the side of the liquid crystal display device and formed to be convexly curved toward the front side and made of a light-transmitting material; at least the main body member of the rotary display member is positioned between the liquid crystal display device and the front member Therefore, the smoke generated from the smoke generating device can be easily retained (contained) in the displacement region of the main body member. Therefore, it is possible to easily make the blinking of the light emitting means stand out by blinking the light emitting means in an atmosphere filled with smoke, or to make only the blinking of the light emitting means visible while the rotary display device is hidden by the smoke. As a result, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect of the light. In particular, since the front member is convexly curved toward the front, smoke can be easily retained in the space on the back side of the front member. As a result, it is possible to easily enhance the above-described lighting effect using smoke.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Using the Rotation Unit 500 as an Example>
a base member; a body member that is displaced between a first position and a second position with respect to the base member; In a gaming machine in which the displacement member is displaced while being placed at the first position, a rotating member rotatably supported by one of the base member and the body member, and the body member being placed at the first position. an abutting member facing the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member in a state of being held so as to be able to abut on the other of the base member and the main body member, wherein the main body member is arranged at the first position. A gaming machine D1 characterized in that the direction of displacement at the time and the direction of rotation of the rotating member are set substantially parallel to each other.

A base member, a body member that is displaced between a first position and a second position with respect to the base member, and a displacement member displaceably disposed on the body member, wherein the body member is A game machine is known in which a displacement member is formed to be displaceable in a state of being arranged at a first position (for example, JP-A-2013-162990).

In this case, when the main body member is arranged at the first position and the displacement member is displaced, the main body member may rattle with respect to the base member as the displacement member is displaced. Therefore, there is a technique in which an engaging means for engaging the main body member and the base member is provided to suppress the looseness. The engaging means includes an engaging member disposed on one of the body member and the base member and biased by the biasing means, and an engaging member formed to be engageable with the engaging member and attached to the other of the body member and the base member. and an engaged member disposed thereon, utilizing the displacement of the body member with respect to the base member (displacement toward the first position) to retract the engaging member while resisting the biasing force of the biasing means. When the member is placed at the first position, the engaging member is advanced by the biasing force of the biasing means and engaged with the engaged member. Thereby, the relative displacement of the main body member with respect to the base member is restricted by the engagement of the engaging means, and the rattling of the main body member with respect to the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member is suppressed.

However, in such conventional engaging means, in order to bring the engaging means into the engaged state (position the main body member at the first position), the engaging member must be pushed against the urging force of the urging means. Not only does it need to be retracted, but also when releasing the engagement state of the engagement means (displacing the body member from the first position toward the second position), the body member resists the biasing force of the biasing means. There is a problem that the engaging member needs to be retracted, and the driving force required to displace the main body member with respect to the base member increases.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D1, the rotating member rotatably supported by one of the base member and the main body member and the main body member contacting the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member in a state of being arranged at the first position. and an abutting member disposed on the other of the base member and the main body member so as to be able to face each other. The displacement of the main body member with respect to the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member can be suppressed. In this case, the direction of displacement when the main body member is arranged at the first position and the direction of rotation of the rotary member are set substantially parallel. When the body member is displaced to the position, the rotating member can be rotated along with the displacement, so that the driving force required to displace the body member with respect to the base member can be suppressed.

The game machine D2 in the game machine D1 is characterized in that at least the outer peripheral surface side of the rotating member is formed of an elastic body that can be elastically deformed.

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effects of the game machine D1, the rotary member is formed of an elastic body that is elastically deformable at least on the outer peripheral surface side, so that the contact member is brought into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the rotary member. In some cases, the rotating member can be easily held by the contact member by elastically deforming the outer peripheral surface side of the rotating member. This makes it difficult to rotate the rotating member and restricts relative displacement of the main body member with respect to the base member, so that rattling of the main body member with respect to the base member due to displacement of the displacement member can be suppressed.

The elastic body is preferably a viscoelastic body such as rubber or urethane. In this case, due to the damping effect thereof, it is possible to perform a vibration damping function or a vibration insulating function of damping and insulating the vibration input from the main body member to the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member. This is because it is possible to suppress wear and failure of various devices provided, loosening of fastening portions, and the like. In particular, when the displacement member is periodically displaced (e.g., rotated at relatively high speeds to function as a versawriter), vibrations of relatively small amplitude and high frequency are transmitted from the body member to the base member. , it is particularly effective to adopt a viscoelastic body.

In the game machine D1 or D2, the rotating member is formed to be radially displaceable, and one of the base member and the main body member rotates the rotating member while the main body member is arranged at the first position. A gaming machine D3, characterized by comprising a facing member arranged to face the abutting member on both sides thereof and facing the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member so as to be able to abut thereon.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1 or D2, the rotating member is formed to be displaceable in the radial direction, and one of the base member and the main body member is arranged at the first position. In this state, the body member is arranged to face the contact member with the rotating member interposed therebetween, and the opposing member faces the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member so as to contact the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member. When the abutting member is brought into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, the outer peripheral surface of the opposite side of the rotating member can be brought into contact with the opposing member. That is, the rotating member can be sandwiched between the contact member and the opposing member. This makes it difficult to rotate the rotating member and restricts relative displacement of the main body member with respect to the base member, so that rattling of the main body member with respect to the base member due to displacement of the displacement member can be suppressed.

Examples of a configuration in which the rotating member is radially displaceable include a configuration in which a shaft that rotatably supports the rotating member is configured to be radially displaceable, and a configuration in which a shaft that rotatably supports the rotating member The outer diameter of the shaft is smaller than the inner diameter of the through hole of the rotating member that receives the shaft, and the outer diameter of the shaft that is fixed to the rotating member is smaller than the through hole of either the body member or the base member that receives the shaft and the like are exemplified.

In the gaming machine D3, a shaft fixed to one of the base member and the main body member is provided, and the rotating member is formed of an elastic body with an annular cross-section having a shaft support hole through which the shaft is inserted on the inner peripheral side. The game machine D4 is characterized in that the displacement of the rotating member in the radial direction is formed by elastically deforming the elastic body.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effects of the game machine D3, the radial displacement of the rotary member is formed by elastic deformation of the elastic body, so that the base of the main body member accompanying the displacement of the displacement member If the rotating member is caught between the contacting member and the opposing member due to rattling of the member, the contacting member and the opposing member can be rotated by utilizing the elastic recovery force of the rotating member (elastic body). This makes it easier to hold the member more firmly. This makes it difficult to rotate the rotating member and restricts relative displacement of the main body member with respect to the base member, so that rattling of the main body member with respect to the base member due to displacement of the displacement member can be suppressed.

In addition, by adopting a configuration in which the radial displacement of the rotating member is performed by utilizing the elastic deformation of the elastic body, the shaft inserted through the shaft support hole of the rotating member can be moved in the radial direction. It need not be formed as a shaft and can be formed as a shaft that is fixed to one of the base member or the body member. As a result, the structure can be simplified, and the durability can be improved and the product cost can be reduced.

In any one of the game machines D1 to D4, a pair of the rotating members are arranged on one of the base member and the main body member, and the pair of rotating members rotate when the main body member is arranged at the first position. A gaming machine D5 characterized by being arranged side by side with a predetermined interval in the displacement direction.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D4, a pair of rotating members are arranged on one of the base member and the main body member, and the pair of rotating members are arranged so that the main body member is the first. Since they are arranged side by side at predetermined intervals in the direction of displacement when they are arranged at one position, the driving force required when displacing the main body member with respect to the base member is suppressed, and the main body accompanying the displacement of the displacement member is suppressed. It is possible to effectively suppress rattling of the member with respect to the base member.

That is, since the abutting member is brought into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, the relative displacement of the main body member with respect to the base member is restricted, but only one rotating member is abutted by the abutting member. In such a case, the rotation of the rotating member may cause the contact member to tilt, and the tilting of the contact member due to the rotation of the rotating member may cause rattling of the main body member with respect to the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member. Become.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D5, since the pair of rotating members are arranged side by side with a predetermined spacing, the abutting members contact the pair of rotating members at two locations with a predetermined spacing. Therefore, the rotating member can be contacted without being rotated, and tilting of the contact member can be suppressed. As a result, rattling of the body member with respect to the base member due to displacement of the displacement member can be effectively suppressed.

In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D5, the contact member is provided on a side of a contact surface against which the rotating member contacts, which receives the rotating member when the main body member is arranged at the first position. A gaming machine D6 characterized in that an inclined surface is formed at an end portion thereof, the inclined surface being inclined downward as the distance from the contact surface increases.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D5, the abutment member can be set to the first position when the body member of the abutment surface with which the rotating member abuts is arranged at the first position. Since an inclined surface is formed at the end on the side of receiving the rotating member, the inclined surface is inclined downward as the body member is moved away from the contact surface. A rotating member can be guided to the abutment surface of the abutment member. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the driving force required when arranging the main body member to the first position.

A gaming machine D7 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines D1 to D6, the rotary member is arranged on the base member, and the abutment member is arranged on the main body member.

According to the game machine D7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines D1 to D6, the rotating member is arranged on the base member and the contact member is arranged on the main body member, so that the weight is relatively light. Since there is no need to dispose a bulky rotating member, the weight of the main body member can be reduced, and the driving force required for displacing the main body member can be suppressed. Further, when suppressing rattling of the body member with respect to the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member, the weight of the body member on the vibration source side can be reduced, making it easier to suppress the rattling.

In any one of game machines D1 to D7, the displacement member is rotatably disposed on the main body member, and the rotation plane of the displacement member is the abutment surface of the abutment member that abuts on the rotation member. and the rotation axis of the rotating member, respectively.

According to the game machine D8, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines D1 to D7, the displacement member is rotatably disposed on the main body member, and the rotation plane of the displacement member is aligned with the rotation member of the contact member. Since the abutment surface to be abutted and the rotation axis of the rotating member are substantially parallel to each other, the driving force required when arranging the main body member to the first position and when displacing it from the first position to the second position While suppressing this, it is possible to effectively suppress rattling of the body member with respect to the base member due to displacement (rotation) of the displacement member.

That is, since the displacement mode of the displacement member is rotation, the main body member tilts on the rotation plane of the displacement member due to the precession motion of the displacement member (the motion in which the rotation axis of the displacement member swings in a circle). It is vibrated in a manner (mode) that makes it vibrate. Therefore, the rotation plane of the displacement member is substantially parallel to the contact surface of the contact member and the rotation axis of the rotation member, respectively, so that the contact surface of the contact member is perpendicular to the rotation axis of the rotation member. It can be pressed against the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member from any direction. As a result, when the body member is arranged at the first position and when the body member is displaced from the first position to the second position, the rotating member is rotated, thereby suppressing the driving force required for displacing the body member. The contact of the contact member with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member effectively suppresses rattling of the main body member with respect to the base member due to displacement (rotation) of the displacement member.

In any one of game machines D1 to D8, the game machine comprises driving means for generating a driving force, and transmission means for transmitting the driving force to the main body member to displace the main body member between the first position and the second position. a crank member having a rotating body rotated about a first axis by the driving force of the driving means and a pin projecting from the rotating body eccentrically from the first axis of the rotating body; The pin portion of the crank member has a guide groove in which it slides, and the pin portion slides along the guide groove to rotate around the second shaft, and the main body member moves along with the rotation. and an arm member to be displaced, and when the main body member is arranged at the first position, a straight line connecting the first axis of the crank member and the axis of the pin portion is aligned with the second axis of the arm member. The game machine D9 is characterized by being substantially orthogonal to a straight line connecting the axis of the pin portion of the crank member.

According to the game machine D9, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines D1 to D8, rattling of the main body member can be effectively suppressed.

Here, in the present invention, the direction of displacement when the body member is arranged at the first position and the direction of rotation of the rotating member are set substantially parallel. Therefore, if the rattling direction of the main body member at the first position is the direction from the first position to the second position or vice versa, the rotating member is likely to rotate in this direction. It becomes difficult to exhibit the effect of suppressing rattling by the rotating member.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D9, when the body member is arranged at the first position, the straight line connecting the first axis of the crank member and the axis of the pin portion is aligned with the second axis of the arm member and the crank. Since it is substantially orthogonal to the straight line connecting the axis of the pin portion of the member, even if the main body member tries to rotate the arm member due to its displacement, a force component in the direction of rotating the crank member is not formed ( That is, a dead center can be formed. That is, rattling of the body member in the direction from the first position to the second position or vice versa can be suppressed. As a result, even when the body member rattles in the direction from the first position to the second position or vice versa (that is, the direction in which the rotating member tends to rotate), the crank member and the arm member are at the dead point. can effectively suppress rattling of the body member.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking the Regulation Unit 490 as an Example>
In a gaming machine comprising a rotary display device having a plurality of light emitting means and blinking the light emitting means according to a rotational position to display an afterimage by an afterimage effect, the rotary display device comprises the plurality of light emitting means. are arranged in rows, a main body member that houses the substrate, and a base member that rotatably supports the main body member, wherein the substrate has a surface on which the light emitting means is mounted, which is the surface of the main body member. The game machine E1 is housed in the main body member in a posture substantially parallel to the rotation axis.

Here, there is known a game machine equipped with a rotating display device that has a plurality of light emitting means (LEDs) and performs afterimage display by an afterimage effect by blinking the light emitting means according to the rotational position (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open Nos. 2015-100385 and 2015-053968). However, in the conventional technology described above, the orientation of the substrate is such that the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted is orthogonal to the rotation axis (that is, the orientation of the rotation plane in which the irradiation direction of the light emitting means faces the front side (player side)). (parallel posture), the outer shape in a front view (rotational axis direction view) becomes large. Therefore, there is a problem that the visibility of the rear side of the rotary display device is hindered when the rotation of the rotary display device is stopped.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, the rotary display device includes a substrate on which a plurality of light emitting means are arranged, a main body member that accommodates the substrate, and a base member that rotatably supports the main body member. Since the substrate is accommodated in the body member in a posture in which the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted is substantially parallel to the rotation axis of the body member, the outer shape of the body member when viewed from the front (viewed in the direction of the rotation axis) is suppressed. be able to. As a result, in a state where the rotation of the rotary display device (body member) is stopped, the visibility of the rear side of the body member can be improved.

In the game machine E1, the game machine E2 is characterized in that the rotating display device comprises a facing member arranged to face the surface of the board on which the light emitting means is mounted.

According to the game machine E2, in addition to the effects of the game machine E1, the rotating display device includes the opposing member arranged opposite to the surface of the substrate on which the light emitting means is mounted, so that the light emitted from the light emitting means The light can be reflected by the member and emitted to the front side (player side) of the rotary display device. Therefore, even when the substrate is oriented so that the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted is substantially parallel to the rotation axis, the light (blinking) of the light emitting means can be visually recognized by the player, and the afterimage display can be performed by the afterimage effect. can be done.

In the gaming machine E2, the facing member includes a plurality of recesses formed in a surface facing the substrate and extending in a groove-like shape substantially parallel to the rotation axis of the main body member. A gaming machine E3 characterized in that the plurality of light emitting means face each other.

According to the game machine E3, in addition to the effects of the game machine E2, the opposing member has a plurality of recesses that are recessed in the surface facing the substrate and extend in a groove shape substantially parallel to the rotation axis of the main body member. , and since the plurality of light emitting means are opposed to the plurality of recesses, the light emitted from the plurality of light emitting means respectively passes through the plurality of recesses of the facing member to the front side (game person side). That is, since the light emitted from each light emitting means can be emitted in a state of being divided by each concave portion, the division of light from each light emitting means can be made clear. As a result, the outline of the afterimage display due to the afterimage effect can be clarified.

The gaming machine E4 in the gaming machine E3 is characterized in that the concave portion of the opposing member has an end partition wall that partitions an end of the rotating display device on the side opposite to the front side.

According to the game machine E4, in addition to the effects of the game machine E3, the concave portion of the opposing member has an end partition wall that partitions the end on the side opposite to the front side of the rotary display device, so that light is emitted from the light emitting means. The light irradiated to the concave portion of the facing member can be reflected by the end partition wall and emitted to the front side (player side) of the rotary display device. Therefore, it is possible to increase the light intensity of the afterimage display due to the afterimage effect.

In the gaming machine E4, the end partition wall of the recess is inclined in a direction away from the light emitting means toward the front side of the rotary display device, and the light emitting means is positioned to face the end partition wall of the recess. A gaming machine E5, characterized in that it is arranged.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E4, the end partition wall of the recess is inclined in a direction away from the light emitting means toward the front side of the rotary display device, and the light emitting means is the end partition of the recess. Since it is arranged at a position facing the wall, the end partition wall can be irradiated with the light emitted from the light emitting means, so that stronger light can be emitted to the front side (player side) of the rotating display device. can. Therefore, it is possible to increase the light intensity of the afterimage display due to the afterimage effect.

A game machine E6 in any one of the game machines E3 to E5, wherein a part of the inner surface of the concave portion of the opposing member is formed as an uneven surface.

According to the game machine E6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines E3 to E5, the concave portion of the opposing member is partially formed as an uneven surface, so that the light emitted from the light emitting means The light can be diffusely reflected by the uneven surface and emitted to the front side (player side) of the rotary display device in a state of being evenly dispersed. That is, it is possible to prevent the light emitted from the opening of the concave portion from being viewed in a biased state in a part of the opening.

In addition, the unevenness of the uneven surface may be a surface consisting only of projections (protrusions) or a surface consisting only of depressions (dents). The projections or depressions may extend as striations or grooves. Moreover, the convex and concave cross-sectional shapes may be circular, elliptical, polygonal, or a combination thereof. That is, as long as a portion higher than the reference position and a portion lower than the reference position are formed, a plurality of portions (surfaces) capable of reflecting light are formed, and diffuse reflection is possible, the shape of the unevenness is arbitrary.

In the gaming machine E6, the uneven surface is not formed in a predetermined range from the end portion of the inner surface of the concave portion of the facing member on the front side of the rotary display device, and the inner surface of the predetermined range is: A gaming machine E7 characterized by being formed as a surface smoother than the uneven surface.

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E6, the uneven surface is not formed in a predetermined range from the end on the front side of the rotary display device in the inner surface of the concave portion of the facing member, Since the inner surface of the predetermined range is formed as a smoother surface than the uneven surface, light can be easily emitted toward the front side (player side) of the rotary display device, and afterimage display by the afterimage effect can be achieved. You can increase the light intensity. That is, when an uneven surface is formed in a predetermined range from the end of the inner surface of the concave portion of the opposing member on the front side of the rotary display device, the uneven surface diffusely reflects the light, and the light is diffusely reflected on the front side of the rotary display device ( The light emitted toward the player's side) is reduced, but by making the inner surface of such a predetermined range smoother than the uneven surface, diffused reflection is suppressed and the front side of the rotating display device is reduced. It is possible to increase the amount of light directed toward (the player's side).

In the gaming machine E7, the predetermined range in which the uneven surface is not formed has a cross-sectional area of the inner surface that increases toward the end on the front side of the rotary display device. E8.

According to the game machine E8, in addition to the effects of the game machine E7, the cross-sectional area of the inner surface of the predetermined range in which the concave-convex surface is not formed increases toward the end on the front side of the rotary display device. (that is, the diameter is expanded), the light emitted toward the front side (player side) of the rotary display device can be spread. In other words, the area visually recognized as the light emitting region can be made larger than the area of the light emitting surface (irradiation surface) of the light emitting means. Therefore, the size of the light emitting means can be reduced.

In any one of the game machines E6 to E8, the recesses of the opposing member are arranged in a row, and the uneven surface arranged radially outwardly away from the rotation axis of the main body member A game machine E9 characterized in that the length dimension in the direction along the rotation axis of the main body member is increased.

According to the game machine E9, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines E6 to E8, the concave portion of the opposing member is arranged radially outwardly away from the rotation axis of the main body member, the more the uneven surface is arranged, the more the main body Since the length dimension in the direction along the rotation axis of the member is increased, the visually recognized brightness (brightness of light) of each of the plurality of recesses can be made uniform.

That is, in the rotating display device, since the displacement speed (peripheral speed) increases as it goes radially outward from the rotation axis (rotation center), if the light emitting means arranged in a row emit light with the same brightness, the rotation speed increases. The light from the light emitting means closer to the axis appears to have a higher brightness (brighter) than the light from the light emitting means farther (radially outward) from the rotation axis.

On the other hand, according to the game machine E9, the length dimension in the direction along the rotation axis of the main body member is increased as the uneven surface disposed away from the rotation axis of the main body member in the radial direction outward. , the concave portion (light emitting means) located radially outwardly away from the rotating shaft of the main body member, the diffused reflection due to the uneven surface is increased (that is, the ratio of the light directly visible to the player from the light emitting means is decreased). , can be visually recognized as light of high brightness. As a result, it is possible to suppress the difference in brightness seen by the eye at the arrangement position in the radial direction, and to make the brightness (brightness of light) uniform.

In any one of game machines E3 to E9, a cover member is provided to cover the end portion of the recess of the facing member on the front side of the rotary display device and is formed of a light-transmitting material, and the cover member includes , a game machine E10 characterized in that an uneven surface is formed at least in a region facing an end portion of the recess.

According to the game machine E10, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines E3 to E9, a cover is provided to cover the front end of the rotary display device in the concave portion of the opposing member and is formed of a light-transmitting material. A member is provided, and the cover member has an uneven surface formed at least in the area facing the end of the recess. ) can be emitted. That is, since the emitted light can be spread, the area visually recognized as the light emitting region can be made larger than the area of the light emitting surface (irradiation surface) of the light emitting means. Therefore, the size of the light emitting means can be reduced.

In any one of the game machines E3 to E10, a plate-shaped interposed member is interposed between the substrate and the facing member, and the intervening member includes the plurality of light emitting means and the plurality of concave portions. A gaming machine E11 characterized by comprising a through hole formed through at a position through which the game machine E11 passes.

According to the gaming machine E11, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines E3 to E10, a plate-like intervening member interposed between the substrate and the facing member is provided, and the intervening member includes a plurality of Since the through-holes are provided at positions through which the light-emitting means and the plurality of recesses are communicated, the light from each light-emitting means is reliably incident on the corresponding recesses, and is prevented from entering (leaking) the adjacent recesses. can. As a result, the light emitted from each light emitting means can be emitted only from the corresponding concave portion, and the outline of the afterimage display by the afterimage effect can be clarified.

Further, according to the gaming machine E11, the structure for causing the light from the light emitting means to enter the corresponding concave portion through the through hole is formed from two members, the facing member and the intervening member. The structure can be simplified as compared with the case of forming from members. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the product cost.

In the game machine E11, the game machine E12 is characterized in that the intervening member has a seat portion that abuts on the light emitting means, and the through hole is formed in the seat portion.

According to the game machine E12, in addition to the effects of the game machine E11, the intervening member has a seat that contacts the light emitting means, and the through hole is formed in the seat, so that the light from each light emitting means can be emitted. can be easily incident on the through-hole, and leakage to the outside of the through-hole can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to increase the light intensity of the afterimage display due to the afterimage effect. In addition, since the seat portion is brought into contact with the light emitting means, it is possible to suppress the light from the adjacent light emitting means from entering the through hole, so that the appearance of the afterimage display due to the afterimage effect can be made clear.

In the game machine E12, the irradiation surface of the light emitting means is formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front, and the through holes are formed in a circular cross section with an inner diameter substantially equal to the outer diameter of the irradiation surface. are arranged concentrically.

According to the game machine E13, in addition to the effects of the game machine E12, the irradiation surface of the light emitting means is formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front, and the through hole has a circular cross section with an inner diameter substantially equal to the outer diameter of the irradiation surface. Since the irradiation surface and the through hole are arranged concentrically, the light emitted from the light emitting means can be efficiently incident on the recess through the through hole.

A game machine E14 in the game machine E13, characterized in that the through hole has an inner diameter that expands from the substrate side toward the facing member.

According to the gaming machine E14, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E13, the inner diameter of the through-hole is expanded from the substrate side toward the facing member, so that the light emitted from the light-emitting means passes through the through-hole. The light can be efficiently incident on the concave portion through the hole. Moreover, since the area abutting on the light emitting means can be secured, it is possible to suppress the light from each light emitting means from leaking out of the through hole. As a result, it is possible to increase the light intensity of the afterimage display due to the afterimage effect.

A gaming machine E15 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines E12 to E14, the seat portion is formed so as to protrude from a surface of the interposed member facing the substrate.

According to the game machine E15, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines E12 to E14, the seat portion is formed to protrude from the surface of the intervening member facing the substrate, so that the portion of the protrusion faces the substrate. A space can be formed between the member and the heat generated by the operation of the light emitting means can be dissipated.

A game machine E16 in the game machine E15, wherein the intervening member has a groove-like groove recessed in the surface facing the substrate and extending along the base of the seat.

According to the game machine E16, in addition to the effects of the game machine E15, the opposing member has a groove-shaped groove recessed in the surface facing the board and extending along the base of the seat. It is possible to enhance the heat dissipation effect while ensuring the rigidity of the interposed member. That is, by forming a groove-shaped groove extending along the base of the seat, the recessed area of the interposed member is minimized, and the rigidity of the interposed member is ensured, while the light emitting means is illuminated. It is possible to increase the heat dissipation effect by enlarging the space for the part where the heat generated by the operation particularly concentrates.

A gaming machine E17 in the gaming machine E15 or E16, characterized in that the outer peripheral surfaces of the adjacent seat portions are connected to each other.

According to the game machine E17, in addition to the effects of the game machine E15 or E16, the outer peripheral surfaces of the adjacent seat portions are connected to each other, so that the rigidity of the intervening member can be increased.

In this case, the outer peripheral surfaces of the seat portions may be circular, and the outer peripheral surfaces of the adjacent seat portions may be connected to each other. As a result, the group in which the plurality of seat portions are connected to each other has an uneven outer shape, so that the rigidity of the interposing member can be increased by utilizing the uneven outer shape while securing a space and enhancing the heat dissipation effect. can rise.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking the Sorting Device 4700 as an Example>
A game machine comprising: a passage member forming a passage through which a ball can pass; An opening formed in the side wall of the passage member on the upstream side of the first privilege providing means and having a size through which the ball can pass, and a ball flowing out from the opening into the game area are formed so as to pass through the opening. A gaming machine F1 characterized by comprising a second privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege in accordance with the passage of the game machine F1.

Here, there is known a gaming machine provided with a passage member that forms a passage through which a ball can pass (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2015-97764). A sensor device for detecting the passage of the ball through the passage member is arranged downstream of such a passage member, and when the passage of the ball is detected by the sensor device, a predetermined privilege is given. However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the passage member only has the function of guiding the ball toward its downstream side (sensor device). There was a problem that it was difficult to

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, when the ball guided to the passage member passes through the first privilege granting means, the first privilege granting means grants a predetermined privilege. In this case, an opening is formed in the side wall of the passage member on the upstream side of the first privilege granting means and has a size through which the ball can pass, and the ball flowing out from the opening into the game area is formed so as to be able to pass therethrough. Since the second privilege imparting means is provided for imparting a predetermined privilege as the ball passes through, it is possible to form a form in which the ball flows out from the opening into the game area while being guided through the passage member, and the ball that has flowed out can be formed. passes through the second privilege granting means, a predetermined privilege can be granted by the second privilege granting means. As a result, the ball guided by the passage member not only passes through the first privilege imparting means, but also flows out from the opening into the game area, and furthermore, the outflowing ball passes through the second privilege imparting means. Form can be formed, and interest can be imparted to the game.

It should be noted that the second privilege granting means may be arranged at a position capable of receiving all the balls that have flowed out from the opening into the game area, or, depending on the state of the balls that have flowed out from the opening into the game area, Some balls may be received and some balls may not be received.

Also, the privilege granted by the first privilege imparting means and the privilege imparted by the second privilege imparting means may be the same privilege or may be different privileges.

In the game machine F1, the passage member has a bent portion formed in a part thereof, and the opening is formed in a side wall of the bent portion.

Here, by forming a bent portion in a part of the passage member, the throwing direction of the ball can be changed, so that the degree of freedom in layout can be enhanced. However, when a bent portion is formed in a part of the passage member, the flow of the balls at the bent portion tends to be stagnant. Therefore, when multiple balls pass through a curved part in a row, the trailing ball catches up with the leading ball, and the trailing ball pushes the leading ball against the side wall, preventing both of them from rolling. , there was a problem that ball clogging occurred.

On the other hand, according to the game machine F2, since the passage member has an opening formed in the side wall of the bent portion, when a plurality of balls pass through the bent portion in a row, the preceding ball is followed by the passage member. Even if the moving ball catches up, the leading ball can hardly be pressed against the side wall, and the rolling of both can be easily continued. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging.

The bent portion is formed by a first portion of the passage member and a second portion connected to the downstream side of the first portion and having a direction in which the ball passes in a direction different from that of the first portion. range. In this case, each of the first portion and the second portion may be a passage extending linearly, or may be a passage extending curvedly. It may be a passage having a shape in which are combined.

The game machine F2 is provided with a game board on which a game area is formed on the front side, and at least a portion of the bent portion of the passage member where the opening is formed is disposed on the front side of the game board. Characterized game machine F3.

According to the game machine F3, in addition to the effects of the game machine F2, since at least a portion of the bent portion of the passage member in which the opening is formed is disposed on the front side of the game board, the bent portion of the passage member When ball clogging occurs, by opening the glass plate, the ball clogged in the bent portion can be accessed through the opening on the front side of the game board. Therefore, it is possible to improve the workability of the work for removing ball clogging. In addition, when the game ball flows out to the game area from the opening of the passage member, the player can visually recognize the manner in which the game ball flows out, so that the interest in the game can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine F3, the gaming machine F4 is characterized in that at least the ball entrance of the second privilege imparting means is arranged on the front side of the gaming board.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effects of the game machine F3, since at least the ball entrance of the second privilege means is arranged on the front side of the game board, game balls flow out to the game area from the opening of the passage member. When playing the game, the player can visually recognize the manner in which the outflowing ball enters the ball entrance of the second privilege providing means, so that the interest in the game can be enhanced.

In any one of the game machines F1 to F4, a connecting passage is provided for connecting the second privilege imparting means to the passage member and guiding a ball that has passed through the second privilege imparting means to the passage member, the connecting passage being , the gaming machine F5 is connected to the passage member on the upstream side of the first privilege granting means.

According to the game machine F5, in addition to the effects of the game machines F1 to F4, the second privilege imparting means is connected to the passage member, and the connection passage for guiding the ball that has passed through the second privilege imparting means to the passage member is provided. Since the connecting passage is connected to the passage member upstream of the first privilege providing means, the ball flows out from the opening into the game area while being guided through the passage member, and the outflowing ball is the second player. When the ball passes through the second privilege imparting means, the ball can be guided to the passage member through the connecting passage and passed through the first privilege imparting means. Therefore, in addition to awarding the privilege by the second privilege granting means, the privilege can be granted by the first privilege granting means, and the interest in the game can be enhanced.

In any one of the game machines F1 to F5, a distribution means is provided for alternately distributing the entered ball to one side and the other, the passage members are arranged in a pair, and one of the pair of passage members is the swing member. A game machine F6 is connected to one of dividing means and the other is connected to the other of the sorting means.

According to the game machine F6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines F1 to F5, it is equipped with a distribution means for alternately distributing the entered ball to one side and the other. One of the passage members is connected to one of the sorting means and the other is connected to the other of the sorting means, so that balls can enter the passage member one by one. That is, since it is possible to prevent a plurality of balls from entering the passage member in a row, it is possible to prevent clogging of the passage member with the balls.

<Regarding the concept of the invention with the sorting device 700 as an example>
A game machine provided with a passage member through which balls can pass, comprising a game board having a game area formed on the front side, the passage member having a ball entrance disposed on the front side of the game board, A game machine G1 characterized in that at least a part of the downstream side of the ball entrance is arranged on the back side of the game board.

Here, there is known a gaming machine provided with a passage member that forms a passage through which a ball can pass (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2015-97764). By using the passage (passage member), the ball entering the passage can be reliably thrown to a predetermined position. However, when the path is arranged on the front side of the game board, there is a problem that the space on the front side of the game board is reduced accordingly. That is, the falling area of the ball in the game area is restricted (reduced).

On the other hand, according to the game machine G1, the passage member has the ball entrance disposed on the front side of the game board, and at least a portion of the downstream side of the ball entrance disposed on the back side of the game board. Since it is provided, the space on the front side of the game board can be secured accordingly. In other words, it is possible to secure a ball flowing-down area in the game area.

In the game machine G1, the passage member is branched from the downstream side of the ball entrance, is inclined downward toward one width direction side and the other width direction side of the game board, and is arranged on the back side of the game board. and a pair of second passages respectively connected to the downstream side of the pair of inclined passages and at least a part of which is arranged on the front side of the game board, and the ball entrance is provided. A gaming machine G2 characterized in that a prize winning device is arranged between the pair of second passages at the bottom of the game machine G2.

According to the game machine G2, in addition to the effects of the game machine G1, the passage member is branched from the downstream side of the ball entrance and inclined downward toward one width direction side and the other width direction side of the game board. A pair of inclined passages arranged on the back side of the game board and a pair of second passages respectively connected to the downstream side of the pair of inclined passages and at least partly arranged on the front side of the game board are provided. Therefore, it is possible to secure a space on the front side of the game board (a ball flowing-down area in the game area) for the slanted passage. Therefore, the winning device can be arranged between the pair of second passages below the ball entrance. That is, the arrangement of the passage member and the winning device described in the game machine G2 is impossible in the conventional product in which the passage member is arranged on the front side of the game board. This is possible for the first time by arranging it on the back side of the .

A game machine G3 in the gaming machine G2, wherein the second passage is formed as a curved passage in which a curved portion is formed in a part thereof, and an opening is formed in a side wall of the curved portion.

Here, by forming a bent portion in a part of the passage member, it is possible to change the throwing direction of the ball (the position where the ball flows out from the passage to the game area), so that the degree of freedom in layout can be increased. However, when a bent portion is formed in a part of the passage member, the flow of the balls at the bent portion tends to be stagnated. Therefore, when multiple balls pass through a curved part in a row, the trailing ball catches up with the leading ball, and the trailing ball pushes the leading ball against the side wall, preventing both of them from rolling. , there is a problem that ball clogging may occur.

On the other hand, according to the game machine G3, in addition to the effects of the game machine G2, since the passage member has an opening formed in the side wall of the bent portion, a plurality of balls pass through the bent portion in a row. In this case, even if the trailing ball catches up with the leading ball, it is possible to make it difficult for the leading ball to be pressed against the side wall, making it easier for the two to continue rolling. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging.

The bent portion is formed by a first portion of the passage member and a second portion connected to the downstream side of the first portion and having a direction in which the ball passes in a direction different from that of the first portion. range. In this case, each of the first portion and the second portion may be a passage extending linearly, or may be a passage extending curvedly. It may be a passage having a shape in which are combined.

A game machine G4 characterized in that, in the game machine G3, the opening is provided on the front side of the game board.

According to the game machine G4, in addition to the effects of the game machine G3, since the opening is arranged on the front side of the game board, the glass plate can be opened when the ball clogging occurs at the bent portion of the second passage. By doing so, on the front side of the game board, it is possible to access the ball jammed in the bent portion through the opening. Therefore, it is possible to improve the workability of the work for removing ball clogging.

In the game machine G3 or G4, a gap through which at least a ball can pass is formed between a portion of the second passage disposed on the front side of the game board and the lower edge of the game area. A gaming machine G5 characterized by:

According to the game machine G5, in addition to the effects of the game machine G3 or G4, at least a ball is placed between the portion of the second path that is arranged on the front side of the game board and the lower edge of the game area. Since the gap through which the liquid can pass is formed, it is possible to eliminate the need to provide outlets on both sides of the second passage. Therefore, the space on the front side of the game board (a ball flowing-down area in the game area) can be secured, and the number of parts can be reduced, thereby reducing the product cost.

In any one of the game machines G2 to G5, an attachment member is formed in a cross-sectional shape with one side open and is attached in a posture in which the open side faces the back of the game board, The game machine G6 is characterized in that the inclined passage is formed between the rear surface and the inner surface of the attachment member facing each other.

According to the game machine G6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines G2 to G5, the attachment is formed in a cross-sectional shape with one side open and is attached in a posture in which the open side faces the back of the game board. Since the mounting member is provided and the inclined passage is formed between the facing surfaces of the back surface of the game board and the inner surface of the mounting member, the back surface of the game board can be used also as a part of the inclined passage to form the inclined passage. It is possible to reduce the number of members for Therefore, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

<Feature K group> (Holding look-ahead effect)
Acquisition means for acquiring information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and determination of the information stored in the storage means when the determination condition is established determination means; display means for displaying identification information based on determination results of the determination means; dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means; dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period for dynamically displaying the display means for displaying an identification pattern on the display means based on the information stored in the storage means, a pattern display control means for changing the corresponding identification pattern to a different display mode when the judgment condition corresponding to the identification pattern which is displayed is established; and the judgment condition based on the information stored in the storage means. a specific condition determining means for determining whether a specific condition is satisfied based on the result of determination by the prior determining means; and the specific condition is satisfied by the specific condition determining means. a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect of changing the background display mode of the display area in which the two or more identification symbols are displayed to a different specific background display mode when is determined. Characteristic gaming machine K1.

Here, a game machine such as a pachinko machine is configured to be able to hold and store a lottery executed based on the winning of a game ball into a starting winning hole for a plurality of times, and to display a held pattern corresponding to the number of held memories. there is something to do As such a game machine, a judgment is performed in advance on the information that has been reserved and stored, and an effect that suggests the judgment result is pre-determined before the lottery based on the pre-determined retention memory is executed. There is one that executes an effect using a reserved design corresponding to the reserved memory (so-called reserved look-ahead notice effect) (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-340038). In this reserved look-ahead forewarning effect, for example, an effect of suggesting the preliminary determination result to the player is executed by changing the display mode of the reserved symbol.

In such a conventional gaming machine, an effect suggesting a pre-determination result is executed using a reserved pattern corresponding to the pre-determined reserved memory, so that the player is interested in the reserved pattern in which the effect is executed. However, there was a problem that the player's interest in other reserved symbols faded and the player quickly got bored with the game. An object of the present invention is to solve the problems exemplified above.

According to the game machine K1, the storage means stores the information acquired by the acquisition means based on the establishment of the acquisition condition. The determination means determines the information stored in the storage means when the determination condition is established, the identification information based on the determination result by the determination means is displayed on the display means, and the identification information is displayed on the display means by the dynamic display means. displayed dynamically. Then, the dynamic display period of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means is determined by the dynamic display period determining means. An identification pattern is displayed on the display means based on the information being stored in the storage means, and when a determination condition corresponding to the identification pattern displayed on the display means is established, the identification pattern corresponding to the identification pattern is subjected to pattern display control. The display mode is changed by the means, and the determination is performed by the prior determination means before the determination condition is satisfied based on the information stored in the storage means. In addition, when the specific condition determination means determines that the specific condition is met based on the determination result of the prior determination means, a specific background display in which the background display mode of the display area in which two or more identification patterns are displayed is different. A specific effect to be varied in a mode is executed by the specific effect executing means.

As a result, the background display mode of the display area in which the two or more identification patterns are displayed is changed to the specific background display mode based on the result of determination by the advance determination means, so that the specific condition is established by the advance determination means. It becomes difficult for the player to specify the identification information for which is determined, and the player can be interested in the identification pattern for the area where the specific effect is displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets bored early.

In the game machine K1, the specific effect executing means executes the specific effect including at least the display area of the identification pattern displayed on the display means.

According to the game machine K2, in addition to the effects of the game machine K1, the following effects are produced. That is, the specific effect executing means executes the specific effect including at least the display area of the identification pattern displayed on the display means.

As a result, since the specific effect is executed including at least the display area where the identification pattern is displayed, there is an effect that the player can be more interested in the determination result corresponding to the identification pattern being displayed. be.

In the game machine K1 or K2, the game machine K3 is characterized in that the specific effect executing means executes the specific effect for all display areas in which the identification symbols are displayed.

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K1 or K2, the specific effect is executed for all the display areas where the identification symbols are displayed. is started, there is an effect that the player can have expectations for the identification symbols displayed after that.

Any one of the game machines K1 to K3 has end condition determination means for determining whether or not the end condition for ending the specific effect is satisfied, and the specific effect execution end means determines whether the end condition is satisfied by the end condition determination means. A gaming machine K4 characterized in that execution of the specific effect is terminated when it is determined that the effect is established.

According to the game machine K4, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the game machines K1 to K3, the specific effect is continuously executed until the end condition is satisfied. There is an effect that it is possible to make the user interested in the displayed identification pattern.

In any one of the game machines K1 to K4, the specific effect execution means displays the display area where the identification pattern is displayed in a first specific background display mode when the specific condition is satisfied, and the identification pattern is displayed in a first specific background display mode. A game machine K5 characterized in that a display area in which the identification pattern that is not displayed is displayed in a second specific background display mode different from the first specific background display mode.

According to the game machine K5, in addition to the effects of the game machines K1 to K4, the player is made to distinguish and recognize identification symbols that may have been determined to satisfy a specific condition by the advance determination means and identification symbols that are not. This has the effect of making the player interested in a limited range of identification symbols among the identification symbols displayed.

In the gaming machine K5, when the identification pattern is displayed in the display area displayed in the second specific background display mode, the specific condition determination means is configured to determine the identification pattern based on the information corresponding to the displayed identification pattern. When the determination is executed, the establishment of the specific condition is determined with a higher probability than when the determination is made based on the information corresponding to the identification pattern displayed in the first specific background display mode. A gaming machine K6 characterized by:

According to the game machine K6, in addition to the effects of the game machine K5, since the specific condition is easily established, there is an effect that the specific effect can be easily displayed continuously.

In any one of gaming machines K1 to K6, dynamic display mode determination means for determining a dynamic display mode of the identification information based on the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means; dynamic display mode storage means for storing a plurality of the dynamic display modes determined by the dynamic display mode determination means, wherein the dynamic display mode storage means stores the dynamic display mode types as A gaming machine K7 characterized in that a plurality of specific dynamic display modes set as specific types are stored.

According to the game machine K7, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines K1 to K6, since the types of dynamic display modes are classified for each type, the player can easily understand the dynamic display modes. There is

In any one of gaming machines K1 to K7, the prior determination means determines at least the type of dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means based on the information stored in the storage means. The specific condition determination means determines with a predetermined lottery probability that the specific condition is satisfied based on the determination by the prior determination means that the type of the specific dynamic display mode is determined. A gaming machine K8 characterized in that it

According to the gaming machine K8, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines K1 to K7, when a specific effect is executed, a specific dynamic display corresponding to any of the displayed identification symbols is displayed. Since the type of dynamic display mode is executed, there is an effect that the player can more quickly recognize that a specific type of dynamic display mode is to be executed.

In the gaming machine K8, the specific condition determination means determines whether the type of dynamic display mode corresponding to one of the identification symbols displayed on the display means is determined by the prior determination means as the specific dynamic display mode. A gaming machine K9 characterized in that it is determined whether the specific condition is established by a predetermined lottery probability based on the fact that it is determined to be the type.

According to the gaming machine K9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K8, it is determined that the specific condition is established when the type of the specific dynamic display mode is determined for any of the displayed identification symbols. There is an effect that the player can have expectations for the displayed identification pattern.

<Characteristic group L> (Round production)
Judgment means for executing judgment based on establishment of judgment conditions, production execution means for executing production based on the judgment result by the judgment means, and production based on the specific judgment result is executed by the production execution means. and a bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player when the game is played, wherein a plurality of the effect modes including a first effect mode are stored as the effects executed by the effect executing means. information storage means for storing information corresponding to the executed first effect mode when the first effect mode is executed by the effect execution means; and execution condition storage means. a notification effect executing means for executing a notification effect for notifying a player of specific game information based on establishment; and a notification effect executed by the notification effect executing means based on the information stored in the information storage means. and a type setting means for setting the type of the gaming machine L1.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, it is suggested whether or not a game state (for example, variable probability game state) that is advantageous to the player is given as a game state after the winning game is completed during the winning game. There are some that execute an effect to play (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-119006). In such a game machine, while playing the winning game, the player can enjoy the performance suggesting the game state after the winning game is over, and the player is prevented from becoming bored with the game during the winning game.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, the effect mode of the effect executed during the winning game is determined by the type of the winning game, so that the player can play early during the period until the winning game is executed. There was a problem that a problem of getting tired of was generated. An object of the present invention is to solve the problems exemplified above.

According to the gaming machine L1, the information corresponding to the execution of the first effect mode as the effect based on the determination result by the determination means is stored in the storage means, and based on the information stored in the storage means, notification is given. Since the type of the notification effect executed by the effect executing means is changed, the player can have expectations not only for the specific determination result but also for the execution of the first effect mode. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets tired of the game early.

In the gaming machine L1, the gaming machine L2 is characterized in that the first effect mode is set to be executed at a high rate when the effect based on the specific determination result is executed.

According to the game machine L2, in addition to the effects of the game machine L1, the first effect mode is set to be easily executed when an effect based on a specific determination result is executed. By being executed, there is an effect that it is possible to have expectations for a specific determination result before the performance result is notified.

In a game machine L1 or L2, a privilege giving means for giving at least one of a plurality of different privileges as a privilege given to a player based on establishment of a privilege giving condition, and a privilege given to the player by the privilege giving means. and a privilege type determination means for determining the type of the benefit type determination means, wherein the notification effect is performed based on the type of the privilege determined by the privilege type determination means. Machine L3.

According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L1 or L2, a notification based on the type of privilege determined by the privilege type determining means is executed by the notification effect, so that the player is given the effect by the notification effect. There is an effect that it is possible to make the user recognize the type of privilege to be received.

In the gaming machine L3, the privilege type determining means determines which of a normal game state and a special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state as the game state to be given to the player after the execution of the privilege game. A game machine L4 characterized in that at least one of them can be determined, and the notification effect is executed during execution of the privilege game.

According to the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L3, the player can know the game state to be given after the privilege game even during the privilege game by the notification performance, thereby suppressing boredom during the privilege game. It has the effect of being able to

In any one of the game machines L1 to L4, the type setting means sets the type of notification effect corresponding to the number of times the first effect mode is executed during a specific period. Machine L5.

According to the gaming machine L5, in addition to the effect produced by one of the gaming machines L1 to L4, even when the first effect mode is executed and the privilege game is not executed, the privilege game to be executed thereafter is executed. Since the specific effect to be played is variable, there is an effect that the value of the first effect mode can be increased for the player.

In the gaming machine L4 or L5, as the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, a first privilege game in which the execution period of the privilege game is set to a first period and a longer than the first privilege game At least a second privilege game set in an execution period is set, and the type determination means sets a case where the first privilege game is executed and a case where the second privilege game is executed. The game machine L6 is characterized in that the type of notification performance is variably set.

According to the gaming machine L6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine L1 or L5, the type of the notification effect is variably set according to the execution period of the privilege game, so that the player can receive the notification effect in accordance with the length of the privilege game. There is an effect that it is possible to provide an effect that matches the period in which the notification effect can be executed more effectively.

<Feature M group> (Reach continuous production)
Main control means for executing main control of the game, and sub-control means for executing game control based on a signal output from the main control means, wherein the main control means satisfies a determination condition determination means for executing a determination based on a determination result of the determination means; determination information output means for outputting a determination information signal based on the determination result of the determination means to the slave control means; and a bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player based on the fact that the sub-control means notifies the player of the judgment result based on the judgment information signal. and a performance mode determination means for determining a performance mode, wherein the main control means provides type information for determining the type information of the performance mode determined by the performance mode determination means based on the determination result. determination means; and determination information signal generation means for generating the determination information signal based on at least a result of determination by the determination means and the type information determined by the type information determination means, and determining the effect mode. When a first condition is established, the means determines one of the effect modes from the type of the effect mode corresponding to the type information specified by the determination information signal, and determines the first condition and is satisfied, the performance mode is determined from the specific performance mode type different from the performance mode type corresponding to the type information specified by the determination information signal. A gaming machine M1 characterized in that it

Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a winning command is transmitted from the main control device to the performance control device based on the winning of the game ball into the starting winning hole. In such a gaming machine, ready-to-win information indicating the effect mode of the special symbol variation effect corresponding to the winning command is set in the winning command to be transmitted, and the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning command is executed. In some cases, a variable effect is executed based on the reach information included in the winning command (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-233993). This reduces the control load of the performance control device.

In such a conventional gaming machine, since the effect control device determines the effect mode of the corresponding special symbol variation effect at the time of receiving the winning command, after receiving the winning command, the special corresponding to the winning command Even if the game conditions are changed during the period until the symbol variation performance is executed, the performance mode of the special symbol variation performance cannot be changed, and a monotonous performance is provided to the player. There was a problem. An object of the present invention is to solve the problems exemplified above.

According to the game machine M1, when the first condition is satisfied, the effect mode is determined from the type of effect mode instructed by the main control means, but the second condition different from the first condition is satisfied. If so, the effect mode is determined from the specific effect mode type different from the effect mode type instructed by the main control means. An effect of a type different from the instruction is executed, and the pattern of the effect to be executed can be diversified. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored early.

In the gaming machine M2, the main control means includes acquisition means for acquiring information determined by the determination means based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, pre-determination means for executing a determination before the determination condition for the information stored in the storage means is satisfied; a prior determination signal output means for outputting, wherein the slave control means has condition determining means for determining whether the second condition is satisfied based on the received prior determination signal. game machine M2.

According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine M1, it is determined whether the second condition is established based on the pre-determination signal before the determination is made by the determination means. By executing an effect corresponding to the type of mode, there is an effect that the determination result to be notified by the effect to be executed thereafter can be notified in advance.

In the gaming machine M1 or M2, the presentation mode includes at least a display presentation of dynamically displaying identification information based on the determination result indicated by the determination information signal on display means, and the identification information includes a plurality of pieces of information. and the determination result is notified to the player by combining the symbols of the respective symbol rows stop-displayed in the predetermined area of the display means. A game machine M3.

According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine M1 or M2, in the presentation based on the determination result, a display presentation of dynamically displaying a plurality of symbol rows is executed, and the symbol rows are stopped and displayed. Since the determination result is notified by the combination of , the player can enjoy the game more.

The game machine M3 is characterized in that the type of the effect mode designated by the determination information signal is a type of a combination of at least two symbols out of combinations of symbols stopped and displayed in a predetermined area of the display means. Gaming machine M4.

According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine M3, a part of the combination of symbols stopped and displayed in the predetermined area of the display means is specified by type by the main control means, so that the symbols are displayed by the slave control means. There is an effect that it is possible to easily select the type of

<Feature N group> (Continuous notice)
information acquisition means for acquiring information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition; storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means; and the information stored in the storage means based on the establishment of a determination condition display means for displaying identification information based on the result of determination by the determination means; dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means; A privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player when the identification information based on the determination result is displayed, and a game state after the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means. and a special game state determining means for determining whether to set a special game state advantageous to the game based on the information, wherein the identification information is a plurality of symbol sequences composed of a plurality of different symbols. and a combination of the symbols stopped and displayed in the predetermined area of the display means informs the result of determination by the determination means, and the plurality of symbol rows are dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. a first stop symbol row in which the dynamic display is first stop-displayed when the dynamic display is stopped, and the specified symbols for the symbols stopped after the first stop symbol row and stopped-displayed in the first stop symbol row and a ready-to-win formation symbol row that can be stopped and displayed in a ready-to-win display mode, which is a symbol combination that can result in the determination result of, and the symbols of the ready-to-win formation symbol row that are stopped after the ready-to-win formation symbol row. a specified result forming pattern sequence capable of forming a symbol combination that notifies the specified determination result corresponding to the symbol combination displayed in the ready-to-win display mode, wherein the gaming machine is prior determination means for executing determination of the information before the determination condition for the information stored in the storage means is satisfied before the determination condition is satisfied; a specific condition determining means for determining whether a specific condition is satisfied based on a determination result; and when the specific condition determining means determines that the specific condition is satisfied, the first stop symbol sequence symbol display control means for performing control so that a first period from when is stop-displayed to when the ready-to-win formation pattern row is stop-displayed is a specific period spanning a plurality of dynamic displays of the identification information; A gaming machine N1 characterized by having:

Here, a game machine such as a pachinko machine is configured to be able to hold and store a lottery executed based on the winning of a game ball into a starting winning hole for a plurality of times, and to display a held pattern corresponding to the number of held memories. there is something to do As such a game machine, a determination is made in advance for the information retained and stored, and as an effect suggesting the determination result, a plurality of lotteries are performed before the lottery based on the pre-determined retention memory is executed. (For example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-35655).

In such a conventional gaming machine, it was possible to make the player interested in the lottery in which the result was reported using continuous performance, but other reserved symbols, that is, during continuous performance There is a problem that the player's interest in the lottery to be executed fades away, and the interest in the game is lowered. An object of the present invention is to solve the problems exemplified above.

According to the gaming machine N1, when the specific condition is established based on the determination result by the preliminary determination means, the first period from the stop of the first stop symbol sequence to the stop of the ready-to-win formation symbol sequence is repeated a plurality of times. Since the specific period straddles the dynamic display of the identification information, it is possible to make the player interested in the timing of stopping the symbol row, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

In the game machine N1, the game machine N2 is characterized in that the specific period is set to the same period as the first period in the identification information for a plurality of times.

According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N1, the first period is set to the same period over a plurality of dynamic displays of the identification information. There is an effect that it is possible to notify in an easy-to-understand manner.

In the game machine N1 or N2, when the symbol display control means sets the specific period by the symbol display control means, the dynamic display of the identification information based on the determination result other than the specific determination result may include the A gaming machine N3 is characterized in that a second period from stop-display of the ready-to-win formation symbol row to stop-display of the specific result formation symbol row is set as a special period.

According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N1 or N2, when a specific period is formed, a special period is set in the dynamic display of the identification information in which the specific determination result is not notified. There is an effect that the player can more easily recognize that the specific condition has been decided by the specific condition deciding means.

In the game machine N3, the game machine N4 is characterized in that the special period is set in the same period as the specific period.

According to the game machine N4, in addition to the effects of the game machine N3, the special period and the specific period are set in the same period, so that the player can more easily understand that the specific condition has been determined by the specific condition determination means. There is an effect that it can be easily recognized.

<Characteristic O group> (Ranking up with patterns)
Acquisition means for acquiring information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition; storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means; and based on the information stored in the storage means based on the establishment of a determination condition display means for displaying identification information based on the result of determination by the determination means; dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means; A privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to a player when identification information based on a specific determination result is displayed, and a game state as a game state after the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means. and a game state setting means for setting a special game state advantageous to the player based on the determination result, wherein the identification information displayed on the display means is composed of a plurality of different symbols. The judgment result is notified by a combination of the symbols composed of a plurality of symbol rows and stopped and displayed in a predetermined area of the display means. A specific symbol combination is set to notify the player that a game state is to be imparted, and the dynamic display means, when dynamically displaying the symbol rows, selects one of the plurality of symbol rows. The game machine is capable of executing a first dynamic display mode in which the dynamic display of the symbol row is continued even after another symbol row is stopped and displayed, and then the one symbol row is stopped and displayed. pre-determination means for executing a determination based on the information before the determination condition for the information stored in the storage means is satisfied; and when the specific condition is determined by the specific condition determining means, the dynamic display means notifies the specific determination result different from the specific symbol combination among the symbol combinations. , after display is performed in a first dynamic display mode in which symbol combinations other than the symbol row of 1 are stopped and displayed in a symbol combination that results in the specific determination result, the symbol row of the 1 is different from the combination based on the specific determination result. and symbol display control means for executing a specific dynamic display mode in which the symbols are stopped and displayed in the first dynamic display mode, which is the specific symbol combination, in the subsequent dynamic display. A gaming machine O1 characterized by:

Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a winning command is transmitted from the main control device to the performance control device based on the winning of the game ball into the starting winning hole. In such a gaming machine, ready-to-win information indicating the effect mode of the special symbol variation effect corresponding to the winning command is set in the winning command to be transmitted, and the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning command is executed. In some cases, a variable effect is executed based on the reach information included in the winning command (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-233993). This reduces the control load of the performance control device.

In such a conventional gaming machine, since the effect control device determines the effect mode of the corresponding special symbol variation effect at the time of receiving the winning command, after receiving the winning command, the special corresponding to the winning command Even if the game conditions are changed during the period until the symbol variation performance is executed, the performance mode of the special symbol variation performance cannot be changed, and a monotonous performance is provided to the player. There was a problem. An object of the present invention is to solve the problems exemplified above.

According to the gaming machine O1, when it is determined that the specific condition is established based on the determination result of the preliminary determination means, the specific dynamic display mode is displayed, so that the combination of symbols is not based on the specific determination result. In this case as well, there is an effect that the player can expect that the specific condition is established based on the determination result of the preliminary determination means.

In the gaming machine O1, the specific condition determination means determines that the specific condition is established based on the determination result of the specific determination made by the prior determination means, and the symbol control means determines the establishment of the specific condition. The identification information is dynamically displayed in the specific dynamic display mode before the dynamic display corresponding to the information determined as the specific determination result is displayed in the first dynamic display mode. A game machine O2 characterized by.

According to the game machine O2, in addition to the effects of the game machine O1, the pattern displayed in the specific dynamic display mode makes the player expect that the specific decision result is the specific decision result to which the special game state is given. has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine O1 or O2, the prior determination means is capable of determining the game state set by the game state setting means after the privilege game if the specific determination result is obtained based on the information. When the prior determination means determines that the special game state is not set due to the specific determination result, and the specific condition determination means determines that the specific condition is established, the symbol display control means , in the specific dynamic display mode, a state in which one symbol out of the specific symbol combination is dynamically displayed and one symbol out of the symbol combination based on the specific determination result other than the specific symbol combination is dynamic; A gaming machine O3 characterized by displaying a special dynamic display mode in combination with a displayed state.

According to the gaming machine O3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine O1 or O2, after the specific dynamic display mode is displayed, the symbol combination based on the specific determination result other than the specific symbol combination is displayed. Since combinations other than the specific symbol combination are also notified, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem of extremely discouraging the player.

<Feature P group> (mode change during pending notice)
Acquisition means for acquiring information based on establishment of an acquisition condition, storage means for storing information acquired by the acquisition means, and determination of the information stored in the storage means based on establishment of a determination condition determination means, display means for dynamically displaying identification information based on the determination result of the determination means, and when the identification information based on the specific determination result is displayed on the display means, a game is played. a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player; a symbol display means for displaying on the display means a symbol corresponding to each of the information stored in the storage means and before the determination condition is satisfied; Pre-determining means for executing a determination based on the information before the determination condition for the information stored in the storage means is satisfied, and determining whether the specific condition is satisfied based on the result of determination by the pre-determining means. A gaming machine comprising: specific condition determining means; and variable display means for varying the display mode of the pattern displayed by the pattern display means when the specific condition determining means determines that the specific condition is established. game state determination means for determining one game state from a plurality of game states; game information display means for causing the display means to display game information corresponding to the game state determined by the game state determination means; In a state in which the display mode of the pattern is variably displayed by the variable display means, when the game information is displayed by the game information display means so as to correspond to the different game state, a specific pattern display means for variably setting the display mode of the pattern to a different specific pattern display mode.

Here, a game machine such as a pachinko machine has a plurality of performance modes, and by switching the performance modes, it is possible to provide a variety of performances. The lottery executed based on the lottery is configured to be able to be held and stored a plurality of times, the judgment is executed in advance for the held and stored information, and the performance suggesting the judgment result is based on the held storage determined in advance. There is one that executes a look-ahead continuous effect that is executed using a period until the lottery is executed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-16167). According to this gaming machine, when the state in which the mode switching effect can be executed and the state in which the look-ahead continuous effect can be executed overlap, the effect is controlled so that only one of the effects is executed. , suppresses the execution of a production that gives a sense of incongruity.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, if the mode switching effect and the look-ahead continuous effect are executed in duplicate, the effect that makes the player feel uncomfortable is executed. This is merely a control that prohibits overlapping execution of the look-ahead continuous effect, and does not fundamentally solve the above-described problem. In addition, since control is used to prevent the execution of executable effects, the effects become monotonous and the player quickly becomes bored with the game. An object of the present invention is to solve the problems exemplified above.

According to the gaming machine P1, when the game state is switched and the displayed game information is changed to the corresponding game information and displayed, the specific pattern display mode is changed and set to a different pattern display mode. Therefore, there is an effect that the display mode of the symbols can be matched with the display mode corresponding to the game information that is variably displayed.

A game machine P2 characterized in that, in the game machine P1, the specific symbol display mode is a display mode before being varied by the variable display means.

According to the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P1, since the specific pattern display mode is the display mode before the pattern is changed, the information in which the pattern is changed can be displayed even when the game state is changed. There is an effect that there is no need to take over and control processing can be facilitated.

The game machine P3 is characterized in that the game machine P3 has a determination control means for determining whether the specific condition is established by the specific condition determination means based on the change to the specific pattern display mode in the game machine P2.

According to the game machine P3, by changing to the specific symbol display mode, it is determined again whether the specific condition is established, so that it is possible to provide an opportunity to change again the symbols that have been changed to the specific symbol display mode. effective.

In any one of the game machines P1 to P3, when the specific pattern display mode is changed and displayed, a suggestive display mode suggesting that the pattern has been changed to the specific pattern display mode is displayed at a predetermined timing. A gaming machine P4 characterized by having suggestive display means.

According to the gaming machine P4, in addition to the effect produced by one of the gaming machines P1 to P3, a suggestive display mode indicating that the specific symbol display mode has been changed is displayed. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress troubles that cause confusion.

In any one of the gaming machines P1 to P4, the display before changing to the specific symbol display mode based on the establishment of the determination condition of the information corresponding to the symbol displayed in the specific symbol display mode. A gaming machine P5 characterized by having an informing means for announcing an informing mode based on the mode.

According to the gaming machine P5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines P1 to P4, when the dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the symbols displayed in the specific symbol display mode is started, the specific symbol display mode is changed. Since the notification mode based on the previous display mode is notified, the player can recognize the changed original display mode at the start of the dynamic display, and the player can play the game in an easy-to-understand manner. There is

<Feature Q Group> (Light emission control of Versalighter)
a decorative member having a supporting portion and at least a first protruding region protruding from the supporting portion and a second protruding region protruding in a direction different from the first region; a moving means for moving the decorative member; a plurality of light emitting means arranged in the first protruding region and the second protruding region of the decorative member; a movement control means for controlling the movement of the decorative member; and a light emission control means for causing the light emission means to emit light in a predetermined light emission pattern, wherein the light emission control means controls a predetermined region of the movement region in which the decorative member is moved, in the first projecting region. The light emission by the light emission means and the light emission by the light emission means in the second protruding area can execute specific light emission control for controlling light emission in a predetermined period unit in the predetermined area. Game machine Q1.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional gaming machine, symbols are variably displayed on the display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, thereby giving a player a big winning game. In addition, such a conventional game machine is provided with a display device (sub display device) different from the display device (main display device) that displays the variable display of symbols, and is provided with a display device (sub display device) that is different from the display device that displays the variable display of symbols. There are also those that display auxiliary effects on the sub display device. As the secondary display device, in addition to displays such as liquid crystal display devices, versa writers and the like have been proposed (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2015-51045).

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, when a Versalighter is used as a sub-display device, the color and resolution of an image (afterimage) to be displayed may be limited due to limitations of the light-emitting section. That is, there is a possibility that it may become difficult to suitably execute the lighting effect by the Versalighter.

According to the gaming machine Q1, the light emitting means of the first projecting area and the light emitting means of the second projecting area control the light emitting mode in the predetermined period unit in the predetermined area, so that different light emitting modes are superimposed in the predetermined period. It is possible to light the predetermined area in various manners.

In the gaming machine Q1, the movement control means includes the light emitting means arranged in the first projecting area and the light emitting means arranged in the second projecting area corresponding to causing the predetermined area to emit light within the predetermined period. A game machine Q2 characterized in that movement control is executed so that said light emitting means and said light emitting means are respectively moved to said predetermined areas.

According to the game machine Q2, in addition to the effects of the game machine Q1, the light emitting means arranged in the first projecting area and the light emitting means arranged in the second projecting area are moved during a predetermined period of time. A predetermined region can be caused to emit light in a light emission mode by each light emitting means.

In the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, when the light emitting means of the first projecting area or the light emitting means of the second projecting area is moved while emitting light in the predetermined period, an afterimage is continuously displayed. A gaming machine Q3 characterized in that it is a period in which it is possible to

In any one of the game machines Q1 to Q3, the movement control means moves the decorative member within a predetermined movement range in a predetermined movement pattern as one cycle, and repeats the movement pattern for a predetermined period. A gaming machine Q4 characterized by:

According to the game machine Q4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines Q1 to Q3, there is an effect that light can be emitted continuously when a predetermined area is to be lighted.

In the game machine Q4, the period in which the decorative member is moved in the movement pattern of one period by the movement control means is a period shorter than the period corresponding to the time resolution of human eyes. Q5.

According to the game machine Q5, in addition to the effects of the game machine Q4, since the light emission of the light emitting means is recognized as an afterimage by a person, there is an effect that light can be emitted in various light emission modes.

In any one of the game machines Q1 to Q5, the luminescent color of the plurality of luminous means arranged in the first protruding area and the luminescent color of the plurality of luminous means arranged in the second protruding area are different. A game machine Q6 characterized by being capable of emitting light at a constant rate.

According to the game machine Q6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines Q1 to Q5, there is an effect that the luminescence mode displayed in the predetermined area can be configured to appear in various luminous colors.

<Characteristic R group> (countermeasures against defects)
A display means for displaying a game performance mode, a performance mode determination means for determining the performance mode to be displayed on the display means, and an advantage for a player when the specific performance mode is displayed on the display means. and a privilege game executing means for executing the privilege game, in a period in which the performance mode is displayed on the display means, the notification effect execution for notifying the game information to the player. and a movable effect executing means capable of executing a movable effect that prevents the visual recognition of the effect mode on the front side of the display area of the display means, and the movable effect executed by the movable effect executing means is: The game machine R1 is characterized in that it is executed so as not to overlap with the period during which the notification effect is executed.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional gaming machine, symbols are variably displayed on the display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, thereby giving a player a big winning game. In addition, some of such conventional game machines are provided with a plurality of display devices, some of which are movable to allow various display effects to be performed. Specifically, another display device is moved in front of one display device, and a composite display effect is performed with a plurality of display devices (for example, Japanese Patent Application No. 2007-185256).

However, in such a conventional game machine, when a part of the display devices is activated, the display content of the display device on the back side may be blocked by the display device on the front side. That is, there is a possibility that the display content of the display device cannot be viewed normally.

According to the game machine R1, since the movable performance is executed so that the movable performance and the information performance do not overlap, it is possible to suppress the problem that the information performance is hindered by the movable performance and the player cannot be normally notified. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress game problems.

In the game machine R1, a timing means capable of keeping time even when the gaming machine is turned off, an obtaining means capable of obtaining the timing data measured by the timing means, and based on the timing data obtained by the obtaining means a restriction determining means for determining whether or not a regulation condition for restricting the execution of the movable effect is satisfied; and when the restriction determining means determines that the regulation condition is satisfied, the movable effect executing means A gaming machine R2 characterized by comprising: regulation means for regulating execution of the movable effect.

According to the gaming machine R2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine R1, the execution of the movable effect is regulated based on the posting data acquired from the timing means, so the regulation conditions such as the number of times of execution are set for each time zone. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the movable effect from being excessively executed and the occurrence of a problem in the object that is moved in the movable effect.

A game machine R3 characterized in that in the game machine R2, the regulation condition is that an upper limit number of times of the movable effect is set for each fixed period.

According to the game machine R3, in addition to the effects of the game machine R2, since the upper limit number of times for each fixed period is set in the regulation condition, the excessive execution of the specific effect and the occurrence of bias in the effect are suppressed. It has the effect of being able to

A gaming machine R4 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines R1 to R3, the notification effect is to display at least a notification effect display mode on the display means.

According to the game machine R4, in addition to the effects of the game machines R1 to R3, the notification effect display mode is displayed on the display means as the notification effect, so the player can play the game by visually recognizing the same position as when visually recognizing the movable effect. and the player can easily play the game.

<Feature S group> (mirror inside)
A decorative member having a supporting portion and a protruding region protruding from the supporting portion, a plurality of light emitting means capable of irradiating toward the protruding region toward the supporting portion, and light emission control of the plurality of light emitting means, respectively. and a light emission control means, wherein the decorative member corresponds to the plurality of light emitting means capable of guiding the light emitted from each of the plurality of light emitting means arranged on the support portion to the projecting region. A game machine S1 characterized in that a plurality of guide paths are formed, and the projecting area has a plurality of irradiation units for irradiating a front side with irradiation light guided from the respective guide paths.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional gaming machine, symbols are variably displayed on the display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, thereby giving a player a big winning game. In addition, such a conventional game machine is provided with a display device (sub display device) different from the display device (main display device) that displays the variable display of symbols, and is provided with a display device (sub display device) that is different from the display device that displays the variable display of symbols. There are also those that display auxiliary effects on the sub display device. In addition to a display such as a liquid crystal display device, a versa writer or the like has been proposed as a secondary display device (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-51045). Here, a general Versalighter rotates a rod-shaped member containing a plurality of LEDs, and switches the light emission state of each LED according to the rotation position, thereby displaying a predetermined image from the light trajectory of each LED. It can be displayed as an afterimage.

However, in such a conventional game machine, each time an effect using the Versalighter is executed, it is necessary to continuously rotate the elongated rod-shaped member on which a large number of LEDs are arranged. There is a problem that failure is likely to occur due to the action of force or the like.

According to the game machine S1, by emitting irradiation light from the supporting portion to the protruding region, it is possible to cause the plurality of irradiating portions on the protruding region to emit light. There is an effect that it is possible to reduce the increase in size and reduce the burden on the supporting portion.

A gaming machine S2 characterized in that, in the gaming machine S1, the plurality of irradiating sections are arranged such that adjacent irradiating sections are arranged close to each other.

According to the gaming machine S2, since the plurality of irradiation units are arranged adjacent to each other, there is an effect that various display modes can be formed by combining the light emission modes of the plurality of irradiation sections.

In the game machine S1 or S2, at least one of the plurality of irradiating units is provided with light-emitting display means for making a predetermined pattern visible by emitting light. S3.

According to the gaming machine S3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine S1 or S2, light is emitted so that predetermined symbols can be visually recognized, so that a novel display effect can be executed for the player.

In any one of game machines S1 to S3, moving means for moving the decorative portion within a predetermined movement range, and movement control means for executing movement control for moving the decorative member by the moving means in a predetermined movement pattern. and wherein the light emission control means controls light emission in a light emission pattern corresponding to the movement pattern.

According to the game machine S4, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines S1 to S3, the decoration member is moved and the light emission of the light emitting means is controlled according to the movement pattern, so that various effects can be provided to the player. has the effect of

In the game machine S4, the movement control means repeatedly moves the decorative member in a period shorter than the time resolution of the human eye, with the predetermined movement pattern as one period. .

According to the game machine S5, in addition to the effects of the game machine S4, when the light emitting means emits light while the decorative member is being moved, the decorative member that is moved in the next cycle with the afterimage remains is emitted. is executed, there is an effect that various display modes can be provided to the player.

In any one of the gaming machines described above, the gaming machine Z1 is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with variable display means for displaying the identification information in a fixed manner after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the stop time and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the definite identification information of is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

In any one of the gaming machines described above, the gaming machine Z2 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, balls are shot into a predetermined game area, and the balls are ejected into actuating openings arranged at predetermined positions in the game area. For example, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with the requirement of winning a prize (or passing through an activation opening). In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize winning device (specific prize winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the balls to win prizes, and a value corresponding to the number of prizes won Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.

A gaming machine Z3 characterized in that, in any of the gaming machines described above, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated game machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, and an operation means for starting (such as an operation lever) The identification information starts to change due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed. a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information; the ball is used as a game medium; A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display, and to pay out a large number of balls at the occurrence of a special game state.
<Others>
2. Description of the Related Art A game machine such as a pachinko machine includes a light-emitting member that performs a light-emitting operation and a performance member such as a variable member that is variable by a motor or the like. Such a conventional game machine is configured to be able to realize a wide variety of performance actions by varying a plurality of performance members (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2008-012194).
However, with the diversification of the production members, it has sometimes become difficult to set the production motion appropriately.
The present technical idea has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of suitably setting the performance action.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the game machine of Technical Concept 1 has a support portion, a decorative member having a projecting region projecting from the support portion, and a decorative member that can irradiate toward the projecting region on the side of the support portion. and light emission control means for controlling light emission of each of the plurality of light emitting means. A plurality of guide paths corresponding to the plurality of light emitting means that can be guided to the projecting area are formed, and the projecting area is provided with a plurality of irradiation units that irradiate the front side with irradiation light guided from the respective guide paths. It has
The gaming machine according to Technical Idea 2 is the gaming machine according to Technical Idea 1, wherein the plurality of irradiation units are arranged so that adjacent irradiation units are close to each other.
A gaming machine according to technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1 or 2, wherein at least one of the plurality of irradiating units includes light emitting display means for making a predetermined pattern visible by emitting light. are arranged.
A gaming machine according to technical idea 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of technical ideas 1 to 3, further comprising moving means for moving the decorative portion within a predetermined movement range, and moving the decorative member in a predetermined movement pattern. and movement control means for executing movement control for moving by said movement means, said light emission control means controlling light emission with a light emission pattern corresponding to said movement pattern.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 5 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 4, wherein the movement control means repeats the predetermined movement pattern as one cycle in a period shorter than the time resolution of human eyes. to move.
<effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, the decorative member is provided with a protruding region protruding from the support portion. A plurality of light emitting means provided on the side of the support portion of the decorative member irradiate light toward the projecting region. Light emission of the plurality of light emitting means is controlled by light emission control means. The decorative member is formed with a plurality of guide paths corresponding to the plurality of light emitting means capable of guiding the light emitted from each of the plurality of light emitting means arranged on the supporting portion to the projecting region. The projecting area is provided with a plurality of irradiation units that irradiate the front side with irradiation light guided from the respective guide paths.
As a result, there is an effect that the performance action can be set appropriately.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 1, since the plurality of irradiation units are arranged adjacent to each other, the light emitting modes of the plurality of irradiation units can be combined. There is an effect that various display modes can be formed by
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 1 or 2, predetermined patterns can be visually recognized by emitting light, so that a novel display is provided to the player. There is an effect that the performance can be executed.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in any one of Technical Ideas 1 to 3, the decoration member is moved and the light emission of the light emitting means is controlled according to the movement pattern. Therefore, there is an effect that various effects can be provided to the player.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 4, when the light emitting means emits light while the decorative member is being moved, the afterimage remains and the following Since the decorative member that is moved in one cycle emits light, there is an effect that various display modes can be provided to the player.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
81 third pattern display device (display means)
S219 privilege game executing means
S405, S505 determination means
S602, S610 acquisition means
S604, S612 storage means
S620 prior determination means
S2206 Design display means
S3010 specific condition determination means
S3151 variable display means

Claims (1)

Acquisition means for acquiring information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition;
a storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means;
determination means capable of determining the information stored in the storage means based on the establishment of a determination condition;
display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the result of discrimination by the discrimination means;
privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player when the identification information based on the specific determination result is displayed on the display means;
a pattern display means for displaying, on the display means, a pattern corresponding to each of the information stored in the storage means before the determination condition is satisfied;
advance determination means for performing determination based on the information before the determination condition for the information stored in the storage means is satisfied;
Specific condition determination means for determining whether a specific condition is established based on the result of determination by the prior determination means;
a variable display means for changing the display mode of the pattern displayed by the pattern display means when the specific condition determination means determines that the specific condition is established,
Among the background modes of the identification information displayed on the display means, one of a plurality of background modes including at least a first background mode in which the design is displayed and a second background mode in which the design is not displayed. background mode determining means for determining a background mode for determining a background mode;
background mode display means for causing the display means to display a background mode corresponding to the background mode determined by the background mode determination means;
In a state in which the display mode of the pattern is changed by the variable display means, when the background mode display means changes the display mode to the second background mode, the identification information is changed in the dynamically displayed area. a specific mode display means capable of displaying a specific mode in which the information about the pattern that has been displayed can be identified;
a means capable of displaying an identification mode that enables a player to identify the number of information stored in the storage means during a period in which the second background mode in which the pattern is not displayed is displayed; have
In the game machine, in a state in which the display mode of the pattern is changed by the variable display means, the second background mode is changed by the background mode display means, and the display mode corresponds to the changed pattern. If the background mode is changed to the first background mode before dynamic display of the identification information is started, the display mode is changed before being changed to the second background mode. It is possible to display the corresponding pattern in this manner,
The specific mode display means displays the identification information after the dynamic display of the identification information, which is performed until the dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the pattern that has been changed and displayed is started. A game machine characterized in that it is configured to be able to display the specific mode during a stop period .

Images